·al
to
THE
SIDDHANTH KAUMUDI
OF
BHATTOJI DIKSHITA,
2296
TRANSLATED AND EDITED INTO ENGLISEL
BY
ŚRIŚA CHANDRA VASU, B. A.
CENTRALE
(New Delhi
VOL. III.
VAIDIO GRAMMAR
All rights reserved.
BRIS
D 2945
SaLV
Bhalvir.
PUBLISHED BY
THE PANINI OFFICE, BHUVANESHWARI ASHRAM,
38-40 BAHADURGANJ, ALLABABAD.
ALLAHABAD:
FRINTED AT TIK MEDICAL HALL PRESA BRANCHE
1905

·INTRAL ARCHAEOLOGICAL
LIBRARY, NEW DELHI.
A00. No. 12.9.6...
Date.......... 16... 2.......7.
*******
041New
اہا مهر
WEL
puntiche
Bhajvy

·FOREWORD. We are glad to present our subscribers the third volume of the Siddhâata Kaumudi. We had hoped to send also the second volume of the same along with it, if not earlier, but the press to which we gave the work more than two years ago for printing, showed the utmost want of sense of duty and businesslike capacity, for they have not printed more than 80 pages during all this time. Now that Messrs. E. J. Lazarus & Co. have undertaken to print also the second volume, after having so quickly printed the present, we hope to publish the remaining portion of the work by the end of this year. Our thanks are specially due tq the Manager, E. J. Lazarus & Co., Medical Hall Press, Allahabad Branch, for the great interest and trouble he has taken in pushing the work through the press. We trust the remaining portion of the work under bis management will be out soon. ALLAHDAD: S. N. V. The 1st July, 1905.

·No text on this page.

·CONTENTS Page 9+ OU #9 4 7 9 . #. * #a a 15 19 25 1) # .. é ### #6 +++ & ## 90 101 103 . VAIDIC GRAMMAR Chapter 1-Prepositions in Vedas II.-Case affix of Div Optional Compounds III.--Irregular Aorists Vaidio Forms Vaidic Diversity IV. - Vaidic Subjunctive Vaidic Infinitive Vaidic Rules ON ACCENTS. Chapter 1.-Accents II._Root-accents. III.-- Affix-accents THE PAIT SUTRA'S. Chapter I.-Phit Sutras III.-Affix-accents Accents of Compounds Accents of Verbs ON RULES OF GENDERS. Chapter 1.–Feminine Gender II.-Masculine Gender III_Neuter Gender IV.-Masculine and Feminine Genders V Masculine and Neuter Genders VI. Common Gender # 37 @ $ ## 112 126 . 9. .. ... 135 202 3. . ## ... 2241 00 226 237 » ##O de ## . 245 24& e. .

·No text on this page.

·SRIS THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDİ. VOLUME III. वैदिकी प्रक्रिया। प्रथमोऽध्यायः। THE VAIDIC GRAMMAR. CHAPTER I. In this volume Bhattoji Dikshita has collected together all the sútras of Pâņini which are peculiar to the Vedas. He has arranged them in eight Adhyâyas in the order as they are found in the Aşhțâdhyâyi. The first chapter contains all those sû tras which occur in the First Book of Pâņini, ३३८७ । छन्दसि पुनर्वस्वोरकवचनम् । १।३।६१ । द्वयोरेकवचन वा स्यात् । पुनर्बसुनक्षत्रं पुनर्वसू वा । लोके तु द्विवचनमेव । 3387. In the Vedas, the two stars, Punarvasů, may optionally be singular, (and connote a dual). In the Vedas, the star punarvasu which is always dual in form, may be in the singular form and connote a dual meaning. As gadşaat As gadnaar' or gaag 77: #fafaaqat ii The option is only allowed in the Vedas and not in the secular literature, In the latter, it must be in the dual as, ti saiſaa faa: gadge u Similarly when it is not the appellation of an asterism but of a man, there is no option, As पुनर्वसू माणवक्री. 3350 ITEDCUTTET I POSTERI gran i fastiat 787 fata ar 3388. In the Vedas, the two stars Visakhà may optionally be in the singular number. The word fastei is in the dual number as & rule, In the Vedas, it is found sometimes to have the singular form, denoting duality. Thus fang 597 or fantè naafhent gaat il ·THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [Vol. III. Cnr. I. $ 3389. " | इहे वैति बहुलं छन्दप्ति" - ३३८८ । षष्ठीयुक्तछन्दसि वा । १।४।९। লাল पतिशब्दश्छन्द्रति घिसंज्ञो वा स्यात् । “क्षेत्रस्य पतिना वयम् योग विभज्य -सीत्व नुवर्तते । तेन सर्वे विधयश्छन्दसि वैकल्पिकाः । इत्यादिरस्यैव प्रपंचः । " याच भम् " ! नभोऽङ्गिरोमजुधां वत्युपसंख्यानम् । * । नभसा तुल्यं नमस्वत । मत्त्वाद रुत्वाभावः । अङ्गिरस्वहिरः । “ मनुष्वदग्ने” । “जनेति" इति विहित उसि प्रत्य यो मनेपि बाहुलकात्। वपन वस्वश्वयोः । * । वपनg कं वसु यस्य स वृषरावसुः । वृक्षा अश्वा यस्यामा पाश्वः । महान्तर्वर्तिनी विर्भाक्तमाश्रित्य पदत्वे सति नलेपिः प्राप्ती भत्वाद्वार्यते । श्रतएव "पदान्तस्य” इति णत्वनिषेधोऽपि न । “अल्लेपिाऽनः" इति अल्लोयो न । अनङ्गत्वात् । 3389. The word pati when used in connection with a noun ending in the sixth (or genitive) case is ghi, optionally, in the Chhandas (Veda). The word päti is understood in this sútra from the sîtra patih sanåse eva ([ 4. 8. S. 257). By that sutra, pati would have been ghi only in composition. This sutra makes an exception to that, when this word occurs in tha Vaidic literature, Thus क्षेत्रस्य प्रतिना वयम् (Rig Veda. IV. 57. 1.) This sutru may be divided into two, (1) shashthi yuktaschhandasi (9) vie In the latter we shill read the annuyritti of chhandasi. Tlie sutra will then menn :-(1) In the Chhandas the word pati is ghi wlicn used in connection with a word in the sixth (2) In the Chhandas there is option. Thus this secoud rule would make all rules optional in the Vedas. In fact, the bahulam chhandasi, which recurs so often in Pâņini would become but a special case of this universal rule va chhandusi. Note: - The word pati being treated as ghi, takes nå in the Instrumental by VII. 3. 120. S. 214, Note: -कुलुउचानां पतये or पत्ये नमः salutation to the lord of the Kulunchas. Wliy do we say "when used in connection with a noun in the genitive Observe मया पत्या जरदृष्टियथासः । Why do we say in the Chhandas'? Observe ग्रामस्य प्रत्ये। Here we repeat the sutra यचिभम् S. 231, for the purposes of certa.in vårtikas which apply to the $edas. ३३८९ कार्याच भम्।१।४ । १८ । 3389A. And when an aflix, with an initial y or an initial vowel, being one of the affixes, beginning with and ending in In, follows, not being Sarvanâmasthậna, then what precedes, is called Bha. The word afa is in the 7th case meaning · when a or sa follows,' and by the last Favrt. of Sutra I. 1. 72, it means ; when an affix beginning with ya or ach follow.' Travtika :- The words नभम, अङ्गिरस् and मनुष should be treated as Bha when the affix वत् (V. 1. 115. S. 1778) follows. Thus नभस्वत • like the sky.' अङ्गिरस्वत् "like the Angiras." मनध्वत: like the man' Bv. beince Bha. the t is not changel ca.se'?

·VOL. III. CI. I. § 3391.] PREPOSITIONS IN VEDAS. are The word Ate is formed by the aflix 3 of the Unali sutra (II. 115) janerusi, by being diversely applied to Vha. The word #97 being treated as bha, the sútra VIII 3. 59, S. 212 applies, and u is changed to mi Vart : The word 297 is treated as Bha in the Vedas when the words ar and squa follow. Thus qua: quuiaz Fa. Here had the word vrishan been treated as pada, the 7 would not have been changed into a (VIII. 4. 37. S. 198) ; and this a would have been dropped before the affir vasu by VIII. 2. 7. S. 236. Nor does the sûtra VI. 4. 134, S. 23£ apply, because the word is not an anga. In secular language the forms quag: and qursa: 3300 1 1972 FUTTA 9280 90 tathatats gryfa Huzga fundaTTUTTI gazd are I AUT a aifa. कम्। उभय ज्ञानपीति वक्तव्यमिति । * । “स मुष्टुभास कता गणेन" । पदत्वात् कुत्वम् । HA1Saranata: i grafauritat: uzgaur araanza ztutai" fazagrafa arisag" 1 47 uzraig Farah | Hrana hranata: 1 “ä uimaaT: " 3390. The words like ayasmaya &e., are valid forms in the Chhandas (Veda), These words being taught here in the topic relating to Pada and Bla show that they have been properly formed in the Chhandas by the application of the rules of Bha and Pada. Thus we have the following Vârtika- Và tt :. It should be stated that in some places both these Pada and Bha designations apply simultaneously. Thus in the word metaformed by ra + an the is first changed into a by treating the word rich as a Pada. Then the word is treated as Bha, and therefore the one is not changed into वता For had it been Pada, the form would have been pran Riyvat.? These irregularly formed words occur only in the Chhandas or Vedio literature, Thus # GEHIE SESAT 10a (Rig Veda IV. 50. 5) Similarly in the sentence aa faaaaaafu afsâ (Rig Veda x. 71. 5) the word aufsat is formed from ara +57 (=arai ga; ' lord or master of speech'). Here vich being trented as a Pada, the ch is changed toj; and then being treated as a Bha, the j is not changed to a guttural. Similarly up + FU=HIFI made of iron.' Here the word wux is treated as Bha and hence the Ę is not changed into T. Thus und an iron-made coat of mail.' Tuhafa oratfu -iron vesaels.' The present form of this word is EUTATII Now we repeat the sútra I. 4. 80, S. 2230, for the purpose of showing its exception in the Vedag. a giar: 1 918 I EOI 3390A. The particles called gati and upasarga are to be employed before the verbal root: (that is to say, they are prefixes). ३२८१ । हान्दसि पनि ।१।४ । ८५ । 3391. In the Chbandas (Veda) these gati and upasarga are ·THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDT. [VOL. III. CH. I. § 3391. As arufasa gan tagaax u aferat feat #81 (Rig. 1. 2. 6). In this we have TUTAJU instead of GUITAR “Vaya and thou Iudra, ye heroes, come ye both quickly to the Soma of the worshipper by this sincero prayer.' 33€ 1 zafrata 191801 हरिभ्यां यायोक पात्रा मन्तै रिन्द्र हरिभियाहि । 3392. In the Chhandas (Veda) these gati and upasarga are also seen separated from the verb by intervening words. As afrugi algia (for gfi TOTf& *:). Here 21 is separated from the word orfe by the intervening wori 15. So also in the sentence in af fefjárfe ægt træfar: (Rig Veda III. 41. 1), “O Indra ! comie (91 27fa) ou horses (Eft) which are spirited (:=Atzfagfa:) end color of peacock's feather, 37€31 far xafazzi aqişler प्राभ्यां परोऽपिल लिट् कित् । 'समीधे दस्यु हन्तमम् ' । 'पुत्र ईधे अथर्वशाः' । बभूव । इदं प्रत्याख्यासम् । 'इन्धेश्छन्दोविषयत्वाद्भवो बुको नित्यत्वात् ताभ्यां लिटः किवचनानर्थक्यम्' इति । fa sfecha MUISTA: 3393. The Lit or Perfect Tense affixes after the roots indh to kindle,' and bhu, 'to become,' also are kit. After these two roots the terminations of the Perfect are कित् । These roots have been especially mentioned, because the root faz ending in a compound consonaut will not be governed by sútra 1. 3. 5. S. 2242, and the root u is mentioned because all the terminations of the Perfect are frig after , not excepting the faa terminations, Thus the verbs #9 and a are illustrations of Perfect Tense from the root az as in the following examples : - Fata URETTE, (Rig Veda VI. 16. 15), and a sa 400:, (Rig Veda VI. 16. 14), Here the uasal of the 190t is dropped by regarding the afis as feria il Similarly froin the root y, we have बभूव, aufag 11 This sútra is considered uunecessary by Patañjali the author of Mahåbhashya, who says we could have done without this sûlra. Because the direct application of Perfect affixes to veze is confined only to the Velas, while in the secular literature the Perfect will be formed by up as gut aFIT ; and its conjugation would have been irregular, by Vaidic license (UI. 4. 117. S. 3435). While y always takes the augmenta in the Perfect, for after llai, the conies invariably whether there be guņa or there be not gını. So there is no necessity of saying that the Perfect atfixes are far after these two roots.” $ 80 CHAPTER. II. ३३९४ । तृतीया च होश्छन्दसि । २।३।३। जुहोतेः कर्माण वृतीया स्याद द्वितीया च । ' यवाग्वा अग्निहोत्रं जुहोति । अग्निहोत्र. Talstafafer ana , ' uairfaâisafufqwìzana a' faifaùinaiaia 1 an विनोद शेन त्यकत्वा प्रतिपतीत्यर्थः ।

·VOL. III. CH. II. § 3396.) CASE-AFFIT OF DIV. 3394. In the Chhandas (Veda), the object of the verb ç'to sacrifice' takes the affix of the third case, and of the second as well. This ordains the third case-affix; and by force of the word a 'and', the second case-nfis is also employed : as aanaifiaeri gefa i Here zanat is in the Instrumental case, though it is the object of sacrifice, Tlie word waait here means " the oblation, ” for we find it used in this sense in senten ces like this :-urifiagizafufHafĀVATO AI &c. The word agnihotra when in this sense, should be analysed as you gaa " that which is saorificed in honor of, or for the sake of Agni-. e., au oblation.” The sentence cantar fraèri şafa therefore means "he throws (into the fire) the oblation called yavágů, offering it in honor of the deity." Note :- In the above example yavågû is in 3rd case and agnihotra in the 2nd case. In this case the latter word means afa: or oblation, The verb güifa in this connection means ofaufa 1 The whole sentence nieans “ the oblation in the shape of yayâgû, he throws (into the fire).” Though the tivo words yavagâ and agnihotra are in different cases, yet they are syntactically one, and refer to one and the same object. But this sútra is considered unnecessary by Patanjali. According to him the word agnihotra in the above example means simply “agni or fire." As we find it used in the sentence यस्याग्निहोत्रं प्रचलितम् ॥ The word agnihotra, when meaning fire, is analysed as za sfera “ Agni in which sacrifice is poured” or “sacrificial fire." Therefore, when the example is canat sag gera, then agnihotra being equivalent to Agni, juhoti means prinana or satisfaction. The whole sentence means varat sfia stuuta “he propitiates fire with yavâgû (barley)." But when the sentence is यवागू अग्निहोत्रं जुहोति, both words being in the 2nd case, then agnihotra means havis or oblation, and juhoti means prakshepana, i. e., “be throws the yavágú oblation (into the fire)" _. e., he throws into the fire the materials of oblations called yavâgû, ३३८५ । द्वितीया ब्राह्मणे । २।३।६० । ब्राझविधये प्रयोगे दिवस्तदर्थस्य कर्मणि द्वितीया स्यात् । षष्टापवादः । 'गामस्य सदहः Futai alugi', 3395. The object of the verb fag in the ser.se of · dealing or ‘staking,' takes the second case-affix, in the Brâhmaņa literature. This debars the Genitive case required by II. 3. 59. S. 620. Ex. UTAFI Azt: Farui atay: (Maitr. S. 1. 6. 11) In the Vedio literature, the simple verb faa takes the accusative, instead of the genitive. When, however, the root faa takes an upasargų, then it may optionally govern the genitive also, by 11. 3. 59 S. 620. ३३८६ । चतुर्यर्थ बहुतं छन्दसि । ३।३। ६२ ।

·6 THE SIDDHANTA KAEMUDI. [VOL. III. CH. II. § 3390. 2 पष्ठी स्यात् । 4 'पुरुषमाश्चन्द्रमसे' । 'गोधा कालका ZTETTE बनस्पतीनाम् वनस्पतिथ्य इत्ययः । अष्टार्थ चतुर्थीति वाच्यम् । * । ' या खर्वेण प्रिति तस्यै खर्वः' । 3396. In the Chhandas the sixth case-affix is employed diversely with the force of the fourth case-affs. Ex. YFURTTAHF: or to the noon, a male deer.' 79T THI दाबी घाटस्ते वनस्पतीनाम् or वनस्पतिभ्यः - to you lunds of the forest, are lizard, kalaka bird, &c.' So also aigre JUT APUA (R. Ved. X. 136. 7). Vart :-- In the Veda, the 4th case affix is enployed in the sense of the sixth : ag an gäu faafa af patstud whosoever woman drinks with a woman in her courses, gets herself in inenstrual." 3365 I 1TA TIRI 31831 इह छर्दास बहुल षष्ठी । एतस्य एतेन वा यजते । 3397. The sixth case-affix is diversely employed in the Chhandas in denoting the instrument of the verb 43 to sacri. fice, Ex. Tag or gña usa he sacrifices with butter,' ३३९८ । बहुलं छन्दसि । २।४ । ३ । अटो घस्लादेशः स्यात् । घस्तां नूनम् । लुङि “मन्त्र घस" sfa #a: ofrasa #' 3398. In the Chhandas (Vedas), gee, is diversely substituted for अद्। As घस्तां नूनम्। The words na and get are to be supplied in this sitra from II. 4. 30. S. 3080, and II. 4. 37. S. 2427. gap is the Aorist form of sz; the Aoris sign for is elided by II. 4. 80. S. 3107. The augmcnt ng is not added, because of YI. 4. 74, S. 2228, read with the age of this sutra. But the form ZenTĀ could have been obtained by II. 4. 37. S. 2,427 also, for that søtra also ordaius yra substitution for 2 1 The proper example, under the present sâtra is not ZTE | Hence the other example afra: (Yajur Veda. Vaj s. XVIII. 9), which is free from this objection. The word fou: = 777 “ eating: " efic: “ companion in eating.” It is formed by adding the affix it (fa) to the ; as 12 +79; then is replaced ly gr by the present sútra, Thus F + ta ni Then the penultimate 4 of 77 is elileil by VI. 4. 100, S. 3550, as zx + fa in Then & is, elided ly VIII 2. 26. S. 2281, as a + fa. Then a is changed to y by VIII, 2. 40. S. 2280, Thus El + fx. Tlien er is elianged to zby VIII. 4. 53. S. 52. The e is considered here as inmediately in contact with y though technically speaking there is an elided n between gand zu But this zero is not sthànivat, because VIII. 4. 53, is a 531 rule ; and the zero å leái is not sthanivat for the purposes of sera rule (I. 1. 58. S. 51). Thus we get fru: ; which withi y, a shortened form of FAT (VI. 3. 84. S. 1012), gives us afia: 11 3368 i zarafafanTARTE ara fa ip 1816 EF: gaafmag: 1 ēArina farfalcaa lapsiafart i sētrāliafanufaa ya:

·Vor. III. Cir. IT.8 3.405.] OPTIONAL 'COMPOUNDS. 7 .. 3399. Of the compounds — hemantasisirau' and 'ahora.tre' the gender is like that of the first word, in the Chhandas. (Vedas). This aphorism debars the general rule given in II. 4. 26. S. 812. Similarly though the vikarana po is ordained ly Il. 4. 72 S. 2423, to be elided after the roots of the Adâdi class, yet by Vaidic diversity it is some: times not so elided ; as taught in the next sûtra. ३४०० । बहुलं चन्द्धति । २ । । । ७३ । इत्रं हति वृत्रहा" । “अहिः शयत उपएक एयिथ्याः" अत्र लुक न । अदादिभिन्न पि कचिल्लुक । “बाध्वं नो देवाः" । "जुहोत्यादिभ्यः प्रतुः " 3400. In the Chhandas (Vedas) there is diversely the luk: elision of the Vikarana शम (III. 1. 68). There is elision in other conjugations than A dâdi : and there is sometimes even to elision ini Adidi verbs. As कृत्रं हनति वहा 'the Vritra-Killer kills Vritra.' हन + शप + ति= हर्नाल instead of हन्ति । So also, अहिः शयत उपरक पूधियाः, here शयते insteal of a Rig Veda I. 32. 5.) « The Dragun lies low on earth,'' In these cases the Vikarıņa gę has not been elided. In some cases the Ta is elided even in conjugations other than Adâdi, as ब्राध्वम् नो देवाः निजुरः शस्थ (Rig Veda II. 29. 6.) " Protect us, God, let not the wolf destroy us." insteild of नायनाम् । Similarly श्लु elision of the vikarana is required by II. 4. 75. S. 2489, in Juhotyå li class. But to this also, there is exception in the Vedas: as shown in the following sutra, ३४०१ । बहुलं छन्दप्ति । २।४ । ७६ । " दाति प्रियाणि चिहसु। अन्यत्रापि । “ पूर्ण विष्टि" । 3401. In the Chhandas there is ślu-elision of a diversely. The elision dies n10t take place where or lained, and takes place where uot ordained. aifa fuatia (instead of zaifa) faze (Rig Veda IV. 8. 3) “ho gives even treasures that we love." See also Rig Veda I. 65, 4; VI. 24. 2 ; VII. 15. 12 VII. 424 Similarly the ślu.elision with its accompanying reduplication takes place in roots other than those of the Juholyurli class. Thus देवा वा द्रविगोदाः पूर्ण विवष्टा- सितम् “ The God who gives your wealth demnuds a full libation poured to him.'' (Rig Veda II 16. 11). Here fagfe is from the Vay « to shine." It belongs to the Alarli class, but takes slu elision. Hence वश् + शप् + ति - वश् + श्लु + ति - वश् धश् + 0 + ति (VI. 1. 10. S. 2490) विधश् + ति (the sis, thanged to. by VII. 4. 16. S. 2190, rend with the bahul.in chhudasi) - विवम् = ति (VIII. 2. 30 S. 294) -विष्टि (VIIL4. 41. S. 26). ३४०५ । मन्त्रे घसहवरणशदहाइव कमजनिभ्यो लेः । ३ । । । ८० । लिरिति लेः प्राचां संज्ञा । सभ्यो ललक स्यात् मंत्रे । अक्षत्रमीमदन्त हि"। घस्ला देशस्य ‘गमहन' इत्युपधालोपे शासिवसीति षः । मार्मित्रस्य " “तिः प्रणमर्त्यस्य " Mirs ·8 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI, [VOL. III. CH. III § 3 102. vanát' gfa Fax," prêt ea qa:" , "AT * 14" 1 & FRITAITI PITAİ UFTXI" To znatgfaal" , "uTam HITTAUT"|"*** UTA: "," rfa sajêr । मंत्रग्रहणं ब्राह्मगास्याप्पलक्षणम् । अजत वा अस्य दन्ताः" । विभाषानुवत्तेनेह । " न ता अमभणबजनिष्ट हि सः” । इति वैदिकप्रकरणे द्वितीयोऽध्यायः । 3402. In the Mantra portion of the Vedas there is lukelision of the sign of the Aorist (and Perfect), after the verbs FH “to eat,' get to be crooked, ' yy' to destroy,'ą to choose,' 'to cover,' al' to burn,' verbs ending in long , 5 वच to avoid,' 'to make,' TA ' to go' and alfa 'to be produced.' The word for is the name given by ancient grammarians to the affixes of the Perfect tense as well as the Aorist, or it might be a common term for all tense-affixes, Thus from eg the substitute of u we have an in the sentence, sa'a aal' azia "Well have they eaten and rejoiced.” (Rig. I. 82. 2). NOTE : –Thus in the Aorist of , there comes TĘ (II. 4. 37. S. 2427); the sign of the aorist is elider by this sutra. The penultimate y of gg is elided by VI, 4 98, S. 2363 ; and a is changed to by VIII. 4. 55. S. 121, and Ę is changed to v by VIII, 3. 60, S. 2410 ; thus we get a, then we add the augment mit which with the third person plural affix 997, gives us sa From the verb Ez we have higürr Faħ i The Hig is the aorist 3rd Pers. Singular, of ga i Thus Et + fan + fa = TZ -0+ fa (S. 3402) = +7 (the elision of is by III. 4. 100. S. 2207). The guņı takes place by VII. 3. 84, S. 2168 ; and then the ais elided by VI. 1. 68, S. 242. From 5ą we have us in the followinz verse #11: yên tài yfä UTFAİR ITTI UTAGUETÀ Let not the foeman's curse, let not a mortals on. slaught fall on us: Preserve us Brabmanaspati," (Rig. I. 18. 3.) The 7 is changed to ex by VIII. 2. 63. S. 431, The word a in the sutra includez both a and 251, as the word aa in the following ब्रह्म' जज्ञान प्रयम पुरस्ताद्विमी' मतः सुरुची' वेन पावः । सबुधनया उपमा अस्य fasi: pas afargada fa a: 1 (Yajur veda 13. 3). From दह we have अाधक as in सरस्वाभनो नधिवस्यो मास्फरीः पयसा मान अाधक । « Guide us Saraswati to glorious treasure : refuse us not thy milk, nor spurn us from thee.” (Rig., VI. 61, 14). The word via means verbs ending in long 91, as got to be full.” Thus, fai देवानामुदगादनीकं चक्षुर्मि स्य वरुणस्याग्नेः । श्राम यावा पृथिवी अन्तरिक्षं मूर्य प्रात्मा जगतस्तस्थु ma 1 (Rig I. 115. 1.) “ The brilliant presence of the Gods hath risen, the eye of Mitra, Varuna and Ayni, The soul of all that moveth not or noveth; the Sun hath filled the air and earth and heaven." The root ap yives us aan as in the following verse :-ATÂT FRAGT ATT at Tumut i gari etfui aai (Rig VIII, 64, 12). « In this great battle cast ur nut aside as one who bears a load; snatch up the wealth and win it." Froin # we have 47 as in the following verse : magazarayaifa &c. (Rig Veda I. 92. 2.) “ Toe Dawns have brought distinct perception as before." of 13 ·Vor. TIL.CH. IILL3403.] IRREGULAR AORISTS. From गम we have अंग्मन ; as in the following verse : वृतेव यन्तं बहुभिर्वनव्यैस् स्वरयि जागृवांसो अनुग्मन । रूशंतमग्नि दर्शतं वृहंतं वपावन्तं विश्वहा दीदिवांस। (Rig Veda VI. 1.3)." From जन we have अज्ञत; as अजत वा अस्य दन्ताः ॥ This is an exampie from the Brâhman literature, as the word is in the sûtra refers also to the Brâhman literature, But sometimes, the elision does not take place, because the word "option" is understood in this sutra. Thus - ATH &c. (Rig Veda. V. 2. 4.) : These seized him not : he had been born already." - CHAPTER III. ३४०३ । अभ्युत्सादयांप्रजनयांचिकयांरमयामकः पावयांक्रियाद्विदामऋविति कुन्दसि । ३ । १ । ४२ । पाटय षु चतुर्यु लुङि 'श्राम अक: इत्यनुप्रयोगश्च । अभ्युत्सादयामकः । अभ्युदसोप्रद दिति लोके । प्रजनयामकः । प्राजीजनदित्यर्थः । चिकयामकः । अवैपीदित्यर्थ चिनोतेराम्द्विर्वचनं कुत्वं च । रमयामकः । परीरमत् । पावयांक्रियात् । पाव्यादिति लोके । विदामक्रन् । अवेदिषुः । 3403. The forms अभ्युत्सादयामकः, प्रजनयामकः, चिश्यामझा, रमया- मकः, पवियांक्रियाद्, विदामन are irregularly formed in the Chhandas with the augment in, and the auxiliary verbs अकर, क्रियात, and . The first two of these and the fourth are the Aorist (लुङ) of the causatives of the roots सद' to sit', जन — to be born, and रम् ' to sport; ' to which the affix श्राम् is addel. The third is the Aorist of the root fa · to collect,' to which Æ has been added after the reduplication and the change of a into the of the root. The auxiliary अकः; which is the 3rd Person Singular Aorist of o is added to all these four. The fifth is derived from the root g‘to blow, to purify.' by adding the causative affix fma, annexing the affix up before the terminations of the Benedictive (at få5) and then using after the form so obtained, the Benedictive of N, क्रियात The last is the Aorist of faz to know,' to which TIF is added and the 3rd Person Plural of the Aorist uf 1. e., the auxiliary अक्रन् is employed, These are the archaic fornis ; their modern forms are follow :-अ चुदसीधदत, प्राजीजनत, अच्चैपीत, श्ररीरमत्, पाध्याद, अदिधुः । NOTE :--The word अभ्युत्सादयामकः is formed by adding the prepositions abhi and us to the Chusative root सादि । सादि with आम becomes सादयां, to which is added अक: the 3rd pers. Singular Aorist of a to do. Thus +च्लि + तिप् = कर । चिल +त् = कर+o+त (II. 4. 80. S. 3402)= कर + 0+0 (VI. I. 68. S. 252): which with the angment अट् becomes अकर or अकः । This auxiliary अकर is added to all the first four words. When this periphrastic Aorist is formed with yg and T, the special mood-affix of the Aurist is elided by II. 4. 81, S. 2238. The regular Causative Aorist is अभ्युदसीषदत् (सादयामकर = असीषदत), The 2 .

·THE SIDDHANTA KAUMEDI. [VoL. III. CH. III. $ 3404. स्वत ito affix I the ver दि is shortened to सदि by VII. 4. 1. S. 2314. This is reduplicated irist affix as by VI. 1. 11, S. 2315. Thus 28 Then z is elided D. S. 2179. Then applying VII. 4. 93. S. 2316, read with VII. 4. the is changed to ई. Thus we have सीपद + चङ्ग + त - सीधदत् । ord fola is the Benedictive form of 'to di The vikarana 3 is cause of the prohibition III. 4. 116, S. 2215, and then there is fx 8. S. 2367. । गुपेश्छन्दसि । ३ । १ । ५० । वा । 'गृहानजूगुपतं युवम्' । श्रगीप्तमित्यर्थः । After the verb 'to protect,' ag is optionally the of fear in the Chhandas, ule applies where the root yo does not take the affix itu (II 2. मान् नो मित्रावरुणा यत् गृहान् अजूगुणत * Mitra and Varnpa protected puses. The other forrms are अमोलम, गोपिष्टम or अगापाविष्टम. In literature, the latter three forms are used, but not the first. । नोनयतिध्वनयत्येलयत्ययतिभ्यः । ३।१। ५१ । इन । ' मा त्वायतो जरितुः काममूनयीः' । ' मा त्वाग्निव॑नयीत् । After the causatives of the verbs 3a 'to decrease sound,' इल ' to send' and अर्द to go or to beg' चङ् is not state of fear in the Chhandas. मात्वायतो जरितुः काममूनयोः (Rig Veda I. 53. 3.) मात्वाग्नि+नयीत् धूम Veda I. 162. 15.) we have ऊनयोः in the Vedas ; श्रीनिनत् in the classical literature ; so त, ऐलयोत् and आर्दयोत ; their classical forms being अदिध्वनत, ऐलिलत् See Rig Veda I. 53, 3, I. 162, 15, and Panini VII. 2. 5. । कृमृदृसहिभ्यश्छन्दसि । ३ । १ । ५९ । । वा । इदं तेभ्यो करं नमः' । अमरत् । अदरत् । 'यत्सानाः सानुमारुहत्' After the verbs to do,'' to die,' & 'to tear,' to rise,' अड is the substitute of रिल when used in the Pu-12 * प्रकरत " he did'; अमरत् 'he died'; आदरत ' he tore '; प्रारुचत he rose. ical Aorist of these verbs are अकात अमत, अदारीत and अरुक्षत्. ये भूतस्य प्रचेतस इदं तेभ्यो ऽवारं नमः' (Big. Ved. X. 85. 17). यत्सानोः भर्यस्यष्टकम् (Rig Ved. I. 10. 2). । छन्दसि निष्टदेवयाणीयोबीयोच्छिष्यमर्यस्तयाध्वर्यखन्यखान्यदेव- धतिषीव्यब्रह्मवाळमायलाव्योपचायडानि । २ । १ । १२३ । निनि स्पवाहक्यपि प्राप्ते एयत् । प्राधान्तविपर्यासो निसः पत्वं च । निष्टवर्य चिन्वीत देव शब्द ! ! पदे हयतेर्जुहोतेत्री क्यदीर्धश्च । स्पद्धन्ते वा उ देवये '। 'प्र'उत् ·Vor. III. CH. III.83408.] VAIDIC FORMS. 11 - । N the root प्राभ्यां नयतेः काप । प्रणीयः । उन्नीयः । उत्पूर्वाच्छिाः क्यम् । उच्छिष्यः । 'मड्' 'स्तृज सभ्यो यत । मर्यः । स्ता। स्त्रियामेवायम् । ध्वर्यः खनेर्ययययता। खन्यः । खान्यः । यजेयः । शुन्धध्वं देव्याध कर्मो देवराज्याय' । आङ पूर्वात्युच्छेः काप । 'श्राएच्छयं धरुणं वाउयति' । सीव्यतेः काचंच प्रतिषीयः । प्रति बर्वत । ब्रह्मवाट्यम् । लोके तु 'वदः सुपि क्याच (२८५४) इति काव्यता । भवतः स्तातश्च यत् । माध्यः । स्ताव्यः । उपपूर्वाचिनातेर्यदाया. देशश्च पृड उत्तरपदे । उपचाय्यपडन् । * विरगय इति वक्तव्यम् । उपचेयएडमेवान्यत् । मुड' सुखने 'पड च' इत्यस्मादिगुपधलक्षणुः कः । 3407. In the Vedas the following words are found which are formed irregularly :-जिष्टय, देवय, प्रणीय, उन्नीय, च्छिष्य, मर्य, स्तया, ध्वर्य, खन्य, खान्य देवयज्या, आपच्छ्य, प्रतिषीव्य, ब्रह्मवाय, भाव्य, स्ताव्य and उपचाय्य पृड । The formation of the above words is extremely irregular and they are all met with in the Vedic literature only. Thus the word face is derived from "to ont,' with the preposition fag, and the affix rap, instead of ada, which is the regular affix, by III, I. 110. S. 2859 ; निः + कात् + रायत् = निः + तुक + य (the root कृत् transformed inte तक by transposition) = निष्ट. As निष्टक्चे चिन्वीत् शुक्रामः । The above is apparently a guess-work ctymology of the grammarians. So also aaga is furnied by adding to the ruot gaa * to call' or ai to inroke, the affix क्यम् and the u papada देव; the vowel of the root is then leng. thened and the angient a (VI. 1. 71), is not allowed, da +9 or हू + क्या - देवयः Thus स्पर्धन्त बाउ देवहये (Rig. Ved. VIL. 85. 2). So also प्र+नी (to leati)+ क्यम् प्रणीयः ; उत् + नी + क्यम् = उन्नीयः, उत् + मिथ् (to leave) + का,-उच्छिष्यम् ; म (to die) + यत् मर्यः ; स्तु (to cover) + यत् = स्तया ; it. is always feminine. श्व (to bend) + यत् = ध्वः ; खन् (to dix) + यत् = खन्यः ; खन् + ण्यत् = खान्यः ; देव (God) + यज़ (to sacrifice) + यत् देवयज्या ; always used as feminine, Thus in शुन्धध्वं दैव्याय कर्मणे देवयज्यायै। श्रा पृच्छ (to ask) + क्यप् = श्रापच्छ्या ! Thus प्रापच्छयं धरुणं वाज्यर्षति (Rig Ved VII. 107.5). प्रति + सीव (tv sew) + क्या प्रतिषीयः ब्रह्मण + वद् (to speak) + ययत् ब्रह्म- घाटयः, in secular literature both क्यम् and ण्यत् come after this word (III. 1. 106. S. 285 4.) भू (to be) + एयत् = भाव्यः ; स्तु (to praise ) + ण्यत् = स्ताव्यः ; उप + चि (to collect) + गयत् + पूड-उपचय्य एडम्, Väri:--This last word is formed then only when the word पृड follows : and when the sense is that of gold.' When it does not mean tgold, the form is उपचेयपद्धन्न । The root ys is read along with me in the Tudâdi class and means « to please.” To this root is added the affix zi (III. 1. 136. S. 2897). ३१०८ । छन्दसि वनभनलिमयाब । ३ । २ । २० । सभ्यः कर्मण्युपपद स्यात् । वत्तानि वा क्षत्रनिम्' 'उत नो गोषणिं धियम्'। ये पथां परिक्षयः': चतुरक्षा पधिरजी । हनिमंधानाभ' । 3408. In the Vedio literature, the affix 7 comes after the verbs are ' to honor' 7 'to worship ' ta' to protect' and Æg i to agitate," when the object is in composition. - SON - .

·** THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. III. CA. III. 3409. *** Thus saata rat quafa (Vaj. San. I. 17., V. 12., VI. 3) ; sa at mufa Rig Ved. VI. 53. 10), an à part ofurat (Rig. Ved. X. 14. 11) SET UTJATA- Far giarülaa (Rig. Ved. VII. 104. 21). ३४०९ । छन्दति सहः । ३ । २ । ६३ । शिवः स्यात् । पतनापाट् । 3409. In the Chhandas, the affix fer comes after the verb to bear' when it is in composition with a word ending in a case alix The words « upasarga' and “supi? are understood here. As YA++ FT + fox Tatata; noin. sing. TATATEA name of Indra.' The dental # is changed into cerebral o by VIII. 3. 56, and the into z by VIII. 2. 31. The fiual of Vaa is lengthened by VI. 3. 137. Ses Rig Veda. I. 175. 2, III, 29. 9, VI. 19. 7, I 88. 7, X. 103. 7. ३४१० । वहश्च ।३।२।६४ । प्राग्नत् । दित्य वाट् । योगविभाग उत्तरार्थः 3410. The affix fia comes after the verb ar' to carry,' in the Chhandas, when a word ending with a case-affix is io composition with it. As gate Ist sing, Toate carrying a prashtha measure ; 80, farang 1 The division of this sûtra froin the last is for the sake of the subsequent, sútras, into which the anuvritti of op only is carried and not of 78. See Ynjur Veda, XIV. 10, XFIII. 26. ३४११ । ऋव्यपुरीबपुरीयेगु ज्युट् । ३ । ३ । ६५। एयु वयु द स्याच्छन्दसि । कव्यवाहनः । पुरीधवाहनः । पुरीश्यवाहनः । 3411. In the Chhandas, the affix sue cones after the verb a when it is in composition with the words en 'oblation of food to deceased ancestors,' gita 'fæces' and goto' water.' As rezurra: fuqTTE (Yajur Vel. 11. 99) · fire that carries the oblation to the patris ; ' gitaiga: é carrier of Water ; ' gitaratga: (Yaj. Ved. XI. **). The feminine of these words is formed by adding long ३४१२ । हव्यानन्तःपादम् । ३ ।। ६६ । sfaaí a zu z1A: I MICHÜ G'agia' sfa fuza 'Farafatst: fuar a: 3412. The affix ज्युट comes in the Chhandas, after the verb as to carry when it is in composition with the word aan oblation to gods, provided that, the word so formod does not occur in the middle of a pâda (tourth part of a stanza). As frase cali&: ' fire, the carrier of oblation to the gods,' (Rig Veda ·VOL. IIT. CH. III. $ 3414.] VAIDIC FORMS. When this word occurs in the middle of a pâda, or at the beginning, the form is gata z which is derived by adding the affis foar (sutra 3110) As, Fonalefaist: faat 7: the never-decaying Agni or fire that carries oblative to the gods, is our father.' (RIVeda. III. 2. 2.) ३४१३ । जनसनखजक्रमगमो चिट । ३ । २।६७। "faggat-'(2-a) Iraq I TEHNISI: & fru Seraaruf“, gër तेरनः' (३६४५) इति षत्वम् । ' इयं शुष्मेभिर्विसखावारुजत्' । 'श्रा दधिकाः शवसा पञ्च Gret:' | ONT: 3413. The affix faz (the whole of which is elided) comes, in the Chhaudas after the verbs a' to be born,' 'to bestow,' anto dig,' 'to pace and to go, when a word ending in a case-affix is in composition, and the final nasals are changed into long IT 'The words छन्दसि. उपसर्गे and सुधि are understood in this sûtra. The verb. 677 includes two verbs meaning “ to be horn ' and ' tu happen ; ' so also ga metus. buth to give' and ' to worship. Of the affix fag che lattor & is, indicatory, and is qualifying, as in. VI. 4x 41. S. 2982, by which rule the final nasal of 575, 7 &c., is replaced by. long a when the affix faz follows, and the whole affix in, elided by VI. 1. 67. S. 375. As a +378 + faç = "65IT: (Rig Ved. VII. 34. 16) born in water? (VI. 4. 41. S. 2982: ; first: born m the heaven i e. God''(Rig. Veda IV. 40. 5). Su also from #4--tar: 'acquiring or bestowing cows' (VIIL. 3. 108. S. 3645) ; ftat इन्द्रोनुषा असि 0 Indra ! bestower of cows ! thou art loyer of mankind' (Rig Veda IX. 2. 10). Fram 27-faggi: * digger of lotus stalk ;' mar: digger of well. From mafunt: who gets milk? as, su afuit: vaan use Fet: (Rig Veda. IV. 38, 10 and 40. 5). From 174 -- sūT: 3RQUIĄ "the lea ler.' ३४१४ । मन्ने श्वेतवहोवयशस्युरोडाशी रिवन । ३ । २ । ७१ । ** saaugalai gazafa apag *' 47 azzalutfa na fuqarsuarai grafie इत्यर्थः । श्वेताः । श्वेतवाहा । श्वेतवाहः । उवयानि उक्थैर्वा शंसति उक्यशा यजमानः ॥ उक्यशासी । उक्थशासः। पुरो दाश्यते पुरोडाः ! 3414. In the Mantra the affix faag comes after the words श्वेतवह, उक्थशस् and पुरोडाश् । The alove words contain both the verb and the upaparla ; the fact of their being so given indicates that there is some irregularity in the applicatiou of the afir. Thus the affix fogy comes after the verb aq preveded ly the ypapada sān as denuting an agent, while the force of the while word so formed denotes au object As can qa' affat = rātauit nom. sing. Paar: 'e name of Indira', (whom white horses carry). See VIII. 2. 67, S. 3416. The afix fuaq iş applied to the very zig • to praise' when preceded by ·BE The SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI (VOL. III. CH. III. § 3£15 As पुरो the word 37 as oliject or instrument; and then the 1894) is irregularly drupp: ert. As marfa staa tafa=#UTE; nom. sing. STI: (Rig Veda, H. 39. 1.) a reciter of hymns, the name of the sacrificer.' The fuzz is applied after the verb TTT to give,' preceded by get, and a is changed into E, the force of the whole word denoting and object. gisufar pa* = yÈTETIT, nom. sing. YÈTET: (Rig Veda [II. 28." 2) *an offering.' Vart :- The a ignent se is adiled to the words sanaię dc., when the pada affixes follow. Thus before pada terminations श्वेतवाह becomies श्वेतवस् । Therefore its Instrumental dunl is saagiz, pl. saqarth: 6 As The augment zy is not applied before Faalprit, and a terminations. ganaigi, saagia : The whole declension this of word is given below: Sing. Dual. Plural. Nom. Tänar: श्वेतवाहा sanat: Ace. श्वतवाहम् Do. Do. fuss श्वेतवाभ्याम् säng Dat. saaan Do, saadjie Abl. saqara Do, Do. Gen. Du, Sanatat: vanagie loc. yanaifa Do. प्रवेतवःसु Voc. saagt or waaa: श्वत महा ४१५ । अवे यज्ञः । ३।२।७२ । wagt: 1 sautäti : 3415. In the Mantra the affix fua comes after the verb. us to sacrifice' when in compositon with the word ! As 2015, nom. sing. Vaat: (Rig Veda I. 173. 12)the name of a Vedio. priest ;' as a TEUU yfg Thou art the priest of Vuruņa in, the sacritice." The division of this aphurism from the last in which it could have been included, is for the sake of the sulisequent sûtras in which the anuoritti of UST only rụus. This word is thus declined: Sing Dual Plural, Ist. gaui: SVEUIST शवयाजः 2nd, Waa16 aast Tags: 3rd. 9925T अवयोभ्यां aufa: 3898 i naut: anet: gira ISIRI 50k सते संवुद्धी करदीर्घा निपात्यन्ते 2162 FT: 3116. The 7 substitution of VIII. 2. 66. S. 16.2 takes place for the final of the Nominatives and vocatives of Faus, TDAGTE and परोडाश giving the irregular forms अवयाः, श्वेतवाः and पुरोडाः ॥ They are so exhibited here, for making them long in the Vocative singular For thov could not have been lengthened in the Vocative singular, be.

·Vor. fir. CH. III. 23419.] VADIO DIVÈRSITY. 16 - cause VI. 4. 14 does not apply to it. 'Thus हे अवयाः, हे श्वेतवाः, हे पुरोडाः ॥ By korce of च in the sutra, we form 3 शा: also similarly. ३४१७ । विजुपे छन्दति । ३ । २ । ७३ । जप उपपदे यजेविच । उपयट् । 3417. The affix विच comes after the verb यज when उप precedes, in the Chhandas. As उपयभिरुध्वं वहन्ति · they carry it up with the उपयज formulas.' उपयज is the name of eleveu formulas at a sacrifice, ३४१८ । अातो मनिन्दनिवनिपश्च । ३।३।७४ | सुप्युपसर्गे चोपपदे अादन्तेभ्यो धातुभ्य छन्दसि विषये मनिनादयस्त्वयः प्रत्ययाः स्युः। चाद्विच सुदामा । सुधीवा । सुपीवा । भूरिदावा । इत्तपावा । विच । कोलालपाः । 3418. The affixes भनिन (मन), वनिय (बन्), वनिप (वन) and विच come in the Chhandas, after verbs which end in long it, when a case-inflected word or an upasarga is in composition. The force of ' and ' is to inclucle विच. Thus सुदा+मनिन - सुदामन, 1st sing. सुदामा (Rig. VI. 20. 7) 'one who gives liberally ; ' सुधी + कनिम् - सुधी + वन (VI. 4. 66 - सुधीवन, 1st sing. सुधीवा - having good understanding ;' सुपा + अनिम् - सुधीवन, 1st sing. सुपीवा 'a good drinker,' भूरि + दा +निम् = भूरिदावन, 1st sing. भूरिदावा (Rig. II. 27. 17) "liberal ; ' vaata7 Ist sing. Enviar (Yaj. VI. 19) ‘ghee-drinker.' The affix faz is also iucluded in this aphorismi. As कीलाल + पा विच = कोलालपा (Rig. x. 91. 14) • nectar-drinker.' ३४१९ । बहुलं छन्दसि । ३ । २ । ८८ । उपपदान्तपि हन्तेर्बहुलं विरस्यात् । मातृहा। पितहा । 3419. In the Chhandas, the affix tant diversely comes after the verb 'to kill with the sense of past time, even when the word in composition with it is other than those mentioned in III. 2.87.S.2998. This aphorism ordains feru in cases which are not governed by the restrictive rule contained in III. 2. 87.S. 2998. As मातहा सप्तमं नरकं प्रविशत् ' may the matricide enter the seventh hell ;' so also fuaat 'patricide.' Diversely we find also picata: and faqaia: 1 The Past participle Nishțhâ is generally formed by a, but in the Vedas, it is formed by the affixes of the Perfect tense also, and the Perfect itself is formed sometimes by the affixes Titaa and any as already tauglit in the sâtras III. 2. 105 S.3093 ; III. 2. 106 S. 3094; III, 2. 107 S. 3095. They are repeated there again. ३४१८ क । छन्दसि लिट । ३।२।१०५ । भूत सामान्ये । 'अहं ट्यावाधिवी भाततान'। 3419 A. In the Chhandas, the affix faz comes after a verb, with the force of Past participle, and Past tense in general, ·16 THE SIDDHÀNTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. CH. III. § 3420. 6 Às Tavaresaat paata • I stretched the heaven and the earth;' Hero the word aan has the force of nishthân. ३४५६ ख। लिटः कानज्वा । ३।३।१०६ । 3419 B. In the Chliandas the affia faa is optionally replaced by the affix Traz.e., the affix has the force of the Perfect. As saiat faania: he consecrated the fire; ' ÊTE सुपुवाया: he pressed the soma juice. This affix comes after thise verbs only which take Atmanepada termination s. See 1.4, 100. aq=1a (Rig Veda I. 3. 6). ३४२८ । सश्च । ३ । २ । १० । छन्दिास लि : कानच्छ सूया स्तः । चक्रागा वष्ण' । यो नो अग्ने अरिवा अघायु: ** TRUETGIMITUT SOTT: *' 1 pizzafe' (940) i : 2019: ** सरजधिकारे जवरुवा छन्दास वाच्या *' । 'ऊवास्तुमे जवः' । 'देवस्य सवितुः सवे'। 3419 C. In the Chhandas the affix she is optionally the substitute of FETT 8,6., the kvasu formed word lias the force of the Perfect. As slaan 1st sing. Gaan ' eaten' (Yaj. VIII. 19); ufuae 1st sing, ufuata • drunk. Thus HTUT gia gira (Rig Veda VIIT. 7. 23). av 19 vety: (Rig Veda 1. 147, 4). Here the word aftalia is formed from the rout at to give,' with the afix EFF having the force of Perfect, The Negative Particle w is added. F = TT TT + 2X=T +32 + ax (VII, 2. 67 S. 3096) = fag. The Nom. Sing. is ररिवान a generous man." arita17 “a miser, an enemy." By S. III. 1. 8. S. 2657. the affix az is added to a noun in order to denote & wish for one's own self. The following vârtika makes an exception in the Vedas. - In the Vedas, the affix ata is added after the word e, even when the wish is with regard to another. As मा त्वा वका अघायवा बिदन. Here अघायु (pl. varia:) is formed by kyuch, 3 being added by III. 2. 170. S. 3150, and a is added by vit. 4. 37. See Rig Veda 1. 120. 7. Thus 14+7= 5€ + U = +2+3 (III. 2. 170. S. 3150) = 3781+(VII. 4. 37. S. 3590.) By sůtra III. 3.56. S. 3231, the affix xais added to roots ending in gor , but in the Vedas this affix is added even after roots in 3 or F by the following Vârtika, Värt:--The words sia and Ha are formed by the affix a and they occur in the Vedas. As sältes À sa:,', ĉarı afago, sê (Rig Vela V. 82, 6.) These roots जु and सु would have otherwise taken the affix अप. The form would have been the same, but there would be difference of acceut. See Rg. I. 112. 21, and Yaj. XI. 2. ३४२० । मन वृषेषपचमनविद वीरा उदात्तः । ३। ३ । ६६ । वृषादिभ्यःक्तिन्स्यात् । स चोदात्तः। 'वृष्टिं दिवः' । 'सुमिष्टये । 'पचापक्तीस्त' । 'इयं ते नव्यमी मतिः । वित्तिः । भूतिः । 'अग्ने श्रा याहि वीतये । 'राती स्या मोभयासः' । Thus TT+ Part : 6 ·6 *** 6 OO, Wiat: ' being atte: VEL. III. CI. III. $ 3423.) VAIDIC FORMS. 3420. In the Mantra literature, kün? acutely accented comes after the following roots, forming words in the feminine gender, denoting a mere action :-- vřish' (to rain), ‘ish' (to wish), “pach' (to cook), 'man' (to think), - vid' (to know), bhủ'(to be), The construction of this sutra is anonzalous, Instead of the bases being put in the ablative case, they are put in the nominative case. Thus area: rainin;' ; afez: wishing '; uf: 'cooking'; fat: thinking '; fafa: " knowing '; Assal fez faa: " (Rig Veda 11. 6,5). gafaza (Rig Veda VI. 70. 4). Taitaa (Rig Veda IV. 24.7). azat fa: (Rig Veda VIII. 74. 7). uratiza: (Rig Veda I. 161. 1). 7777 Hift airū (Rig Ved. VI. 16. 10). TTÄT FUTATUZTE: (Rig. Ved. V11. 1, 20). 3931 i guia TuY22:131319701 suarlauawag ümit utgRBUTA yeuta i sarsuara: i gustiska: 3421. The affix 'yuch' comes in the Chhandas, after roots having the sense of to go', when the word 'ishad' &c. meaning lightly' or with difficulty' are in composition with such verbs. This debars the affix te of III. 3. 126, 127 S. 3305 and 3308. Thus aažisia: FunAUTTEIT See T. S. 7. 5. 20. 1. 32 streda 3131 9901 NATÜVIT C sa umaarufu nia yasama ngalan TEOGTÜ ma'! 3422. The afix 'yuch ’ is seen to come in the Vedas, after other verbs also, than those meaning "to go? Thus gara IH UTC Pero ni; so also gáz 27 EUTT FOÙ ni (Rig Veda X. 112, S). 3831 | raia TETETTE: 1 3 18161 ursufi ja aserosā aiz: 1 tū uzrā Rat: i gia aar aa farinata' azzü 5 IST BZT1 Fa:' 1476 I FAZI ĉituantai ushtar', façı 21 না। মা মিল নাই। 3423. In the Vedas, the Aorist, Imperfect and Perſect are optionally employed in all tenses, in relation to verbs. The words vigent and vaateix aie understood here also. By saying ' optionally, other tense affixes may be sim la ly employed. Thus car aaTHITHA (Rig. I. 1. 5). "O God Ayni ! conie hither with the gods '. Here the Aorist sinna he's the force of the Imperative. niet vana så å satsa A: I make salutation &c. &c.' (Rig. X. 25. 17) Here ai is Aorist (55 ) and has the sense of the Present. 6 6 ·18 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. CH. III. § 3423. Thus । So also अग्निमा होतारमवणीतायं यजमानः। Here लङ् is used instead of लट् । So also अटा ममार = अहा नियते। Here ferę is useil instead of लट् NOTE:-गमत् is formed with the affix अ of the Aorist because the root गम्लु has an indicatory d in the Dhituphtha ani belongs to Pashadi class. अकरम् here लि is replaced by Rs by sutra VII. 2. 13. S. 2293. +अड़+म. Then there is guna by V11. 4. 16 S. 2406. With the augment , we get अकरम् “ I did." श्रवणीत from a to choose'; add लङ, and sना vikarana because the root belongs to Kryadi class. Then there is long ई by VI. 4. 113. S. 2497. Thus we have अवणीत ॥ ३४२४ । लिथै लेट । ३।४।। विध्यादा हेतुहेतुमद्भावादी च धातोर्लेट् स्याच्छन्दसि । 3424. The affix 'Let' is optionally employed in the Vedas, wherever the Potential can be used. The formation of wę is shown in the subsequent sûtras. In the first place, the vikarana føq is sometimes added between the Personal-endings and the root. Secondly, the Personal-endings themselves lose their g thus far becomes , fæ becomes Ę i Thirdly, the word takes the augment me and satę between the Personal-endings and the root. Foarthly, the feu vikaraṇa sometimes causes Vriddhi also. ३४२५ । सिब्बहुलं लेटि । ३ । १। ३४ । 3425. fara is diversely the affix of a verbal root when it follows. ३४२६ । इतश्च लोपः परस्मैपदेषु । ३ । ४ । ६७ । लेटस्तिडामितो लोपो वा स्यात्परस्मैपदेषु । 3426. In the Parasmaipada affixes the i' is optionally elided in the Subjunctive. The at of the the preceding Ashțâdhyâyî sûtra III. 4. 96. is understood here also. ३४२७ । लेटोऽडाटौ। ३ । ४ । ९८ । लेटः 'अद श्राद 'एतावागमा स्तः । ता च पिती । * सिब्बहुलं णिक्तव्यः ' । वृद्धिः । 'vण प्राषि तारिषत्' । 'मुपेशसस्करति जोविद्धि' । ' या माविषदर्शसानाय शरुन'। सिप इलोषस्य चाभावे । 'पताति विद्युत् । 'प्रियः सूर्ये प्रियो अपना भवाति । 3427. The augments 'at' and it' are added to the personal endings of the Vedic Subjunctive. The augments pę and any are fup and are not to be added at once, but by turns. Thus जुष् + सिप * अट् + त् = जोषिषत् ; तारिषत्, मान्दिषत ; similarly पत् * प्राट् * ति = पताति; च्यावयाति । See III. 1. 34 for the addition of सिप in the above. Varl :—The vikarana fær is treated as fun and therefore causes Vriddhi- Thus from the root g we have तारिषत, as तू * तिप् = तू * सिप * तिप, - तु* इद सिय तिप = तार + इ + सि * ति = तारिषत् | Thus प्र ण पायूंषि तारिषत् । न मिटि ।

·you. III. Cir III. S 3437.] VAIDIC SUBJUNCTIVE. 10 Similarly warfacą from gooāsatât:, as in the following- স্মা নির্মানায় ঘর (Rig Vedia X. 29. 7.) But when there is no fan added, and the c of the Personal-endings is not elided, then we have forms like wata fean and fra: näfuar swathaifa (Rig Veda V. 37. 5) In fact az is a composite Mood, and may be considered to have six tenses as shown below:- 1.Preseat.-- 1. মনি কল ময়নি মান্নান মানি 11. সাল भवासि কল্লা III. ময়াদি সাল নন II.-Imperfect. भवत् ফল भवात লাল I. : HATA: . মান III. মা অদি ন সার রা III. Present Conditional. 1. মিনি মশিনঃ চানিলি মিনি মায়ানঃ মষিয়ানি II. কম্বিয়ায় সয়িত্ব সবিহ भविषासि মন্ত্রিাগ: সন্নিায় III. মুনামি ময়লা মল্লিকা ময়িমান भविषाम IV.--Imperfet Conditional. 1. নিয়ন নিন: र्भावषन् মনিয়ান নুন: भविधान 11. সন্নিস: সয়িয়: শয়িায় মনিরা ছি।স্ব: প্তি III. মতিলাল সন্নিা: মলিগ্রাম মন্তি! भविषाम 7.-Strong Present Conditional. 1. সান্নিয়ন মায়ন: শনিয়ন সান্তিয়ান Tয়া: কানালি I. ১।নিহি এরিযঃ মানি ৭uানি মমিগ্রাঃ নি III. সানিলি নাকি ব্রেন: কান্তিয়ান: মাত্রা মালি VI.-Strong Imperfect. Condi'ional. 1. মানি মারিন: মামিনুল भाविधात् মানি: भाविधान ·TO 1 9 Sars: GT787 HTC UR, TATTFUTETTFETT: Garu. 20 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. III. CH. III. S 3427. 11. fau: faua: Hiraga Hiraat: wtfara: Hifaux III, UTETTA Mirauta: WTfouTA: ifesta wifauna Taaza at TTT: CITET I Hatz 1 Fiata: atra 3428. The's' of the first person is optionally elided in the Subjunctive. As Tata or Tata:, Taja or CITETA: 1 The first person is used in the sútra to indicate that the ca is not elided in any other person. TERETETT Tra izant to sera facut astite asin ', 3429. In the Subjunctive, ai' is the substitute of «â of stars and water in the first and second person dual of the Atmanepada. Thus waa, a, saa, seal Why is not the augment 97changed into t? Because otherwise the rule enjoining te would be superfluous, and the sutra enjoining te ought to have enjoined ac at once. offer: aer A ( Rig Veda IV. 41. 3). Here the affix ax is chang ed to TR The regular form on the it is changed to J hy III. 4 79. S. 2233. The 7 of the augment 7ię is not changed to as we have already said ahove, and here we have the foring yutia &c. et osta asian (Rig Vela VIII. 31. 1). 3830 i 3115ETU AE TSITE IZTET! माल से इत्यस्य विषयं विना । 'पशनामोशे TETURN;*' faiguat Hiaüi'i 3430. In the Subjunctire, 'ai' is optionally the substitute of 'e', in other places than those mentioned in the last sâtra. This na, &e, in the following examples : - aiztfa, EU, Eha पशूनामीशे, मदया स्व वा यथा गृया TATA 4: urriage And in the aiterziative we have simply T. as 49 a Q Hit 97 QUE37777 I Note :- from the root pad It is the 1st Pers. Sing, "The Atmanepada Personal ending et of th: Ist Pers. Sing, is changed to È , This is not elided by. III. 4. 97. S. 3-426, becuuse that sûtra is confined to Parnsmaipada 5 a The & is changed to L by III. 4. 79. S. 2233, then changed to T by this sâtra. Um from ofa in the Passive. The g of the Passive is added, and then the 3rd Pers. Plural fat or grai The Personal en lmg takes the illiymezit mię and beuomes i The t of us is cha ged to by VI. 1. 16, S. 2412, and the 3 of Ti is changed to y by III. 4. 79, S. 2233, and this Ę is changed to Î 4 $ 1 1 ·VOL. IIT. C. III. 3432.] VAIDIO SUBJUNCTIVE. 2 53 consonants. 3439 1 STEGTETUJūzai 318161 *** TOT #za SEAL utarata', afsaama ATÉGIA' TE: 5: 917138777' (2449) 3431. Where a contingent promise (a reciprocal ment), or where apprehension is implied, the affix Les? is employed after a root, in the Chhandas Literature, The word 3079T menus reciprocal agreement, contracting to do. Thus ufe a wala uz auf van a ZiRaTfh It you do this for me, I will give this to you.' Agreements like these are called 378721Z, while guessing or inferring the result from a canse is called 1981. apprehensiou or fear.' Thus wa watu u This is the reply of Ra Ira, when he was solicited by the Devas, to conquer Tripura. The word te means “boqul souls, jivan treading the mound of Samsara. OATH is Let the finis elided by III. 4. 98 S. 3428. 772 TL ÖT JEI TEI usuartåa a: uragana u fata* (or. afm791) O CARTI (Nir. I. 11. Bohulingk) - iscuda 72muta 11 All the above exumples have the sense of Potential, but the Subjunctive (Let), muust be employel necessarily in these senses and not optionally, which anu vritti was understood in the last sûtra. By III. 1. 83, S. 2557, in the Imperative 2nd Pers. Singular, $7717 is. sometimes suòstituted for the ikarana yan, after the Kryadi roots ending in By the next sûtra, Tiuz is optionaily the substitute in the Vedils, 2838 i fa 512SA I 3191 $1uzkian) '* TTĒTSETIH fa H: 1 quta isgal y aurt aa ufan:' 1 'fafanta (894) zfa JumatatT: 1 TUTTA Ä', 'FAT 2H17'! 3432. In the Chbandas, g197 is also the substitute of an after roots ending in consonants, when to follows. Thus Tuta ferga ay(Rig Veda VIII. 17. 5.) take up the honey with the tongue." The aliis taa is also employed by force of the word api in the aphorism as an ua "hind the beasts.' Vert: In the Onhanılas, * is substituted for the # of and ug u Thus, TERA starfa ; AEGRI Txufa ; atqüransfut, 3q7thaf UTHE SAŻET päiqua u NOTE :-Tuta is derived from up' to seize'; the ț is vocalised liy ufasat etc. VI. 1. 16 S. 2412 ; and a chuinged to up by the vârtika alıove given. शना + हि = गृह + ना = गम् + ना=गृभ् + प्राय (शायच) - गृभाय * take up thou.' Note :-out is formeil by ha; alded to the rout gold to bind' the nasal is elide l by VI. 4. 24 s. 415 ; the Imperative affix fx is elided by VI. 4. 105 S. 2202 Thus बन्ध + sare fa = 74 + 971 + fx = qui a + f& - a" raja + a = dura bind or tether.” Other examples of the chauge of & into a by the above vârtika are given below : aufpa (Rig Veda X. 85. 36). FLATFHIT Thus at a ·- । - - "धुरि दक्षिणायाः । दर्शक्षणस्यामिति प्राप्त । 'चषालं ये अश्वपाय तक्षति। तक्षन्तोलि प्राप्त भेदति (Rig VIII. 40. 111 22 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. CH. III. S 3433. ३४३३ । व्यत्ययो बहुलम् । ३ । १ । ८५ । विकरणानां बलं व्यत्ययः स्याच्छन्दसि । 'प्राण्डा शुष्णस्य भेर्दाल' । भिनतोति प्राप्ते । 'जरसा मरते पतिः । मियत इति प्राप्त । 'इन्द्रो वस्तेन नेजतु । नयतेलोट् शर्यासपी द्वीविकरणौ ॥ 'इन्द्रे गा युजा तरूपेण कृत्रम्' । तरेमेत्य यः। तरतेर्विध्यादी लिङ । उशासपचेति भयो विकरणाः । सुप्तिकुपनलिङ्गनराणां कालहलदस्वरवायां च । व्यत्ययमिच्छति शास्त्रज्ञदेवां सोपि च सिध्यति बाहुनकेन । उपग्रहः परस्मैपदामनेपदे । 'ब्रह्मचारिणमिच्छते' । इच्छतीति प्राप्ने । 'प्रतीधमन्य जमिध्यति । युध्यत इति प्राप्ले। 'मधेस्तिता इवासते' । मधुन इति प्राप्ते । नरः पुरुषः । 'अधा स वीरेशभिर्वि- सूयाः' । विधूयादिति प्राप्ले । कालः कालवाची प्रत्ययः । शवोऽग्नीनाधास्यमानेन । लुटो विषय टट् । तमसो गा अदुक्षत' । अधुद्धिति प्राप्ते । मित्र वयं च सूरयः'। मित्रा वर्याति प्राप्ते । स्व व्या. त्ययस्तुवक्ष्यते । कर्तृ शब्दः कारकमात्रपरः । तथा च तद्वाचिनां छातद्धितानां व्यत्ययः । अन्नादायमा शिवषय च । अवग्रहे विशेषः । यडो यशब्दादारभ्य लियाशिष्या (३४३४) इति इन्कारया । प्रत्याहारः । तेषां व्यत्ययो भेदतीत्यादिसत एघ । 3433. In the Chhandas there is diversely an interchange of the various vikarañas yu and the rest, which have been ordained under special circumstances. The word 271g means transgression of the fixed rule, or interchange ; taking of two vikaraņas at a time, and 80 Thus भेदति = भिट+शप् +ति ; in stead of fuafn from the root faz 'to split', belonging to the Rudhidi class ; e. g. of Shushna"; so also, जरसा मरते पतिः (Rig. X. 86. 11.); here there is मरते - (म+ + a) instead of faca ; the root # belonging to the Tudádi class. So also there are two vikaranas at one and the same time, in the following. इन्द्रो वस्तेन नेपतु 'May Indra lead by this abode' ; here there is नेषनु 3rd per. sing. of the Imperative (लोद) of the root नी to lead' ; there are two vikaranas सिप and शप instead of नयतु = (नो + शप + तु); इन्द्रेण युजा तरुधेम वृत्रम् (Rig. VII. 48. 1). The word तस्म (+उ+ सिप + शप + अम) is the lst per. sing. of the Optative (लिङ) of the root a and is formed by three vikaraņis ; the classical form bein g ATA "may we cross. Karika: -In the Vaidic literature we have many apparent irregularities with regard to the application of (1) सुप (case-affixes), (2) तिज (Personal-endings), (3) उपग्रह (Parasmaipada or Atmanepada affixes), (4) rules of gender, (5) person or (6) tense (7) rules of interchange of consonants, or (8) of vowels, (9) rules of accent (10) rules relating to my and afra affixes and (12) rules relating to the affixes included in the prátyáhâra ug (III. I. 22 to Ill. 1. 86). All these irregularities areexplained by the anthor by the worl anau In fact, the word Bahulam not only covers, but explains an l justifies all Vaidio anonialies Note : --The word UTE IN “science-naker,'' in the above kårikâ refers to Pånini. Thus:-- (1). Irregular application of case affixest धुरि दक्षिणायाः (Rig Veda I. 164. 9.) 011 . '" शप .

·VOL. III. CH. III. $ 3431.] VAIDIO DIVERSITY. son. Mix स् mnearls Here zlautat: (Genitive) is used instead of the Locative afa URTE (2). Irregular applicatiou of Personal-endings : sura a sugaru nafar (Rig Vela I. 162. 6). Here nata is used instead of aan hanya (3). Irregular use of Parasmai pada and Atmanejadas: As, Hatha Here Atmanepada gun is used instead of Parasınaipa la la Similarly प्रतीपमन्य कर्मियुधति instead of युध्यते ॥ Irregular use of Genders, as HUFTHAT sanaa Here the word मधु which is Neuter gender, is deolined as Masculine. The classical form is HY: (5). Trregular use of Person. The word *: in the Kârika nieans P 1 As wur fait: aufi farur: instead of faqaia u Here 2nd Person is used for 3rd Person. This word is the Benedictive Mood of the root g" to mix," with the prefix fa i (6). Irregular use of Tenses. The word entry in the Kârikå means the affixea denoting time. Thus vaisनीन् प्राधास्यमानिन । Here लट् is used instead of लुट । It is formed from ut with the affix Tre (III. 3. 14. S. 3107) and the Mood. affix F (III. 1. 33. S. 2186), and the augment (VII. 2. 82. S. 3101). (7). Irregular interchange of consonants : as, MHẾT 171 waq Here a is, not changed to 171 The proper form is my (8) Irregular vowels : a, frau: instead of fast aru (9). Irregular use of Accents. This will be illustrated later on. (10). Irregular use of Kirakas, The word set in the Karika Kárska ; and inoludes the Krit and Taddhita affixes. Thus from the root na 'to eat' with the upaprda , a compound is formed by adding the nffis tur Thus x2 + y + Fu = 5a + 12 = 5912: 1 But in the Vedas, affix is used. Thus + 7 + 77 = 79+ 2 = Tata: 1 Here though the resulting form in both cases is the same, yet in analysis they will be different. Thus in would be a + SHTATO, in the other 77 +!! यड़ in the Kârika is a Pratyâhåra formed with the a of III. 1. 22, and the of in III. 1. 86. There is irregular use of these affixes also in the Vedas. These affixes are : 1. US Intensive affix. 2. fuq Causative and Ch irâdi class affix, 3. Kandı yadi class affix. 4. stu: 7. Sur 6. fus 7. F and arfe of the Future Tense &c. 8. fe of Let. 9. ure of Perfeot. 10. fent and faer, *, ug and and fan of the Aorist. 11. um of the Passive, 12. The vikaranıs su, 177, 53, 1. TA#, 3, 7t, and the Benedictive 51 The irregular use of these has already been illustrated in the exanıples like Sara &o. 3838 1 fagurf NE I 3 19 LEI श्राशीलिडि परे धाताग्छ स्याच्छन्दसि । 'वच उम्' (२४५४)। 'मंत्रं वोचेमाग्नये। * दृशेरग्वलव्यः' । 'पितरं च दृशेयं मातरं च' अङि तु Rasfs- (२४०६) इति गुगाः स्यात। 3434. The affix Te is employed in the Chbandas when the affixes of the Benedictive (pruitas) follow. one case it (11). The 7 6 ·well; see Várt :- 6 1 Girnar carburaarait 24 SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. III. CH. III. § 3435. This debars u. The affixes of the Benedictive are ârdhadhâtuka by III 4. 116. S. 2215; but in the Velas they are sârvadhâtukil as III, 4. 117, S 3435. The scope of the present rule is confined to the Benedic. tive of the verihs स्था. गा, गम, बच्, वद शक and सह ; as उपस्येयम् ; सत्यमप्रमेयम्, गमेम स्वर्ग लोकमारुहेयम्. The affix is employed in the Chhandas after the verb zu in the Benedictive. Had there leen 13, it would have caused guna by rule VII. 4. 16. S. 2406 ; to prevent this, 7 is ord: ined ; as foaia Juu Hinta (Rig Veda I. 24, 1). May I see the father and the mother.' 2834 RAUT | 31819991 धाधिकार प्रत्ययः साधतुझार्धधातुकोभयसंज्ञः स्यात् । अर्धन्तु त्वा सुष्टुतयः । 'argāt: - ' (az<s) fa 27 ! , 973afyasa: fa am fear a' (949) 1 116 117 SUTTIGTâra iarnar in: 1 nefagaa 'afvacaiofa: étan'afatit: sfagar'ı size ufafaur 'i sía: i façanaaa faa' (+243) gfa juaTuatu tu. Fun a to? (3400) इत्युवम् । ततुरिः । अगुरिः । 3435. In the Vedas this distinction of sarvadhâtuka 'and Cárdhadhâtuka' is not always maintained, and the afires ordained after roots are promiscuously employed. In the Vedas, there is no hard and fast rulo abont sûrvadhútrika and @rahadhatuka afbres. Sometimes the fast and fua are treated as if they were Aidhadh dluku. Thus ar ET GERU: Here the atlives of the IT are treateid as Ardhaullalula and consequently there is the elision of the fue by rule VI. 4. 51. S. 2313 ; the proper form of this world wonld be aue Sometimes ardhuthatuku affixes are treated like scârvadharuka affixes ; as y yrtar; here the a fixes of the faç are treated as sárvadkáinka and there is the Vikarapa sy and the 3 is changed into ai Thus, fa + ****+ = fa + 1 +7+ (III. 1. 74. S. 2386.) = 12 + + + (VI. 4. 87. S. 2387.) = famız Similarly, ল্লি। The this is sometimes treatet in the Vedas both as drdhadháruka and sarvadhain ka at one anl the same time; as 3 vui ! Here, by treating the effix as Ardhudhatuka, there is elision of a in the foot (VII. 2. 79. S. 2211) and by treating it agiin as ardhadhatuku the 91 of Fur is changed into 01 Si also in fin the fix is treated as súarv:{dhatrika and there is no sub. stitution of x for x as required by II. 4, 52. S. 2470. In this connection, we read here again the sûtra IIT. 2. 171. S. 3151. 3834 F area: Fare Fag 7 13181999 1 3435. A. In the Chhandas, the affixes ki' and kin' in the sense of the agent having such a habit &c' come after the verbs that end in long 'a' or short or long “ și' and after the verbs gan go,' han ‘to kill,' and jan ‘to be produced,' and these.affixes operate like 'Lit causing reduplication of the root. SO -- ·Vot. III. r. III. $ 3436.] VAIDIC INFINITIVE. 25 afuash (Rig Ved. VI. 23. 4). From the root 25! + fx = air: i Reduplication because treated as far ! पपिः सोमम् (" ), From or + fan = ofa: diat: ). From zu + fan = aft: stíhagat (Rig Veda VII. 20. 1.) From + #afra: The penaltimate w is elided hy VI. 4. 98. S. 2263. sfagafarfum (Rig Veda. IX. 61. 20). Iron +f*=fa: changed to 7 by VII. 3. 54. S. 358. sfa:ats (I'. S. VII. 5. 20. 1.) From 54+ f*7 = sfat: Q. * Now all the above roots either end in vowel or in simple consonants, and therefore by varie faç fin (I. 2. 5. S. 22:12)the afi ses f an / f (the real afix is ) would be fa; why we these affixes enuincinted with an indicatory ? Ans. They are real as in in order to prevent counce in the case of roots ending in loug ; for by VII. 4. 11. S. 2383, faç alone would not have been fan after I long x The usefulness of the affixes being firing is illustrated in the next two examples. faara magica (Rig Veda. IV. 39. 2). agier = fa 1 gi argfc: (Rig Veda X. 108. 1). Here from the roots 27 Atuar: and furtû both ending in long as we get the forms weft: and aria: ly the affix Had the afix been merely 3 without indicatory #, it heing like fag would have caused gliņa of a by VII. 4. 11. S. 2383; but the indicatory a prevents it. Thus a + fa=+ Fan (the is replaced by sy by VII. 1. 103. S. 3578.) Then there is reduplication. And we should get तुरतुर +5॥ But by I. I. 59 S. 2213, the a substitutiva does not take place first. It is after reduplication that VII. 1. 103, S. 3578. finds scope. Thus +8+ = 7+ fx = ara + f* (VII. 4. 66. S. 2244.) = a +ima (VII. 1. 60. S. 2179). At this stage will apply sú tra VII. 4. 11, and we have agit: a Similarly we get stafe: 11 3838 तुमर्य FATTAR À FAIT asqah: 13181 âi aa aru:', falar arawtrêtaitae ur; ' i gitaratara4177: et en mal watia mo' a mai nat'ı uz sata: Twiga va furat: 11 * 1127: #7 Azt a l'artā fazcü' ma i zaats i pagi hai máą i kila ! 3436. In the Veilas the following affixes come after roots with the force of the affix tumun, viz :--se', sen', 'ase', asen', 'kse', kasen', 'adu yai', adhyain?, kadlıyai”, “kadh yain ', 'sadhyai ', śadhyain', 'tavai', taven', and · ta ven.' In the Vaidio literature, the Infinitive is formed by the above 15 affixes. These, when stripped of their indicatory letters, will be found to cousist of the follow. ing five affixes :-(1) Ħ= , #9 and 11 (2) = pa, paaud äta I (3) pra= srü, Emin, sita, a, te aud 717 11 (4) aä 11 (5) aâ=aas aud aaqi 4 pu 1 1 he 1 6 < es ·26 THE SIDDHANTA KAUNUDI. (VOL. III CH III. § 3137. The difference in the affixes is made by four indicatory letters, viz, 7, , and The forces of paul have already been explained; the indica ory a makes the word take the událta acrent on the first syilahle (71.1. 197. S. 3686). Thus ais acute (III. 1. 3. S. 3701); n has acute on the first syllable of the word (VI. 1 197); his accent of the atix (III, 1. 3); ia throws the accept on the first syllable of the word; the indicatory y makes the numbers 11 and 12 Sîrvadhâtuka, and the root takes the proper Vikarana uf its class before these affixes; while before ra, the acute fally both on the first ayllable and the last stable simultaneously (VI. 1. 200. S. 3.88. VI. 2. 51. 5785, Before going to give examples of these afixes, let us explain what is meant by the sense of the alix ap The word au is here equivaleut to wia or act on', for the pratyayas or affixes, to which no meaning has been assigned in grainmir, couvey the meaning of the bases to which they are added. This no special meaning having been attached to 799, it will convey the nean. ing of the rvot to which it is added, 2. e. it will denote the faction of the verb, or Infinitive mood. (1) 8-57(from 59 +9) TU: (2) 4-THU 19177# (Rig. V. 66. 3), from y qu: (3 and 4) waard 9-5 aziai staż ur: (Rig. III. 36. 10), So also trà auja start! (Riy. X. 57.14 ). With way the word will be sticla i (5) -7ū uita from , gün 9-90=70 (0) To'fa fa(Rig. V. 59. 3). It has not the fam accent (VI. 1. 197) which would have given us foda 117 and 8) , sa 50 yu The accent is on the last in one case sud on the first in the other: (9) at orgas (Rig VI. 60. 13). (10) fwati (11 and 12) T2, 1-faza (Rig VI. 27. 5); the nooite lowever is on fu #1 124 (Rig. VI. 60 13). (13) 3-10 100 (14) - TATA ZTA AA na (Rig. X. 184. 3). (15) fião-riña (Pig. I. 46. 7); maa (Rig. I. 85.9); gaan 3839 of Feuino 9181.901 एते तुमर्थ निपात्यन्ते । प्रधातुं रोटुमव्याधिमित्यर्थः । 3437. The words 'prayai, 'rohishyai,' and avyathishyai are irregular Vaidic Infinitives. Thus (1) vuaast wo: (ig. I. 142. 6); * + 1 + 3 = vů = WIGA 1 (2) ĀTautai arff | 58+ = fata = TIETTU (3) *+224 + = gofod= 1 * थनाय! २५३८ । दृशे विख्ये च । ३ । ४ । ११ । द्रष्टुं विख्यातुमित्यर्थः। 3438. The words driše andvikhye' are anomalous Vaidic Infinitives. Thus a fasztu gum (Rig. I. 50. 1) = ger i fer ar Eufe = famiga! 383€ i gafasi hat ! 3181921 पोतावुपपदे तुमर्थ सती स्तः । विभाज नाशनत्'। अपलुपं नाशकत्' । विभत्तु- सपलातुमित्यर्थः । 3439. The affixes 'namul' and 'kamul' are added to roots in tlie Chhandas to form Infinitives, when they are governed by the verb sak' (to be able.)

·YOL. III. CH III. $ 3443.) VAIDIC INFINITIVE. 5.) ! Of the affix up the real affix is ; the letier y causes viidhi (VII. 2. 115); and a regulates the accent (VI. 1. 193). So also of कमल the letter prevents guņi and vriddhi substitution (1. 1. Thus अग्निं वै देवा विभाजं नाश धन · the Gods were not able to divitle Agui. fauss+upa=fauts=fauna So also sagu 1927 instead of #u- लोप्तुम् । ३४४० । ईश्वरे तोसुकसुनौ । २।४ । १३ । flair faafcäs: '7'était fafae:' faafra faalang 3440. The affixes . tosun' and kasun kasun' are acted to roots in the Chhandas, to form Infinitives, when the word "iśvara' is in composition. This statisfuafrai= fuaferater fafaa: - fafaragatati faqa: faalaga ৪৪৫৭। শ্বারী ননক্ষেত্রঃ। । ৪। ৫৪। 7 Frana 'wama's faganu:'" भर्वत्यष्ट कर्वन्', 3441. The artigos tavai,' ken,' 'kenya' and tvan' are added to roots in the Chhandas, in the sense of the Krityaaffixes.' The force of kritya aflives is to denote action' (ra) and cohject' (a). Thus = a0; heutakautuina; amaig = stanicazzo ; fagot: (Rig. I. 106. 5;=razianz ; T:=1774 ; ; (Pig. I. 10. 2)=270# Tue fix na was mentioned in sûtna III4. 9, also; there it bail the force of the Infiintive, and here that of the Passive Participle. For its ducent, see VI. 1. 200; 2. 51. ! 6 frguraud 'I gaan nafarů: 3412. The word avachakshe? is an anomalous passive participle in the Vedas. Thus fagmt ataza (Rig. IV. 58, 5)=aTAETH | 4a +54 + Tapata Thie sútra IL 4. 54. S. 2436, is not applied bera. 3833 I MURET Zustizitzatea TV3 171€ teatar: alatt, TEAM 129773: t: i puisi gaſzár: Tart: 1 GIÀT: afrai: 1199ifasiaat: Huaih' The affix tosun comes in the Vedas after the followiny verbs, when mere name of the action is indicated, viz :- stha' (to stand), 'in' (to go), “kriñ '(to make),' vad' (to speak), 'char' (to walk), 'hu'(to sacrifice), “tam' (to grow tired) and jan' (to produce). These are alsi, Tofinitives. The ploase zi is not to be reail into this sûtra, The word Hiqnal qualities the sense of the root (utāt asua ). 6 6 ·28 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. CH. IV. § 3443. Thus, स्था-श्रा संस्थातोर्वयां सादन्ति = आसमाप्तेः सीदन्ति । इण -पुरा सूर्य स्यादेते र.धेयः । का-पुरा वत्सानामपाकताः । वद-पुरा प्रवदितो रग्नी प्रहातव्यम् । चर् -पुरा प्रचरिता- Trituta gazt: (Gopatha Brahmaņa II. 2, 10) 7- Tuania i 77 afHattrata (Taitt. Br. I. 4 4. 2) 577- fanfaat: FRIA (Taitt. S. II 5. 1. 5). 3848 i eficai: za! 318.1991 HIGHWU a ITATTU fagar farfema'1'77 372 maa:', इति तृतीयोऽध्यायः । 3444. In the Vedas, the affix kasun' kasun' comes after the verbs · sřip' (to creep) and trid' (to injure), in the sense of Infiuitives indicating name of action. Thus faut: I gr star faed: (Yaj. I. 28.); az: Gr 57722 iaai (Rig. VIII. 1. 12). These words are Indeclinable by 1, 1. 40, S. 450. 6 CHAPTER IV. 3889 1 TTECETSTHÌ 1 819.1.391 त्रिशब्दान्डीपस्यात् अस्विपये छन्दसि रात्री व्यख्यदायता । लोके तु জহিলা তিনি डीयन्तोदात्तः। 3445. The affix 'Níp' comes after the word "ratri' in the Chhandas, and in denoting a Name, except when the affix jas' (nominative plural ) is added. Thus titolatafa, ot it get, f#: ( 3rd pl. ); (Rigveda X, 127. 1. I. 35. 1.) but in the nominative plural we have 1790:, the regular plural of the wordt =, as in the sentence UTENT 7790., instead of 1790: 1 In the class cal literature, the feminine is formeil by ste ( IV. 1. 45 ) with acute on the final. Note: - According to Katyayana, up is not added, not only when we apply the nominative plural termination sp; but in all other terminations beginning with 17 nilso. Thus Ti sifarat; here in the accusative singular case also the ata is not enployed. But bow do you explain the form iga: in the following fafATOZATayfuzatsa tu ? This 'zâtrya' is the nominative plural of Tâtri' shich is formed by the feminine affix nip ; and not by üisb. The fornus evolved by adding & tū or stų are one and the same, except with regard to accent that fomed by Nish bas udatta accent on the final: the otber has it on the initial. The word ufs is formed ly the knit affix for (Un. IV. 67), and therefore, it is a word which is governed by IV. 1. 45 because it is a word falling in Bahuvadi c ass, by virtue of the general subrule “ wo d ending with the vowel g of a krit aftix, other than fen belongs to Buhuvâdi class ; some say tiat every word ending in s, if it has not tlie force of the affix fra belongs to this class". Therefore it takes sta in furming the femure, ३४४६ । नित्यं छन् । ४ । १ । ४६ । F-... Faai की नित्वा'। नित्यमहयामुत्तरायम् ।

·** मुद्दलाच्छन्दसि लिच्च लिस्वरः। 'रथीग्भून्मुद नानी' । डीपो लित्वानुनचागमः । 29 Tum SIDDIANTA KAUMUDI (VOL. III. CH. IV. § 3449. 3446. The affix Nîsh' is always employed in the Vaidic literature, in forming the feminine of the word ' bhu' and the Test. Thus agit frasi ufgaan Here azt is the name of a herb. Tlie word faru salways' is used in the aphorism, mire fur the sake of the sub-equent sûrra, who it giverns than for this súrra. For the word *optionally' does not guvern this, and the aphorisin even without the word initya' would have been a necessary rule and not opitioual: for TREATaa नित्याविधिः सिद्धः, योग रश्चिन्त्य योजनः ॥ 3889 1 91819 189 1 की यात् छन्दसि । विभ्वी । प्रभवी । धिप्रसंभ्य इति डुप्रत्ययान्तं सूत्रेऽनुक्रियते । उत इत्यनुत्तेः । उवादेश ATT: 1 . ster P . - 3447. The aflix nis is always em loyed in the Chbandas in forming the feminine, after the word biu.' Thus farat, (Rig. Vedi V, 38, 1), wat (Re Vel. I. 188. 5). But why it, so in the case of facian: ? Because it erls in long 55, while farat &c. are feminine of fans, &c. eming in short 3 ils these two words are frormed by the iftix 3 (3) of III. 2. 180. In fact the word 37: after it word ending in short 3 of sútra IV. 1, 44 governs this also). The word ua: is the ablative case of Vinegularly formed by the substitution of this form being confined to sâtras only. Vart:- In the Ci bandas, the affix te with the augment water is added to the word 977; and the affic is treated as if it hal an indicatory all The force of the in dicatury is to mike the vowel preceding the affix, take the acute accent (VI 1. 193 faia). Thus rutrum gaat mfaet u (Rig Veda X. 120. 2.) 3845 i aláfangi a81914€ i संये गोपधत्वादप्राप्नो डीबिधीयते । 'प्रासुरी वै दोघंजिही देवानां यजवाद। 3448. The form दीर्घजीवी long tongued' is irregularly formed in the Chhandas, The word alasitzat is the feminine of aenig, but as the latter bas a conjunct consonant for its penultimate, the feminine affix zu would not hive appliel to it by IV. l. 56. The present aphorism enjoins cten Thug atásitzt in the sentence wigita atásitgt garai unaic ! NOTE ;---The word o, an in the aphorism is used in order to draw in the word PST from the last, so that the word clîrghe-jihui is always it Name, Moreover by using the feminine fornı dîrgha-jihvî in tie sâtra, it is indicated that the application of sin is necessary and uot optional, as was the case in the precedivy A htadhyâyi stras. ३४४९ । कद्रुकमण्डल्बो श्छन्दनि । ४ । १ । ७१ । 517 • ema â FATET '* गुग्गुलुमधुजतुप्रतयालनार्माित वक्तव्यम् +' । गुग्गुलः । मधूः । जतः । पतयालः *HZULTAT (93-) i ·30 SIDDHAXTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. III. CH. IV. $ 3449. * अाविष्टपस्योपसंख्यानं छन्दसि २' । 'प्राविष्ट्यी वर्धते'। 3449. The feininine affix 'ûn' comes in the Vedas after the words kadru' (tawny), and 'kamandalu' ( a water pot). Thus कश्च वै सुपर्णी च॥ मास्मकमण्डलं शृद्राय दयात् ॥ Why do we say in the Velas." Witness: and FRE: 1 Vårt :--So also after the words yug, Y, and ATIT: # Thus Toret, मधूः, अत:, and पतयान । Vårt: The my is adiled to the word ufae in the Vedas. Ås, vifa- ष्ट्यो वद्धते॥ ३४५" । छन्दसि ठज।४।३। १६ । atraz: i hrsgata: i Fa: aifan 3 450. In the Chhandas, the word varsha' takes the affix thañ' in the remaining senses. This debars 37 The form will have difference in accent. 27ta arfüm12! The word here means month," lo e. Nabha and Nabhasya are two rainy nionths. $ হামি । মামুলিম। 3451. In In the Chhandas, the affix ' thañ ' comes in the remaining senses after the word vasanta.' This debars sau (IV. 3. 16. S. 1387.) Thus yne Atuaz araipelag i 3898DFATET I 181896 Etie Zi Gui gian1 SFTTH: 1 Trailer bath'(puta) fun | STUTTUGTE: 1 T Tavian jai**: 1 tagaitz: ''fa'fare! Sraator fiat 1 3452. In the Chhandas, the affix thañ comes in the remaining senses, after the word "hemanta. This debars Fum (IV. 3. 16). Thus 617 pia ana u The making of two separate Sîtras of 20 and 21, is for the sulisequeut sútra, in which, the anuvštti of the word only is taken. must refer again to IV. 3,106. S. 1486. 339 011 Etfal 121 9051 3452. A. The ainx nini? comes in the sense of enounced by him, after the words - saunak' &c., in denoting the Chbandas enounced by them. This debars and set (1 Thus eran: " who stuly (IV. 2. 64) the Chhandas enounce s by Samanka. Simila:ly assie 2: Why lo we say “ in denoting chhundas ? O serve imalat fet " tho Oribography of suunak." The affix here is $ (IV. 2. 114. 3. 1337). ३४५३ । द्ववचरचार । ४ । ३ । १५० । Taart मयट् स्यात् । शरमयं बहिः CET QUATT JE: Here we ·Vok, IIT. CH. IV § 3156.] VAIDIC DIVERSITY. 31 $ 6 3453. In the Chhandas, after a dissyllabic word, the affix mayat comes in the sense of its product or part.' 'This orilams up in the sacred literature in the sense dealt with in IV. 3. 113, S, 1523. Thuis vura:, *99: TAT: in the following up turná Jaafa, Chat wafa, 71207 ait ara i 2898.1 FT TUR78131999 : szigartzia fumaniai ar neu famēr arut 5:1 Stat gu: , 4101 a' (949) 3454. The afix · mayat' does not come in the Chhandas after a dissyllabic word, having a short vowel 'u in it nor after the words - vardhra' and bilwa.' This À 4 far from y5** by an anii 19ufuan nafa; ara sa agrega su: The woril znan means having or short 02 (I. 1. 70). The word 35is idy-udatta ly quyi (Plit II. 4): and therefore it takes the universal stur (IV. 3. 134). The word as meaning skin is adyndatta by Phit II. 19, and therefore takes w, the feminine being formed by gto (IV. 1. 15), as auf " rope made of leither." : means the j úpa in which sacrificial victims are tied. By the sûtra FTUT T: (IV. 4. 105. S. 1657) the affix 2 is added to UT in renoting excellence. But in the Chladas, the affix is added under similar conditions : as tanght below. 3899 275 eta 1819 1908 FHUT yat 3455. The affix 'dh' comes in the Chhandas after the word sabha,' in the sense of excellent with regard thereto. This debars g of the precerling søtra IV, 4. 105. S. 1657. ''{z 12s ਧ: 112 सभेयास्य युवा यजमानस्य वीरो जायताम् let a refined, youthful hero be born to this sacriticer.' ३४५६ । भवे छन्दसि । ४।४।११० । लसम्यन्तावार्थ यत् । सेवाय च विद्युत्याय च्च i mavi STATUTAUTatai To- वादोऽयं यत् । पक्ष तेपि भवन्ति । सर्वविधीनां छन्दसि वैकल्पिकत्वात् । ताथा मुजवाचाम पर्वतस्तत्र भवा माज्जवतः । सोमस्येव मजवतस्य भक्षः ' ॥ श्राचतुर्थसमाप्तेश्छन्दोऽधिकारः। 3456. The affix' yat' comes in the Chhandas, after a word in the locative case in construction, in the sense of what stays there." This debars HU &c. (IV. 3. 53). Those affixes also are employed in the alternative, there beiny much latitude of grammatic] rules in the Vedas. Thus the Fords #ta: anil fagad in the following bymn of the Yajur Veda (16. 38) : नमो मेध्याय च विदुत्याय च ॥ All the sutras henceforwaril up to the end of the fourth chapter, are Vaidio søtras, the word of being understood in them all. The word Hâ governs all the sûtras up to IV. 4. 118, S. 3464. 6 2 6 6 > ·32 VAIDIC FORMS. [VoL. III. CH IV. 83456. - firnia- । In th: alt. rnatives the affixes T &c., will also be employed. Thus there is a murutain calleil 958171a Moñjavat; from it we get the Derivative word मज्जवतः in the sense of तत्र भवः, as in the sentence सोमस्येव माजवतस्य भक्षः " The eater of Soma plant produced on Muñjavat Mountains." ३५५७ । पाथोनदीभ्यांडाण । ४ । ४ । १११ । 'तमु त्वा पाय वषा' । बनो दधीत नाट्यो गिरो मे'। पासि भवः पाथ्यः । नयां भवा नाटा: । 3 457. The affix 'dvaņ' comes in the Chhandas, in the sense of what stays there,' after the words pâthas' and ' nadî,' wherby the last vowel, with the consonant following, is elided. This debars gal Thus arufa Ha: याथ्यः 'watery, celestial, ' so also नाटाः “ of th: river, Auvial." Ay in the following hying ' तमु बापाथ्यो वृषा,' (Rig Ved. VI. 16. 15) 'च नो दधीत नाट्या गिरो मे' (Rig Ved II. 35. 1). पाथः means ment, and water. ३४५८ । वेशन्तहिमवदभ्यामण।४।४ । ११२ । भवे । 'वैशन्तीभ्यः स्वाहा' । हेमवतीभ्यः स्वाहा'। 3458. The aflix an' comes in the Chhandas in the sense of what stays there' after the words — vesanta' and 'himavat.' This dehars यन ॥ Thus वैशन्तीभ्यः स्वाहा. हेमवतीभ्यः स्वाहा ॥ ३४५६ । स्रोतसो धिभाषा झड्गा । ४ । ४ । ११३ । जक्षे यन् । झड्अयोस्तु स्वरे भेदः । सोमि भनः स्रात्यः - स्रोतन्यः । 3459. The affixes 'dyat' and 'dya' come optionally in the Chhandis in the sense of what stays there, after the word, '" srotas' and before these affixes the final syllable ' as' of srotas is elided. This dehars ga which comes in the alternative, As सोसि भवः = नात्यः or मोत्य (Rig Ved. X. 104, 8) the difference theing in the accent (III. 1.3unlVI. 1. 185). The anulhan tha s cituses the elision of अस् of स्रोतस् ॥ When यत् is added the form is सातस्यः ॥ ३४३० । सगर्भष्यथएनुतादान् । ४ । ४ । १४ । अनुभाता सगयः । अनुमखा सयूथ्यः । 'यो नः सनु य उत वा जिधनुः । नुतिर्नुतम् । 'नपुंसके भायेक्तः' (२०१०) । सगर्भादयस्त्रयोऽपि कर्मधारयाः । 'समानस्य छन्दसि-' (१०१२) इति सः। तता भवार्थ यन् । यतोऽपवादः। 3460. The affix 'yan' comes in the sense of what stays there, after the words — sayarbha,' — say tutha' and 'sanuta.' This debars यत् the difference being in accent (VI. 1. 197). Thus अनामतः समयः 'a younger brother'. अनुमखास थ्यः 'a younger friend'. युता भवन्ति अस्मिन So also यो नःसनुन्यः उत वा निधन्तु thief lit. 'who stays in a concealed place', sanuta meaning ' concealed ' (see Rig Veda II. 31. 9). From the root 7 with the Passive a we get नुतम् ॥ The word समान is always changed into स in the chhandas , ·VOL. III. CH. IV. § 3466.] THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. 33 (VI. 3. 84). All three are karmadhâraya compounds, us FATISTÊI au = HTH: nyha:=1t: ३४६१ । तुयाइन् । ४।४। ११५ । भवेऽर्थे । पक्षे यदपि । ' श्राव: शमं वषमं तुम्यासु' इति वचाः । 'तुधियानु' इति शाखा I gavisupaftog guta:' xfa afa: 1 3461. The affix 'ghan' comes in the Chhandas in the sense of 'what stays there,' after the word tugra.. This debars um, which comes in the alternative. Thus gfaa: as स्वमग्ने वृष- भस् तुपियाखां Which assumes the form quu tugrya also. As a: T## quz TOTE (Rig Veda I. 33. 15) Tugrya meaning guok in the waters'. Another reading is gfuorg The word ga means “fuod, firmament, sacrifice and varishta'. ३४६२ । अयादात। ४।४।११६ । 3462. The affix 'yat' comes in the Chhandas in the sense of "what stays there', after the word “agra. Thus ਬਧੇ ਮਥ = ਧੂਝ ॥ Why this separate rule, for up would have come after au by the general rule IV. 4. 110? The repetition is to show that ux is not debarred by y aud of the next su tra, which would have been the case, bad this sûtra not existed. 38E3 I GEET 1818 1999 GIAOMI w warsyu: -faa: - uuitat: 3463. The affixes 'ghach' and 'chha' come in the Chhandas in the sense of 'what stays there', after the word 'agra.' Thus drug by (wa), auira (hy) and «faux (by va). And foux (by TO) from IV. 4. 115. See R. V. 1. 13. 10 TURRETHUET ३४६४ समुद्रामाद् घः । ४ । ४ । ११८ । ogfcat rêt walfaux' 1 FrazãT STATUS E10:' 3464. The affix 'gha' comes in the Chhandas in the senses of 'what stays there,' after the words ‘samudra' and 'abhra.' This debars यत् ॥ Thus समुद्रियः and अभियः, as in समुट्रिया अप्सरसो मनीषिणम and TACÂT fra OTOT: " The word “abbra', being a word of fewer syllables than “samudra', ought to have come first. Its coming as a second member is an irregularity, and shows that the rule of pûrva-nipâta is not of universal application. BEY i afffa W I81819901 प्राग्यिताट्यदित्येव । 'बहिष्येषु निधिषु प्रियेषु' । 3465. The affix ‘yat comes in the Chhandas in the sense of 'given,' after the word 'barhis' in the 7th case in construction. The anuvſitti of ag ha: ceases. Thus afcg fafug fweg u R. V, 10. 15, 5. ३३६६ । दूतस्य भागकर्मणी । ४ । ४ । १२० । भागशः। दूत्यम् । 5 ho DAS 2 ·THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL III. CH. IV. § 3466. 3466. The affix ‘yat' comes in the Chhandas after the word då ta’ in the genitive case in construction, in the sense of 'its share' or 'its duty.' Thus दूत्यम *the share of a messenger or the work of a messenger. As Ê VÀ TRE According to VI. 1. 213, the accent will be mp but the accented Text reads gada 38&9 i Taitarai Emmit 8181 979 'या तेऽग्ने रक्षम्या तनूः'। 3467. The affix "yat' comes in the Chhandas in the sense of 'killer, after the words 'raksha' and yâtu' in the sixth case in construction. That by which anything is killed is called हननी ॥ This रक्षस्य and यातव्यं meaning that which kills the demous called Rakshas and Yacus. As un ūsas Taat a: i. e, Taxi Etait u 'O Agui thy bodies are kill-rs of Rakshas.' So diateat: 973 | The word is in the plural as a mark of respect, 3895 i Tatagate faraztuz: FIR 1818 1999 I प्रशंसने यत्स्यात् । रेवत्यादीनां प्रशंसनं रेवत्यम् । जगत्यम् । हविष्यम् । 3468. The affix ‘yat' comes in the Chhandas, in the sense of 'praising', after the words ‘revali,' 'jagatíand havishya' in the sixth case in construction. The word Tra means riiaa 'praising, extolling,' formed by adding the Krit affix wu to the root, with the force of #ta or condition.' This Tapi, Firen and sfanta 'praising of Revati, Jayatî or Havishyn.' The word face is thus formed afad fen- faut: things fit for offering 'i. e. butter be. (nfert +7 V. I. 4) gtaueną vik = gfax (xiao t up IV. 4. 122=#ff0+ un the final y being elided by VI. 4. 148 = afav + the a being elided by VIII. 4. 6+) ३४६६ । असुरस्य स्वम् । ४ । ४ । १२३ । असुर्य देवेभिर्धायि विश्वम्'। 3469. The affis ‘yat' comes in the Chhandas in the sense of property,' after the word “asura' in the 6th case in construction, This debars wat Thus ega belonging to the Asuras.' एतत् पात्रं यच्चकटतं कुलालकतम् ' this Vessel made on a wheel by a potter belongs to the Asuras.' pa gafavifu fasag 11 See Maitr S. I. 8. 3. In a TEFL: (Ishop. 3). 3890 I ATTUTTO 1818 1928 पासुरी माया। 3470. The affix 'an comes in the Chhandas in the sense of glamour,' after the word “asura' in the 6th case in construction. 6 As mga ar So also अमुर्गा ·VOL. III. CH. IV. & 3472.] VAIDIC INFINITI VE. 85 6 a mean- This debars va u rata ALAT=uFT: feminine migeta u As ige ATAT स्वधवा कतामि॥ ३४७१ । सद्वानालामुपधानो मन्त्र इसीष्टकासु लुच मताः । ४ । ४ । १२५ । GÜRITUUAT #21 utgifremtai adet: 1 #T: 1 3471. The affix 'yat' conies in the Chhandas, after a nominal stem, in the 1st case in construction, ending with the affix matup,' when the sense is “this is their mantra of putting up," provided that, the things put up are bricks : And the affix matup is elided by luk. This sûrra requires analysis. ag! is formed by adding मतुप to ing · having that,' and refere to a noun formed by the affix मतु। The word STATE is genitive plural fem. of a meaning of them '; the pronoun refers to the word CFT The word your means ' putting up,' ani technically means cusad #s a Mantra in the putting up of sacrificial bricks, pots &c' #7“sacred hymn" इष्ट का bricks." The whole sútra means “the affix yat' is used with the force of a genitive já sâm), after a word which ends with matup (tadyan), and denotes a mantra used in patting up of sacrificial objects; when auch mantra refers to bricks: ant when this affi, yat is added, the affix matip is eliden.' Thug ang is a Mantra containing the word aag i The bricks put up or collected (avuta) with the recitation of Jaan Mantra, will be called वर्चस्या (धरस्वत् + यत् = वर्चस + यत् the affix वत् (मतुप) being elide.l=वर्चस्य, fem. aéri)Thus aárt suzutfa' he collects Varchasyı brieks i, e. on which Varchus vân mantra has been pronounced' So तेजस्या उपदधाति ॥ So पयस्याः, Tagit: 1 NOTE : -Why do we say azia ? The affix is not to be added to the whole Mantra, Why do we say, 300T7' putting up'? The affix is not to be added to other Mantras such as those used in praying etc. e. g. adarganta #77 ATACATTI, here there will be no nttis. Why do we say Mantra ? Osserve STRAIGTUTI ZA TIAP 'these bricks are collected with hand having fingers,' here there will be no affix. Why do we shy इष्टकासु ? Observe वर्चवानुग्धाना H7 pat mata, here there will be no affix, the thing cullected being potsherds and not bricks. 3897 1 UTARATI 818197 gifsaataa ufa' 3472. The affix 'an' comes in the Chhandas, after the words aśvimân, to denote bricks put up with the Mantra containing the word Aśrin, and the affix matup is elided. Thus CÍSARFyrat #79 TIHTIHE FIAB -- ufaga: fem. afvant: 11 The word is thus formed. #f52414 + T=afaa + zu ihe natup being elided IV. 4. 125=4 fraq + " VI. 4 104 - 91f387 ii lhus vísa A Fazura «he colects Asriu bricks i. e. bricks at the time of collecting which Mantras containing pingat were uttered, See Yajur Veda Tait S. 5. 3. 1. 1. SHARE Stres | ·7 32 यत् ॥ second matup, and there is elision of the first matup when the 36 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [Vol. IV. CH. IV. 3473. ३४७३ । वयस्यासु मा मतुप । ४ । ४ । १२७ । तद्वानासमिति मूत्रं सर्वमनुवर्तते । मतोरिति पदमावर्त्य पञ्चम्यन्तं बोध्यम् । मतुबन्तो यो TERETANA AGURITAT I HUAR FRiga i auramowafepaig i afÆR va: zët ft: Ma'sotuig va TeuaufA ' xfa : 3473. The affix 'matup' is added in the Chhandas, to the word murdlanvat,' in expressing bricks collected with the Mantra containing the word 'vayas.' The whole of the sûtra 3471 is undorstood here. The word FÀT: sbonld be repeated, and is to be construed in the Ablative case, The sûtra reans “ After the word niørdhaending in matup, i. e. after the word niurdhavat, there is added a bricks are collected with vayas mantra.' The word TRT nieans the bricks, the Upadhâna mantras of which contain the word aur # The affix मतुप debars mantra which contains both the word guy and qua, that Mantra is loth aug17 and ina u Now in denoting sacrificial bricks put up with such a mantra, the affix un would have come by IV. 4. 125 after both these words atral aud 3*=17 The present søtra ordaing ago, after year u Thus gelaatsuzafa he collects Mardbanyati bricks.' The words gori: and Femara: denote the same object. See VI. 1. 176. ३४७४ । मत्वर्थे भासतम्वोः । ४।४ । १२८ । नभोमम् । तस्मिजस्तीति ममत्यो मासः । श्रीजस्या तनूः । 3474. The affix' yat' comes in the Chhandas with the force of matup, after a word in the first case in construction, the word so formed meaning a month or a body. This delars the affix ago and those having the sense of मतुण 1 Thus quife facra a Ate= 7*: the month of clouds' i. e. June-July, Similarly what mat: 'the bodies full of vigor.' 3894 I AUT 1818195€ चायत । माधव:-मधनः । 3475. The affix 'ña' as well as ‘yat' comes with the force of matup, in the Chhandas, after the word 'madhu.' Thus Hiya: or #92: ayce i istersefa dar 1 81 81930 1 PIETRAC: i pari 3476. The affixes ‘yat' and 'kh' come with the force of matup, after the word "ojas,' when a day is meant. Thus grupių or mua =*E: the day' lit. full of heat. 3899 | शायशादेगााखो।४।४ । १३१ । aut ad aga 27: I a ITHT: I ONTHIU: I aviarita: 1 atata: i ·ESTE VOL. IIT. CH. IV. & 3480.1 VAIDIC ININITIVE. 37 6 V 3477. The affixes 'yal' and 'kh' come in the Chhandas, with the force of matup, after the word bhaga, having the words veśas' or 'yasas' in the beginning. The rule of yAtha sankhya does not apply here. The 7 of ch shows that the accent falls on the powel preceding the affix (VI. 1. 1931. Thus STIHOT faza qe = a1210: = 01110: strong.fortune's also Jonuia: « famous-fortune.' The word au means “strength' : H0 means fortulle, desire, effort, greatness, virility and farne.' The word TTH: may be taken as a Dvaniva compound of aux force' and 79: * fortune.' The word uThru: would then mean possessed of power aud fortune.' With , anota:, uit NOTE : --Kasikâ does not real w into this sûtra. That is more reasonable. 3895 i 18181923 1 OTHIT 3 TE I fatto ung 1 3478. The affix kh’ also comes after the words veśubhaga' and 'yaśubhaga,' in the Chhandas, with the force of matup. Thus atua: and Twita: 8 Note according to the Kásiká : - This sûtra has been separated from the last in order to prevent the application of the auto rule (I. 3. 10). For had the sâtra heen adot Wahnię uşar, as it occurs in the Siddhanta Kaumudi, then the affix u would apply to an, andthe affix u to a THT: which is not what is intended. Another reason for making it a distinct aphorism is that the anuvšitti of u ruus in the next sâtra, not so of up i ३४७९ । पः कृतमिनयो च । ४ । ४ । १३३ । sautif#: afufu: graaf#:'1' ì à =ut: afan: yota:'ı 3479. The affixes 'in' and 'ya' as well as 'kh 'come in the sense of' made by them,' after the word 'pūrva ' (forefathers), in the Instrumental case in construction. The wis read into the gâtra by force of the word a; the anuvșitti of war Thus gä: ami=gfalu: 'made by the ancestors ' i. e, a road. So also gå: and gafa: * The word gä: in the plural meang gagga: “past gener. ations, ancestora." These words occur generally in the plural, and mean" roa le widened by the forefathers," Thus गम्भीरेभिः पथिभिः पूर्विणेभिः ॥ So also, ये ते urur: afaar: yafa: (Rig I. 35. 11). Another reading of this sútra is vā: safafaüta: the affixes then will be pf* (3-1), Anil a ; and a will be drawn in hy virtue of all The examples then will be gfáz; 3rd pl. gfáfa: (with <1), as afafu: gfafa: ; or gata: (a), or you: (a) u ३४८० । अभिः संस्ष्टातम्। ४ । ४ । १३४ । यस्येदमयं हविः । 3480. The affix yat' comes in the Chhandas, in the sense of 6 ceases. SAN be ·38 THE STD DHAN TA KAUMUDI. [VoL. III. CH. IV. F 3480. Thus DT . . । . -- offering purified with water.' As यस्येटमध्यं हविः (Rig Ved. x 86. 12). The case of construction is indicated in the sutra itself. ३४८१ । स :लेण संमिता घः । ४।४ । १३५ । 'सहस्रियासोपां नर्म यः' । सहस्रेण तुल्या इत्यर्थः । 3481. The affix 'gba' comes in the Chhandas, in the sense of like,' after the word 'sahasra,' in the third case in construction. The case of construction is indicated by the sûtra. Thus सहस्रण समितः rufaa: like unto thousand.' As in the following vers:: : -महस्रियासोपा नाम- यः (Rig Ved. I 168. 2). The word संमित means तुल्य ' equal to.' Some read the word afar instead of afma, but the meaning will be the same, ३४८३ । मतो च । ४।४।१३६ सहस्र शब्दान्मत्वर्थ घः स्यात् । सहसमस्यास्तीति सहनियः । 3481, The affix 'gha' comes in the Chhandas, with the force of matup, after the word 'sahasra.' As सहसयस्य बिटाते = सहमियः ॥ This debars the मत्वर्थ affixes विनि and इनि and nu of V. 2. 102 and 103. ३४८३ । साममहति यः। ४।४।१३७ । सोम्यो ब्राह्मणः। यताह इत्यर्थः । 3483. The affix 'ya' comes in the Chhandas, after the word Soma,' in the second case in construction, when the sense is that of who deserves that.' Thus सोममह त = सोम्यो ब्राह्मणः " The Brahmana who deserves Soma i. honorable and learned, and worthy of performing sacrifices. The difference bet. ween ua and g is in accent. ३४८४ । मये च । ४ । ४ । १३८ । सोमशब्दाटयः स्यान्मयडर्थे । सोम्यं मधु । सोमममित्यर्थ । 3484. The affix ‘ya' comes in the Chhandas, after the word Soma, with the force of the affix mayat. The force of the affix मपट् is that of ततः पागतः (IV. 3, 74 an1 82). faritraua (IV. 3. 134 and 143) and una (V. 4. 21). The cise in construction will vary according to the sense. Thus सोम्यं मधुः पिबन्ति सोममयः मधुः ॥ ३४८५ । मधाः । ४।४ । १३८ । मधुशब्दान्म घडथै यत्स्यात् । मधव्यः । मधुमय इत्यर्थः । 3485. The affix 'yat' comes in the Chhandas, after the word madhu,' with the force of the affix mayat. Thus मधव्यान स्तोकान - मधुमयान् ॥ ३४८६ । बसोः समहे च । ४ । ४ । १४० । चान्मयडर्थे यत् । वमव्यः । * अक्षरसमूहे छन्दस उपसंख्यानम् +'। छन्दः शब्दादक्षरसमूहे वर्तमानात्स्वार्थ यदित्यर्थः। श्रोपावय' इति चतुरक्षरम्, 'अस्तु श्रीषट्' इति चतुरक्षरम्, 'येयजामहे इति पञ्चावरम्, 'यज' इति द्वक्षरं द्वयारो बषट्कार एप वै सप्तदशाक्षरछन्दस्यः । 1.e.

·VOL. III. CH. IV. $ 3490. VAIDIC DIVERSITY. 39 # Sense, 3486. The affix' yat' comes in the Chibandas after the word vasu,' when a collection is meant, as well as with the force of mayat. Th118 ann: - FAT: 'a collection.' Vårt : _The aflix yat' comes without changing the senge, after the word Do when reference is maade to the collection of letter, Thus the word : in the following sentence : FacuaTIDER: unfaat fafcat," 17 letters here referred to being sau, four ; mar staç, four ; UF, two; a USTR? five, and ut two. The aflix on comes after ag witho it changing te As शस्ता गृहीतस्य बहुभिर्बसव्यैः ॥ Here वसव्यः is equal to वसुभिः । Similarly waits वसव्यस्य-वसोः ॥ 3869 1 Paris: 1818 1989 1 स्वार्थ । 'नत्रियेभ्यः स्वाहा । 3447. The affix ‘gha? comes in the Chhandas after the word ‘nakshatra,' without altering the meaning. The anuvritti of Ege does not extend to this sútra, Thus नक्षत्रियेभ्यः FATET = 9974: FITOT IN 3845 I HÄTTET I 81 81 982 1 Erik afaat a: pag gaatfaħ' i fuzfafurzaarfagriu:, I 3488. The affix tâtil' comes in the Chhandas after the words. sarva' and 'deva,' without altering the meaning. As Fataifa: and daarfa: in the following hynins: "gfaar a: Fag naar fax (Rig Ved. X. 3. 14), and uziatua anifahru: (R. Ved IV. 6. 3). 88faqafeRI TI 8181 483 I करोतीति करः । पचाट्यच । शिवं करोतीति शिवतातिः । 'याभिः शन्ताती भवयो ददाशुषे'। अथी अरिष्टतातये। 3489. The affix tâtil' comes, in the Chhandas, after the word 'siva," sam,' and 'arishta' in the sixth case in construction when the sense is he does,' The word at: is equivalent to tifa formed by a (III. 1. 134) This shows that the construction must be genitive. With a krit-formed word, it has accusative force, as, ftari air: = fua antifa al Thus ftarur : = fiyaarfa: u So starfa: and afteafa: 1 As atia: quint भवयो दढाशुषे (Rig. I. 112. 20) शंताती being dual of शन्तातिः, and meaning सुखस्य htt; so also ut arcata I (Rig Ved. X. 60. 8.) ३४८० | भाव च।४।४ । १४४ । fuatia i nià atia: refpifraga Hja: fjaatfa: 1 Data: 1 steaifa: 1 इति चतुर्थोऽध्यायः। 3490. The affix tatil' comes in the Chhandas, after the words • siva,'sam' and 'arishta,' being in the 6th case in construction, the sense being that of condition, .

·40 SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. CR. V. 3490. Thus far uta: - fraaifa: 'the coudition of blissfulness.' Taufa: the state of happiness or peace,' sufrenifa: # Here these words have the force of Verbal nouns. 1 CHAPTER V. ३४९१ । सप्तनोज छन्दसि । ५ । १।११॥ aza ufiamma' (q99a) xfa ' sfar as I ang PENA' | a manfaat: tage RHIEF SECTEntri OftaTUART alca: *' I gofguaTSUHIET: 1 fift ATAT: 1 ** fa samara altup * , fafvalsigta: 1 * yonamat: Ergü acea1az: * 1 PATHA: GETART Imarai yaa:', a FAURI ATAN:'1 3491. The affix añ comes after the word saptan, in the Chhandas, in the sense of “this is its measure, when the meaning is that of a Varga, As सप्त सामान्य समन् ॥ “They create the seven seven-fold monarchies.' The phrase nan uitAlu (V. 1. 57 S. 1723) and oi (V. 1. 60 S, 1726) are understoot here. Thus Flat + 5455 = FIT + (the fz portion is elided by VI. 4. 144 S. 679) = AT 1 Its Plural in srx is utatta by the ordinary rules of declension of Neuter nouns. Vårt: --The affix fafa comes in the Chhandas, after the words ending in a and 77, as d'afaa Hig: “Half-months have a measure of 15 days'. fifunt #TAT: Mouths are of thirty days”. Vårt :- So also after the word faufa, as faftätsfera: “Angiracas consist of or comprise "twenty Gotras." Vårt:--The affix agh comes after युष्मद and in denoting similarity. As '17: yegāti aratai **: (Rig Veda VI. 21. 10). ufaure ATEN: (Rig Veda I. 142. 2). ३४९२ । छन्दसि च । ५। १ । ६७ । प्रातिदक्रमात्रात् 'तदहति' इत्यर्थे यतस्याच्छन्दमा 'मादन्यं विदथ्यम् । 3492. The affix yat (T) comes in the sense of deserving that' in the Chhandas, after every prátipadika. This debars 29 &c. Thus उदक्या वृत्तयः, W: watu:, ini ĉu: u See VI. I. 213. H12-fazzę (Rig. Vzda. I. 91. 20). The word alza is deriveil from an "house." He who deserves a house is a HT22:11 The lengthening takes place by Vl. 3. 137 S. 3539. fuzu means 'sacri. fices' that which deserves a sacrifice is fuavą il 3843 1 atat fa 41 9149 fæą alfaraug irgota: 1 3493. The affix chba (iya) comes in the Chhandas, in the fivefold senses taught in V. 1. 79, 80, after a stem ending with vatsara. 6 ·Vor. III. CH. V. 83498.] TEE VAIDIC RULES. 41 - This debars ठज॥ Thus इद्वत्सरीयः, इदावत्सरीयः॥ ३४९४ । संपरिपर्वात ख च । ५। १ । १२ । चाच्छः । संवत्सरीणः । संवत्सरीयः । परिवत्सरीणः। परिवत्सरीयः। 3494. The affixes ‘kha' (in) and ‘chha' (iya) come in the Chhandas in the fivefold senses taught in V. 1. 79,80, after the word vatsara, when preceded by sam and pari. 'Thus संवत्सरीण: and संवत्सरीयः, परिवत्सरोणः and परिवत्सरीयः॥ ३४९५ । छन्दसि घस ।।१।१०६ । ऋतुशब्दात्तदस्य प्राप्तमित्यर्थे । 'भाग ऋत्वियः' । 3495. In the Chhandas, the affix'ghas' (iya) comes after the word 'ritu' in the same sense of 'season has come for it.' This debars अण. As भाग ऋत्वियः (Rig Ved. I. 135. 3). Here there is no Guna by VI. 4. 146, because by sutra I. 4 16, ऋतु before the affix घस् gets the desiguation of uz, hence the guņa rule which applies to ar (I. 4. 18; does not apply. ३४९६ । उपसर्गाच्छन्दसि धात्वर्थ । ५। १ । ११८ । धात्वार्थविशिष्टे साधने वर्तमानात् उपसर्गात् उत्तरे स्व.थै वतिः स्यात् । यदुद्वतेनिवतः । उद्गतानिर्गता नित्यर्थः । 3496. In the Chhandas, the affix vati' is added to an Upasarga (Preposition), in the sense of a verbal root. As the word उद्वतः and निवतः in the following Rik (X. 142. 4.) यदुद्वतो' निवली यासि बप्सत् एथंगेषि प्रगर्धिनीव सेना ॥ “ When thou o Fire ! goest burning high (उद्वतः = उद्गतान्) and low (निवतः = निर्गतान्) trees &c. ३४८७ । थट च च्छन्दसि । ५।३।५० । नान्तादसंख्यादेः परस्य डटस्थट् स्यान्मट् च । पञ्च थम्-पञ्चमम् । 3497. The 'that' is the augment of 'dat,' in the Chhandas, after a Numeral ending in 'n' and not preceded by another numeral: as well as the augment 'mat.' Thus पंचयः, सप्तथः or पञ्चमः, सप्तमः ॥ As पर्णमयानि पञ्चथानि भवन्ति and पञ्चममिन्द्रियमस्यापाक्रामन् ॥ See V. 2.56. ३४८७ क । छन्दसि परिपन्थपरिपरिणी पर्यवस्थातरि । ५। ३ । ८९ । पर्यवस्थाता शत्रुः' । 'अपत्यं परिपन्धिनम् ' । 'मा त्वा परिपरिणा विदन'। 3497 A In the Chhandas, the words paripanthin and pariparin are anomalously formed by the affix ini (in) and have the sense of "an antagonist." अपत्यं परिपन्धिनम् (Rig Ved. I. 42. 3). मात्वा परिपरिणा विदन (Yaj. Ved. IV. 34). See S. 1889. ३४९८ । बहुलं छन्दसि । ५। २ । १२२ । मत्वर्थे विनिः स्यात् । अग्निस्ते श्रीजस्वी' । छन्दोविन्प्रकरणे अष्टामेखलाद्वयोभयाजा. हृदयानां दीर्घश्चेति वक्तव्यम् +' । इति दीर्घः । मंहिष्ठमुभयाविनम्। शुनमाष्ट्राव्य चरत् * छन्दमीवनिया च वक्तव्या *'। ई। रथीरभूत् ' 'सुमङ्गीरियं वधूः' । 'मघवानमीमहे । । 6 श्री ·मतुप ॥ Ved. X. 85. 33. वानप-मघवानमीमहे: Rig Vel. X. 167.2. THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDE. [VoL. II. Ca. V. 1 3498. 3498. In the Chhandas, the affix vini is added diversely in the sense of matup. As asika u Sometimes it is not added, as por darnia i 4&rt:--In the Chhandas, the final of द्वय, उभय and हृदय is lengthened optionally before विनि ; and it comes after अष्ट्रा, मेखला and सजा also : as अष्ट्रावी, मेखलावी, यावी, उभयावी, सजावी, हृदयावी ॥ As मंहिष्ठमुभयाविनम् ; शुनमष्ट्रा व्यचरत् । The word fashtri" is a synonym of " danshtra and means ' tooth.' vårt :- In the Chhaulas, the aftixes , and afay come in the sense of Thus ई:-रथीरभून मुद्गलानी गविष्टी (रथी:) Rig Ved. x. 102. 2. सुमङ्गली- NOTE :--The affixes इरन् and हर come respectively after मेधा and Rध: as मेधिर, धरः ॥ ३४९ । त्योाहिलो च छन्दसि । ५।३ । २०॥ इदं तदोर्य थासंख्यं स्तः । इदा हि वे उपस्तुतिम्' । तर्हि । 3499. After these two (nominal stemns idam and tad), come respectively the affixes dà and rhil, in the Chhandas, and also the other affixes. The affix दा comes after इदम् and हि after तद ॥ Thus at (V. 3. 3. S. 1949), तह (VII. 2. 102. S. 265) So also इदानीम् and तदानीम् ॥ As दुदा छि वमुप'स्तुतिमिदा वामस्य भक्तेय 'Rig Veda VIII. 27. 11). NOTE :-इदम + दाइ + दा (इदम् is replaced by a by V. 3. 3. S. 1949). ३५०० । था हेतो च छन्दसि । ५। ३।२६ । किमस्था स्याता प्रकारे । कथा ग्रामं न पृच्छसि।केथा दाशेम'। 3500. The affix 'tha' comes in the sense of 'cause well as 'manner '), in the Chhandas, after the word kim. The word genit aga is read into the sutra by force of all wherefore ? why ? for what reason ?', कथा - how.' The former is an example of हेतु ' reason or caluse', the second of प्रकार - manner.' As in the following sentences : कथा ग्रामें न पृच्छसि Rig Ved. X. 146. 1. केन हेतुना ग्रामं न एच्छसि ॥ कथा टा शेम (Rig Ved. I. 77. 1). NOTE : ..किम् + था = क + था (किम् is replaced by a by VII. 2. 108. S. 342, because the affix ot is a vibhakti as defined in V. 3. 1, S. 1947). ३५०१ । पश्च पश्चा च च्छन्दसि । ५।३ । ३३ । प्रघरस्यास्तात्यर्थ निपाता । पश्च हि सः'। 'नो त पश्चा'। 3501. The words paśclia and paśchâ are anomalous in the Chhandas, having the foree of astati. By च, the word पश्चात् is also included. As पुरा व्याघ्रो जायते, पश्च, पश्चा or पश्चात् सिंहः ॥ As पश्चात् प रस्तादधरादुर्दक्तान (Rig Veda X. 87. 21) पुश्चेदमन्यदभव- गजत्रम् (Lig Veda X. 149. 3). नात पश्चा (Rig Ved. II. 27. 11). ३५०१ क । तुगछन्दसि । ५ । ३ । ५६ । तृजन्तान्तवन्ता इष्ठनीयसुना स्तः । श्रासुति करिष्ठः' । 'दोहीयसी धेनुः । , ३ also (as Thus कथा ·SR Por.TI.CE.V.13501.] VAIDAC RULES. in 3501A. The affixes ishtan and iyasun. come in the Chhandas after a Nominal stem ending in tri. S 2000: पासुतिं करिष्ठः (Rig Ved. VII. 97.7) Thus क + इष्ठ-कर + इष्ठ (Teliited by VI. 4. 154. S. 2008) दोहीयसी धेनुः ॥ Thus दोग्धी + ईयसुन =दोग्ध + ईघसुन (कोप, elided by VII. 1. 88. S. 368 = दोह+ईयसुन (a elided by VI. 4. 15t. S. 20081 ३५०२ । प्रत्नपूर्वविश्वनात थाल छर्दास । ५। ३ । १११ । स्वार्थे । 'तं प्रत्नथा पूर्वथा विश्वयेमथा। 3502. In the Chhandas, the affix thal comes in the sense of like this', after pratna, pūrva, viśva, and ima (idam). Thus :- प्रथा पूर्वथा विश्वथेमथा ज्येष्ठताति बहि पदं स्वर्बटम् ॥ (tig Veda v. 44. 1). Him (Iudra), as the ancients, as the prelevessur's, as all creaturus, and as these living men have worshipped &c.' ३५०३ । अमु च च्छन्दसि । ५। ४ । १२ । किसिध्ययवित्येव । प्रतं नम प्रतरम्'। 3503. In the Chhandas, the affix amu (am) also is added after kim' &c, under similar conditions as in V. 4. 11. S. 2004. To the word fan, words ending in 7, finite verbs and indeclinables, when taking the comparative affixes at and an is addel the affis qa in the Vedas, when these words are used as-adverbs. By the force of the word g also the sûtra, the affir sig is also included. Thus, Taat datą (Rig Vul X. 45. 9). प्रतरम् नामः ॥ or प्रतराम वस्यः । प्रतर means प्रशष्ट तर ॥ The words ending in want are indeclinables, as they are include in the class of Svaridi (E. 1. 37. S. 447), २५०४ । वृकज्येष्ठाभ्यां तिस्तातिला च छन्दसि ।। ४ । ४१ । स्वार्थे । यो नो दुरेवो वृतिः' । 'ज्येष्ठताति बर्दिबदम्'। 3504. In the Chhandas, the affix til and tatil come after vșik and jyeshţha when excellence is denoted. The word ystaatE is to be read into this sûntra. This also. duburs EUT 1.3. 66. S. 2021. Thus बकतिः or कतातिः, as, योनो मरुतो वक्रतातिमत्यः (Rig Veda. II. 34. 9) Similarly ज्येष्ठतातिः ॥ यो नो दुरेवो एकतिः (Rig Ved. IV. 41. 4): ज्येष्ठतातिं बहिर्षदम् (Rig Ved. V. 44. I). ३५०५ । अनसन्तानपुंसकाच्छन्दसि । ५।४ । ५०३ । सत्पुरुषात्स्यात्समासान्तः । 'ब्रह्मसामं भवति' । देवच्छन्दसानि'। 3505. In: the Chhandas, the. affix tach comes after a Tatpurusha compound in the Neuter Gender ending in an' or 'as. Thus हस्ति + चर्मन- हस्तिवसम् as in हस्ति चमें जुहोति, si also ऋषभच अभिजिवति । so also when a word ends in अस् as, देवच्छन्दसानि (देव + छन्टस् = देव । छन्दम + टच - देवच्छन्दसम्) so also मनुष्य च्छन्द सानि ॥ Why do we say" when en ling in or są" ? Olserve farazir gèria u Why do ixe say fk in the Neuter 'Ouserve सुत्रामायणं पृथिवी ठामनेहसम् । मा । * । । E ·Rajes THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [Vot. III. CH. V. S 3505. T - NOTE : -The word वा optionally" should be read into the sutra. Therefore is optionally added, as ब्रह्मसाम or ब्रह्मसामम्, देवच्छन्दः or देवच्छन्दसम् । ३५०६ । बहुप्रजाश्छन्दसि । ५। ४ । १२३ । 'बहुप्रजा नितिमाविवेश'। 3506. The form bahuprajas is valid in the Vedas. Thus alust faz fahifat i Rig Ved. I. 164. 32. In the classical literature, the form is बहुप्रजः; as बहुजा ब्राह्मणः ॥ ३५०७ । छन्दसि च । ५।४ । १४२ । दन्तस्य दत स्याद्वक्षुबी हो । 'उभयतोदतः प्रति ग्रहणाति । 3507. For danta is substituted dat in the Vedas, when final in a Bahuvrihi. Thus पत्रदन्तमालभेत, उभयदत पालभेत or उभयता दतः प्रतिगृह्णाति ॥ ३५०८ । स्तश्छन्दसि । ५।४। १५८ । दन्ताद्वहुवी हेर्न कप । हता माता यस्य इतमाता। इति पञ्चमोऽध्यायः । 3508. The affix ‘kap' does not come after a Bahuvrihi ending in short 'ſi' in the Vedas. Thus ता माताऽस्य = हतमाता, हतपिता, हतस्वसा, सुहोता। CHAPTER VI. ३५०९ । क । एकाचो द्वे प्रथमस्य । ६।१।१। छन्दसि वेति वक्तव्यम् । यो जागार' । दाति प्रियाणि'। 3509. A. In the room of the first portion, containing a single vowel, there are two. S. 2175. Vårt :-In the Chhandas there is optionally reduplication of the root in the Perfect and other tenses. As aifa fæutfu (Rig Ved. VI. 8. 3) or Taifa प्रियाणि ॥ मघवा दातु or ददातु, नस्तुतो वीरवद् धातु or दधातु ॥ Vårt :--The root st!T is optionally reduplicated in the Perfect As, at ETIMIT (or GIETITT) Rig Ved. X. 44. 14. ३५०९ । तुजादीनां दीर्घाऽभ्यासस्य । ६।१।। तुजादिरातिगणः । 'प्रभरा तूतुजानः' 'मूर्ये मामहानम् । दाधार यः पृथिवीम् ' 'स तूताव । 3509. In the room of a short vowel of the reduplicate of the roots 'tuj' &c, a long is substituted. There is no list of artfa verlis given any where. The word श्रादि in तुजादि therefore should be construed as “ verbs like tuj.” So that wherever we may fiud a word having a long vowel in the R-duplicate, we shonld consider it a valid form. Thus प्रभरा तूतुजानः तुज + कानच 11. 2. 106 = तूतुजानः Rg. I. 61. 13). सूर्य मामहान । दाधार यः पथिवीम Rig Ved. III. 32. 8. म हताव Rig Ved. I. 94. 2. This lengthening ouly takes place in the Vedas before sone special uffi res. । OS । NRN KAARAYANETASHATION ·Vor. III. CH. VI. $ 3512.] VAIDIC RULK. So also हामि . :- ३५५० । बहुलं छन्दसि । ६ । १।३४ । हः संप्रमारणं स्यात् । इन्द्रमा हुव ऊतये'। * ऋचि रुत्तरपदादिलोपश्च छन्दसि *' ऋछब्देपरे त्रः संप्रसारणमुत्तरपदादेलीपश्चेति वक्तव्यम् । तचं सूक्तम् । 'छन्दसि' क्रिम् । ज्यचानि । '* रयेमतोबहुलम् +' । रेवान् । विमान्युष्टिवर्धनः । 3510. In the Chhandas, the semivowel of the root hve is diversely vocalised. Thus हुवे or हयामि, as इन्द्रमाहुव ऊतये (Rig Vel. I. 111. 4) देवी सरस्वती The form हुवे is Atmanepada, Present tense, 1st Pers. sing. the vikarana शप is elided, then there is vocalisation and substitution of उबड् ॥ मस्त. शिवान । हुयामि विश्वान देवान् ॥ So also हवः as अधीहवम् (Rig. I. 2. 1.)- hear the invocation.' Vart : There is vocalisation of the semivowel off when followed by ऋच, and there is elision of the ऋ of ऋw when it refers to Metres. As तिम ऋच यस्मिन् - तृचं सूक्तं ॥ तृचं साम ॥ The word at takes the ban åstanta affix by V. 4. 74. Why do we say when referring to a metre ? Oihserve यूवानि ॥ Vart :-In the Chhandas there is diversely vocalisation of the semivowel of रयि followed by the affix मतुप. as रयि + मत् = रह + मत् = र + +मत्र+ इ + वत् (VIII. 2. 15) रेवत् ; As, श्रा रेवामेतु नो विशः ॥ Sometimes it does not take place, as रयिमान पुष्टिवर्धनः॥ The # here is not changed to a as required by VIII. 2. 15. ३५११। चायः की।६।१।३५ । चायतेर्यहुलं कीत्ययमादेशः स्याच्छन्दसि । 'न्य १ न्याञ्चिक्युर्न निधिक्युरन्यम्' । लिट्युसि रूपम् । बहुलग्रहणानुवत्तेन । 'अग्निं ज्योतिर्निचाय्य 3511. For chảy is diversely substituted ki in the Chbandas, Thus विधुना निचिक्युः, न्यन्यं धिक्युर्न निचिक्युरन्यम् ॥ These are forms ending in the affix 37 of the Perfect, Sometimes there is no substitution. As arra- ज्यातिनिहाय्य ॥ Thus चाय + उम् = की+उस चिकी+उस चिक्युः । So also चाय+क्तचाय + ल्यप् = चाय्य । ३५१२ । अपस्पृधेथामानृचुरानृहुश्चित्युतित्याजाताः श्रितमाशीराशीतः ।। १।३६। एते छन्दसि निपात्यन्ते । इन्द्रश्च विष्णो यदपस्पृधेथाम् ' । स्यधेलं याथाम् । 'अर्कमान- चुः' । ' वसून्याहुः' । 'अरहंभच लिट्युमि'। चिच्युषे । च्युडो लिटि थासि । ' यस्ति व्याज' । त्यजेलि । 'पातास्त इन्ट सोमाः' ।' श्रिता नो ग्रहाः' । श्रीज पाके निष्ठायाम्' । 'नाशिरं दुहे' । 'मध्यत श्राशीतः' । श्रीज एव विपि निष्ठायां च । 3512. In the Chhandas, the following irregular forms are met with :-अपस्पृधेथाम, आनृचुः, अानृहुः, चिच्युषे, तित्याज, श्राताः, शितम्, आशी: and शाशीतः ॥ The word cafe is understood here. From the root स्पद ' to challenge ,, is fornsed अपस्पृधेथाम् being the Inuperfect (लह), 2nd Pers. Dual, Atmanepada there is reduplication of the root, vocalisation of t, and the elision of irregularly. Ag, 57 aaguur UGUETUDIF (Rig Ved. VI: 69.8). Iu the classical language . - . AR । 4 GAR ·46 The SIDDMANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. CX. VI. $ 3512, the form is qudÝZA II Some say, it is derived from us with the preposition 79, the vocilisation of T, the elision of an the non-prefixing of the augment uç in the Imperfect (VT. 4. 75), The counter-example of this will be more थाम् ॥ From me and to respect, to worship’, are derived wag: and 78 in the Perfect before the 3rd per. pl. 38, there being Vocalisation of a and the. etision of irregularly. Then there is reduplication, then changed to, then the lengthening of this y, then the addition of the augment #, as : 79 +38: Rx+38-***+38=*++* +5H (VIL 4. 66) = 1 + 2+ 37 (VII. 4. 70) AT+7+7+38 (VIL 4. 71)=": II. The irregularity consists in the sam.. prasarana with the elision of su Thus gaur Ing: (Rig Ved. L 19. 4), - बसून्यानुहुः ॥ The classical forma will be mag, wag: The form faza is the Perfect 2nd per. sing. of the root ng 'to.go.": there. is vocalisation of the reduplicate, and the non-addition of the augment before: the affix से This is the irregularity. The regular form is gefawu The form facts as in "UFFTS" (Rig Ved. X. 71. 6), is the Perfect of 231, the vocalisation of the reduplicate is the irregularity. The regular form, is antst 1 From the root gts. 'to cook ', is derived alat before the Nish hê offir, at changed to a irregularly. As प्रातात. इन्द्रसोमाः ॥ The forin fun is also derived: from the same root by shortening the Vowel with the same affix. As FIAT Gret oftaida:, fun ug: 11. Some say the wt substitution of # takes place. when the word refers to @TA, in the plural, and fa. when it refers to other than ETA # Sometimes the word ma: is seen in the singular, referring to objects other than मोमः। Thus यदि पातो जुहातनः । In fact, the exhibition of the word aat: in the plural in the sutra is not absolutely necessary. The words and add 1978: are from the same root ot, with the prefix Fix and taking the afires fraq and. Fi respectively. Befure these it is replaced. hy itt, and the non addition of a in the Nishțhâ is irregular, As, "ATU GET (Rig Ved. III. 53. 14), THEzza anu (Rig Ved. VIII. 2, 9.) ३५१३ । खिदेश्छन्दति । ६ ।। ५२ । 'खिद दैन्ये ' । अस्यैच श्रा स्यात् । चिखाद । चिखेदेत्यर्थः । 3513. There is optionally the substitution of & in the room of the diphthong of the verb khid 'to suffer pain," in the Chhandas. The word fautet is understood Bere. Thus fari fawz or fada a la the classical literature we have fari azofa IL ३५१४ । शीशछन्दसि । ६.१ । ६० । fuzzygo & Fila + ' TORTA:'# 3514. The word firshan is found in the Chfiandas. This word, is another form of fut: and means • head.' This is not a substitute of fut in the Vedas, for both forms are found therein, Thus TTT ·Vor. III. CRI.83517.] THE VAIDIC RULES, " । - जगतः (Rig Ved. VII. 66. 15). In the classical literature there is only one form for: 1 The Sutras VI. 1. 104 and 105 declare. * The substitution of a long vowel homogeneous with the first, does not take place when you or is followed by a Towel other than of the case-affixes of the Nominative and the Accusative." " The substitution of a long vowel homogenevus with the first, does not take place when a long vowel is followed by a Nominative or Accusative case-affix beginning with a vowel other than or by the Nom. Pl. affix जस The following sutra makes an exception in the Vedas. ३५१५ । वा छन्दसि । ६।१ । १०६ । दोघीज्जसीचि च पूर्वसवर्णदी वा स्यात् । वाराही । वाराह्यो । 'मानुषोरोलते विशः । उत्तरमूत्रद्वयीदं वाक्यभेदेन संबध्यते । तेनामिपूर्वत्वं वा स्यात् । शमां च शम्यं च । 'सूर्य सुषि- रामिव ' । सप्रसारणाच्च ' (३३०) इति पूर्वरूपमपि वा । दुज्यमानः । यज्यमानः । 3515. In the Vedas, the long vowel may optionally be the single substitute of both vowels, in contravention to the prohibition mentioned in VI. 1. 104 and VI. 1. 105, Thus मारतीः or मामत्या, पिण्डी: or पिण्यः, वाराही or वाराया; उपानही or उपानी॥ 'मानुयोरीलते विश' (Rig Ved. v. 8. 3). The two sútras subsequent to this in the Ashțâdhyâyi, namely VI. 1. 107 and VI. 1. 108 are also influenced by the present sûtra. Thus sutra VI. 1. 107 declares. “ There is the single substitution of the first vowel, when a simple vowel is followed by the r of the Accusative singular श्रम । But this is optional in the Vedas. Thus शमीम orशम्यमः, and सूम्यं सुषिमिव (Rig Ved. VIII. 69. 12). Similarly VI. 1. 108 declares. “ There is the single substitution of the first vowel for the vocalised semi vowel and the subsequeut vowel." In the Veda this rule is optional, as इज्यमान: 1 यज्यसानः ॥ ३५१६ । शेश्छन्दसि बहुलम् । ६।१ । ०० । लोपः स्यात् । 'या ते गात्राणाम् ' । 'ताता पिण्डानाम्' । '+ समादिषु छन्दसि पररूपं वक्तव्यम् +' । अपांत्वेमन् । अपां त्वाम्मन् । 3516. In the Chhandas, the elision of case-ending i (si) of the nominative and accusative plural neuter, is optional. Thus या ते गात्राणाम् (Rig. Ved. I. 162. 19.) ताता पिण्डानाम् (Rig Ved I. 162. 19). Vårt :- In the Vedas, the para-rûjia substitution takes place when yaa to. follow. Thus अपां वागमन - श्रयां त्वेमन् ॥ So also अपां त्वा ओठमन् श्रपांत्योदान । ३५१७ । भय्यप्रवय्य च च्छन्दसि । ६।१।८३ । बिभेत्यस्मादिति भय्यः । वेते प्रवथ्या इति स्त्रियामेव निपातनम् । प्रवेमित्यन्यत्र । छन्दसि' किम् । भेयम । प्रवेयम्। *ह्दय्या श्राप उपसंख्यानम् ' इदे भवा : दय्या प्रापः । भवे छन्दमि यत् । 35 17. The forms bhayya and pravayya are found in the Chhandas. - :03 ·48 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. III, C.. VI. § 3419. The word भय्य is derived from भी+ बत्, and प्रवय्या from t+वी+यत् ॥ The guna ए is changed to अय् ॥ Thus भय्यं किलासीत् ॥ वत्सतरी प्रवय्या ॥ The यत् is allded to भी with the force of Ablative by virtue of the diversity allowed by कत्यलुटो बहुलं (III. 3. 113)॥ Thus बिभेति अस्माद - भय्य न् “ frightening or fearable." The word want is always used in the femivine : in other places väu is the proper forni. Why we do say in the Vedas' ? Observe भेयम्, प्रवेयम् in the classi al literature. Vart: -The word brauzt should also be enumerated when referring to water. As हरदे भवा हदय्या प्रापः ॥ The nfix यत् is added by IV. 4. 110 (हर+य-हरदय् +य)। ३५१: । प्रकृत्यान्तःपादमव्यपरें। ६।१ । ११५ । ऋपादमध्यस्थ एङ् प्रकत्या स्यादति परे नतु' वकारयकारपरेऽति । उपप्रयन्तो अध्वरम् । 'सुजाते अश्वमूनृते' । 'अन्तःपादम्' किम् । एतास एतेचन्ति' । 'अव्यपर' किम् । तेऽवदन' तेचिजन् । 3518. The final 'e' or 'o' and the following 'a' when occurring in the middle half of a foot of a Vaidic verse, retain their original forms, except when the 'a' is followed by 'v' or 'y.' ॥ The word is: is understood here, but it should be coustrued here in the nominative case and 20t in the Ablative. The word gefa means original nature, cause.' The word अन्तर is an Indeclinable, used in the Locative case here and means « in the middle.' The word dia: 'the foot of a verse' refers to the verses of the Vedas, and not to the verses of the classical poetry. The word ufa is also understood here. Thus उपप्रयन्तो अध्वरम् (Rig Ved. I. 74. 1.); सुजाते अश्वसुनते (Rig Veda. V. 79. 1). Why do we say in the inner half of a foot of a verse ?" Observe करा Hit a data dasafat (Rig. Ved. I. 165. 1)! Why do we say “when a or a does not follow #?". Observe तेवदन (Rig. X. 109. 1) ॥ Why do we say por श्रो? Observe अग्निसषसामग्रमख्यत् ॥ Some read this sûtra as नान्तः पादमव्यपरे ॥ According to them, this sûtra supersedes the whole rule of juxtaposition or great (VI. 1. 72). ३५१९ । अव्यादवादवक्रमरवतायमवन्त्ववस्युषु च । ६ ।। ११६ । पषु व्यपराप्यति एङ् ग्रंकृत्या । 'वसुभिनोव्यात्' । 'मित्रमहो अवट्यात्' । 'मा शिवासो अवक्रमः' । 'ते नो अवत' । 'शतधारी अयं मणिः' । 'ते नो अवन्तु' । 'कुशिकासेो अवस्यवः' । यद्यपि । बहुचैस्तेनोऽवन्तु रथतः सा यमागात्' तेऽरुणेभिः' इत्यादी प्रतिभावो न क्रियते तथापि बाहुलकात्समाधेयन् । प्रातिशाख्ये वाचनिक एवायमर्थः । 3519. The 'e' or 'o' retain their original form in the middle of a Vaidic verse, when the following words come after them (though the ‘a' in these has a 'v' and 'y' following it) : -अव्यात, अवयात, अधक्रमः, अबत, अयम्, अवन्त, अवस्य । Thusग्निः प्रथमोवसुभिर्नो श्रव्यात् ॥ मित्रमहा अवयात् (Rig IV. 4. 15), मा शिवा- सो अवक्रमुः (Rig VII. 32. 27) ; ते ना अवताः (Not in the Rig Veda). Prof. Bohtlingk gives the following examples from the Rig Veda :--मीक्षन्तीअवतम् (VI. 14. 3) संदहन्तो अव्रतान (IX. 73. 5), कर्ते अवतान् (IX. 73. 8), शतधारी अयं मणि, ते ना अवन्तु, तु a NE ·Vor. III. CH. VI.83521.] VAIDIO RULES. (Not in the Rig Veda according to Prof. Bohtlingk the of any is generally elided in the Veda after e or श्रा) कुशिकासो अवस्यवः (Rig III. 42. 9). Though in the Rig Veda we find examples like a aisarg tua: (Rig Ved. X. 77. 8), and सोऽयमागात् and तेऽरुणेभिः (Rig Ved. 1. 88.2) &c. where there is 10 Prakriti-bhara, but sandhi, yet these are to be explained by behulum i. e. as a Vaidic diversity. But in the Pratisikhyas, there is an expresss rule to this eflect; and not left to mere inference as here, Nor:-1. para is Benedictive 3rd Per. Sing, of sta sto protect.' 2. अवढ्यात् is Ablative singular of अवय ॥ 3. श्रवक्रमः is the Perfect, 3rd Per. Plural of क्रम् preceded by the Preposition ai There is no reduplication as a Vaidic irregularity. Some read saany: (with roluplication) in the text, but no such word is found in the Rig Veda. 4. san is the Aorist of ag and ast; the 3rd Per. Pl. fari is replaced by wa I (The Aorist sign is elided by II. 4. 80. S. 3102). 5. अयम् is from इदम् । 6. अवन्तु is Imperative 3rd Per. Pl. of अव 'to protect.' अवस्यु: is a Noun, from श्रव+मुन् = श्रवस् । Then is added क्यच् as अयस्य । Then 3 is added by III. 2, 170, and we get war: 11 ३५२० । यजुष्यरः । ६।१ । ११७ । उरःशब्द एडन्तोऽनि प्रकत्या यजुधि । 'उरो अन्तरिक्षम्' । यजुषि पावाभावादनन्तःपादार्थ वचनम्। 3520. In the Yajur Veda, the word 'uras' when changed to 'uro' retains its original form when followed by a short 'a' which is also retained. Thus उरो अन्तरिक्षम् (Yajur Veda Vajasan. IV. 1). Some read the sutra as यजुष्युरोः॥ They take the word as 35 ending in 3, which in the Vocative case assumes the form उरो॥ They give the following example उरो अन्तरिक्ष But in the Yajur Veda VI. 11, the text reads उरोरन्तरिक्षत् In the Yajur Veda, there being no stanzas, the condition of अन्तः पादं of VI. 1. 115. does not apply here, and hence the necessity of a separate sûtia; otherwise VI. 1. 115, would have covered this case also. ३५२१ । आपो जुषाणो वृष्णा वर्षिष्ठेऽम्बेऽम्बालेम्बिकपर्व । ६ ।। ११८ ॥ यजुष्यति एक प्रकत्या। 'पापा अस्मान्मातरः शुन्ध यन्तु ' । जुषाणो अग्निराज्यस्य'। 'वृष्णो अंशुभ्याम् '। 'वर्षिष्ठे अधि नाके ' । 'अम्बे अम्बाले अम्बिके । अस्मादेव वचनात • अम्बार्थ -'। (२६७) इति हरस्वो न । 3521. In the Yajur Veda, the short 'a' is retained after आपो, जुषानो, वृष्णो, वर्षिष्टे, and also in and after — ambe ' or 'ambale when they stand before ' ambike.' Thus पापा अस्मान मातरः शुन्धयन्तु (Yaj. IV. 2): जुषाणो अातुराज्यस्य (Yaj. V. 35), वृष्णो अंशुभ्यां गभस्ति पूतः (Yaj. VII. 1). वर्षिष्ठे अधिनाके । The Vajasaneyi Sauhita has afässfu (V. S. I. 23). The Taittariya Sanbita has afats अधि ॥ (I. 1. 8. 1. 4, 43, 2. 5. 5.4) अम्बे अम्बाले, अम्बिके (V. S. 23. 18 where the reading is अम्ब अम्बिकोम्बालिके) but Tait. S. VII. 4. 19. 1, and Tait. Br. III. 9. 6. 7 सजर ।। . । स ·THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VoL. III. CH. VI. F 3522. । - . . 3 has अम्ब अम्बाल्यम्बिके । The words are &c. though in the Vocative, do not shorten their vowel by VII. 3. 107, because they have been so read here. ३५२२ । अङ्ग इत्यादौ च । ६।१। ११६ । अङ्गशब्द य एड तदादा चाकार य एड पूर्वः सोति प्रकृत्या यजुषि । 'प्रणो अङ्ग अङ्ग श्रदोव्यत्'। अङ्ग अङ्ग प्रशोचिषम्। 3522. In the Yajur Veda, when the word 'ange' is followed by ‘ange' the subsequent short a is retained, as well as the preceding e' or o.' Thus ऐन्द्रः प्राणो अङ्ग अङ्गे श्रदाध्यत, ऐन्द्रः प्राणो अङ्गे अङ्ग निदीध्यत्, सेन्द्रः उदानो अङ्क अङ्ग निधीतः, ऐन्द्रः प्राणो अङ्ग अङ्गे अशोचिषम् (Yaj. 6. 20). ३५२३ । अनुदात्ते च कुधपरे । ६ । १ । १२० । कवर्गधकारपरं अनुदात्तेति परे एह प्रकृत्या यजुषि । 'अयं सो अग्निः' । 'अयं सो अध्वरः'। 'अनुदात्ते' किम् । 'अधो ग्रे रुद्रे'। अग्रशब्ट अायुदात्तः । 'कुधपरे' किम्। 'सोयमग्निमन्तः' । 3523. In the Yajur Veda, when an anudatta a is followed by a Guttural or a dh, the antecedent 'e' or 'o' retains its form, as well as this subsequent a. Thus अयं से अग्निः (Yaj. 12. 47), अयं सो अध्वरः ॥ Why do we say when .is gravely accented ? Observe अधोऽये, here अग्रे has an acute accent on the first syllable. Why do we say " when followed by a Guttural (कु) or a ध" ? Observe सोयग्नि मन्तः ॥ ३५२४ । अवपथाप्ति च।६।१।१३१ । अनुदात्त अकारादी अवपथा:शब्दे परे यजुषि सह प्रकृत्या । 'जीरुद्रेभ्यो अवपथाः' । वपेस्थासि लाङ 'तिङ्ङतिङः' (३६३५) इत्यनुदात्तत्वम् । 'अनुदात्ते' किम् । यदुद्रेभ्योऽवपथा' । निपातैर्य- व्य दि-' (2130) इति निघातान। 3524. In the Yajur Veda, when the gravely accented a of avapathâs follows e or o the vowels retain their original form. Thus त्रो द्रेभ्यो प्रवपथाः ॥ The word अवपथा: is 2nd per. Singular Imperfect of aq in the Atmanepada. Thus अ+वप +शप +थात् ॥ The sm is grave by VIII. 1.28. When it is not gravely accented, the drops. As aga varsauut: it Here in not grave by virtue of VIII. 1. 30. ३५२५ । लाडोऽनुनासिकश्छन्दसि । ६।१ । १२६ । श्रा.चि परोनुनासिकः स्यात् । स च प्रसत्या । अभ या अपः' । ' गभीर आ उग्रपुत्रे'। ईपाक्षादीनां छन्दसि प्रतिभावा वक्तव्यः' ईषा अक्षा हिरण्यः' । 'ज्या इयम् । 'पूषा अविष्टु'। 3525. For the adverb a' is substituted in the Chhandas the nasalised 6 añ' when a vowel follows it, and it retains its original form. Thus अभ्र श्रा अपः (Rig Veda V. 48. 1); गभीर ा उग्रपुत्रे जिघांसतः (Rig Veda VIII, 67.11.) - . ।

·VERS Wor. III. CH. VI. 83528A.] VAIDIC RULES. । in a Vårt : _In the Vedas su #a: &c. are found uncombined. As, ईषा अक्षा, का ईमिरे पिशंगिला, यथा अङ्गदः, पथा अगमन् &c. ज्या इयम् (Rig Ved. VI. 75. 3.) पूषा अविष्टु (Rig Ved. X. 26. 1). ३५२६ । स्यश्छन्दसि बहुलम् । ६।१ । १३३ । स इत्यस्य सीपः स्याद्धलि । 'एष स्य भानुः ' 3526. In the Chhandas, the case-affix of the nominative singular is diversely elided after sya, when a consonant follows it. Thus उत स्य वाजी क्षिपणिं तुरपयति । ग्रीवायां बद्धो अपिकक्ष प्रानि (Rig Veda IV. 40. 4), एघ स्य ते मधुमा इन्द्र सोमः (Rig Veda IX. 87, 4). Sometimes it does not take place : 6 यत्र स्यो निपतेत् ॥ The स्य means : he.' ३५३० । हुस्वाच्चन्द्रोत्तरपदे मन्त्रे । ६।१ । १५१ । हस्वात्परम्य चन्द्रशब्दस्योत्तरपदस्य सुडागमः स्यान्मन्ने। 'हरिश्चन्द्रो मरुद्गणाः' । सुश्चन्द्रस्य । 3527. In a Mantra, the 'sut' is added to chandra,' when it is a second member in a compound and is preceded by a short vowel. Thus हरिश्चन्द्रो मरुङ्गणः (Rig Ved. IX. 66. 26). सुभचन्द्रो युष्मान् ॥ Why to we say after a short vowel ! Observe सूर्याचन्द्रमसाविव ॥ Why do we say Mantra' 1 Observe, सुचन्द्रा पार्णमासी ॥ The उत्तरपद can only be in a compound (samâsa) as it is well-known to all; and it does not mean, the second word,' as the literal meaning might convey. Therefore the rule does not apply here मुक्रर्मास चन्द्रमसि । ३५२८ । पितरामातरा च छन्दसि ।६।३। ३३ । द्वन्द्व निपातः । 'पा मा गन्तां पितरामातराच'। चाद्विपरीतपि । 'नमातरापितरा नू चिदिष्टी'। 'समानस्य छन्दस्यमूर्धप्रभृत्युदर्केषु' । समानस्यमः स्यान्मूर्धादिभित्र उत्तरपदे । सगर्थ्यः । * छन्दसि स्त्रियां बहुलम् ' । विश्वग्देवयोरट्यादेशः विश्वाची च इताचीच 'देवदीची नयत देवयन्तः'; 'कदीची'। 3528. In the Vedas the form Pitarâmâtarâ' is also valid. Iu the ordinary language Ataifuait is the proper form. The Vaidic form is derived by ailding me to the first member, and is aldeil to the second by VIL. 1. 39 : and then Guna by VII. 3. 110. Thus प्रा मा गन्ता पितरामातरा च ॥ By force of a "also', the converse is also valid. As न मातापितरा न चिदिष्टी । 3528A. स is the substitute of समान in the Chhandas, but not before मर्धन, प्रभृति and उदर्क ॥ (See VI. 3. 84. S. 1012.) Thus सगयः = समाना गर्भ: "nterine brother." Vårt :- In the Vedas, the finals of faza and àa are replaced by 925 diversely hefore the feminine nouns : thus in "विश्वाची च एताधी च "; there is no Bilbstitution in favarat, but in the at there is this sibstitution. agat is derived from किम् + अंच = कदि + अंच ॥ Then is addud डीप and then like अश्वाची ॥ This vårtika is an exception to VI. 3. 92. S. 418, 127196 o ST NERGES । POST RE H ·52 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. CH. VI. $ 3529. 3). " ३५२६ । सध मादस्ययोश्छन्दति । ६।३। ६६ । सहस्य सधादेशः स्यात् । 'इन्द्र त्वास्मिन्सधमादे'। सोमः सधस्थम् । 3529. Sadhu is substituted for saha in the Chhandas when mdda and stha follow. Thus सधमादेोयुम्न्य एकास्ता: सधस्थाः ॥ Another example is पात्वा वहन्तो हरयो युजाना, अर्वागिन्द्र सधमादो वहन्तु (Rig. III. 3. 7) सहमाव्यन्ति देवा अस्मिन् = यज्ञः ॥ “इन्द्र स्वास्मिन्सधमादे' (Rig Ved. VIII. 2. ३५०० । पधि च च्छन्दसि । ६।३ । १०८ । पथिशब्द उत्तरपदे कोः कवं कादेशश्च । कषपथ:-कापथ:-कुपथः । 3530. The substitution of ka, and kava for ku takes place in the Chhandas before patha. Thus कवषयः, कापथः and कुप्रथः ॥ ३५३१ । सा साठ्या साऊत निगमे । ६।३ । ११३ । सहेः बत्वाप्रत्यये पाढा द्वयं वृनि तृतीयं निपात्यते । 'मरुद्भिरुयः पृतनासु साहा' प्रचोर्मध्यस्यस्य डस्य लः ढस्य हश्च प्रातिशाख्ये विहितः । प्राह हि । 'द्वयोश्चात्य स्वरयोर्मध्यमेत्य संपटाते स डकारो लकारः। हूकारतामेति स एव चास्य ढकारः सन्नूष्मणा संप्रयुक्ते ॥' इति । 3531. ' Sadhyai' 'sadhwa' and 'sadha' are irregularly formed in the Vedas. Thus साढो समन्तात्, साढ्वा शत्रून् । The words and and wigat are both formed by far afix added to at the sht substitution not taking place, In the first, what is changed to u The third word Fiet is formed by a7 affix added to सह ॥ In the classical literature सोढा and सोढ़वा are the proper 'मभिरुयः एतनासु साहा (Rig Ved. VII. 56. 23). In the Prâtisâkhya it is ordained that a g situated between two vowels is changed to ल ; and a ढ so situated becomes हल | As says the karika. Karika :-- - The letter & falling between two vowels has become in the pronunciation of this Professor, So also & similarly situated is pronounced by him as an Ushman letter i. e., लह ३५३२। छन्दति च।६।३। १३८ । अष्ट न प्रात्वं स्यादुत्तरपदे । अष्टापदी । 3532. In the Chhandas also, the long vowel is substituted for the final of 'ashtan' before a second member. Thus प्रष्टापदी॥ The form अष्टापदी is the feminine in डीप (IV. 1. 8) of TEUTT (V. 4. 138 the # of urz being eliiled in a Bahuvrihi), ua being substituted for uta by VI, 4, 130. ३५३३ । मन्त्रे सोमाश्चेन्द्रियविश्वदेव्यस्य मतो । ६ । ३ । १३१ । दीर्घः स्यान्मन्त्रे । 'अश्नावती सम्मावतीम् । इन्द्रियावान्मदिन्तमः । “विश्वकर्मणा विश्व- देव्यावता'। forms, ·दीर्ध: स्यात् । . । ग्रावाणः' । 'कूमना' । 'अत्रात Vor. III. CH. VI.83537.] VAIDIO RULES. 53 3533. In a Mantra, the final vowels of ETA, na, grant and विश्वदेव्य are lengthened when the affix 'matup' follows. Thus सोमावती, अश्वावती इन्द्रियावती, विश्वदेव्यावती। अश्वावती सोमवतीम् (Rig Ved. x. 97.7.) विश्वकर्मणा विश्वदेव्यावता (Rig Ved. x. 170. 4). ३५३४ । ओषधेश्च विभक्तावप्रथमायाम् । ६।३ । १३२ । दीर्घः स्यान्मन्त्रे । 'यदोषधीभ्य अदधात्योषधीयु' 3534. In a Mantra, the final of 'oshadhi' is lengthened before the case-endings, but not in the Nominative. Thus यद् ओषधीभ्यः अदधात्योषधीषु ॥ ३५३५ । चि तुनुधमत्तङ्कुचोरुष्याणाम् । ६।३ । १३३ । श्रा तू न इन्द्र'। 'नू मूर्तः' । उत वा धा स्यालात्' । मत गोमन्त- मीमहे । 'भरता जातवेदसम्' । तङिति थादेशस्य डिस्वपळे यहणम् । तेनेह न । शृणोत भद्रा । यत्रा नश्चक्रा । उरुष्याणः । 3535. In the Rig Veda, the finals of the particles तु, नु, घ, मत, the tense-affix तङ्, कु, the ending ' tra' and the word उरुष्य are lengthened. :-भा तू न इन्द्र वृत्रहन् (Rig IV. 32. 1) नु-नू मतः ॥ घ:-उत वा घा स्थालात् ॥ मनः--मत्त गोमन्तमीमहे ॥ तह:-भरता जातवेदसम् (Rig x. 176. 2). तङ is the a substitute of zt, when it is treated as fea, therefore it does not apply here, शणोत ग्रावाणः (I. 2. 4.) कु-कूमनस् ; त्र-'अत्रा ते भद्रा ।' यत्रानश्चत्रा' उरुण्या गाग्नेः ॥ -The घ in the sutra is the sound I and not the technical घ (तरप and तमय). स्याल means « the wife's brother." भरत is Imperative Second Person Plural. शणात is the Imperative Second Person Plural formed by the affix तप, (VII. 1. 46. S. 3568). Since this atix is पित् the present rule does not apply to it. उरुण्य is Imperative 2nd Per. Singular and is derived from the Kandwadi root उरुष्य (formed by यक). The affix हि is elided by VI. 4. 105. S. 2202. The 7 of the Pronoun नस is changed to m after उस by VIII. 4. 27. S. 3649, ३५३६ । इक्रः सुजि। ६।३ । १३४ । ऋचि दीर्घ इत्येव । 'अभीषुणः सखीनाम्' । 'सुञः' (३६४४) इति । 'नश्च धातुस्था रुषुभ्य' (१६४६) इति णः । 3536. In a Mantra, the finals of the preceding member ending in ‘i' or 'u' are lengthened before the particle 'su.' Thus अभी षु णः सखोनाम् (Big. IV. 31. 3) उर्ध्व ऊ पुण उत्तये (Rig I. 36 13) The 18 changed to u by VIII. 3. 107 : S. 3644, and a chauged to u by VIII. 4. 27. S.3649. ३५३७ । द्वयचोऽतस्तिङः । ६ । ३ ॥ १३५ । मन्ने दीर्घः । 'विठ्मा हि चकाजरसम्' । Thus तु :- NOTE :

·THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. III. CH. VI. $ 3537. 3537. A tense affix ending in 'a' is lengthened in the Rig Veda, when the Verb consists of two syllables. Thus विश्मा हि त्वा सत्यतिं शूर गोनाम् &c. See Rig. III. 42. 6, विमा हि चका मरसम् । ६c. But not here देवा भवत वाजिनः, as the verb consists of more than two syllables: not also here श्रा देवान वक्षि यक्षि च as the verbs do not end in श्र॥ NOTE: – faza is Present First Person Plural. # replaces #: by III. 4. 82. चक्र is 2nd Person Plural of the Perfect of क॥ ३५३८ । निपातस्य च।६।३।१३६ । एवा हि ते'। 3538. In the Rig Veda the final of a particle is lengthened. Thus एवा हि ते, अच्छाते, अच्छा रितारः (Rig Ved. I. 2. 2). ३५३९ । अन्येषामपि दृश्यते । ६ । ३ । १३७ । अन्येषापि पूर्वपदस्थानां दीर्घः स्यात् । पूरुषः । दण्डादण्डि । 3539. The elongation of the final is to be found in other words also. Here we must follow the usage of the “ishthas. Where the lengthening is not ordained by any rules of Grammar, but occurs in the writing of standard authors, there we should accept such lengthening as valid. Thus पुरुषः दण्डादण्डि:। ३५४० । छन्दस्य भयथा।६।४।५। नामि दीर्घा वा । ' धाता धातृणाम्' इति बचाः । तैत्तिरीयास्तु इस्वमेव पठन्ति । 3540. In the Chhandas, the finals are optionally lengthened before the Genitive plural 'nâm.' In some places they are seen as lengthened, in others not. याम् (Rig Ved. x. 128.7). So also चतमणाम् and चतसृणाम् ॥ The Rig Vedins read with long , the Taittariyas read it with short Ru ३५४१ । वा षपूर्वस्य निगमे । ६।४।। षपूर्वस्याची नोपधाया वा दीर्घोऽसबूद्धो सर्वनामस्थाने परे । ऋभुक्षाणम् । अभुक्षणम् । 'निगमे किम् । तक्षा । तक्षाणा। 3541. The lengthening of the penultimate vowel of a stem ending in 'n' before the affixes of the strong-case, is optional in the Nigama, when 'sh' precedes such a vowel. Thus ऋभुक्षाणं or ऋभुक्षणमिन्द्रम् ॥ Why do we say ' in the Nigama a In the classical literature we have तता.. तक्षाणा, तक्षाणः always. ३५४२ । जनिता मन्त्रे । ६।४ । ५३ । इडादा चि णिलोपो निपात्यते । यो नः पिता जनिता'। 35 42. In a Mantra, the word “janita' is formed irregularly by the elision of 'ni' before the affix 'tri' with the auginent ' it. . As धाता धातु .

·Vot. III. CHVI.S3317.] VAIDIO RULES. long Thus यो नः पिता जनिता (Rig Veda X. 82. 3.)। Otherwise जनयिता in the classical literature, It is an exception to VI. 4 51. ३३४३ । शमिता यजे । ६।४। ५४ । शर्मायतेत्यर्थः। 3543. 'Samita' is formed irregularly by the elision of 'ni' before an 'it'augmented affix, when meaning a sacrificial act. Thus शतं हविः शमितः ॥ It is formed by ag and is in the Vocative case. Why do we say when referring to a sacrificial act"? See azai tla: tatua: a Seo Satpatha Br. III, 8. 3, 4 and 5, ३५४४ । युप्लवोर्दीर्घश्छन्दसि । ६।४ । ५८ । ल्यपीत्यनुवर्तते। वियूय । विस्य । श्राडजादीनाम्' (२२५४)। 3544. In 'yu' and 'plu,' is substituted for 'u' before 'lyap' in the Chhandas. Thus दान्त्यनुपूर्व वियूय ; यत्रा थो दक्षिणा परिप्लूय ॥ Why do we say, in the Chhandisu Observe संयुत्य, प्रोसुत्य in the classical literature. By VI. 4. 72 the augment are is added to verbs beginning with a vowel, in the Aorist, the Imperfect and the Conditional. In the Vedas, it comes before verbs beginning with consonants also, ३५४५ । छन्दाप दृश्यते । ६।४ । ७३ । अनजादीनामित्यर्थः । पानट् । आवः । 'न मायोगे' (२२२८)। 3545. The 'at' augment is found in the Chhandas also. It is found there before the roots beginning with a vowel as well as before Thus wa, from AT in the Aorist, The form is elided by II. 4. 80, when VIII. 2. 63 does not apply, then y is changed to by VIII. 2. 36 which becomes s and finally ट्॥ श्रानक, from नश् when VIII. 2. 63 applies and पायुना ॥ a: is Aorist of as, the affix being elided by II 4. 80. * from 27 (II. 4. 80) and algatan is the Imperfect of garu The augments अट् and प्राट् are elided when the Particle मा is added. See VI. 4.74. But not necessarily so in the Vedas as taught below. ३५४६ । बहुलं छन्दस्यमाड्योगेऽपि । ६।४ । ७५ । अडाटी न स्तः मायोगेऽपि स्तः। 'जनिष्ठा उग्रः सहसे तुरायः।' 'मा वः क्षेत्रे परबीजान्यवाप्सुः' 3546. There is diversity in the Chhandas : the augment 'at' or 'at' is added even with “mâ,' and sometimes not added even when there is no ' ima'. Thus in जनिष्ठा उग्रः (Rig. X 73. 1), काममूयोत (Rig. I. 53. 3) and काममयीत् the angment is not added though there is no #1 il In मा वः क्षेत्र परबीजान्धवाग्मुः। मा अभित्थाः, मा श्रावः, the augment is not elided, though the purticle मा is added. ३५४७ । इरयो ।६।४।७६ । 'गर्भ प्रथमं दधे प्रापः' । रेभावस्थाभीयत्वेनासिद्धत्वादालोपः । अत्र रेशब्दस्फेट कते पुनरपि रेभावः । तदर्थ च सूत्रे द्विवचनान्तं निर्दिष्ठमिरयोरिति । consonant roots.

·56 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VoL. III. CH. VI. F3547. 3547. “Re'is diversely substituted for fire' in the Veda. Thus के स्विदर्भ प्रथमं दधे प्रापः (Rig. x. 82. 5) या स्य परिदः ॥ In दधे, the श्रा of धा is elided, before the affix इरे by VI. 4. 64, the रे substitution being considered as asiddha (VI. 4. 22) for the purposes of the elision of पा ॥ Here gę augment is first addeci to i after the @ę roots and the affix thus beconies Et, then I is substituted again for this asi by this sûtra, thus the affix is brought back to its original condition. To show this repetition-रे-हरे-रे the sûcra has exhibited the word gtat: in the dual number. ३५४८ । छन्दस्यु भयथा ।६।४।६। भूसुधियोर्यगस्यादियडुवङी च। 'वनेषु चित्रं विश्वम्' । विभुवं आ । 'सुध्यो हव्य मग्नेः, सुधियो वा। '* तन्वादीनां छन्द्रसि बहुलम् ' । 'तन्वं पुषेम । तनुवं वा । त्र्यम्बकम्-त्रियम्बकं वा। 3548. In the Chhandas, in the case of a stem in bhu' and 'sudhi' are found sometimes the यङ्, उबङ्, and sometimes the semivowel substitution. As विभ्व , विभुवम्, सुध्यः and सुधियः ॥ वनेषु चित्रं विश्व विशे (Rig Veda IV. 7. 1) विभुवम् ॥ सुध्यो हव्यमग्ने for सुथियो हव्यमग्ने ॥ Vártika: -There is diversely the substitution of qug and gas in the Chhandas, after तनु &c. and the rest. This ordains substitution even after words which - are not roots. As, तन्वं पुषेम (Rig Ved. X. 128. 1) or तनुवं ॥ यम्बकम् or त्रियम्बकम् 66 Threeeyed." । तनिपत्याश्छन्दसि । ६।४ । ९ । एतयोरूपधालोपः डिति प्रत्यये । 'विर्तावरे कवयः' । 'शकुना इव पप्तिम' । भाषायां विते. निरे। तिम। 3549. In the Chhandas, the root-vowel of 'tan''to stretch and 'pat' to fall, is elided before an affix beginning with a vowel, when it has an indicatory 'k' or 'n'. As faaſaa maa: u It is the 3rd Person Plural Perfect of nail The vowel अ of तन is elided. Though the elision is asiddhaa yet the rale VI. 4. 120 requiring the substitution of g and the elision of the reduplicate a does not apply: be. cause then the present sutra would be nullified. शकुना इव पप्तिमः (Rig Ved. IX. 107. 20). This is also लिट् ॥ In the classical language we have विर्तनिरे, तिम् ॥ ३५५० । घसिमसाहलि च । ६।४ । १०० । 'सग्धिश्च में' । 'बन्धा ते हरीधानाः' । 'हुझलभ्यो हेर्धिः' (२४२५) । 3550. The root-vowel of ghas' and ' bhas ’ is elided in the Chhandas, before any affix, whether beginning with a vowel or a consonant, which has an indicatory k' or 'N'. Tbus सग्धिश्च मे सपीतिश्च मे, बब्धां ते हरी धानाः ॥ सरिधः is thus derived: क्तिन is ndded to the root अद् ; then by II. 4. 39, घस् is substituted for अद; thus घस् + ति = घुस + ति ( being elided by the present sutra) = ध् + ति (म being elided by ·VoE. III. CH. VI.83553.] VAIDIC RULES. The a - VIII. 2. 26), then a is changed to y, and a to # and we have fiu: Then Farat: fix:=pfiu: (Fara changed to & VI. 3. 84). The word is the Imperative of भस्, thus भस्+श्लु + ताम् = भ भ + ताम्ब भस्ताम् (VI. 4. 100)- बभ +ताम् (VIII. 2.26)= ब+ धाम बब्धाम। This rule of clision being a nitya, and a subsequent rule, onght to have operated first, but, as a Vaidic anomialy, the reduplication takes place first. See VII. 2.67. Why do we read “before an athir beginning also with a consonant"? Because the elision takes place before a vowel affix also, as धपक्षति भस् + प्रलु + झि = बभस+अति (VII. 1. 4) = बसति (VIII. 4. 55). Why having an indicatory amor ? Observe अंशून बस्ति । has been added into the aphorism by the Vârtikakâra, ३५५१ । श्रु शृणपष्टवभ्यश्छन्दति । ६।४ । १०२ । 'श्रुधी हवम्' । 'टणुधी गिरः' । 'रायस्पर्धि' । 'उरुणस्कृधि । अपाधि । 3551. घिis substituted for हि in the Vedas, after भु, पृणु, पु, and वृ॥ As श्रुधी हवम् (Rig Vel. I. 2, 1.) शधि गिरः (Rig Ved. VIII. 84. 3.) रायस्पधि (Rig Ved. I. 3. 12). उरुकदुरुसधि and अवाधि ॥ In uyut, the fe is not elided after the 3 or y, as it was required by VI. 4. 106, since the present aphorism specifically mentions it. The lengthening takes place by YI. 3. 137. The fornis other than zyfu are irregular ; qų being added diversely by III. 1. 85, and then eliderd diversely by बहुलंछन्दसि 11. 4. 73. -grå is from a to protect'. The so is elided ; for the final # there is उर by VII. I. 102. S. 2495 and it is lengthened by VIII. 2.77 S. 354 उरु णस्वधि from *; the = of RĘ is changed to o by VIII. 4. 27 S. 3649 and the visarjauiya is chauged to 8 by VIII. 3. 50. S. 3635. ३५५२ । घा छन्दसि । ३।४ । ८८ । हिरपिता। 3552. In the Chhandas the substitute thi' is optionally treated as not having an indicatory "p.' The result is that in the Chhandas, the second person singular of Parç has two forms, as state or rulfa; ggfu or garfu, fa belng substituted for fe in the Vedas (by VI. 4. 103 S. 3553) as in the following terse: अग्ने मयं स पारायः अस्मान्यिश्वानिदेव पुयुना िव ान । यु योध्यस्मज्जु राणमेनोयिष्ठान्ते नमऽउक्तिम्विधेम ॥ Rig Veda I. 189. 1: Yajur Veda, 40. 16, ३५५३ । अडितश्च । ६।४।१०३ ॥ होधिः स्यात् । रारन्धि । रमेयंत्ययेन परस्मैपदम् । शपः श्लुरभ्यासदीर्घश्च । 'अस्मे प्रयन्धि "युयोधि जातवेदः' । यमेः शप्रे लुक् । योतेः शपः भलुः । 'अडिन्तः' किम् । प्रणीहि । 3553. 'Dhi' is substituted for thi' when the tense-affix is not nit. amma - 1 । 500 स ।

·58 THE SIDDHANTA KA UMEDI. [Vor. III. CH. VII. 3553. .. Uniler III. 4. 88 S. 3552 ft is also fun in the Vedas : and when it is fun! it is not डित by 1. 2. 4. Thus गरन्धि, प्रयन्धि and युयोधि in the following सोमरारन्धिः अस्मभ्य तद्भर्यश्व प्रयन्धि; युयोध्यस्मज जुहुराणमेनः ॥ Why do we say when it is not fea'? Observe outft u (1) सन्धि is irregularly formed Parasmaipnda of रम; the शप being replaced by set, and the reduplicate lengthened as a Vedic form. The is not elided, by VI. 4. 37 as the affix is not ङित् ॥ (2) प्रयन्धि is from यम the शए is elided. (3) युयोधि from यु (योति), the शप being replaced by लुयुयोधि जातवेदः (Rig Ved. VIII. 11. 4). ३५५४ । मन्नेष्वाड्यादेरात्मनः । ६।४ । १४१ । श्रात्मनशब्दस्यादेर्लोपः स्यादाडि । 'त्मना देवेषु' । 3554. In the Mantras, the beginning of Atman' is elided, when the affix of the Instrumental Singular follows. is the name of the Instrumental singular affis, given by ancient Grammarians. Thus सना देवेषु (Rig Ved. VII. 7. 1). ३५५५ । विभाष श्छन्दसि । ६ । ४ १६२ ॥ ऋजुशब्दस्यतः स्थाने रः स्याद्वा इष्ट मेयस्सु । 'त्वं रजिष्टमनुनेशि' । ऋजिष्ठं वा। 3555. Before the affixes ishtha, iman and lyas, the ri' of ‘riju' may optionally be changed to 'ra' in the Chhandas. As रजिष्ठः and ऋजिष्ठः, in त्वं रजिष्ठमनुषि (Rig Ved. I. 91. 1). ३५५६ । मृत्व्यवारव्यवास्त्वमाध्वीहिरण्ययानिच्छन्दसि । ६।४। १७५ । ऋती भवमत्व्यम् । वास्तुनि भवं वास्तव्यम् । वास्त्वं च । मधुशब्दस्याणि स्त्रियां यणा. देशो निपात्यते । 'माध्वीनः सन्त्वोषधीः। हिरण्यशब्दाद्विहितस्य मयटो मशब्दस्य लोपो नि- पात्यते । 'हिरण्ययेन सविता रथेन । इति षष्ठोऽध्यायः। 3556. In the Chhandas the following are irregularly formed : Ritvya, Vastvya, Vastva, Madhvi, and Hiranyaya. The word maan is derived from and वास्तु यत्, उ being changed to a ॥ ऋती भवम् = ऋतव्यम्, वास्ती भवम् = वास्त्व्यम् ॥ वास्त्व is from any, as argfa Ha:-aara: with the affix cu Arat from my with the affix अण in the feminine as 'माध्वीनःसन्त्वोषधी:' Rig Ved. I. 90. 6. हिरण्यय is from हिरराय with the afix मयद, the म being elided, as 'हिरण्ययेन सविता रथेन' (Rig Ved. - वास्तव्य from with the affir I. 35. 2.) CHAPTER VII. 'शीडो रुट (२४४२)। By VII. 1. 682442 ; the angment स्ट् is added to the tense affix त the 3rd Person Plural Atmanepade. But in the Vedas the augment is added to other affixes also. ३५५७ । बहुलं छन्दसि । ७।१।८। रुडागमः स्यात् । 'लोपस्त श्रात्मनेपदेषु' (३५६३) इति पक्षे तलोपः। 'धेनवो दुन्हे" । लो. पाभावे छतं दुव्हते । 'अदृशमस्य' । 'अतो भिस ऐम् (२०३)।

·Vor. III. CH. VII. 3561.] VAIDIO Rults. धेनवा दुहे 3557. The augment 'rut' is diversely applied in the Chhandas. The त of श्रत is elided by VII. 1. 41. S. 3563, in one alternative. Thus ॥ When then there is no elision, we have एतं दुहते । So also अश्वमस्य । देवा अदुन्हे ; गन्धर्वा अप्सरसा अदुन्ह Here अदुन्ह is the Imperfect (लङ, plural of दुह ॥ Thus दुह +झ = दुह् + रत् = अदुह, the e being elided by VII. 1. 41. Sometimes, the augment does not take place, as अदुहत ॥ Owing to the word बहुल, diversely', the augment r is added to other uffixes also, than a | As अदृशम् in अतृश्रमस्य केतवः ॥ This is the aorist in अड़ of the root दृश by III. 1. 57. the guna ordained by VII. 4.16, does not take place. By VII. 1. 9 S. 203 ; ऐस् is substituted for भिस् in the Instrumental Plural after nouns ending in . But not always so, in the Vedas. ३५५८ । बहुलं छन्दसि । । १ । १० । 'अग्निदेवेभिः'। 3558. In the Chhandas the substitution takes place diversely. That is is substituted for fup even after stems which do not end in short ; as aa: ; and some times the substitution does not take place even after stems ending in short , as, देवेभिः, in देवोदेवेभिरागमत् (Rig Veda I. 1. 4). ३५५९ । नेतराच्छन्दसि ।।१।२६ । स्वमोरदङ् न । 'वात्रमितरम्' । 'छन्दसि' किम् । इतरत्काष्ठम् । 'समासेऽनपूर्वे तवो ल्या' (३३३२) 3559. In the Chhandas, at (or ad) is not the substitute of suh and am (Nom. and Acc. Sg.) endings, after itar. As इतरमितरमगडमजायत ; वात्रमितरम् ॥ Why in the Vedas ! See इतरत् काष्ठम्, इतरत् कुझम्॥ By VII. 1. 37. S. 3332, is substituted for ktvá in a compound the first member of which is an Indeclinable but not 75 # In the Vedas, this is optional. ३५६० । तवापि च्छन्दति ।।१।३८ । यजमानं परिधापयित्वा । 3560. In the Chhandas the ktva' also; as well as lyap, is substituted for ktvå, after an Indeclinable compound, other than one preceded by the Negative 'nañ.' Thus m মাৰা যান অবিশ্বায়য়িা। ३५६१ । सुपां सुनुपर्वसवर्णाच्छेयाडाझायाजालः । ७।१।३८ । 'ऋजवः सन्तु पन्थाः' । पन्थान इति प्राप्ते सुः । 'परमे व्योमन' । 'व्योमनि' इति प्राप्त डेल क । धोती । मती । सुष्टुती। धीत्या मत्या सुष्टुत्येति प्राप्ते पूर्वसवर्णदीर्घः । 'या सुरथा रथीतमा दिविस्एशा अश्विना' । 'यो सुरथो दिविस्एशो' इत्यादी प्राप्त था। 'नतादब्राह्मणम् । नतमिति प्राप्त श्रात् 'यादेव विटा तात्वा' । फर्मात प्राप्ते। 'न युष्म वाजबन्धवः' । 'भस्म इन्द्रावृहस्पती । युष्मास्वस्मभ्यमिति प्राप्ते शे । उख्या। धष्णुया । उम्णा धष्णुनेति प्राप्ते या । SEAN R । - । । स । । E । सा ·60 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. CH, VII. $3501. - । 'नाभा एधिध्या: । नाभाविति प्राप्ने डा। 'ता अनुश्योच्यावयतात् । अनुष्ठानमनुष्ठा । व्यवस्था- वदङ्। प्राडो या । साधुया । साविति प्राप्ते याच । 'वसन्ता यजेत । वसन्त इति प्राप्ते पाल् । याडियाजीकाराणामुपसंख्यानम्' । उर्विया । दार्विया। उम्णा दारुणेति प्राप्ते इया । सुक्षे. त्रिति प्राप्ते डियाच । 'तिं न शुष्कं सरसी शयानम्' । डेरोकार इत्याहुः । तत्रायुदात्ते पदे प्राप्त व्यत्ययेनान्तोदात्तता। वस्तुतस्तु डोषन्तान्डेल क् । ईकारादेशस्य तूहादरणान्तरं मग्यम् । *पाङयाजयारामुपसंख्यानम्' । 'प्रबाहवा सिसतम्' बाहुनेति प्राप्त श्राङादेशः । 'धेर्डिति' (२४५) इति गुणः । स्वमया। स्वन नेति प्राप्तेऽयाच । 'स नः सिन्धुमिव नावया' । नोति प्राप्तेऽ- यार। रितस्वरः। 3561. The following irregular endings are substituted for the various case-endings in the Chhandas : (1) 's' of the Nom. Sg. for 'as' of the Plural, (2) the luk-elision of the case-endings, (3) the single substitution of the homogeneous long vowel for the end vowel of the stem, (4) a, (5) at, (6) e (se) for the ending of the Nom. Plural, (7) yal, (8) | (da.), with the elision of the last vowel and the consonant, if any, that follows it in the stem, (9) yå (dya) with the similar shortening of the stem, (10) yâ, (yach) and (11) a' (accent of la'), Thus (1) अनुक्षरा ऋजवः सन्तु पन्थाः (for प्रन्यान) Rig Veda x. 85. 23. Vart: -It should be stated that case-endings replace case-endings promiscuously, as yfe afaurur: (for ziauriatą Rig I. 164. 9). Vari:-One personal ending replaces another personal ending in the Vedas चषालंय अश्वयूपाय तक्षति (for तक्षन्ति) Rig. I. 162. 6. (3) gru-clision : -As À A (Tait-up. II. 1. 1) for safa Here is elision of डि ॥ (3) Lengthening :-धीती, मती, सुष्टुती for धोत्या, मत्या and शुष्टुत्या । (4) श्रा substitute :-~-As या सुरथा रथोतमोभा देवा दिविस्पृशा । अश्विना ता हमामधे । (Rig Ved. I. 22. 3). Instead of यो, सुरथी, दिविस्पृशो, उभी, &c. we have या, सुरथा, .. (5) श्रात-नताद् ब्राह्मणम् for नतम् ॥ यादेव विटम ता त्वा here या is for यम् ॥ (6) शे-न युष्म (for युष्मासु) बाजबन्धधः, Rig. VIII. 68. 19. अस्मे (for अस्मभ्यम्) इन्द्रावृहस्पती; Rig. IV. 49. 4. (7) या-उरुया, धष्णुया for उरुणा and ष्णुणा ॥ (8) डा-नाभा (for नाभी) पृथिव्याः Rig. I. 143. 4. (9) झा-अनुष्ठया उच्यावयतात्for अनुष्ठया Ait Br. II. 6. 15. अनुष्ठानेन भवान विशसनं करोतु । The word अनुष्ठा (feminine) is derived from स्था with the affix अड (III. 3. 106) and the preposition अनु । In the Instrumental Singular, the टा is replaced by GT 8 But is not the affix 5 of 1II. 3. 106 set aside in the case of an by the specific affix frig of III. 3. 957 Not always, for Pânini himself has used forms like व्यवस्था (I. 1. 35) showing that स्था takes the affix also. (10) याच-साधुया for साधु ; the elision of सु which was otherwise required does not take place. (11) बाल-वसन्ता यजेत for वसन्ते ।।

·VOL. III. Ca VII. $3563. VAIDIC Rules. 61 it, 1 V&H: The following substitutes should also be enumerated, (a) Eat, (b) feurą with the elision of the final vowel and the consonant, if any, that follows and (6) long ई | As (a) उर्बिया परिधानम्, for उरुणा, so also aार्विया for दारुणा ॥ (1) सुदंत्रिया for सुर्वेत्रिणा, and सुगात्रिया for सुगात्रिणा ॥ (6) तिं न शुषकं सरसी शयानम् (Rig Ved. VII. 103. 2) for a fa al The word wat however may be otherwise explained. The ordinary explanation is that fe (Loc. Sing). is replaced by long of this Vårtika. The word ought to have udât ta on the first syllable, but anomalously the accent falls on the last. Thus 8ay those who give this example. But as a matter of fact acat here is the feminine iu sta of HTĘ 1 The Luc. Sing, fe is elided after it by clause (2) of this sůtra ; &:d it is uot illi example of the addition of long to HTË I Well, what is then the example of substitution of this vârtika ? That must be found out. Norw:-Sayana also explains सरसी in this way कृति न ॥ तिमिव शुषकं नीरसं सरसी महत्सरः ; सरसो मारादिलक्षणो डीप ; सरस्यां “सुपां सुलुक" इति सप्तम्यां महति सरसि निर्जले धर्मकाले शयानं निघसन्तं मण्डूकगणा: ॥ Vart:--So also (a) 5116 (6) 2017 and (c) qa17: as vargar fagna (Rig Ved. VII. 62. 5), for taigana The 3 is guiñatad to it by VII. 3. 111, and it is changed to wą before 9 (6) eråt va aqwą for gaja, (c) fewfaa amar (Rig Ved. I, 97, 8) for arat # The in sunt regulates the accent, The word as in the sûtra is compounded of three words 1+ a + 1, the word gta = $T + SIT H ३५६२ । अमो मश । ७।१।४० । fəalIRIPT PTZ ISHT SETTUTů: i framafan: Infefau:-'(RR34) fac rautaza'i nafugfafa uigi 3562. For the Personal ending am of the First Person Singular (in the Aorist) ma (1. 1. 55) is substituted in the Chhandas. The x here is the substitute of fæa, and not the accusative singular affix. The sin T is for the sake of pronunciation only. As aufą7# (for safuux ) Rig. I. 165. 8:1 The mę augment is diversely elided (VI. 4. 75). The iudicatory I of hy shows that the whole of the affix qx is to be replaced. The long is added by VII. 3.796. The substitution of Ħ for H is to preveat the change of # into anusvira as in VIII. 3. 25. Notu :--Thus 47+fat feu +ay+at+fHQ (II. 4. 43 ) = au+feat+fmu. ( III. 1. 44 )= 24+5. + fæa+fHU = 74 + +faq+++ ( III. 4. 101)= ax+38+ faa + ( Pres: ut Sutra ) -- ay+58 + Fere+sĘ + # ( VII. 3, 96 )=54+5€+ $¢ + # (VIII. 2. 28 )= aulæ ( VI. 1. 101 ). ३५६३ । लोपस्त आत्मनेपदेषु । ७।१ । ४१ । छन्दसि । “देवा अदुव्ह' । अदुहतेति प्राप्ते। 'दक्षिणतः शये' । शेत इति प्राप्ले। 'प्रात्मने- इति किम् । 'उत्सं दुहन्ति' । 3563. In the Chhandas the ta of the Atmanepada Personal ending is elidod. SA ·THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [Vol. III. CH. VII. 93563, As देवा अदुन्ह for अदुहत् ( see VII. 1. 8); दक्षिणतः शये for शेते ॥ Owing to the anuvritti of safa from VII. 1. 38, this substitution sometimes does not take place ; as : अात्मानमनृतंकुरुते ॥ Why in the Atmanepada ? Observe उत्सं दुन्ति कलश चतुर्बिलम् ॥ ३५६४ । ध्वमो ध्वात् ।।१।४२ । ध्वमो ध्वादित्यादेशः स्याच्छन्दसि । 'अन्तरेवोष्माणं वारयध्वात' वारयध्वमिति प्राप्त । 3564. In the Chhandas, 'dhyât' is substituted for the Personal ending 'dhvam'. As अन्तरवाष्माणं वारयध्वात् for धारयध्वम् ॥ Ait Br. II. 6. 14. ३५६५ । यजध्वेनमिति च।७।१।४३ । एनमिस्मिन्पर ध्वमन्त लोपो निपात्यते। 'यजध्वेनं प्रियमेधा' 'वकारस्य यकारी निया. त्यते इति वृत्तिकारोक्तिः प्रामादिकी। 3565. यजध्वनम् is irregularly formed in the Vedas for यजध्वमेनम् । The word af followed by Taloses its final 7 in the Vedas. As यजध्वन प्रियमेधः (Rig. VIII. 2. 37). The Kašika adds that a is also irregularly changed into य": the form would then be यजध्यैनम् ॥ This is, however, a mistake. ३५६६ । तस्य तात् । ७ ।। ४४ । लोटोमध्यमपुरुषबहुवचनस्यस्थाने तात् स्यात् । 'गात्रमस्यानूनं कणुतात्' । कणुति प्राप्ते। 'सूर्य चक्षुर्गमयतात्' । गमयति प्राप्ते । 3566. For the ending ta of the 2nd Pers. Pl. Imperative is substituted tat in the Chhandas. As गात्रं गात्रमस्या नूनं कणुतात् (for कृणुत), and ऊवध्ये गोहं पार्थिवं खनतात् ( for खनत) Ait Br. II. 6. 15, 16, अस्मारक्ष संसजतात् (= संसजत), सूर्य चक्षुर्गमयतात् (= गमयत). ३५६०। तप्तनप्तनथनाश्च ।।१।४५ ॥ तस्येत्येव । शणात ग्रावाणः । शृणुतेति प्राप्ते त । 'सुनातन पचतं ब्रह्मवाहसे' । 'दधातन दविणं चित्रमस्मै' । तनप, । 'मरुतस्यज्जुजुष्टन' । जुषवमिति प्राप्ते व्यत्ययेन परस्मैपदं भलुश्च । विश्वे देवासो मरुतो यतिष्ठन' । यत्संख्याकाः स्थत्यर्थः । यच्छब्दाच्छान्दसो हतिः । प्रस्तेस्तस्य धनादेशः । 3567. Also ta and tana (before both, on account of the indicatory Ø the preceding vowel of the verbal stem is strengthened, or if weak, not shortened), tana and thana are substituted for the ta of the 2nd Pers. Pl. Imperative in the Chhandas. Thus (1) शणोत ग्रावाणः (for शणुत), (2) सुनातन पचत ब्रह्म वाहसे (Rig. Ved. V. 34. 1). सुनातन सुनुत ॥ दधातन द्रविणं चित्रमस्मै (Rig Ved. X. 36. 13). The indicatory u. makes तप, and तनप non-डित ॥ffixes (I. 2. 4). (3) तन:-मरुतः तज्जुजुष्टन (Rig Ved. VII. 59. 9). for जुषध्वम, the Parasmai pada and Ślu are anomalous. (4) ya :-fasadatąt Fat afava. The pronoun uą becomes afa by taking the afix डति ; and अस् 'to be.' अस + त=अस+थन = स्थन ॥ Padamanjari says.

·Vor. III. CH. VII. 33572.] VAIDIC Ruzte. 03 "The Rig Vedins read यतिष्ठन instead of यतिष्टन in Surnhita Patha, of कोवस्तो महतो यतिष्टन ; and in Pada Patha they read it as यतिस्थ न ॥ In this case, it is derived from अस् “to be." Kåsikî derives it from an "to wish,” ३५६८ । इदन्तो मसि । ७ ॥१॥ ४६॥ मसीविभक्तिको निर्देशः। इकार उच्चारणार्थः । मसित्ययमिकाररूपचरमावयवविशिष्ठः स्यात् । मस इगांगम: स्यादिति यावत् । 'नमो भरन्त एमसि । त्वमस्माकं तत्र मसि' । इमः स्म इति प्राप्ते। 3568. The Personal ending mas becomes in the Chhandas masi ending with an i. Thus नमो भरन्त मर्मास ( Rig Ved. I. 1. 7), for इमः। त्वमस्माकं तव स्मसि (Rig Ved. VIII. 92. 32) for स्मः ॥ The word ofg in the Sûtra is read without any case ending. The 3 in it is for the sake of utterance only. "AF" assumes in the Vedas a form which ends in 1 In other words the augment com is added to the affix मस The sû tra might have been मस इक ॥ ३५६९ । क्त्वो यक् । ७ । १।४ । 'दिवं सुपर्णो गत्वाय । 3569. In the Chhandas the Absolutive affix ‘ktvâ' gets at the end, the augment 'ya.' Thus दिवं सुपर्णो गत्वाय (Rig Ved. VIII. 100.8). ३५७० । इष्टीनमिति च । ७।१।४८ । कृत्वाप्रत्ययस्य ईनमन्तादेशो निपात्यते । 'दृष्ट्वीनं देवान । इष्ट्वैति प्राप्ते। 3570. In the Chhandas the Absolutive ‘ishţvînam' is irregularly used for "ishtva.' To the root यज् is added कृत्वा, and the final या is replaced by ईनम् ॥ As दृष्ट्वीनम् देवान for दृष्ट्या देवान ॥ The w in the søtra indicates that there are other forms like this, as पीत्वीनम् for पोत्वा ॥ ३५०१। खात्व्यादयश्च ।।१।४। श्रादिशब्दः प्रकारार्थः। श्राकारस्यकारी निपात्यते । खन:स्सात्वी मलादिव' । 'पीत्यो सोमस्य वावृधे । नात्वा पीत्वेति प्राप्ते । 3571. 'Snatvi' &c. are irregularly formed in the Chhandas. Thus नात्वी मलादिव, for स्त्रात्वा; पीत्वी सोमस्य वावधे for पीत्वा ॥ The word wtfa et cetera means " of the form of," namely words having the form like 'सात्वी, as पीत्वी &c. ३५७२ । आज्जसेरसुक । ७।१ । ५० । प्रवर्णान्तादात्य रस्य जसोऽसुकस्यात् । देवासः । ब्राह्मणासः । 3572. After a stem ending in a long or short, the affix as of the Nom. Pl. gets, in the Chhandas_the augment as (asuk) at the end. - न -- HAR CM दा ·64 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [Vor. III. CH. VIL. 83572. Thus ब्राह्मणासः पितरः सोम्यासः for ब्राह्मणा: and सोम्यःRig VI, 75, 10. ये पूर्वांसो य उपरासः (Rig x. 15. 2) for पूर्व and उपरे ॥ So also पुतासः (R. I. 3. 4). NOTE : -The form जसे: instead of जस: is out of respect for anctent grammarians. ३५७३ । श्रीग्रामण्योश्छन्दसि ।।१।५६ । श्रामा नुट् ! 'श्रीणामुदारा धरुणारयीणाम् । 'मत ग्रामणीनाम् । 3573. In the Chhandas after the words sri' and 'gramani' Gen. Pl. am' gets the augment ‘n.' As श्रीणामुदारो धरुणो रयीणाम् (Rig Ved. x. 45.5). NOTE :-This sûtra could be well dispensed with: by I. 4. 5. f is optionally a Nadi word in the Genitive plural. We make the option of that sûtra a vya vasthita-vibhâshâ, by saying it is always Nadi in the Vedas, and optionally every where else. As regards मूत ग्रामणीनाम. we have सूताश्च यामणीश्च सूतग्रामणि, the Genitive Pl. of which by VII. 1. 54 will be सूतग्रामणीनाम्, । The necessity of this sútra will, however, arise if the compound be सूताच ते ग्रामण्यश्च सूतग्रामरायः ॥ ३५७४ । गोः पादान्ते ।।१।५७ । विमा हि त्वा गोतिं शूर गोनाम' । 'पादान्ते' किम् । 'गवां शता पुक्षयामेषु। पादान्तोपि क्वचिन । छन्दसि सर्वेषां वैकल्पिकत्वात् । 'विराजं गोपतिं गवाम् । 3574. After go, when standing at the end of a Rik verse, the augment na comes before the Gen. Pl. âm. As विद्यमाहि त्वा गोपति शूरगोनाम् (Rig Ved. x. 47. 1); but गवां गोत्रमुत्सृज aztet: in the beginning of a Páda. "All rules have exceptions in the Vedas” is an established maxiın, so at the end of a Pâda, sometimes this rule does not apply, as हन्तारं शत्रूणां कृधि विराजं गोपतिं गवाम् । गवां शता एक्षमिषु (Rig Ved. I. 122.7). ३५७५ । छन्दस्यपि दृश्यते । ७ ।। ६ । अस्थ्यादीनामनङ् । 'इन्द्रो दधीचो अभिः'। 3575. In the Chhandas also, the stems asthi, dadhi, sakthi and akshi are found to take the substitute anan before endings other than those mentioned in VII. 1. 75 S. 322. Thus the substitute is ordained before endings beginning with & vowel. In the Vedas it comes before affixes beginning with a consonant. As तुन्द्रो दधीचा प्रस्थभिः (Rig Ved. I. 84. 13). ३५७६ । ई च द्विवचने । ७।१।७७ । अस्थ्यादीनामित्येव । 'अक्षीभ्यां ते नासिकाभ्याम । 3576. The acutely accented '1' is substituted for the final of asthi, dadhi, sakthi and akshi, in the Chhandas, when the case, affixes of the dual follow.

·Vor. III. CH. VII. $3581.) VAIDIO RULES, 65 As श्रीभ्यान ते नासिकाभ्याम् ॥ (Rig vel. X. 163. 1). In at the augment is not added to the stem before the vowel-beginning ending, because VII. 1. 73, which ordained JR, is superseded by the present sîtra, and being once superseded, it is superseded for good. (सकद् गता विप्रतिषेधे यहाधितं तद्वाधितमे) ॥ ३५७७ । कस्वनःस्वतवसां छन्दति ।।१।। एषां नुम्स्यात्सी । 'कोङिन्द्रः' । स्ववान । स्वतवान् । 'उदोपठापूर्वस्य' (२४१४) । 3577. Tu, Bar and FAU take the augment num before the affix su (Nominative and Vocative Singular) in the Vedas. Thus ईदृङ, तादृङ् यादृङ्, मदन, स्ववान् स्वतवान्, ॥ The श of ईदृश (formed by III. 2. 60), is elided by VIII. 2. 23 ; aud z substituted for a by VIII. 2. 62. The lengthening in स्ववान and स्वतवान् is through VI. 4. 14. कोडिन्द्र (Rig. Ved. X. 108. 3). For Fagra see Rig, Ved. I. 35. 10; III. 54, 12, VI. 47. 12; For स्वतवान् see Rig Ved. IV. 2. 6. By VII. 1. 102 S2494 उर् is substituted for the final long ऋ of a root when it is preceded by a labial consonant belonging to the root. In the Vedas hoy ever, there is diversity. ३५७८ । बहुलं छन्दसि । ७।१ । १०३ । ततुरिः । जगुरि । पपुरिः॥ 3578. In the Chhandas, the ur substitution for 'ri' of a rootstem is diverse. That is, it takes place even when the preceding letter is not labial, and does not take place even when the letter is labial. Thus aaft: (Rig Ved. I. 145. 3) dat syft:, and ugft: from ito and q | All these words agfa, siyfe and थपुरिः are formed by the affix किन् (III. 1. 171). ३५७८ । हु हरेश्छन्दसि । ७ । २ । ३१ । हर्निष्ठायां, ''आदेशः स्यात् । 'अन्तर्मास हविर्धानम् । 3579. Hru is substituted for hvar (Bhvâdi 978) in the Chhandas before the Participial-affix. As हु तस्य चान्तु तस्य च, अह तमसि हविर्धानम् (Vaj San. 1. 9). But हृतम् in the classical literature. ३५८० । अपरिहताश्च । ७ । २३२ । पूर्वण प्राप्तस्यादेशस्याभावो निपात्यते । 'अपरिहताः सनुयाम वाजम् । 3580. The word 'aparih vritâh is irregularly formed in the Chhandas. The substitution required by the last satra, does not take place here. As अपरितः सनुयाम वाजम् (Rig I. TO0. 19). The word being found in the plural number in the Vedas, it is so shown in the sutra also. ३५८१ । सोमे हरितः । ०।२ । ३३ । - ·CG THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL, TIT. CI. VII. 8.3581. घड्गुणी निपात्यते । 'मा नः सोमो रितः । 3581. Hwaritah is irregularly formed from hori in the Chhandas, by guna substitution and it' augment, when it refers to Soma. As मा नः सीमो हुरितो, विहुरितस्त्वम् । ३५८२ । ग्रसितस्कभितस्तभितोत्तभितचत्तविकस्ता विशस्तृशंस्तृशास्तृतस्तृतरू- तृवस्तृवरूतृवरूजीरज्जवलितिक्षरिति(क्षमिति)वमित्यमितीति च । । २ । ३४ । अष्टादश निपात्यन्ते । तत्र 'सु' 'स्कम्भु 'स्तम्भु' एषामुदित्त्वानिष्ठायामिट प्रतिषेधे प्राप्त इग्निपात्यते । 'युवं शचीभिर्वसिताममुज्चतम्'। 'विकभिते अजरें । येन स्वः स्तभितम्'। सत्ये- नोभिता भूमिः । स्तभितेत्येव सिद्ध उत्पूर्वस्य पुनर्निपातनमन्योपसर्गपूर्वस्य मा भूदिति । 'चते याचने । 'कस गती। श्राभ्यां क्त स्येडभावः । चत्ताइतश्वसामुतः। त्रिधा ह श्यावमश्विना विकस्तम्' 'उत्तानाया हृदयं यद्विकस्तम्' । निपातनबहुत्वापेक्षया सूत्रे बहुवचन विकस्ता इति तेनैक- वचनान्तोऽपि प्रयोगः साधुरेव । 'शसु' 'शंसु' 'शासु' एभ्यस्तृच इडभावः । 'एकस्त्वष्टुरश्वस्याविशस्ता'। ग्रावग्राभ उतशंस्ता' । "प्रशास्ता पोता'। तरतेईज्ञोपच तृच 'उट्' ऊट' एतावागमी निपात्येते । 'समतारं रथानाम् । तरूतारम् । वस्तारम्-वरूतारम् । 'वरूत्रीभिः सुशरणो नो अस्तु' । अन्न डीबन्तनिपातनं प्रपंचार्थम् । वस्तशब्दो हिनिपातितः। ततो डीपा गतार्थत्वात् । उज्ज्वलादिभ्यप्रचतुर्यः शप इकारादेशी निपात्यते । 'ज्वल दीप्ती । 'क्षर संचलने । 'टुवम् उदगिरणे । 'श्रम गत्यादिषु । इह क्षरितीत्यस्यानन्तरं क्षमितीत्यपि कैचित्पन्ति । तत्र 'क्षमष सहने इति धातु/ध्यः।भाषायां तु 'अस्तस्कब्धस्तब्धोत्तब्धचतितविकसिनाः'। विशसिता-सिता-शासिता। तरीता-तरिता। वरीता-रिता | उज्ज्वलति ॥ क्षति । पाठान्तरे क्षति । वर्मात । श्रमति । 3582. In the Chhandas,the following irregular forms are found, some with, and some without the augment it-1 grasita, 2 skabhitas, 3 stabhita, 4 uttabhita, 5 chatta, 6 vikastah, 7 visastri, 8 Sanstri, 9 sastri, 10 tarutri, 11 taritri, 12 varutri, 13 varatri, 14 varůtriḥ, 15 ujjvaliti, 16 kshariti, (17 kshamiti,) 18 vamiti and 19 amiti. Of the above nineteen words, 1, 2, 3, and 4 are from roots ग्रसु 'to swallow' (I. 661) स्कम्भु 'to stop' (I. 414) and स्तम्भु (I. 413) all having an indicatory उ, and therefore by VII. 2 56 read with VII. 2. 15, their Nishtha would not have taken इट् ॥ Thus युवशचीभिः सिता (ver. ग्रस्त) ममुञ्चतम् Rig Ved. X, 39. 13. विकभिते अजरे (Rig Veda VI. 70. 1) (-विष्कब्धः); येन स्वस्तभितम् (Rig Ved. x. 121. 5) (- स्तब्धम्), ॥ सत्येनोभिता भूमिः (= उत्तब्धः) Rig Ved. X. 85. I. the irregularlity is only with the preposition 37, with other prepositions, the form Fifaa is not employed. Similarly (5) चत्ता (= चतिता) as in चत्तो इतश्चत्तामुतः (Rig Ved. X. 155. 2,) from चते याचने। (6) त्रिधाहश्याधश्विना विकस्तम् (Rig Veda I. 117.24). उत्तानाया हृदयं यद् विकस्तम्। (=विकसितम्) The word vikastah generally occurs in the plural and is therefore so shown in the Sûtra. But the singular is also valid. The forms, 7, 8, and 9 are from the roots शसु हिंसायाम and शंसु स्तुती, and शासु अनुशिष्टी with the afix सृच and no augnent; as स्कस्त्वष्टुरश्वस्याधिशस्ता (Rig - DI ARE ·VoL. III. CH. VI. $3584.] VALDIC RULES. 67 श्रम, forrmed । - Veda I. 162. 19) (= विसिता), उत शंम्ता सुधिप्रः (Rig Veda I. 162. 5) (=सिता), प्रशास्ता पोता (Rig Veda I. 94.6), (-प्रशासितम्)॥ The forms 10, 11, 12, 13 and 14 are from the roots and e(t and ) with the affix तृच and the augnment उट् and ऊट् ॥ As तस्तारं or तरुतारं रथानाम् Rig Veda x. 178. I. (= रितारम् or तरीतारम), वस्तारम् or वरूतारम् रथानाम् (=रितारम् or वरीतारम्); वरूत्रीभिः सुशरणोनो अस्तु (Rig Veda VII. 34. 22). वरूत्री: is exhibited in this form of Nom, pl. of the feminine get merely for the sake of showing one form in which it is found: mother fornm is अहोरात्राणि वैवस्त्रयः । Here the plural is fornnel irregularly, by taking the word as वरुति ॥ The fenuinine form could have been easily obtained from gez, by ad liug 310, the special mention is explanatory. The rest 15, 16, 17, 18 and 19 are fronm उत-ज्वल, क्षर, क्षम, वम् and with the vikarann yo and the aflix of the 3rd Per. Sing frau being substituted for of शप, or शप is elided and the augment इट् is added || As अग्निज्ज्वलित (= उज्ज्वति), स्तोमं क्षमिति (= क्षति), स्तोक क्षरिति (= नति), या मोम बमिति (= वमति), अभ्यमिति वरुणः (=अभ्यमति)। Sometimes we have अभ्यामीति, as रावमभ्यमीति॥ We should read here again VII. 2. 64. S. 2527. ३५८२ क ॥ बभूथाततन्यजगम्भवति निगमे । ।३ । ६४ । विमा तमुत्सं यत श्राबभूथ' । येनान्तरिक्षमुर्वाततंथ' । 'जग्टम्भा ते दक्षिणमिन्द्र हस्तम्' । त्वं ज्जोतिषा चितमो ववर्थ' । भाषायां तु । वभूत्रिय । पातेनिथ। जहिम । ववरिति । 3582A. In the Nigama (Veda) are found the irregular formas बभूथ, अाततन्य, जगभ्म and ववर्थ ।। As, विटमा तमुत्सं यत प्रा बभूथ । येनान्तरिक्षमुर्वा ततन्य (Rig Veda. III. 22. 2), जसम्भाते दक्षिामन्द्र हस्तम् (Rig Veda X. 47. 1). त्वं ज्योतिषा वितमो ववर्थ । In the classical literature, we have बभूविथ, श्रानिध, जगहिम aud अवरिथ res. pectively. ३५८३ । सनिससनिवांसम् ।।२।। सनिमित्येतत्पूर्वात्स नतेः सनातेर्वा कसोरिट् । एत्त्वाभ्यासलोपाभावश्च निपात्यते । * पावकादोनां छन्द सि *' प्रत्ययस्थात्कादित्वं नेति वाच्यम् । हिरण्यवर्णाः शुधयः पावकाः। 3583. The form sasanivănsam with sanin is irregularly formed. This is derived from सनोति or सति root with the affix K.vasu. As अजि fara afi pafaataan The augment of is added, there is no change of g of 87- to T, nor the elision of the reduplicate before all The other form is सेनिवासम् when not precedent by सनिम् ॥ This form सनिवांसम् is Vedie, in the classical literature we have सैनिवांसम् ॥ Várt :-The feminine of urah dc, in the Vedas does not take 3 for a As हिरण्यवर्णः शुचयः पावकाः, याम् ऋ लामका: नका. ke. But पाधिकाः, अलामिका the classical literature. (See VII. 3. 45. S. 464), ३५८४ । घालापा लेटिवा । ७।३ । ७० । 'वध मानि दाशुषे । सोमो दवढ्गन्धर्वाय' । 'यदग्निरनये. वात' । । स ·68 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. IIL. CH. VII. $3548. - 3584. The final of 'da' and dha' ('ghd roots) may optionally be elided in the Subjunctive "let'. As दधद्र ना दाशुषे (Rig. I. 35. 8.) सेामो ददट् गन्धर्वाय (Rig. X. 85. 41.) But also यदग्निरग्नये ददात् ॥ ३५८५ । मीनातेनिगमे । ७।३ । ८१ । शिति हस्वः । 'प्रमिणन्ति ब्रतानि'। लोके प्रमीणाति । 'अस्ििसचोऽपृक्त' (२२२५) । 3585. In the Chhandas 'm' is shortened before a 'sit' affix. As प्रमिनन्ति व्रतानि (Rig. x. 10.5.) The न becomes ण (प्रमिणन्ति according to Kasika) by VIII. 4. 15. Why in the Chhandas ? Observe प्रमीणाति ॥ By VII. 3. 96. S. 2225 a single consonantal sârvadhâtuka affix gets the augment ईट, after अस् (अस्ति) and after the Aorist character सिच ॥ But in the Chhandas, there is diversity. ३५८६ । बहुलं छन्दसि । ७।३ । १७ । 'सर्वमा इदम् । अस्तेर्लङ, तिय ईडभाव अपक्तत्वादल्यादिलोयः । सत्व विसी। संहितायां तु भाभगो (१६७) इति यत्वं । 'लोपः शाकल्यस्य' (६७) इति यलोपः । गोभिरक्षाः रक्षपालने लुङ, 'अतोल रान्तस्य' (२३३०) इति शुद्धिः । इडभावश्कान्द सः। अट् शेषं पूर्ववत् ॥ हस्वस्य गुणः (२४२)। 'नसि चं' (२४१)। * जसादिषु छन्दसि वा वचनं प्राड है। चड्युपधायाः'। 'अधा शतक्रत्वो यूयम्' शतक्रतवः । 'पश्वेनभ्या यथा गवें । पशवे । 'नाभ्यस्त- स्याचि-' (२५०३) इति निषेधे । * बहुलं छन्दसीतिवक्तव्य म् ' । 'श्रानुषग्जुजोषत्' । 3586. In the Chhandas, a single consonantal Sarvadhâtuka affix gets diversely the augment 'it' after as and such a As श्राप एवेदं सलिलं सर्वमाः ॥ Here श्राः is used instead of श्रासीत् ॥ NoPEE -प्राः is thus evolved, अ+ अस् + लङ + तिम् । The ई that would have come by S. 2225 does not come. So we have + अस् +त् = आस् (the final consonant t is elided by VI. 1. 68 S. 252). Then the v is changed to and then to visarga : and we have WIT I Then in saubita, the visarga or is obanged to य by VIII. 3. 17 S. 167. and we get प्राय ॥ Then this य is elided by VIII. 3. 198, 67, and so we have सर्वम् प्रा इदम् ॥ Similarly in wrfaran: 1 It is the aorist (FS) of ra 'to protect.' 'The Vriddhi takes place by S. 2330. The absence of sz is the Vaidic irregularity. By VII. 3. 108, a guņa is substituted for short & and 3 in the Vocative Singular, and also in the Nominative Plural by VII. 3. 109. The following Vårtika makes an exception to these as well as the other rules of the third chapter of the Seventh Book from sutra 108 downwards. Vart:-All these rules up to the end of this (7th Book, 3rd) chapter are of optional application in the Vedas. As अम्बे or अम्ब, पूर्णा दर्वि or पूर्णा दर्वी, अधा शतक्रत्वः (Rig Ve la X. 97. 2) or शतक्रत्वः पश्वे नभ्यो यथागवे (Rig Veda I. 43. 2) or पशवे, नभ्यः, किकिदोव्या, किकिदीविना ॥ By VIT, 3. 87 the guina is not substituted for the penultimate short s, 3 in the reduplicated form of a rout, before a Sárvadbatuka affix beginning with - ·R Vol. III. CH. VII. 83586.] VAIDIC RULES. - a vowel and having an indicatory प ॥ The following Vårtika nakes an erception. Tart: -Thare is diversity in the Vedas. As अनुपक जुजोषत् (Rig Veda III. 4. 10) the लेट of जुस् ॥ ३५८७ । नित्यं छन्दसि ।।४।। छन्दसि विषये चढ्युपधाया ऋवर्णस्य ऋचित्यम् । अवीवृधत् । 3587. Short is in variably substituted in the Chhandas for the penultimate or ऋ of a Causative stem, in the Reduplicated Aorist. As अवीवृधत् (Rig Veda VIII. 8. 8) अवीवधताम्, अवीवृधन ॥ ३५८८ । न च्छन्दस्यपुत्रस्य । ७।४। ३५ । पुभिमस्यादन्तस्य कचित्वदो? न । मित्रयुः। 'क्याच्छन्दसि' (३१५०) इति । 'अपुत्रस्य' किम् । 'पुत्रीयन्तः सुदानवः । * अपुत्रादीनामिति वाच्यम् *' । 'जनीयन्तोऽन्वग्रवः' । जनमिच्छन्तीत्यर्थः 3588. In the Chhandas the rules causing lengthening, or the substitution of long 'i' for the final vowel of the stem before the affix kyach, do not apply, except in the case of putra. Thus मित्रयुः, संस्थेदयुः, देवाञ् जिगात सुम्नुयुः ॥ But पुत्रीयन्तः सुदानवः (Rig. VII. Vart:-It should be rather stated पुत्र and the rest: as जनीयन्तोऽन्वग्रवः ॥ Ses III. 2. 170, for the affix उ ।। ३५८६ । दुरस्युषिणस्युषण्यति रिवण्यात । । ४ । ३६ । सते क्याच निपात्यन्ते । भाषायां तु उप्रत्ययाभावादृष्टीयति । द्रविणोयति । वृषोयति । रिष्टोति। 3589. In the Chhandas दुरस्यु, द्रविणस्यु, वृषण्यति and रिषण्यति are irregularly formed. As अवियोना दुरस्युः, (- दुष्टीयति with the affix क्यच added to दुष्ट), द्रविणस्य विपन्यया (दविणीर्यात, here द्रविणस् is substituted for द्रविण similarly). वषगति - वषीर्यात (वषण substituted for qष)॥रिषगर्यात - रिष्टीयति (रिषण substituted for रिष्ट)। ३५९० । अश्वाघस्यात् ।।४।३० । 'अश्व' 'घ' एतयोः क्यच्यातस्याच्छन्दसि । “अश्वायन्तो मघवन् । 'मा त्वा का अघायवः । 'न च्छन्दसि-' (३५८८) इति निषेधी नेत्त्वमात्रस्य । किंतु दीर्घस्यापोति । अत्रेटमेव सूत्रं ज्ञापक्रम् । 3590. In the Chhandas, long 'a' is substituted for the final of aśva and agha, before the Denominative kyach. As अश्वायन्तो मघवन् (Rig. VII. 32. 23), मा त्वा वका अघायवो विदन ॥ This also indicates that other words do not lengthen their vowel in the Vedas before काच, as taught in VII. 4. 35. S, 3588. See Vârtika to III. 1. 8. The word प्रघायु rin Rig. I. 120.7, 27;3.. 96.4.) - - occuts . AR RAS NE M । य । S se न ·THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VoL. III. ON. VII. F3572. । ३५९१ । देवसुन्नयोर्यजुषि काठके । । ४ । ३८ । अनयोः क्यचि प्रातस्याटयजुषि कठशाखायाम् । 'देवायन्तो यजमाना' । 'सुम्मायन्तो हवामहे । इह यजुःशब्दो न मन्त्रमात्रयरः किं तु वेदोपलक्षकः । तेन ऋगात्मकेपि मन्त्र यजुर्वेदस्ये भवति । किं च ऋग्वेदेऽपि भवति । सचेन्मन्तो यजुषि कठशाखायां दृष्टः । 'यजुधि' इति किम् । 'देवाज्जिगाति सुखयुः' । बचानामप्यस्ति कठशाखा ततो भवति प्रत्युदाहरणमिति हरदत्तः । 3591. The long 'a' is substituted for the final of devar and sumna before the Denominative kyach in the Yajush Kathaka. As देवायन्तो यजमानः सुम्सायन्तो हवामहे । Why in the Yajus ? Observe देवाग्जि- गाति | According to Haradatta the author of Padamanjari, this counter example is taken from the Katha Shâkhâ of the Rig Veda, for the Rig Veda also, has a Katha Shakha. Why do we say in the Kathaka. ! Observe सुम्युरिदमासात् । In this sûtra, Yajush is not confined merely to the Mantra, but means the Veda in general. Therefore the rule will apply to a Mantra of the Rig Veda also, if it is found in the Yajur Veda. That is, the rule will apply to a Mantra of the Rig Veda also, in the Rig Veda, if it be such a Mantra which is coramon to the Rig and Yajur Veda Katha Shâkhân ३५९२ । कव्यध्वरपृतनाच लोपः । ७।४॥ ३९ । 'कवि' 'अध्वर' 'एतना' एषामन्त्यस्य लोपः स्यात्वयचि परे ऋचिविषये । 'स पूर्वया निविदा कध्यतायोः । अयं वा मधुपाणिम्' । 'दमयन्तं एतन्यून' । 'वधाहिः' (३०७६)। जहातेश्च कित्त्व (३३३९) । 3592. In the Rig Veda, the final of कवि, अध्वर and पृतना is dropped before the Denominative क्यच । स पूर्वया निविदा कव्यतायोः (Rig. I. 96. 2). अध्वर्यु वा मधुपाणिम् (Rig Veda X. 41. 3) दमयन्तम्एतन्यून (Rig Veda X. 74. 5). By VII. 4. 42. S. 3076 हि is substituted for the धा of दधाति before an affix beginning with and having an indicatory of By VII. 4. 43, S. 3331 fx is. gubstituted for the et of seifa before ma i But in the Vedas there is diversity ३५८३ । विभाषा छन्दसि ।।४।४४ । हित्वा शरीरम्' । होत्वा वा । 3593. Hi is optionally substituted for 'hi before ktva' in the Chhandas. As हित्वा शरीरं यातव्यं, or हीत्वा also. The long t of VI. 4. 62 deos nok take place also as a Vedic irregularity. ३५९४ । सुधितवसुधितनेमधितधिववधिषीय च ।। ४ । ४५ । 'सु' 'वसु' 'नेम' एतत्पूर्वस्य दधातः क्ते प्रत्य य इत्त्व निपात्यते । 'गर्भ माता सुधितं वक्ष- णासु' । वसुधितमग्नी । नधिता न पोस्या। क्तिन्यपि दृश्यते । 'उत श्वेतं वसुधि'तं निरके । धिष्वग्वज दक्षिण इन्द्र हस्ते । धत्स्वैति प्राप्त । 'सुरेता रेतो धिषीय' । प्राशीलिङ । इट् । 'इटोत्' (२२५७) धासोयेति प्राप्ने । 'प्रपा भि' (४४२) । * मासश्छन्द्र सीति वक्तव्यम् *' । माद्भिः शद्भिः । 'स्यवः स्वतवसोमयसश्चेष्यते । स्वतर्वाद्रः। अवतेरसुन् । शोभनमवो येषां ते स्व वसस्तैः । 'तु' दति सानो धातुस्तस्मादसुन् । स्वं । । । ।

·VoL. III. CH. VII. 83596.] VAIDIC RULES. 71 मासdc. तवो येषां ते स्वतद्भिः। 'समुर्षाद्भजायथाः' । मिथुनेऽसिः । 'वसेः किच्च इ.सप्रत्यय इति घरदत्तः। पञ्चपादीरीत्या तु 'उषः कित्' इति प्राख्याख्यातम् । 'न कवतेयडि' (२६४१) । 3594. The following five Vedic forms are irregularly formed, namely सुधित, वसुधित, नेर्माधत, धिषव and धियीय । Of these five, gfun, agfua and awfua are formed from the root ut with the affix क्त, preceded by सु, वसु and नेम ॥ As गर्भ माता सुधितम् (Rig Veda x. 27. 16). (= मुहित), . वसुधितमग्नी जुहोति (=वहितं). The word वसुधितं is a Kurinadhâraya compound, according to Haradatta. In the Veda-Bhasya it is explained as वसूनां धातारं प्रदातारम् ॥ The form वसुधिति with किन is alsh found in the Vedas. As :-उतश्वेतं वसुधिति निरके (Rig Veda VII. 90. 3). नेर्माधता न पौस्या (Rig Veda X. 93. 13) (= नेर्माहता) ॥ नेम् means 'halk.' धिष्व is Imperative 2nd Per. Sg. of धा, there is no reduplication, as धिष्व सोमम् = धत्स्व ॥ धिष्व बनम हस्त प्रा- afaufa: (Rig Veda VI. 18. 9). fuulu is Benedictive Atmauepada Ist Per. Sg. of धा, the regular fornn being धासीय ॥ See III. 4. 106. By VII. 4. 48. S. 442, a is substituted for the final of the stem uy before a case-ending beginning with ## In the Vedas this substitution takes place in the case of मास ८c. Värlika: The substitution takes place in the Chhandas for the final of Thus मादिभः, शरभिः ॥ मास becomes मास् by VI. 1. 63. lehti :-The æ substitution should take place, according to Patavjuli, after स्ववस्, स्वतवस and उषस् also. As स्वभिः । स्व वस् is derived from अव् 'to protect,' with the affix and the prefix सु॥ It means the whose protection is good.' See Rig Veda I. 35, 10; &o. The word haag is derived from the root T with the affix असुन and Prefix It means yaart or wealthy. As Baafar: i See S. 3633. Similarly उद्भि: as in समुद्भिः अजायथाः (Rig Veda I. 6. 3). This word is formed by the affix असि which is treated as कित् after वस् (See Unadi IV. 222 and 233). This is according to the opinion of Haradatta, who follows evidently the lost Uņâdi Sûtras which consisted of Ten Padas. In the present Oñadi Sûtra of Five Padas we have sa: faria and not aà: fria u aafar सूर्येण सह इति उषा ॥ है। By VII. 4. 63. S. 2641, the Palatal is not substituted for the Guttural of the reduplicate of कु (कवते) in the Intensive. In the Vedas this prohibition applies to the root कृष् also. ३५९५ । कृषश्छन्दसि । ७।४ । ६४ । ययभ्यासस्य चुत्वं न । करोफष्यते । 3595. The Palatal is not substituted for the Guttural of the reduplicate of 'krish' in the Chhandas, when in the Intensive. As करीकथ्यते यज्ञकुणपः; otherwise चरीकृष्यते कृषीबलः । ३५८६ । दार्धात दर्धर्तिदर्षिबोभतुतितोलापनीफणसंसनिष्यदकरिक्रत्क- निम इदरिमविध्वतोवियतत्तरित्रतःसरीसृपतंबरीवृजनमर्मज्यागनीगन्तीति च । । ४।६५ ।

·73 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [Vor. III. CH. VII. F3596. - । । - । एतेऽष्टादश निपात्यन्ते। प्रायास्त्रयो घडो धारयते। भवतेयङलुगन्तस्य गुणाभावः । तेन भाषायां गुणो लभ्यते । तिजेर्यङ्लुगन्तालक । इयतर्लाट हलादिः शेषापधादा रेफस्य लत्वमित्वाभावश्च निपात्यते 'अलर्षि युध्म खजकत्युरन्दर । सिपा निर्देशो न तन्त्रम् । 'अलर्ति दक्ष उत'। फगतेरापूर्वस्य यह लुगन्तस्य शतर्यभ्यासस्य नीगागमो निपात्यते । 'अन्वापनीफणत्' । स्यन्दः संपूर्वस्य यङ्लुकि शतर्थग्यासस्य निक । धातुसकारस्य प्रत्वम् । करोतेर्यालगन्तस्याभ्यासस्य चुत्वाभावः । 'करिक्रत् । क्रन्दनुडि च्ले रद्विवचनमभ्यासस्य चुत्वाभावा निगागमश्च । 'कनिन्दज्जनुषम् । अक्रन्दी- दित्यर्थः। 'बिभर्नेरभ्यासस्य जश्त्वाभावः। "बि यो भरिभदोषधीषु' । ध्वरतेयङ्लुगन्तस्य शतर्यभ्य सस्य विगागमा धातो कारलेपश्च । 'दविध्वतो रश्मयः सूर्यस्य'। युतेरभ्यासस्य संप्रसारणाभावोऽत्त्व विगागमश्च । 'विद्युतवीटाच्छोशुचानः' । तरतेः शतरि लावभ्यासस्य रिगागमः। महर्जाि तरित्रतः' सप्रेः शरि श्लो द्वितोयैक. वचनेरीगागमोऽभ्यासस्य । बजेः शतरि श्लावभ्यासस्य रोक । मजेर्लिटि लभ्यासस्य रुक धातोश्व युक् । गमेराङ पूर्वस्य लटि लावभ्यासस्य चुत्वाभावी नीगागमश्च । 'चतयन्ती वेठा गनीगन्तिं कर्ण 3596. In the Chhandas are found the following eighteen irregularly reduplicated forms:-1 dâdharti, 2 dardharti, 3 dardharshi, 4 bobhutu. 5 tetikte, 6 alarshi, 7 a paniphanat, 8 sam sanishyadat 9 karikrat' 10 kanikradat, 11 bharibhrat, 12 davidhvatah, 13 davidyutat, 14 taritratah, 15 sarisępatam, 16 varivrjat, 17 marmrjya and 18 a ganiganti. The word ware is drawn in to this sútra, by force of all The frora दार्ति, is either from the Causative of the root घड़ अवस्याने or from in the शलु or या लुक, there is lengthening of the abhyasa and elision of णि ॥ (3) 30 also zz'fa is the form in slu, with mak augment of the abhyasa. (3) दोर्ष if it be a form of यह लुक. there is no irregularity. (4) बाभूतु. is from भू in the Intensive ( या लुक ) Imperative, irregularly without gins (6) अलर्षि is form the root ऋ ( sufr ) in Present, 2ud Person, the 5 of abhyâsa is not elided, though required by VII. 4. 60, and this r is changed th) ल irregularly. This form is found in the 3rd Person also, as अर्ति दक्षः ॥ अर्षि युध्म खजकत्युरंदरः (Rig Veda VIII 1. 7). अलर्ति दक्ष उत (Rig Veda VIII. 48. 8). (7) श्रा पनीफणत् is from फण् with ा augment and शत् affix is added to यड़ लुक, and in the reduplicate नो is added. (8) संस- निध्य इत् is from स्यन्द with the Preposition सम्, in the Intensive yai luk, with शत affix, fæ being added in the ahhyâsa, the root y is changed to all The Preposition H is not absolutely necessary, with other Prepositions also we have this form as श्रा सनिष्यवत् ॥ (9) करिक्रत is from क ( करोति ), in the Intensive yari luk, with शत, in the albhyasa there is no palatal change (VII. 4. 62). and nि is added to the reduplicate. (10) कनिक्रदत् from क्रन्द in the Aorist with अह reduplication, there is no chutva (VII. 4. 62) of the reduplicate, and the augment नि is added. In the classical literature, the form is अक्रन्दीत् ॥ कनिक्रदज्जनुषं (Rig Veda II. 4. 4). (11) भरिभत् from भू (बिति) in yan luk with शष्ट, without r of VII. 4. 76, ·3598. I' is diversely substituted in the Chhandas. for the Vot. III. CH. VIII. 3600.] VAIDIC Rults. without jastva, and रि is added to the reduplicate. वियो भरिभृदोषधीषु (Rig Veda II. 4. 4). (12) दैविध्यत: from va (ध्वरते) in the yan luk, Hatri, plural number Nominative. The fa is added to the reduplicate, the is elided, afa- ध्वतः रश्मयः मूर्यस्य ॥ (Rig Veda IV. 13. 4.). (13) दविद्युतम् is from dyut, yui luk with śatr, there is no vocalisation of the reduplicate, with change and fa aug. ment. (14) afera: from a (atfa) with ślu šaty, genitive singular: and ft added to abhyasa. सहोर्जा तरित्रतः (Rig Veda IV. 40. 3). (15) सरीसपत् from सए with slu Satr, Acousative with री added to abhyasa. (16) वरीवजत् from वज़ with slu, Satx and री augment. (17) मर्मज from मज् with लिट् ( Perfect ) णन, स added to abhyasa, and य added to the root, and there is no vxiddhi, because there is no short penultimate now. In fact VII. 2. 114 is to be qualified by the words लघूपध from VII. 3. 86. (18) प्रा गनीगन्ति is from गम् with the Preposition श्रा, in the Perfect, with slu, there is no chutva (VII. 4. 62), and augment नी is added. वयन्ती बेदा गनीगन्ति (Rig Veda VI. 75. 3). The word gfa in the aphorism indicates that other forms, similar to these, are also to be included. ३५८७ । ससर्वात निगमे । ७ । ४ । ७४ । सूर्तलिटि परस्मैपदं युगागमोऽभ्यासस्य चात्वं निपात्यते। 'ष्टिः समूब विरम् । सुषुव इति भाषायाम्। 3597. In the Chhandas sasuva is irregularly formed in the Perfect. It is derived from g * Thus tive: aga pfat otherwise aga i Rig Veda IV. 18.100 ३५९८ । बहुलं छन्दसि । । ४ । ७८ । अभ्यासस्येकारः स्याच्छन्दसि । 'पूर्ण विष्टि' । वशेरेतयद्रम। vowel of the reduplicate, in the Reduplicated Present-form. As yuf faare (from an). इति सप्तमोऽध्यायः । कर्णम् ॥ CHAPTER VIII. ३५९ । प्रसमुपोदः पादपरणे । ८ । १॥ ६ ॥ राधा स्तः पादपूरणे । 'प्रप्रायमग्निः' । संसमिट्युवसे' । 'उपोप मे परामश' । 'किं नोडे 3599. Pra, sam, upa, and at are repeated, when by so doubling, the foot of a verse is completed. As प्र प्रायग्निर्भरतस्य शरवे (Rig. VII. 8. 4),संसमिट्युवसे वृषन् । (Rig Veda X. 191. 1). उपोप में परामश (Rig Veda I. 126. 7), किं नोबुद्ध हर्षसे दातवाउ (Rig Veda IV. 21.9). ३६०० । छन्दसीरः । ८।२। १५ ॥ द्रवर्णान्ताढेफान्ताच्च परस्य मतोर्मस्य वः स्यात् । हरिवते हर्यश्वाय' । गीर्वान । 10 ·THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI, VOL. III. CH. VIII. 93600. 3600. In the Chhandas v is substituted for the 11 of mat, when the stem ends in i, î or r. As, हरिवते हर्यश्वाय (Rig Veda III. 52.7). Of the stems ending in t we have गोर्वान &c. ३६०१ । अनो नुट् । ।२।१६ ॥ अनन्तान्मतोर्नुट् स्यात् । 'अक्षणवन्तः कर्णवन्तः । श्रस्थन्वन्तं यदनस्था बिभर्ति । 3601. The affix mat gets the augment ‘nuţ' in the Chhandas, after a stem ending in an. As अक्षयवन्तः कर्णवन्तः सखायः (Rig Veda X.71. 7) अस्थन्वन्त्रंयदनस्या बिर्सि (Rig Veda. I. 164.4). ३६०२॥ नादस्य।८।२।१७॥ नान्तात्परस्य घस्य नुट् । 'शुपथिन्तरः' । 'भूरिदाबस्तुड्वाच्यः । भूरिदाबत्तरो जनः । '+ इद्रथिनः + । रथीतरः' । 'रथीतमं रथीनाम् । 3602. In the Chhandas, the affixes tar and tam receive the augment nut after a stem in n. The affixes तरप् and तमप् are called घ। Thus सुपथिन् । तर - सुपथि + तर (VIII: 2. 7) = सुथ + नतर (VIII. 2. 17) - सुपथिन्तरः । Vårt :-The augment of is added to these afixes after yfizia7; as eft दावत्तरः (III. 2. 74, the affix is निप.) जनः (Rig Veda VIII. 5. 39). Vart: -Long is the substitute of the final of fuq before at and HH 1 The word tfua is formed by the affix gfa iv the sense of Agu, 1 The final z is first elided by VIII. 2. 7, and then for the short s of tfu the long is substituted by the present vårtika. If the longes were substituted for the final a of fun as रथिई + तर, then this long ई being asiddha, it could not be compounded by eki. desa with the preceding & into and the form would ulways remain trugat: 1 As रथोतरः, and रथीतमं रथीनाम् (Rig Veda I. 11. 1). Or this ई may be considered to have come after रथ in the sense of मतुप । ३६०३ । नसत्तनिषत्तानुत्तप्रतूर्तमूर्तगानि च्छन्दसि । ८।२।६१ ॥ सदेनंजयूर्वाभि पूर्वाञ्च निष्ठाया नत्वाभावा निपात्यते । 'नसत्तमञ्जसा' । नित्तमस्य - 'रस' . प्रसन्न निषगणमिति प्राप्त । उन्देर्नजपूर्वस्थानुत्तम् । प्रतूर्तर्माित त्वरतेः । तुर्वीत्यस्य वा । मूर्तमिति स' इत्यस्य । गूर्तीति 'गूरी' इत्यस्य । 3603. In the Chhandas we have the following irregular Participles : nasatta, nishatta, anutta, pratùrtta, sûrtta and gûrtta. The words war and face are derived from the root BZ preceded by 2 and नि, and there is not the न change of VIII. 2. 42. Thus नसत्तमज्जसा ॥ In the classical iterature we have असन्त्रम् ॥ So also fauni: in the Vedas, as in निषत्तमस्य चरतः (Rig Ved. 1. 146. 1) but निषण्ण: in the classical literature. The word अनुत्तः is from उन्द with the negative अन् । The option of VIII. 2. 56 does not apply here. As अनुनमा से मघवन (= अनुचम्) ॥ प्रतूतम् is from स्वर or सूर्व, 88 प्रतूर्त वाजिनम (= प्रतूर्णम्) ॥ When it is derived from rat theu FZ is added by VI. 1. 20; aud when froin - - ·Vor. III. CH. VITT. $3608.] VAIDIC RULES. । पूर्व then VI. 4. 21 is applied. मूर्त is from , the ris changed to उ irregularly; AN मूर्तीगावः = सतागाधः ॥ is from गूर 28 गूर्ता अमतस्य (गुण) ३६०४ । अम्वरूधरवरित्युभयथा छन्दसि ।।२।२० ॥ रेफोवा। अस्व-प्रम रेव। ऊध सव-ऊधरेव । श्रव एव-श्रवरेव। 3604. In the Chhandas, both ru and ra are substituted for the final of amnas, adhas, and avas. Thus अम्म एव or अब रेव, ऊध एव or ऊधरव; श्रव सव or वरव When is substituted for the fiuals, this is replaced by a by VIII, 3. 17, which is elided. by VIII. 3. 19. The word अमस् means a little:, and प्रव 'protection.' ३१०५ । भुवश्च महाव्याहृतः । ८।२।७१ ॥ भुव इति-भुवरिति । 3605. In the Chhandas, ru and ra may replace the final of the word 'bhuvas' when used as a mahậ- vyåhriti. This भुवरित्यन्तरिक्षम् or भुजः इत्यन्तरिक्षमः ॥ The mahā-vyahritis are three भः, भुवः and स्वः॥ ३६०६ । आमभ्यादाने। ८।२।८७॥ ओशब्दस्यालुतः स्यादारम्भे । 'ओ३म् अग्निमोले पुरोहितम् । अभ्यादाने किम् । श्रीमित्ये काक्षरं प्रहर । 3606. The vowel in om is pluta in the beginning of a sacred text. The word maara means the commencement of a sacred" mantra or vedio text. Thus म अग्निमी लें पुरोहितं यत्तस्य देवमत्विजं ॥ (Rig I. 1. 1.) Why do we say "in the beginning"? Observe ओमित्येतदक्षरमुद्गीथमुपासीत (Chhandogya Upanishad I. 1. 1). Here ira is not used to indicate the com. mencement of Text or Mantra, but is itself the subject of comment, ३६०७। ये यज्ञकर्मणि । ८।२।८८॥ मे३ बामदेयज्ञ-'ति क्रिम् । ये यजामहे । 3607. The vowel of ye becomes plata in a sacred text, when it is employed in a sacrificial work: Thus येयजामहे | Why do we say when employed in a sacrificial work ! Observe ये यजामह इति पञ्चाक्षरम्: “Ye vaj.amahe" consists of five syllables. Here it is a simple recitation. ३६०८ । प्रणवष्ट: । ८।३।। यज्ञ कर्मणि टेरोमित्यादेशः स्यात्। 'श्रपा रेतांसि जिन्वतोम' । 'टे किम् । हलन्तान्त्यस्य मा भूत । 3608. In a saerificial work, ओ३म् is substituted for the final vowel, with the consonant, if any, that inay follow it, of a sentence. The word यज्ञकर्मणि understood here also. 'The word प्रणव means श्राम It is the name given to this syllable. I'his श्रोम is substituted for the final letter..

·THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDE. VOL. III. CH. VIII. 93608. (टि) of that word which stands either at the end of a Pada of a sacred hymn ORat the end of a hemistich of such Rik. Thus for wai Taife fnafa (Rig. VIII. 44. 16), we may have sai Taffe fruiza ! So also for aais foruma yag: (Rig. III. 27. 1), we may have देवाञ् जिगाति सुम्नयो ३म् ॥ The word fe is repeated in this aphorism in spite ofits anuvritti from VIII. 2. 82, to indicate that replaces the whole of the last syllable, with its vowel sund consonant. Had टि not been repeated, then by the rule of अलोऽन्यस्य the. bual letter only of the fa portion of a sentence would have been replaced. Thus: in सुम्नयुः the visarjaniya alone would have been replaced. When not employed in connection with sacrificial works, there is no such substitution. Thus in the simple reading of the Vedas, we should always recitę. अपां रेतांसि जिन्वति ॥ ३६०९ । याज्यान्तः ।।२।१०।। ये याज्यान्ता मन्त्रास्तेषामन्न्यस्य टेः प्लुतो यज्ञकर्मणि । 'जिह्यामग्ने चषे हव्यवाहा म्। अन्तः किम् । 'याज्यानामनां वाक्यसमुदायरूपाणां प्रति वाक्यं टेः स्यात् । सन्त्यिस्य चेष्यते । 3609. The last vowel at the end of Mantras called Yajyas, when employed in sacrificial works, iş, pluta and has the Acute. Thus स्तोमविधेमाग्नये३ (Rig. VIII. 43. 11), जिवामग्ने चक्र हव्यवाहारम् (Rig. X, 8.6). Why do we say at the end" ? There are some Yajya hymns, consisting of several sentences. The final vowel (ft). of every sentence would have become pluta, in such a hymn. To prevent it, the word “anta" is used, so that the final vowel of the bymn at the end of all, becomes pluta, ३६१० । बहिप्रेष्यनीषड्वाषडाबहानामादेः । ८ । ३ । ९१ ॥ एषामादेः प्लुता घनकर्मशिः। 'अग्नयेऽनुब्रू हि' । 'अग्नये गोमयानि प्रे३ष्य' । 'अस्तू औषट'। सोमस्याग्ने बीहो वाइषद । 'अग्निमा३वह' । 3610. In a sacrificial work, the first syllable of ब्रहि,प्रेष्य, औषट् वौषट् and आवह is pluta. Thus अग्नयेऽनुबहि (Maitr s. I. 4. 11), अग्नये गोमयानि (or न) प्य, अस्तु श्रौँ षट् ; सोमस्याग्ने वीही३ वा षट्. अग्निम् ३वह ॥ So also in पिज्यायामनुस्वधा on the analogy of बूहि, on the analogy of afe, so also stETIUT # The word वौषट् is illustrative of the six forms वषट्, वौषट्, वाषद, वोक्षद, वाक्षट् वक्षाट् ॥ But there is no prolation in श्रावह देवान यजमानाय ; आवह जात वेदः ॥ ३६११ । अग्नीतप्रेषणे परस्य च । ८।२।९२ ॥ अग्नीधः प्रेषण प्रादेः प्लुतस्तस्मात्परस्य च । 'श्राश्वयं । नेह । 'अग्नीदग्नीन्विहर। बहि स्मोहि। 3611. In an order given to Agnidhra priest, the first syllable as well as the succeeding syllable is pluta. In a Yajña, the principal priests (ritvij) are four, Adhvaryu, Udgåtâ, Hotâ and Brahnia, Every one of these has three subordinate priests (ritvij) under him. - ·VOL. IIT. CH. VIII. $3612. VAIDIO RULES. In a summons Or The duty of Agnidhra is to kindle the sacrificial fire. call (@at) made by the Adhvaryu, who is the Director of ceremouies, to the Ågnidhra to perforn the functions of Ayuidh, both syllables become pluta. The word waita tau is a compound - watu: OR " call or summons relating to Agnidh duty." Thu8 #1 * 18 au 2 au The pluta takes place only in these examples ; therefore, not here, as matarata fatt; aie paruta i ३६१२ । विभाषा पृष्ट प्रतिवचते हो।।२।६३ ॥ सुतः । अकार्षीः कटम् । अकार्ष हो । अकार्ष हि । 'एष्ट-'ति किम् । 'कटं करिति हि'। हैं:' किम् । करोमि ननु। 3612. 'Hi' at the end of an answer to a question may optionally be pluta. Thus Q. straf: n gaan? Ans.md or min fa Why do we say "in answer to a question" ? Observe a fura fx Why do we say #: “of fire" ? Observe afar ननु। ३६१३ । निगृह्मानुयोगे च । ८।२।६४ अत्र यहाक्यं तस्य टेः सुतो वा । 'श्रयामावास्येत्यात्य' । अमावास्येत्येवं वादिनं युक्तया स्वम- तात्यूच्याव्य एवमनुप्रयुज्यते । 3613. The end syllable of that sentence is optionally pluta, when it asserts something which has been refuted, and is employ. ed by the victor by the way of censure. The word faus: means the refutation of another's opinion. fara is a gerund, and means having refuted'. Again: is the expression of the same proposition which has been refuted. When a person has demonstrated the untenableness of another's assertion, and then employs the said assertion by way of taunt, reproach or reprimand, then the final syllable of such a sentence becomes pluta. The sûtra literally means "Having refuted (it) when assecting the same by way of censure), Thus an opponent asserts that “The word is not eternal.' (ufani ya:) 1 Proving by arguments the uutenableness of this position, and after refuting it, the victor says by way of reprimand:-w: TG AT or sfart 13 SATI “This is then your assertion—that the word is not eternal. Similarly a TE- मित्यात्या ३ or अटाश्राद्धमित्यात्य । अटयामावास्येत्यात्या ३ 0 अटयामावास्य त्यात्य । ३६१४ । प्रामेडितं भर्सने । ८ ।। ५ ॥ 'दम्योट्स्यो३ घातयिष्यामि त्वाम् । पामोडितग्रहणं द्विरुक्तोपलक्षणम् । 'चौर चीर'। 3614. The final syllable of an âmreợita vocative is pluta when a threat is expressed. A Vocative is reiterated when a threat is meant (VIII. I. & S. 2143). Its final syllable beconues pluta. Thus दस्यो दस्यो : घातयिष्यामित्वा ।

·78 THE SIDDHANTA KATHUDI. [Vor.. III. CH. VIII. F3614. । । Though the anuvritti of the st tra VIII. 2. 82, is current here, yet the tinal of the sentence is not pluta, but of the amredita. It should be rather stated that any one of the repeated words may be pluti by alternation. Thus चोर or चोर चोर ।। The word. amredita is employ. ed in the sutra ás illustrative of the doubliay, for the threat is expressed by botha words, so that pluta may be of both words in turn: and not of the second, word only, though that is technically called âmredita. ३६१५ । अङ्गयुक्तं तिडाकाङ्तम् । ८ । २ । ६ ॥ अत्यनेन युक्तं तिङन्तं प्लवते । 'श्रङ्गकूज३ इदानीं ज्ञास्यसि जालम' । 'ति' किम् । 'अङ्क देवदा मिथ्या वास' । 'श्राकाङ्क्षम् किम् । अङ्ग प । नेतदपरमाकाइति । भसन इत्येव अङ्काधीष्य भक्तं तव दास्यामि' । 3615. The final syllable of a finite verb, used as a threat tecomes pluta, when the word anga is joined with it, and it demande another sentence to complete the conclusion. Thus अङ्ग कूजा ३ इदानी ज्ञास्यसि जालम । अङ्ग व्याहरी ३. पटानी ज्ञास्यसि जालम । Why do we say ' a verb' ? Observe अङ्ग देवदत्त मिथ्या वति। Why do we say "when this calls for a conclusion'? Observe 25 da. Here. it is a complete sentence and does not demand another to complete the sense. The word HR of the last sûtra is understood here also. Therefore not in w auta, teri à CTEQIA Here has the force of solicitation. (VILI: 1.33.S. 3940)- ३६१६ । विचार्यमाणानाम् । ८।२।६३ ॥ वाक्यानां टेः सतः । 'होतध्यं दीक्षितस्य महा ३६न होतव्यमिति । होतव्यं न होसव्य- सिति विचार्यते । प्रमाणैर्वस्तुतत्त्वपरीक्षणं विचारः । 3616. The final syllable of those sentences is pluta, which denote acts of reflection (or balancing between two alternatives). To determine a thing by weighing all arguments pro and con is called Richāra or judgment. Thus होतव्यं दीक्षीतत्य रहा ३ इन होतव्यारम् ' should one perform a cacrifice in the house of an initiated person.' Similarly तिष्ठेपा३ इ, अनुपहरे युपा३ ॥ Here also it is being reflected upon whether यूपे तिष्ठेत् or यूपे अनुग्रहेरत् ॥ i. e, shorild the stake remain upright or should it be put ftat by the yajamâne, किं. यूपस्तिष्टेत, किं वा यूयं यजमानः शाययेत् ॥ ३६१७ । पूर्व तु भाषायाम् । ८ । २ । ६८ ॥ विचार्यमाणानां पूर्वमेव सवते । 'अहिर्न ३ रज्जुन' । प्रयोगापेक्षत्वं पुर्वस्वम् । इह भाषा- महणात्पूर्वयोगश्छन्ठसीतिज्ञायते । 3617. In common speech, the final vowel of the first alternative is only plutaa This makes a viyama or restriction. The previous sútra, is thus confined to the Vedic literature, and not to the classical. तु here has the force of 'only:' Thus अहि ५ ३ रज्जुर्नु, Is it a snake or a rope' ! लेष्टिो ३ कपातामु • Is it a clod. of earth or a pigeon ?' . - ·Von. III. CR. VIII. 83820.) VAIDtc ROLE. . The priority, of course, depends upon employment. Tue order of words de. pends upon one's choice. ३६१७ । प्रतिवणे च।८।२॥ वाक्यस्य टेः सुतोऽभ्युपगमे प्रतिज्ञाने प्रवणाभिमुख्ये थे। गां मे देहि भा३' । 'इन्त ते ददामि' । 'नित्यः शब्द' भवितुमर्हति३' । 'दत्त क्रिमात्य३' । 3618. The final syllable of the sentence which expresses assent or promise, or listening to, is pluta. The word ufaday means ' a zreement, assent or promise.' It also means listening to.' All these senses are to be taken here, as there is nothing in the sútra to restrict its scope. Thus it has three selises, 1. to promise something to petitioner, 2. to acknowledge the truth of some proposition, 3. to listen to allother's words Thus गां मे देहि भाः, 1. हन्त ते ददामि ॥ 2. नित्यः शब्दो भवितुमहत ३ ॥ 3. देवदत्त भीः, किमाया। ३६१९ । अनुदात्तं प्रश्नान्ताभिपूजित्योः । ८ । २ । १०० ॥ अनुदात्तः सुतः स्यात् । दूरादू तादिषु सिद्धस्य एनुतम्यानुदात्तत्वमात्रमनेन विधीयते : अग्निभूतः । पट उ । 'अग्निभूत 'पटो' स्तयोः प्रश्नान्तं टेरनुदात्तः प्लुतः । शोभनः खन्न्यास मारावक 3619. The final vowel at the end of a question or of a praise is pluta, but unaccented. That which is employed at the end of an interrogative sentence is called प्रधनान्त: I According to some, this rule does not ordain pluta, but only ordains the unu. datta-ness of those syllables which become plute by the previous rules VIII. 2.84 &c. The meaning of the sútra then is : That pluta which comes at the end of an Interrogative sentence or a sentence denoting admiration, is anudatta, Thus अगमा पूर्वान् ग्रामान अयिभूता३ or गर्म पूर्वान ग्राम पटा ३ उ (i. e. अगमः पूर्वान् ग्रामाम् अयिभूते or पटो)। The words अधिभूते, and पटो being finals in a question, become auudatta as well as pluta. The other words अगमः &c. become svarita and pluta by VIII. 2. 105. See VIII. 2. 107. As regards अभिपूजिते we have शोभन: खल्वसि माणवका ३ ॥ Here the final of माणवक becomes anudatta and plata. ३६२० । चिदिति चोपमार्थ प्रयुज्यमाने । ८ । २ । १०१ ॥ वाश्यस्य टेरनुदानः प्लुतः । 'अग्निचिद्भाया३ त्' । अग्निरिव भाया त् । 'उपमार्थे' किम् । कथंचिदाहुः । 'प्रयुज्यमाने किम् । अग्निर्माणवको भायात् । 3620. The end-rowel at the end of a sentence becomes anu. dåtta and pluta, when the particle chit is employed, denoting comparison. The word para is understood hore. This sûtra ordains pluta as well, aud not merely accent. Thus अग्निचित् भायात् 'may he shine as fire'. So also रानविद् भारत् 'may he shine as a King'.

·80 T'HE SIDOMÄNTÄ KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. ČA. VIII. 93620. - Why do we say when the sense is that of comparison'? Observe fag : Here faç has the force of "littleness or difficulty'. Why do we say प्रयुज्यमाने 'when expressly employed' ? Observe अग्नि माणवको Hata "Let the boy shine like fire'. Here faa is understood, hence the rule does not apply. ३६२१ । उरिविदासीदिति च । ८।३। १०२ ॥ टेः प्लुतोऽनुदात्तः स्यात् । 'उपरिस्विद्रासो' । अधःस्विंदासी ईत्यत्र त विचार्य- माणानाम् (३६१६) इत्युदात्तः प्लुतः। 3621. In उपरि स्विद् मासीद् the end-vowel is anudatta and pluta. The word anudatta is understood here also. The end-vowel would have been pluta here by VIII. 2. 97: S. 3616, the present sutra really ordains accentlessness of this pluta. Thus अधः स्विटासीनत, उपरि स्विदासी३त् (Rig x. 129. 5). In the first portion श्रासीत् is pluta and udatta by VIII. 2. 97, in the second it is anudatta by tha present sûtra. ३६२२ । स्वरितमामेडितेऽसयासमतिकोपकुत्सनेषु । ८।२।१०३ ॥ स्वरितः प्लुतः स्यादामोडिते परेऽसूयादी गम्ये । असूयायाम् । अभिरूपक३ अभिरूपक रिक्त से प्राभिरूध्यम् । समता । अभिरूपक अभिरूपक शोभनोऽसि । की। अविनीतक अविनीतक इदानीं जास्यसि जालम । कुत्सने । शाक्तीक३ शाक्तीक रिता ते शक्तिः । 3622. Of the two vocatives of the same form standing at the beginning of a sentence, the end-vowel of the first becomes pluta and svarita, when envy, praise, anger, or blame is expressed. The Vocative is doubled by VIII, 1.8. S 2143. This sútra ordains pluta there. Thus Envy:--माणायका माशावक, अभिरूपका३ अभिरूपक, रिक्तं त अभिरुप्यम् । Praise :-माया प्रकार माणवक, अभिरूपका अभिरूपक शोभन: खल्वसि। Anger:-माण बका मागावक, विनीतकार अविनीतक इदानी जस्यसि जाल्म | Blame :-शाक्तीका ३ शाक्तीक पाष्टी का याष्टीकरिता ते शक्तिः। ३६२३ । क्षियाशीमेषेषु तिडाकाम् । ८।२। १०४ श्राकाक्षस्य तिडन्तस्य टेः स्वरितः सुतः स्यात् । प्राचारभेदे । स्वयं ह रथेन याति । उपा- ध्यायं पदासिं गमयति । प्रार्थनायम । पुत्रांच लप्सीष्टः धनं च तात । व्यापारयो । कटं कुरु३ ग्राम गच्छ । 'श्राका क्षम्' किम् . दीर्घायुरसि अग्निदग्नीन्विहर । 3623. When an error against, polite usage is "censured, or when a benediction or a bidding is intended, the end syllable of a finite verb becomes pluta and svarita, if this requires another señº tence to complete the sense. The word + svarita' is understood here. The word faut means the error in usage' or want of good breeding.' (VIII. I. 60) nut: means benediction. hu: means 'order' or 'commanding by words.'

·VoL. III. CH. VIII. 3625.] VA:DIC Rules. 81 Thus स्वयं रथेन याति, उपाध्याक्ष पटातिं गमर्यात ॥ स्वयं श्रीदनं भुङ क्त३, उपा- ध्यायं सक्तन पायर्यात ॥ In both these, the first seuteuce requires the second as its complement, and hence there is the ET 1 Benediction:--मुतांश्च लासीष्टा धनं च तात; छन्दोध्येपोष्टा ध्याकरणं च, भद्र। Order :-कटं कुरु'३ ग्राम च गच्छ; यवान् लूनीहि३, सक्तूश्च पिब । Why do we say " when it requires another sentence as its complement' ? Observe दीर्घायुरसि अग्नीदग्नीन विहर । There cannot be any counter-example of क्षिया, for there two sentences are absolutely necessary to express the sense of. censure. - - . - १२ | अनन्त्यस्यापि प्रश्नाख्यानयोः । ८।२।१०५ ॥ अनन्त्यस्यान्त्यस्यापि पदस्य टेः स्वरितः प्लुत एतयोः । प्रश्ने । अगम३: पूर्वा३ न ग्रामा न । सर्वपदानामयम् । श्राख्याने । अगम म पूर्वा न ग्रामा न् । 3624. In a question or narration, the end-vowel of a wore though not final in a sentence, becomes svarita and pluta, as well as of the word which is final in a sentence. The word 'padasya' is understood here: and so also the word «svarita. The end-vowel of a word which is not the last word in a sentence, as well as of the last word, becomes svarita and pluta, when a question is asked, or a fact is narrated. In fact, all the mords of a sentence become syarita and pluta hereby. Thus in questioning we have : अगमा पूर्वान प्रामाउन अग्नि भूता३ or पटाउ॥ Thus all words have become svarita and pluta. The final word would in one alternative, become anudatta also, by VIII. 2. 100, as shown under that sutra. The force of the word safe in the sûtra, is to make the final word also svarita, and thus this sutra makes VIII. 2. 100 an optional shtra with regard to question. In akhyana or narration, there is no other rule, which is debarred by this. Therefore there, all words become svarita and plata necessarily, by the force of this sutra. Thus अगमा३म् पूर्वान् यामा.न भेTa: ॥ ३६५ । मुलावैच इदुता ।८।२।१०६ ।। द्वराच्छू तादियु प्लुतो विहितम्त नयेचा प्लुतप्रसङ्ग तदवयवाबिदुता सवेते। ३ तिकायन । पौर पगव । चतुर्मात्रावत्रेचा संपठ्यते । 3625. In forming the pluta of the diphthongs ai and an their last element i and zu get the pluta. The pluta ordained by VIII. 2. 84 do. when applied to E or ar cause the prolation of the last element of these diphthongs namely of for J1 The word wat in the sůtra is Nominative dual of sýn, and the aphorism literally means 'E and 3 are pluta of the diphthongs # and #rº Thus सेतिकायन, श्रा३पंगव। This pluta of ऐ and tr has four matras. Thus it and +3 each has one måtrå. The pluta of g and 3 will have three nuâtrås. Thus + gi and **+31, or the whole bas four måtrås, ·82 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VoL III. CH. VIII. 43626. । । . ३६२६ । एचोऽमगृह्यस्थादूराहते पूर्वस्यार्धस्यादुत्तरस्येदुतौ । ८ । २ । १७ ॥ अप्रगृह्यस्यैचोऽदूरादू ते प्लुविष्ये पूर्वस्यार्धस्याकारः प्लुतः स्यादुत्तरस्य त्वधंल्य दृदुतास्तः । ** प्रश्नान्तभिपूजिविचार्यमा प्रत्यभिवादयाज्यान्तेष्वेव *' । प्रश्नान्ते । अगम३ः पूर्वान्- ग्रामा न् । अग्निभूत छ। श्रभिपूजिते । भद्रं करोषि पटउ । विचार्यमाणे । दातव्यं दीक्षितन्य ग्रहा३ । प्रत्यभिवादे । आयुष्माधि अग्निभूतः । याज्यान्त। स्त्रोमोविंधमाग्नय३ इ । 'परि- गणनम्' किम् । विष्णभूते३ घातयिष्यामित्वाम् । अटूराळू त इति न वक्तव्यम् । पदान्तग्रहणं कतंध्यम । इह मा भूत् । भद्रं करोषि गौरिति । श्रप्रयास्य' किम् । शोभने माले ३ । '* श्रान्त्रिते छन्दसि प्नुविकाराऽयं वक्तव्यः *' । अग्ना३पत्नी वः। 3626. In the diphthongs, which are not Pragrihya (I. 1. 11 &c) and which become pluta under the circumstances mentioned in VIII. 2. 83. &c., but not when that circumstance is a call from a distance (VIII. 2. 84); for the first half, there is substituted the prolated 'a', and for the second portion e or u. The diphthongs or ए. are ए, ऐ, श्री and श्री। Their elements are a+s, and +31 When these diphthongs are to be prolated, at the end of a word, the diph. thong is resolved into its elements, the first portions is prolated, and 2 or 3 adlded, as the case may be. This 3 and 3, in fact, are the substitutes of the second portion, which may be g or 3, or I or i This rule is not of universal application, but applies to Rules VIII. 2. 100. VIII. 2. 97, VIII. 2. 83, and VIII. 2. 90 only, according to the following Vartikas. Vårt:—The scope of this sûtra should be determined by enumerating the rules to which it applies, Vart:-It should be stated that it applies to sutras VIII. 2. 100, 97, 83 and 90. Thus VIII. 2.100: As अगमाः पूर्वाश्न् ग्रामाइन् अग्निभूताई or प_उँ । भद्रं करोषि माणवकार अग्निभूताई or पटार । So also VIII. 2. _97:- Rs_होतव्यं दीक्षितस्य रहाई। So also VIII. 2. 83 :-as, आयुष्मान एधि अग्निभूताई or पाउँ । So also VIII. 2. 90:-as, उक्षानाय वशानाय सोमएष्टाय वेधसे । स्तोम विधेमाग्नयाई। (Tait, S. I. 3. 14.7). This pluta u is udầtta, aindât.ta or svarita, according to the particular rule which has been applied, i, e. at the end of a question it is anulâtta or svariti, and everywhere else, uda.tta. The & and 3 are of course, always udåtta : because the an uvritti of udâtta is current here. Why do we restrict this sûtra to the above-mentioned four rules ? Observe विष्णुभूते विष्णुभूते३ घायिष्यामि त्वा पागच्छ भो माया वक्र विष्णुभूते । In fact, the present sûtra being confined to the above-mentioned fonr rules, the words अदूराद्धृते in the shtra, are red undant : and should not have been used. Moreover the word ugun should have been used in the sútra, for it applies to diphthongs at the end of a pnda. Therefore, not in भद्रं करोषि गौरिति । Here गो befure the sarvanâmasthâna affix सु is not a pada (1. 4. 17). Why do we say 'when it is not a Pragrihya' ? Observe शोभने माले ३। Vart:-This peculiar modification of pluta vowel takes place in the Vocatire case in the Vedas. As प्रश्ना३ पन्नोवा३ः सजूदेवेन त्वष्ठा सामं पिब । Here by no उ - ·Vor. III. CH. VIII.3828.] VAIDIC RULES, ॥ ॥ other rule, the Vocative would have become prolated. ३६२७ । तयोयविधि संहितायाम् । ८।३ । १०८ ॥ इदुतार्यकारवकारी स्तोचि सहितायाम् । अग्नश्याशा । पटश्वाशा । अग्नपिन्द्र म । पट३-वु, दकम् । 'अति' क्रिम् । अग्ना३वरुणा । 'संहितायाम् किम् । अग्न३६ इन्द्रः। संहितायामित्यध्यायस- माप्ताधिकारः । इदुतामिद्धत्वादयमारम्भः सवर्णदीर्घत्व म्य शाकलस्य च निवृत्त्यर्थः। यथयार, सिद्धत्वात् 'उदात्तस्वस्तियोर्यणः स्वरितोऽनुदात्तस्य' (३६५७) इत्यस्य वाधनार्थो वा ॥ 3627. For these vowels i and u, are substituted y and v, when a vowel follows them in a samhita (in an unbroken flow of speech). The word gfEATOTR is an adhikâra and exerts its influence up to the end of the Book. Whatever we shall. teach. hereafter, up to the end of the Book, will apply to the words which are in the Sanhita. Thus अग्माश्याशा पटानाशा, अग्नायिन्द्रम, पटावुदकम् ॥ Why do we say when a vowel follows' ? Ouserve अग्नाश्वगा। Why do we say संहितायाम् ' in an uninterrupted flow of speech'! Observe. ऋग्ना३ इ इन्द्रम, पटाउ.उदक्रम् in the Pada Patha, This sútra is made, because 3 and 3 being Pluta-modifications are considered as asiddlha (VIII. 2. 1) for the purposes of इको यणचि (VI. 1. 77). But supposing that somehow. or other, these x and 3 be considered siddha, still the present rule is necessary to prevent their lengthening before a homogeneous vowel (VI. 1. 101), or their retaining their form unchanged by VI. I. 127. If it be said, that these rules VI. 1. 101, and VI. 1. 127, would not apply, because of the Vartika इकः प्लुतपूर्वस्य सवर्णदीर्घ बाधनार्थ यणादेशो वक्तव्यः (Vartika to VI. 1. 77); still the preseut sútra ought to be made, in order to prevent un accent (VII. 3. 4. S. 3657). ३६२८ । मतुप्रसो रु संबुद्धा छन्दसि । ८।३ । १० ॥ क इत्य विभक्तिको निर्देशः। मत्वन्तस्य च सः स्यात् । 'अलोऽन्त्यस्य' (१२) इति परिभाषया: नकारस्य । 'इन्द्र महत्व इह पाहि सोमम् । 'हरिवोमे दिनं त्वा' । 'छन्दसीरः' (३६००) दति 3623. For the final of the affixes mat and vas there is substituted ru, in the Vocative singular, in the Cbhandas. The word संहितायां is understood here. A word ending in the affix मत or वस्, changes its final c or स्. (I. I. 52. S. 42) into r, in the Chhandas, in the Vocative singular. Thus मत :-इन्द्रं ममत्व इह पाहि सोमम (Rig. III. 51. 7). हरिवो. afaat par 1. Here ar fra: is Vocative Sg. of Hipag and afra: of afran, meuning •he who is possessed of Maruts or Hari horses.'. The म of मत् is changed to as by VIII. 2. 10; 15. S. 3.00. The base #up before this termination is Bha by I. 4. 19. The affix g (nomi. sg.), is elided by VI. .1. 68; the q, is elided by VIII. 2. 23, and the ap (of JA VII. 1. 70) is changed to ļ by this sútra. So also zufa: तूतुजानः उपब्रह्मणि हरिवः (Rig. I. 3. 6). With वस् :-मीबस्तीकाय तनयाय मल (Rig. II. 33. 14), इन्द्रमाहुः । See VL 1 12, for the formation of मीखान, साहान with वसु । । ।

·THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [Vol. III. CH. VIII. 83629, Why do we sny of Aą and ap'? Observe aga FIDIA: 1 Why do we say in the Vocative Singular Oiuserve य एवं विद्वानग्निसाधने । Why do we say in the Chhandas' } Observe हे गोमन्, हे पपिवन् । ३६२९ । दाश्वान्साहानमोठ्वांश्च । ६ । १ । १२ ॥ मते क्वस्वन्ता नियात्यन्ते । 'मीढ्वस्तोकाय तनयाय' । '* वन उपसंख्यानम् ' । वनिवनिपाःसामान्यग्रहणम् । अनुबन्ध परिभाषा तु नापतिष्ठते। अनुबन्ध स्यहानिर्देशात् । 'यस्त्वायन्तं वसुना प्रातरित्वः । इणः वनिय । 3629. The participles dasvin, sahvan and midhvan are irregularly formed without reduplication. The word aisara is from the root aiz 'to give' with the affix *** (III. 2. 107); here the reduplication and the augment इट are prohibited irregularly; as शाश्वांसो दाशुषः सुतम् (Rig. I. 3. 7). The word साहान is derived from the root सह *to endure,' by adding the affix tag (III. 2, 107), the irregularity being in lengthening the penultimate, not allowing the augment zy and the reduplication Phas साहान् बलाहकः । So also मीछान comes from मिह to sprinkle' with tha affix (III. 2. 107) the irregularity cousisting in non-reduplication, non-application of xp, the lengthening of the penultimate vowel, and the change of u iuto As मोटवस्तोकाय तनयाय मल (Rig Veda II. 33. 14)... It is not necessary that these words should be in the singular always ; in their plural forms also they do not reduplicate, Vart:-The affix aq should also be enumerated. The affixes क्वनिप, and निप. are both meant here. Its final is also changed to in the Vuoative Sg. As यस्त्वायन्तं वसुना प्रातरित्वः । The word प्रातरित्वन is formed by adding क्वनिप to the root 5 (ण) preceded by प्रातः। See III. 2. 75. The game is added by VI. 1.71. ३६३० । उभयथर्वा । ८ । ३ । ८ ॥ अम्परे छवि नकारस्थ मा । पशूस्तांश्चझे। 3630. In both ways, in the Rig verses. This ordains an option to the last sútra, by which the t substitution was compulsory. A word ending in a followed by a letter of a class, which itself is followed by #, changes its final a to ? optionally in the Rig Veda. Sometirnes there is r and sometimes न। Thus af a fat quifa or तस्मिस स्वा दधाति । पशूस्ताश्चक्रे । (Rig Veda x. 90. 8). ३६३१ । दीघाटि समानपादे।८।३।। दीर्धानकारस्य सर्वा स्यादटि तो चेन्नाटी एकपादस्यौ स्याताम् । 'देवा अच्छा सुमती' । 'महाँ इन्द्रो य प्रोजसा' । उभयधेत्यनुवृत्तेर्ने ह । 'श्रादित्यान्याचित्रामहें। 3631. Ru is optionally substituted for that final n of a word which is preceded by a long vowel, and is followed by an 'ať letter (vowels and semi-vowels with the exception of l), when these ('' and 'at') come in contact with each other in the same stanza of the Rig Veda. ।

·Y VOL. III CH. VIII. 3635.] FArprc RULES. The a: of VIII. 3. 7 is understood here : and so also The word समानपाद means एकपाद, i. e. when both words are in one and the same Pida of the verse. Thus परिधा रति (Rig. IX. 107. 19) स देवा एचवति (Rix. I. I. 2) देवा अच्छानुमतो; (Rig Veda IV. 1. 2.) महा इन्द्रो य श्रीजसा ॥ (Rig Vedu VIII. 61.) The word Thour of the preceding satra is understood here a'so ; so that is an optional rule: sud 7 remains unchanged also, as facta vatra utfaraia utiara (Rig Vela VIII, 67. 1). See VIII. 3. 3. ३६३२ । आतट नित्यम् । ८।३।३ ॥ अटि परतो रोः पूर्वस्यातः स्थाने नित्यमनुनासिक 'महा इन्द्रः' । तैत्तिरीयास्तु अनुस्वार- मधीयते । तत्र छान्दो व्य यय इति प्राञ्च । एवं च सूत्रस्य फलं चिन्त्यम् । 3632. A nasal vowel is always substituted for '&' before rih, when it is followed by a letter of 'at' pratyahara (1. e. when it is followed by a vowel or hit, ya, vr, or ra). Thus VIII. 3.9. teaches substitution of न, the long श्रा preceding it, woulil have been optionally nasal by the last sûtra. The present stitra makes it necessarily 80 Thus महा असि (Rig. III. 46. 2) महा इन्द्रो य ओजसा (Rig. VIII. 6. 1). देवा श्रच्छादीव्यत् ॥ Sorne (i. e. the Taittariyas) read it as anunvârs. This is a Vedio diversity aocording to the Easterns. In this view, the necessity of the sîtra is rather doubtful. ३६३३ । स्वतवान्यायो । ८।३ । ११ ॥ भर्वा । 'भुवम्तस्य स्वतवाः पायुरग्ने । 3633. The n of 'svatawân' is changed to 'ru' before 'påyu." As स्वत्वः पायुरंग्ने (Rig. IV. 2. 6). The word is स्वतवस, the नुम is added by VIL. 1. 83. rine word is derived from तु वृद्धी with the affix असुन (स्वन्तो यस्य ऽसो स्वतवान्)। See S. 3594. ३६३४ । छन्दसि वाऽप्रामेडितयोः । ८।३ ४९ ॥ विप्तर्गस्य सो वा स्यात्कुष्योः प्रशब्दमामेडितं च वर्जयित्वा । 'अग्ने वाततस्कविः । 'गिरिन विश्वतस्पृथुः । नेह । 'वसुनः पूयः पतिः' । 'अप्र-' इत्यादि किम् । 'अग्निः प्र विद्वान' । 'पुरुषः पुरुषः । 3634. Samay Sa may optionally be substituted for the visarga before a hard guttural and labial, in the Chhandas ; but neither before pra, nor before a doubled word. Thus :-अग्ने त्रात तस्कविः (Rig Ved. VIII 60 5.) गिरिन विश्वतस्पृथुः (Rig Veda VIII. 98. 4). But not here :-बसुनः पुर्व्यः पतिः (Rig Veda X. 48. 1). Why do we say 'not before x and a doubled word'? Observe stra: o facin (Av, V. 26. 1), पुरुषः पुरुषः परि । ३६३५ । काकरकरतिधितश्वनादतः । ८।३ । ५० ॥ विसर्गस्य सः स्यात् । 'प्रटिवो अपस्कार' । 'यथा नो घस्यमस्करत' । 'सुपे शस्करति । 'उह यधि' । सोमं न चामवत्सु नस्कतम् । 'अदितेः' इति किम् । 'यया ना अदितिः, करत' । FE ·THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. CH. VIII. $ 3635. S 3635. The Visarga is changed to s. in, the Chhandas, before का, करत, करति, कृधि and कृत: but not so the visarga of aditi, Thus प्रदिवाअपस्कः ॥ कः is the Aorist of o; the लि: has been, elided. by II. 4. 80: the # of is gouated before the affix fao, thus we have ta, the a is. elided by VI. 1. 68; and the augment is not added by VI. 4. 75. Smilarly, ययानो बबस करत् ॥ Here alse करत् is the Aorist of a, with. अड, by II. 1. 59. सुपे शस्करति, here करीत: is the लट्, of क; शप, is. adiled. instead of उ, as a. Vedic. anomaly. उरणस्कृधि, here कधि: is the Imperative of ल, the सि, is changed to fr. the vikarana is elided and fe changed to fu by VI 4. 102 See VIII. 4 27, for: the change of न.to. ण ॥ सोमं न चारू, मघबत्सुःन स्कृतम्, here कृतम् is Past Participle of all Why do we say but not of ufafa;? Observe out at afafa: Flą (Rig Veda, I. 3. 42). ३६३६ । पञ्चम्याः परावध्यर्थे । ८।३। ५१॥ पञ्चमोविसर्गम्य सः स्यादुपारभावार्थः परिशब्टे. परतः । दिवस्परिप्रथमं जज' । 'अध्यर्थे, किम् । दिवस्यथिव्याः पाजः'। 3636. The visarga of the Ablative case is changed to before pari meaning'over'. The word Chhandis is understood here also. Thus टिवस्परि प्रथम जज्ञे (Rig. Ved. X. 45. 1) Why do we saay : when परि means over? See दिवः पृथिव्याः प्रोज उद्भतम्, (Rig Ved. VI. 47. 27). Here oft has the sense of 'ou all sides'. ३६३७ । पाता च बहुलम् । ८ । ३ । ५२ ॥ पञ्चम्या इत्येव । 'सूर्यो नो दिवस्पातु । 3637. S may diversely be substituted for the visarga of the. Ablative before the verb 'pâtu' in the Chhandas Thus सूर्यानो दिवायातु, (Rig Veda. X. 158. 1), Sometimes, the change does. npt take place ; as.परिषदः पात:॥ ३६३८ । षष्ट्याः पतिपुत्रपृष्ठयारपदपयस्पोषेषु । ८ । ३ । ५३ ॥ 'वाचस्पति विश्वकर्माणम्' । 'दिवस्पुत्राय सूर्याय । दिवस्पृष्टं भन्दमानः । तमसस्पारमस्य ।। 'परिवीत इलस्पदें। दिवस्य यो दिधिषाणाः', 'रायस्पोनं, यजमानेषु'। 3638. For the visarga of the Genitive, there is substituted s in the Vedas, before. पति, पुत्र, पृष्ट., पार, पद, पयस and पोष ॥ Thus वाचस्पतिं विश्वक्रमीणमूतये, (Rig Veda X. 81, 7), दिवस्पुत्राय सूर्याय, ( Rig: Veda X. 37. 1) दिवस्पृष्ठे भन्दमानः ( Rig Veda IIT 2. 12) तममस्पारम (Rig Veda I.. 92. 6). परिवीत इलस्पद (Rig Veda I, 128. 1). दिवस्पयो दिधिषाणा (Rig Veda x. 114. 1).. रायस्पषं यजमानेषु ( Rig Veda. X, 17. 9).. Why do we say ' after a genitive case ' ?. See मनुः पुत्रेभ्यो दार्य व्यभजत् ॥. ३६३९ । इडाया वा।८।३ । ५४ ॥ पतिपुत्राटिषु परेषु । इलायास्युत्रः-इलायाः पुत्रः । इलायास्पदे-इलाया.पदे।

·Vol. III. Cir. VIII. 3642.] VAIDIC RULES, 3639. Sa is optionally substituted for the visarga of ‘ida yalı' before piti &c., (VIII. 3. 53.) in the Chhand is. Thus डायाः पतिः or इडायास्पतिः इडायास्पुत्त्रः । इडायाः पुत्रः । इडायास्पष्टम् । इडायाः पृष्ठम् । इडाया स्पारम्, इडायाः पारम । इडायास्पदम् । इडायाः पदम् । इडायास्पयः । दडायाः पयः । इहामाः पापम् । इडायास्पापम् ॥ Here we must read again the sütia VIII. 3. 102 S. 2403:- ३६३९ । क । निसस्तपतावनासेवने ॥ निसः सकारस्य मूर्धन्यः स्यात् । 'निष्टप्तं रक्षो निष्टप्ता अरातयः'। 'अनासेवने किम् । निस्तपति । पुनःपुनस्तपतीत्यर्थः ।। 3639 A. She is substituted for the sa of nis before the verb tap when the meaning is not that of repeatedly making red hut.' As निष्टप्नं रक्षा निष्ठमा अरातयः॥ Why do we when the meaning is not that of repeatedly making red hot'? Ouserve farofa menuing makes repeatedly red hot.' ३६४० । युष्मत्तत्ततत्तःण्वन्तःपादम् । ८।३। १०३ ॥ पादमध्यस्थस्य सस्य मूर्धन्यः स्यात्तकारादिष्वषु परेषु । युष्मदादेशाः त्वंत्यातेतवाः । 'त्रिभिष- धं देव सवितः' 'तेभिषट्वा प्राभिष्टे'। 'अपस्यग्ने सधिष्टव' । 'अग्निष्ट द्वश्वम्' । 'ट्यावापृथिवी निष्टतक्षुः' । 'अन्तःपादम् किम् । तर्दाग्नस्तदयम। ' । 'यन्म अात्मनो मिन्द।भूर्दाग्नस्त त्पुनराहा - तवेदा विचर्षणिः । अत्राग्निरिति पूर्वापादस्यान्तो न तु मध्यः । 3640. The s standing in the inner half of a stanza is changed to sh before the ta of twam &c. and iad and tatakshus. 'The word युष्मद् here means the substitutes त्वम्, त्वाम्, ते, तव. As अग्निष्ट्वं, नामासीत् । त्वा, अग्निष्टं वा वर्द्धयामसि । ते, अग्निष्ठे विश्वमानय । तव, अप स्वग्ने सायष्टव, (Rig. I III. 43. 9) । तत, अग्नि दृश्वमाएगाति, (kig. X. 2. 4) ततत्स्, दयावापृथिवी निष्ट- तनुःषु॥ Why do we say in the inner half of a stanza "? Observe यन्मात्मनो मिन्दा- भूग्नि स्तत्युनगह जातवेदा विचर्षणिः । Here the word gita! is at the end of the first stanza while an is at the beginning of the secoul stauza, therefors the of safax is not in the midiile of a stiuliza. ३६४१ । यजुष्यकेषाम् । ८ । ३ । १०४ ॥ युप्मत्तत्तततुषु परत सस्य मूर्धन्यो वा। अर्चिभिष्ट्यम् । अग्निष्टे । अग्रम् । अर्चिभिष्ट तक्षुः। पक्ष अचिभिस्त्वामित्यादि । 3641. In the opinion of some, the above change takes place in the Yajurveda also. Thus अचिभिष्टवम् or अचिर्भिस् त्वम् । अग्निष्टनम् or अग्निस्तनम् । अग्निष्टत् or अग्नि स्तत् । अर्चिभिष्टतक्षुः or अर्चिभिस्तन क्षुः ॥ ३६४२ । स्तुस्तामयोश्छन्दसि । ८।३ । १०५ ॥ नृभिष्टुतस्य-नृभिः स्तुतस्य । गोष्टोमम्-गोस्तोमम् । पूर्वपदादित्येव सिद्ध प्रपञ्चामिदम् । 3642. The s of sťut and stoma in the Chhandas, is changed to sh in the opinion of some, S R Ham L ·88 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VoL. III. CH. VIII. 83642. This Thus त्रिभिष्टुतस्य or किभिस्सुतस्य गोष्ठोमं घोडशिनम्, or गोस्तोमं घोडशिनम् । ohange would have taken place by the general rule contained in the next sätra VIII. 3. 106, the special nuention of स्तुत and स्तोम here is a mere amplification. The word gefa of this sûtra governs subsequent så tra also. ३६४३ । पूर्वपदात् । ८ । ३ । १०६ ॥ पूर्वपदस्थानिमित्तात्परस्य समय यो वा । 'यदिन्द्राग्नी दीवि छः' । 'युर्व हि स्थः स्वर्पती' । 3643. In the Chhandas, according to some, s is changed to sh, when it stands in the beginning of a second word, preceded by a word ending in i &c. The words छन्दसि and एकेषां are both understood here. Thus fguft: or द्विसन्धिः, त्रिन्धि: or त्रिसन्धिः; मधुष्ठानम् or मधुस्थानम, द्विसाहसं चिन्योल or द्विषाहसं चिन्धीत ॥ The word gauz here means the first member of a compound word as well as the prior word other than that in a compound. Thus त्रिपमहत्वाय or त्रिःसमद्ध- स्वाय॥ टिन्द्राग्नी दिधिष्टः (Rig Veda I. 108. 11). युहिस्थः स्वर्पती (Rig Veda Ix. 19. 2). ३६४४ । सुजः । ८।३ । १०७ ॥ पूर्वपदस्यानिमित्तात्य रस्य मुजओ निपातस्य सस्य षः । 'ऊर्ध्व ऊ षु णः' । 'अभीषु णः' । 3644. The sa of the Particle su is changed to sha in the Chhandas, when preceded by an other word having in it the change-effecting letter i &c. Thus ऊ ऊ षु णः (Rig Veda I. 36. 13.) अभी षु णः सखीनाम् (Rig Veda IV. 31. 3). The lengthening takes place by VI. 3. 134, and a changed to u by VIII. 1.27. - 11, ३६४५ । मनोतरनः । ८।३ । १० ॥ 'गोषा इन्द्रो नषा असि । 'अनः किम् । गोनिः । 3645. The sa of the verb san when it loses its is changed to sh under the same circumstances. Thus sjat: (Rig. IX. 2. 10), formed by the affix fat (III. 2. 67), the ais elided by VI. 4. 41. So also नृपाः ॥ Why do we say “when it loses its a'? Observe hrafa afagatiua (Athrrv. III. 20. 10). Here the affix is इन (III. 2. 27). See however it iu iu Rig. VI. 53 10 ३६४६ । सहः पृतन भ्यां च । ८।३। १०९।। एतनापाहम् । ऋतापाहम् । चात् । ऋतीषाहम् । 3646. The s of sha is changed to sh after pritand and rit. Thus पृतनापाहम ऋताधाहम्। The word a and' in the sûtra includes words other than those mentioned in it, The worlog would be valid by this also. ३६४७ । नियाभभ्योऽव्यवाये का छन्दसि । ८ । ३ । ११६ ॥

·VOL. III. CI. VIII. $3649.) VAIDIC RULES, 89 सस्य मूर्धन्य : । न्यत्रीदत्-न्य सोदत् । व्यषीदत्-व्यसीदत् । अभ्य ष्टीत-अभ्य स्तोत् । 3647. The sh is optionally substituted in the Chhandas after the prepositions ni, vi and abhi when the augment 'at' intervenes, Thus न्यपोदत् . or न्यसोदत् पिता नः; व्यषोदत; or ध्यसीदत् पिता नः; अभ्यपीदत् or ਅਧ ਸੀ ## The anuvritti of ra and rais is not to be read into this sû tra. It is, in fact a general rule and applies to verbs other than these two. As QAT, LETA, eta or TA u ३६४८ । छन्दस्य॒दवग्रहात । ८।४।२६ ॥ प्रकारान्तादवग्रहात्परस्य नस्य णः । नृमणाः । पितृयाणम् । 3648. In the Chhandas, na of a second term is changed into ina' when the prior term ends with a short 'ri' even when there is an avagraha or hiatus between the two terms. The word gauata is understood bere. The word maur means a hiatus or separation. Thus fua JIOA, #UT: u Here is yangu i The change of a into u is effected ordinarily then, when tho terms, one containing the cause, and the other 9, are in great or conjunction. For the rules of Sandhi and the rules like these can apply only to words in staat il The present rule is an exception to it, and here, even when the words are not in great, but there is an actual hiatus between the two, the change still takes place. The word aftar of VIII. 2. 108, exerts regulating influence up to the end of the Book. ३६४९ । नश्च धातुस्योरुषुभ्यः । ८ । ४ । २७ ॥ Uigeta fara tar :', fuath X 550 entu' i waitgu:' | 'Ang u:'ı इत्यष्टमोऽध्यायः। इति वैदिक प्रकरणम् ॥ 3649. In the Chhandas, the na of (the Pronoun) nas is changed into fņa' when it comes after a root having a ra or shu or after the words uru and shu. Thus wa Tatu: (Rig. VII. 15. 13) O Agnil protect us. fra ut fra (Rig. VII. 32. 26) Teach us this.' 35:-Stukafu (Rig. VIII. 75. 11) g-ago: adatą (Rig. IV. 31. 3). Fagu: sää (Rig. I. 36. 13). The word az is here the pronoun aę, which is the substitute, in certain cases of FAE (VIII. 1. 21) and does not mean here the 778 substitute of arfaite धातुस्य means that which exists in a dhàtu,' namely 7 and it when ocourring in a root. The word 36 means the word form 36; and पु means सुज, and is exhibited with a-change. It does not mean the affix g of the Locative Plural. Therefore not in Fai utar raga: The word zat is the 2nd Person singular, Imperative the lengthening is by VI. 3. 135. The root fua has the sense of ara in the Veda, aut is 2nd Person Sg. Imperative of * (VI. 4. 102), the višarga of a: ia changed to # by VIII. 3. 50. In mug there is lengthening by VI. 3. 134, 80 also in syu: &c. Here ends the Book on Vedic forms, 12 *** BE 323 ·अथ स्वर प्रकरणम् ON ACCENTS. CHAPTER 1. ३६५० । अनुदात्तं पदमेकर्जम् । ६।१ । १५८ ॥ परिभाषेयं । स्वविधिविषया । यस्मिन्प्रदे यस्योदात्तः स्वरितो वा विधीयते समेकमचं वर्ज- यित्वा शेषं तत्पदमनुदात्तच्कं स्यात् । गोरा यतं नः । अत्र सनाटान्ताः-' (२३०४) इति धातुत्वे धातुस्वरेख यकाराकार उठात्तः शिष्टमनुदात्तम् । * सतिशिष्टस्वरबलीयस्त्वमन्यत्र विकरणेभ्य इति वाच्यम् *' । तेनोक्तोदाहरणे । गुपेर्धातु- स्वर आयस्य प्रत्ययस्वरश्च न शिष्यते । 'अन्यत्र' इति किम् । 'यज्ञं यज्ञमभिव दो गणोतः । अत्र ति शिष्टोऽपि शना' इत्यत्र स्वरो न शिष्यते किंतु तस एव । 3650. A word is, with the exception of one syllable, unaccented. That is, only one syllable in word is accented, all the rest are anudatta or unaccepted. This is a Paribhâsbâ or maxim of interpretation with regard to the laws of accent. Wherever an accent-be it acute (udâtta) or a circumflex (syarita )-is ordained with regard to a word, there this maxim must be applied, to make all the other syllables of that word unaccented. The word अनुदात्त means having anudâtta vowel.' What is the one to be excepted ? That one about which any particular accent has been taught in the rules here-in-after given. Thus VI. 1. 162 teaches that a root has acute acoent on the fual. Therefore, with the exception of the last syllable, all the other syllables are unaccented. Thus in minda a:' (Rig Veda VI. 74, 4) the acute accent is on y, all the rest are unaccented. Vart :-The afafue accent is stronger than all which precede it, except when it is a Vikaraņa accent. Thus in the above example, the root accent of yu and the affix accent of ma do not renain, but ñ accent prevails. Why do we say "except when it is a Vikarana accent'? Observe #faqe truita: (Rig Veda III. 6. 10). Here the vikaraņa acceut is grafie, but it does not prevail over ag acceut. Nors :—The rule is that except one special accept taught in a sûtra the other syllables take an udâtta. Therefore, where there is a conflict of rules, the accent is guided by the following maxim : "urfaUTM ttuata: Fear atau mafuota " namely (1) the sequence, a suoceeding rule setting aside a prior rule (2) a Nitya rule is stronger than Anitya (3) Antaranga" stronger than Bahiranga, (4) the Apa vâda is stronger than Utsarga. When all these are exhausted, then we apply the role of atafute # What is this rule ? To quote the words pr Rasika : यो हि यस्मिन् मति शिष्यते स तस्य बाधको भवति ' that which does remain यज्ञ ·VOL. III. CA. I. $3653.] ACCINTS. 91 and must last in spite of the presence of another, debars such other.' Thus iu tarafa ; here the artet: “ the accent of the affix (IIT. 1. 3) by which the & cute is on the first syllable of the affix is an apavâda to the thT: (VI. 1. 192) by which the foal of a dbåtu is aete, and it debars the dhâtu-aocent; but this affix accent is in its turn deb urred in the case of derivative verbs formed with affixes by the rule of grafts, because even after the ad lition of the affix, these words retain the designation of dhâtu. Similarly in italitatiesya: ** The son of him. whose upper garmeut (utta å anga) is of black color, the Son of Baladeva," the Bahurrihi-accent (V1, 2, 1) being an apavala to Samasa-accent; (VI. I. 223 , debars the samása.accent; but this Bahuvrihi-accent is in its turn debarred by the rule of afafure, wheu a further compound is formed and the final word is ab compound ouly and not a Bahuvrihi. Though the accent of the Vikarana is a ginface, yet it does not debar the Sårvadhâtuka accent (VI. 1. 186). Thus in mati, the accent of the vikarana i dues not debar the accent of ag a ३६५१ । अनुदात्तस्य च यत्रोदात्तलोयः । ६ । १ । १६१ । यस्मिन्ननुदात्ते पर उदात्तो लुप्यते तस्योदात्त: स्यात् । 'दे वीं वाचम् । अत्र डीबुदात्तः। 3651. An unaccented vowel gets also the acute accent, when on account of it the preceding acute is elided. The word udâçta is understood here. Thus FA+= HTET , The word ATT has acute on the last, when the unaceented (noudatta) stu is added to it;. the is elided (VI. 1. 148); the anıdåtta å becuines udîttit. So also a fu a + 15 - qu: (VIC 1.88); o faal+ =qû, arna 1=v år i The afgą hus ao te on the last. So also 92+çaya = 51 (IV. 2. 87), 7şaa, aaaa 1. l'he words aga &c are end-acute, and the afix ą (a) is anuditta (III. 1. 4). aat ara (Rig Veda VIII. 100, 11 and 101. 16). ३६५२ । चौ.। ६।१ । २२२ ॥ लुप्ताकारेञ्चती परे पूर्वस्यान्तोदात्तः स्यात् । उदात्तनिवृत्तिस्वरापवादः। 'टे वद्रीची नयत. aguni' 'प्रतद्धित इति वाच्यम्' । दाधीच: । माधूचः । प्रत्ययस्वर एवात्र । 3652. In compound words ending in anch, the final vowel of the preceding word has the acute accent in the weak cases in which only ch of anche remains. Thas dazi at aa aau (Rig Veda III. 6. 1). This is an exception to VI. 1. 161, 170 and VI. 2. 52. Vart:—"This rule does not apply before a Taddhita affix, Aş qures argarin Here the accent is regulated by the affix (ur. 1, 3). ३६५३ । आमन्त्रितस्य च । ६ ।। १८८ ॥ श्रामन्तिविभक्त्यन्तस्यादिम्दानः स्यात् । भान इन्द्र वरूण मित्र दे वाः ।। 3653. The first syllable of a Vucative gets the acute accent: Thus faeculiar a ar: (Rig. Ve la V, 4.1, 2). This debarg the final acceat ordained, by VI. 2. 148... Though the atfix map, be elided. by a ghn word, ·92 T## SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. CH. I. F3654. (लक. लुप or लु), yet the effect of the affix remains behind in spite of I. 1. 63. As सारागच्छ ! सप्ता गच्छत!॥ ३१५g | आमन्त्रितस्य च ।।१।१९ ॥ पदात्परस्यापादादिस्थितस्यामन्त्रितस्य सर्वस्यानुदात्तः स्यात् । प्रागुक्तस्य पाष्ठस्यापवादोऽयमा- ष्टमित्रः । 'इमं में गङ्गे यमुने सरस्वति' । 'प्रपादादी' किम् । 'शुतु'दि स्तोम॑म्' । 'श्रान्तितं पूर्वमविटामानवत्' (४१२) । 'अग्न इन्द्र। अत्रेन्द्रादीनां निघातो न । पूर्वस्याविटामानत्वेन पदा. त्परत्वाभावात् । नामन्तिते समानाधिकरणे सामान्यवचनम्' (४१३)। समानाधिकरण आमन्तिते परे विशेष्यं पूर्वविद्यमानवन । 'अग्ने तेजस्विन्' । 'अग्ने त्रातः' । 'सामान्यवचनम् किम् । पर्यायेषु मा भूत् । 'अल्ये देवि सरस्वति' ॥ 3654. All the syllables of a Vocative are unaccented when a word precedes it, and it does not stand at the beginning of a hemistich. The Vocative is acutely accented on the first by VI. 1..198, the present makes it all unaccented, and is thus an exception to the last sutra, Thus इमं मे गङ्ग यम ने सरस्वति (Rig Veda X. 75. 5). Why do we say 'wlien it does not stand at the beginning of a hemistich '1 Observe शुद्रिस्तोमम् (Rig Veda X. 75. 5). But rule VIII. 1. 72. S. 412 taught us that a Vocative standing before an. other word is considered as non-existent. Therefore in अग्न इन्द्र वरुण every Vocative gets the acute by the last sätra, and the present sſtra does not make &c. accentless, for the Vocative being non-existent, इन्द्र &c. are considered as not preceded by another word. To VIII. 1. 72. S. 412 there is however an exception made by VIII. 1. 73, S. 413. Therefore where there are two Vocatives in apposition, one qualifying the other, the first Vocative (or the qualified), is not considered as non-existent for the purposes of the present sútra. Hence in अग्ने तेजस्विन ; अग्ने त्रातः; the words tejiisvin and tratah qualify Agne; and therefore they are unaccented. Why do we say 'when in apposition'? Observe अघन्य देवि सरस्वति ; here the words are not in apposition, 4. e. one does not qualify the other, but they are merely synonyms: and therefore the present sútra applies. ३६५५ । सामान्य वचनं विभाषितं विशेषवचने । ८।१।७४ ॥ अत्र भाष्यकता बहुवचनमिति पूरितम् । सामान्यवचनमिति च पूर्वसूत्र योजितम्। अामन्त्रि. सान्ते विशेषणे परे पूर्व बहुवचनान्तविटामानवद्वा। 'देवी': धनुर्वीस रु नः कणोत' । अत्र देवीनां विशेषणं डिति । 'देवाः शरण्या' । इह द्वितीयस्य निधातो वैकल्पिकः ॥ 3655. When the preceding Vocative is in the Plural number, it is optionally considered as non-existent, if the subsequent Vocative, in apposition with it, is a specific term. The VIII. 1. sutras 73 and 74 as enunciated by Panini are नामन्तिते समानाधि करण, and सामान्यवचनं विभाषितं विशेषवचने । Patanjali made the amendment by add. ing सामान्यवचने to 73 and completed the present sutra by adding बहुवचनम् to it. This ordains option, where the sutra VIII. I. 73, S, 413 would have made the consideration of the first vocative as existent, compulsory. Thus quit: agafar ..

·VOL. III. CH. I. $3656.) ACCENTS. 93 1 1 a: RUTH (Rig Veda X. 128. 5). Here uz is an adjective qualifying aut: So also a at: htuur: or à ai qat: u ३६५६ । सुबामन्त्रिते पराङ्गवत्स्वरे । २।१।२॥ सुबन्तमामन्त्रिते परे परस्याङ्गवत्स्यात्स्वरे कर्तव्ये । 'टवंत्याणी शुभंस्पती' । शुभ इति शुभेः विबन्तषष्ठ यन्तम् । तस्य परशरीरानुप्रवेशे षाष्ठिकमामन्त्रितायुदात्तत्वम् । न चाष्टामको निघात: शंक्यः । पूर्वामन्त्रितस्याविटयमानत्वेन पादादित्वात् । 'यत्ते दिवो दुहितमतभोजनम् । इह दिवः Tartefnan fayra: परशुना वृश्चन ॥ * षष्ठयामन्त्रितकारकवचनम् । षष्ठयन्तमामन्त्रितान्तं प्रति यत्कारकं तद्वाचकं चेति परि- गणानं कर्तव्यमित्यर्थः । तेनेह न । 'अयमग्न रिता । एतेनाग्ने ब्रह्मणा'-समर्थानुवया वा सिद्धम् ।। '* पूर्वाङ्गवच्चेति वक्तव्यम् । श्रा ते धितमरुताम् । 'प्रति त्वा दुहितर्दिवः' । अव्ययानां न'। 'उच्चरधीयान' । 'अव्ययीभावस्य स्विष्यते । उपान्यधायान' । 3656. A word ending in a case-affix, when followed by a word in the vocative case, is regarded as if it was the anga or component part of such subsequent vocative word, when a rule relating to accent is to be applied. In other words, the word ending in a case-affix enters, as if into the body of the vocative (amantrita) word. Thus sûtra VI. 1. 198 S. 3653 declares a word ending in a vocative case-affix, gets the udâtta accent on the beginning 2.e, first syllable. Now, this rule will apply even when a word ending with a case-affic precedes such word in the vocative oase. Thus the word dat o two lords '! has udâtta on the first syllable. Now, when this word is preceded by another inflected noun as शुभस् * of prosperity,' the accent will fall on y, the two words being considered as a single word ; as :-fedar asa itftat ada uut THÁT GEHT WRX (Rig. 1. 3. 1). 'O Asvins, riding on quick horses, lords of prosperity and bestowers of plenty of food, eat the sacrificial offerings to your satisfaction.' Here VIII. 1, 19, S. 3654 does not make the word accentless, for the preceding Vocative, dravat påui' being considered as non-existent, the second is beginning of But in the following example a feat graad À (Rig. Veda VII. 81. 5) the word fza: is accentless because of the VIII. 1 19. s. 3654. So also ůryat asa? "O thou cutting with an ase'! The word vry is formed from the root and with the prefir ut and the Upâdi affix which is treated as fsa (See Uñadi I. 34). Hence it has acute on the final. But by the present Bâtra, being considered as the component part of the Vocative 229, it becomes first-acute. Vart : -The rule of this sûtra should be confined to that word only that denotes the agent (kâraka) of the verb with which the Vocative is connected and to the Genitive governing the Vocative. Though the Vocative being a substantive pure and simple cannot stand in relation of a kâraka to a verb, yet the verb in the sentence has a káraka. That is meant in the Vartika. Therefore not so here : quia aftan (Rig Veda X. 142. 1) and päara pau (Rig Veda I. 31. 18). Here the words wir and raa are not connected with the verb to which the Vocative refers; while in utratatan the word utral with the axe is a & Pida. www 5 ·THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. CH, I. 83656 káraka to the verb denoted by the root aaa (to cut from which the Vocative Par comes. In other words, the preceding word becomes the integral part of the Vocative under two conditions, only, namely, (1), when it is a Genitive govern. ing the Vocative as in THRAT. where the word guy is in the sixth case (derived with the affir für from yt, the base being T); or (2) when the preceding word stands in the relation of a karaka to the action denoted by the root from, which the. Vocative is derived : as in o'ryat etan ‘O with axe cutting! Or we may dispense with this Vârtika, and get the same result by the rule of agrafafu: ; for ouly that word can become the integral part of a Vocative which is syntactically. connectel with it, and not any word that night happen to precede it. Tart-It should be rather stated : 'Oomponent part of the preceding.' That is, while the sútra teaches that the preceding word becomes part of the subsequent word, Katyayana would reverse the order. Thus su a: fuay #5a14 (Fig Veda II. 33. 1). Here the subsequent word' ATATH becomes as an auga or component part: of funt which is the preceding word. fant is acoertless, because & Vocative, and therefore, A#A# also becomes accentless being considered as anga of fanſ i So alsɔ ofa rat z frat fea: (Rig. VII. 81. 3); here faa: is accentless, because the Vuoative gfeaç is uiguata. Vårt :--Prohibition must be stated of Indeclinables as agrara!! Isti. -But not so.of the Avyayibhava, compounds, which are also Indeclina ables. As उपान्यधीयान॥ ३६५७ । उदात्तस्वस्तियोर्यणः स्वरितोऽनुदात्तस्य । ८।३।४॥ उदासस्थाने स्वरितस्थाने च यो यगत परस्यानुदात्तस्य स्वरितः स्यात् । अभ्यभि हिस्वरितस्य UT: 1 TAATSATUT I ve Faftar Jutlara atfarminfaatan a un 3657. A svarita vowel is the substitute of an anudatta yowel, when the latter follows after such a semi-vowel, as has replaced an udâtta or a syarita yowel. An unaccented vowel becomes svarita, when it comes after a dur (semi-vowel). which यण itself has come in the room of a vowel which was acute or svarita once. Thus muzifa fe i The word of is finally acute (See Phit Sûtras IV, 12. and I. 1). It is doubled by VIII. 1. 4. S. 2140. The second of gets the designation of âmredita VIII. 1. 2. and it is anudatta by VIII, 1.3, S. 3670, Therefore in af afa the of the first is udatta, the , of second is anudầtta, the is changed to y, this q is uilâtta-yan. hence the of the second au after it beconies svarita by the present sûtrafø+ ***w = m* q+sifs = fa un Now to take an exuinple of a svarita-yan. The word and is finally acute by krit-accent (VI. 2. 139. S. 3873). The Locative singular of this word is Call + -wafa, by VI. 4. 83. S 281). This ą is A-semivowel which comes in the room of the acute , therefore, it is udâtta-yan. After this udatta-yan, the-anudatta 3 of the Locative becoines svarita by the first part of this sûtra. Nun when, uafut ·VOL. IIT. CH. I. $3659.] AOCENTS. 59 স্মা, 1 i are combined by sundhi, this svarita is changed to y; it is, therefore, & #varita-you. The unnocented or will become svarita, after this svarita-yan. As nu au The word "TUT is finally acute and cousequently or is not acuta (Phit, I. 18). This gvarita si of what is evolved by the present sûtra which belongs to the Tripidi section of the Ashtadhyayî, and hence it is asiddha (VIII. 2. 1. S. 12). Tberefore rule VI. 1. 158. does not cause the ir to lose its accent. Cf. 3660. ३६३८ । एकादेश उदात्तनोदात्तः । ८।२६॥ Bara fatau z1a: 19 L'atsvar:' atac Hai' 3658. The single substitute of an unaccented vowel with an udatta vowel is udatta. Thus a ars at: (Rig Veda 61. 2) and at AEN: The word a: is anudatta by VIII. 1. 21. S. 405. read with VIII. 1. 18. S. 403. The word ga: is acutely accented on the first, as it is formed by adding to (Uņ. I. 151). The E of ag is changed to T (VIII. 2. 66. S. 162), which is again charged to 3 (VI. 1. 113. S. 163). Thus ar sar: Here , becomes pûrva-rupa by VI. I. 109. S. 86. which is udátta. i is formed from f*# by up affix (V. 3. 12. S. 1959. and VIL 2. 105. S. 2299) and is svarita (VI. 1. 185. S. 3729). The word dat is acutely accented on the first by the Phit II. 6. The single long substitute ia udatta. ३६५९ । स्वरितो वानुदात्ते पदादी। ८।२।६ ॥ अनुदात्ते पदादा पर उदात्तेन सहेकादेशः स्वरितो वा स्यात् । पक्षे पूर्वसूत्रेणादात्तः। वोट fa&tæ • paraf faatda' i cafeanfaatuta færdi: sa fia: 1 ateinan Data: किञ्च 'एक पदान्तात-(६) इति पूर्वरूपे स्वरित एव । तेऽवदन् । सोउयमागोत् उक्तं च ग्रातिशाख्ये-'इकारयोश्च प्रश्लेषे हे पार्भािनहतेषु च' इति । 3659. The single substitute of an unaccented vowel, standing at the beginning of a word, with an udatta vowel, may optionally be svarita or udatta. Thus वीदं ज्योतिर्हृदये। अस्य प्रलोको टिचीयते । This is a vyavasthita-vibhåsbå; in this wise. There will necessarily be svarita (1) where a long is the single substitute of (x+3) or of two short 7's, (2) where there is pûrva-rupa by the application of T3: Uztara sfa (VI. 1. 109. S. 86) There will be udátta where & long vowel comes in. Thus in fa + sax-atzą in are sui farza, the long s is substituted for two short a's. This substitution of a long for two short g's is technically called 999 Where there is Praś lesha, the long is necessarily svarita. Similarly when there is sufaxaafaj: 1. c., the peculiar sandhi taught in VI. 1. 109. Thus a'saa, TSUNĄ I So also whore there is an gfa i. e., the substitution of a semi-vowel in the room of an udatta or svarita vowel as miffi The above rules about svarita are thus summarised in the Pratisakhyas: सकारयोश्च प्रश्लेषे क्षेत्राभिनिहतेषु च । But where a long is substituted an * single substitute for et § (one of the 3's being long), there it niust alwaya bo acute, As na bata fasta (Rig. 1. 190, 4). The words tafa + na are 1 ·96 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. CH. I. 93660. of agui. # compounded into faatan | The word fafa (Locative singular) is finally acute by VI. 1. 171, S. 3717. gaat is from the Divadi root yg gat, and has lost its accent by VIII 1. 28. S. 3935. ३६६० । उदात्तादनुदात्तस्य स्वरितः । ८।४। ६६ ॥ उदात्तात्य रस्यानुदात्तस्य स्व रितः स्यात् । 'ग्निमीले'। अस्याप्य सिद्धत्वाच्छेषंनिघातोन। #171918:' 3660. The Svarita is the substitute of an Anudatta vowel which follows an Udâtta vowel. Thus अग्निम् + ईले - अग्निमीले। Here which was gath by rule VIII. 1. 28, becomes svarita by the present rule, as it comes after the udåtta of The rule VI. 1. 158, S. 3650, does not change this syarita into an Aoudatta because for the purposes of that rule, the present rule is fast, or as if it had not taken place (VIII. 2. 1. S. 12). Therefore both the udatta and the svarita accent are heard. VÄITE: (Rig Veda I. 129. 2). Here on the Acousative singular of ag is finally acute. The word State: is the Nominative Plural of far, the augment aan being inserted by VII, 1. 50. S. 3572. 'The word Sun is derived from ST' to rule' with the affix Tag, and therefore it is finally acute because of the faq accent. The Nom, Pl, affix at being a go is anudâtta. The long & and the w of 5 are svarita. ३६६१ । नोदात्तस्वरितोदयमगार्ग्यकाश्यपगालवानाम् । ८ । ४।६७ ॥ उदात्तपरः स्वरितपरश्चानुदात्त: स्वरितो न स्यात् । गाग्र्यादिमते तु स्यादेव । 'प्रय असा । atsaa 1:' 113 viita:' 3661. All prohibit the above substitution of svarita, except the Âchâryas Gârgya, Kâśyapa and Gálava , when an udatta or a svarita follows the anudatta. Tbus g g 15: (Rig Veda III, 7. 1). apaat:; rata 19a: 11 Note :- This debars the prece ling rule. That anudatta which is followed by an udầtta is called saiatzu: or SGFUT: 1 The word cu means ut in the terminology of ancient Gran marians. That anudatta which is followed by a svarita is called rafrârga: 1 These are Bahuvrihi compounds. Thus उदात्तोदयः -premii, ama nii The word åa is first acute by fazy accent, before this udatta, the u of these words does not hecome svarita, So with स्वरितोदयः-गार्य: Et'i atar': a The word of is svarita being formed by the faą affix na (V. 3 12 S, 1959); before this svarita the preceding a does not become *svarita. Why do we say 'except in the opinion of Gârgya, Kâśyapa and Gâlava' ? Observe गारयः क, गार यस्तत्र । According to their opinion, the svarita change does take place. The employment of the longer word szy instead of the shorter word op is for the sake of auspiciousness, for the Book has approached the end. The very utterance of the word say is auspicious, All sacred works commence with HA ·Von. Itt. Ch. I. $3664. ACCENTS. 97 6 an auspicious word, have an auspicious word in the middle, and end with an a118- picions word. Thus Pâņini con mences his sútra, with the avispicious word aff: * increise' (in Sûtra 1. 1. 1), has the word for the well wisher in the middle (IV. 4. 143), and so at the end. The mention of the names of those several Acharyas is for the sake of showing respect (pujartham). ३६६२ । एकति दूरात्संबुद्धौ । १ । २ । ३३ ॥ दृरासंबोधने वाक्यमेश्रुतिः स्यात् । स्वर्यापवादः। 'पागच्छ भी माणवक' । 3662. In addressing a person from a distance, the tone is called Ekaśruti or monotony. Monotony or Ekasruti is that tone which is perceived when a person is aildressed; in it there is an absence of all the three tones mentioned above; and there is no definite pitch in it. It is, therefore, the ordinary reoitative tone. The word “Sambuddhi' means here addressing a person from a distawe; and has not its technical meaning of the singular number of the vocative case. श्रागच्छ भो माणवक देवदत्तार "O boy Devadatta ! come! There is vanishing of all the accents in the above case; and the final short vowel of Devadatta is changed into pluta by VIII. 2. 84 (giga a) || ३६६३ । यज्ञकर्मण्यजपन्यवसामसु । १।२३४ ॥ यक्रियायां मन्तु एकश्रुतिः स्याज्जपादीन्वर्जयित्वा । 'अग्निर्मा_वः ककुत्' । 'यज्ञ-' इति किम् । स्वाध्यायकाले त्रस्वर्यमेव । 'अजप-' इति किम् । 'माग्ने बों विवेवस्तु । FÖT AIA TuiTum: 1 TA AĦT FAPTARTI sai ATA DITEST TIKUT: 1 nitfag J1A1011 1 3663. In the sacrificial works, there is Monotony, except in japa (silent repetition of a formula), Nyúnkha vowels (sixteen sorts of om) and the Sama Vedas. In sacrificial works' or on occasions of sacrifice, the mantras of the Vedas are recited in Ekaśruti or monotony. But on occasions of ordiuary readingthe mantras are to be recited with their proper three-fold accents. • Japa' is the repetition of mantras, and their recitation in a low voice or whisper as when a person immersed in a river recites them. Nyúňkha is the name of certain hyinns of the Vedas and the names of 16 sorts of Om.' Some of these are pronounced with udatta and others with anudatta accent. Sâmas are songs, or the musical cadence in which some vedio hymns are to be uttered. As :--- - Fap Fafiga: mafa': yfyan gĘ I Uið taifa fint a (Rig Veda VIII. 14, 16). When a mantra is recited as a japa, then it must be profounded with an Hocent.—As aðra aä fafaa's (Rig Veda I. 128. 1). When not einployed on oocasions of sacrifice, bnt are ordinarily read, the mantras must have their proper accent, and there will be no Ekaáruti. ३६६४ । उच्च स्तरां वा वषट्कारः । १ । २ । ३५ ॥ यज्ञकर्मणि वौषट्छद उच्चस्तरां वा स्थादेकथुतिर्वा ॥ 13 ·98 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. CH. I.83664. 3664. The pronunciation of the word 'vashat' may optionally be by raising the voice (accutely accented), or it may be pronounced with monotony. The phrase "yajña-karma' is understood here. Even in yajña-karmas or sacri fices the word ataz may optionally be pronounced in a raised tone. The word वषट् in the sutra signifies वौषट् । ३६६५ । विभाषा छन्दसि । १।। ३६ ॥ छन्दसि विभाषा सकश्रुतिः स्यात् । व्यवस्थिविभाषेयम् । हितायां स्वयंम् । ब्राह्मण- एकश्रुतिर्ववचानाम् । अन्येषापि यथासंप्रदाय व्यवस्था । 3665. The monotony is optional in the recitation of the Vedas, or they may be recited with accents. In the Chhandas or the Vedas there is option either to use the Ekaśruti tope or the three tones. Even on the occasion of ordinary reading, the Chhandas might be uttered either with the three accents or monotonously. Some say this is a limited option (vyavasthita-ribhashā). The option allowed by this sätra is to be adjusted in this way. In reading the Mantra portion of the Veda, every word must be pronounced with its proper aocent: but in the Brâhmaņa portion of the Vedu there might be Ekaśruti. This is the opinion of the Rig Vedins, while some say there must be Ekaśruti necessarily and not optionally in the recitation of the Brâbmaņas, Thus :-pirata y üfüs or simply wanita giferi i 'I praise Agni the puronita'. ३६६६ । न सुब्रह्मण्यायांवरितस्य तूदात्तः । १।२। ३७ ॥ मुब्रह्मण्याख्यनिगदे यज्ञकर्मणि-' (३६६३) इति विभाषा छन्दसि' (३६३५) इति च प्राप्ता एकश्रुतिर्न स्यात्वरितस्योदात्तश्च स्यात् । सुब्रह्मण्योम् । सुब्रह्मणि साधुरिति यत् । न च 'एकादेश उदात्तनोदात्तः' (१६५८) इति सिद्ध पुनरत्रेदमुदाविधानं व्यर्थमिति वाच्यं । तत्रानुदात्त इत्यस्यानु वृत्तः । '* असावित्यन्तः । तस्मिन्नेव निगदे प्रथमान्तस्वान्त उदात्तः स्यात् । गाग्र्यो यजते। जि. त्वात्प्राप्त श्रायुदात्तोऽनेन बाध्यते । *अमुष्येत्यन्तः । षष्ठयन्तस्यापि प्राग्वत् । दानेः पिता यजते । * स्यान्तस्योपात्तमं च । चादन्तः । तेन द्वावुदाती । गाय॑स्य पिता यजते । 'वानामधेयस्य+'। स्यान्तस्य नामधेयस्य उपोत्तममुदात्तं वा स्यात् । देवदत्तस्य पिता यजते 3666. There should be no Monotony in the recitation of the Subrahmanya hymns and in those hymns, the vowels, that would otherwise have taken the svarita accent, take the 'udatta' accent instead. The subrahmanya hymns are portions of the Rig Veda mentioned in Satapatha Brahmana. This sútra prohibits Ekaśruti in the case of certain prayers called subrahmanya. By I. 2: 34 read with 1. 2. 36 unte, prayers might be optionally uttered with Ekašruti acoeut, This ordains an exception to that rule. In subrahmanya - ·Vol. IN. C# 1. 83667.] ACCENTS. 99 prayers there is no ekasruti; and in these hymns, a powel which otherwise by any rule of grammar would have taken a svarita accent, takes an udatta accent instead. As सुब्रह्मण्यो ३ मिन्द्रागच्छ हरिव प्रागच्छ : Here the word Fauna is formed by the addicion of the affix Un (IV. 4. 98) to the word ITU, and this u will get svarita accent by VI. 1. 185, (faqaaftan) as it has an indicatory a; by the present sitra, this nascent svarita is changed into udêtta. In the phrase 17, the word Indra being in the vocative case, g is udatta, they of Indra is anudâtta VI. 1. 198. The anudatta preceded by an udatta is changed into svarila (VIII. 4. 66). Thus the są of must become svarita, but by the present sitra this nascent svarita is changed into an udatta. Thus in , both vowels become urâtta. In the word a, the pris udatta; the next letter which was anudatta becomes was ita, and from svaritat, it is changed to udata by the present rule. Thus in the sentence $ 17, the first four syllables are all acutely accented, the fifth syllable is only anudatta. So also in efra sa, for the reasons given above, the letters at and we are anudatta, the rest are all acutely accented. Ol. Shat Br. III. 3. 4. 17 and fgg. 2.1 Vårt: --In the Subrahmanya hyong the final vowel of a word in the Nomia native case is acute. Thus 711* usa Here are is derived from it by the affix us! (IV. 1. 105), and therefore it ought to be acute on the first because of fsa accent. But the present vårtika prevents that. Thus we have . instead of गायः॥ So also the final of a word in the Genitive is acute in the Subrahmanya texts. As ara fuai uzÀI Here arfa is derived from aa by the Patronymio affix go and it would have been dia: but the vârtika makes it ara: 1 Várt :-But the penultimate as well as the final of the Genitive ending in 8 is udatta. Thus the fort når Here there are two udattas in the same word. Optionally the penultimate of a Genitive in fuis ndâtta, when the word is a Proper Name. As aasta funt asià or ĉagari fuar asta i ३६६७ । देवब्रह्मणोरनुदात्तः । १ । २ । ३८ ॥ अनयोः स्वरितस्यानुदात्तः स्यात्सुब्रह्मण्यायाम् । 'देवा ब्रह्माण प्रागच्छत' । 3667. The word 'devå' and Brahmâna in those bymns have Kanudatta' accent. By I. 2. 37, it was declare 1, that in the subrahmanya hymns, svorita accent is replaced by událta aocent. This sätra make: an exception in favor of the words qat and EU occurring in those hymnis, These words have anudatta accent. As aan GIU 24A come ye Devås and Brahmånas. Here the word aan gets. událta accent the brst syllable by Vl. 1. 198 (in the vocative the novent is on the beginning) : ai has origina ly an aruditta Accent which by VII. 4, 66 fan. anudásra following au udáttu is changed into svarila) would have been Várt : . Várt a 02 ·100 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL, III. Ch. 1. $3668. changed into svarita. This syarit, by the previous sûtra required to be changed into ulcitta ; but by this rule, it is replaced by anudatta. In other words, the criginal andátta remains unchanged. ३६६८ । स्वरितात्संहितायामनुशत्तानाम् । १।२।३८ ॥ स्वरितात्परेषामनुदात्तानां संहितायामे श्रुतिः स्यात् । 'इमं मे गड्ढ़े यमुने 'सरस्वति ॥ 3668. The Monotony takes the place of the anudatta vowels which follow the syarita vowels, in close proximity (sanhita). Sanihta is the joining of two or more words in a sentence, for the purposes. of reading or reciting, When words are thus glued together, then the anudáttu accents become Ekabruti if they are preceded by svarita vowels; and are pronounc. ed monotonously. As F# # T F girafa (Rig Veda X, 75, 5) O Ganga, Yamuna, Sarasvati ! this mine. Here the word F# has udâ tta on the last syllable : the word A. is originally anzdátla, but by rule VIII. 4. 66 following an udatta, it is changed into svaritu ; after this svarita all anuda/ta like ng, &c., are replaced by ekaśruti. All the. vowels of the words ng aga le, hvi anudâtta accent by rule VIII. 1. 19 (all vocative get anuđåtta if standing in the middle of a sentence and not beginning a stanza.) The word "sanhita' bag been used in the sđtra to show that when there is a hiatus between the words then there is no change of agudatta into ekasruti. Tbe word sanhitâs is defined in sûtra I. 4. 109, ३६६। उदात्तस्वरितपरस्य सन्त्रतरः । १।२।४० ॥ उदात्तवरिता परीयस्मात्तस्यानुदात्ततरः स्यात् । 'सरा शुतु'ट्टि'। ध्यचक्षय तस्व' । 'तस्य भरमा हितम्' (८३)। 36.69. The accent called Sannatara is substituted in the room of an anudatta vowel, which has an udatta or svarita vowel following it. In the previous sûtra it was said that an anudátla preceded by a svarita becomes Ekaśruti. If however such an anu dátia is followed by an udatta or a avarita, it does not become Ekaśruti but becomes sannatura ce, lower than anudátta. The gannatara is therefore that accent which was originally anudátta, and which is preceded by a syarita and is followed by an udatta or & svarita. This is onc. explanation of the eûtra. There is another explanation which. does not take the anuvšitti of Ekaśruti in this sůtrą, The ayudatta is replaced by aaiinataru when such anulatta immediately precedes an udatta og svarita. The summutra is also called anulátta. Thus greafa yafe i magunea i ·Vor. III. CH. II.83673.] ROOT-AOCENTS. 101 As देवा मन्तः एप्रियमातरोये ॥ Here the word *Tat: is apudatta. Tho word gg: has udatta on the last syllable by VI. 1. 171. In the phrase मातरोप: (Atat:+:) The syllable it is suudatta, because anudatta + an udât ta = muudatta. This anudáttu 1911, preceding the udatta a., is changed into şannatara. ३६७० । अनुदात्तं च। ८ ।। ३ ।। द्विरुक्तस्य परं रूपमनुदात्तं स्यात् । दिदि।। 3670. That which is called âmredita is gravely accented. Thus fra faa' (Rig Vedu I. 1, 3). That is, all the vowels of the am redita become anudatta or accentless. Here ends the Chapter on Accents in general, अथ धातुस्वराः। CHAPTER II. ROOT-ACCENTS. ३६७१ । धातोः । ६।१।१६२॥ अन्त उदात्तः । गोपायत स्यात् नः'। 'असि सत्यः । 3671. A root has the acute on the end-syllable. The word sunt is understood here. Thus गोपायात, उनः' असि सत्यः' (Rig Veda. I. 87.4). ३६७२ । स्वपादिहिंसामयनिटि । ६।१।१८८ ॥ स्वपादीनां हिंसेश्चानिट्यजादा लसार्वधातुके परे श्रादिस्दात्ता वा स्यात् । स्वादिरदाढा. सर्गणः । स्वन्ति । श्वसन्ति । हिंसन्ति । पक्षं प्रत्ययस्वरेण मध्योदात्तता । 'डित्य वेष्यते' । मेछ । स्वपानि । हिनसानि । 3672. The acute accent is optionally on the first syllable when a Personal-ending, being a Sarvadhatuka tense affix beginning with a vowel, (provided that the vowel is not the augment ‘iț') follows after 'svap' &c., or after hins.' The phrase Efrånig in the locative case is understood here. स्वन्ति or स्वन्ति, श्वसन्ति, or श्वसन्ति हिं सन्ति or हिंसन्ति। The aecent on the middle falls by the accent of the affix III. 1. 3. Why do we say before an affix beginning with a roveth Observe स्वप्यात्, हिंस्यात । why do we say ' not taking the augment इट' Observe पि: and श्वसितः । Ishti :- This role applies to those vowel-beginning affixes which are fea; it does not apply to स्वयानि, हिनसानि । ३६७३ । अभ्यस्तानामादिः। ६।१।१८६ ॥ अनिट्वजादी लसार्वधातुके परे अभ्यस्त्रानामादिस्दात्तः। ये दर्द ति प्रिया वसु" । परत्वा- च्चित् स्वरमयं बाधते । 'दधाना इन्द्र। Tbus --- Sahe ।

·103 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. CE. I. $3673. so 3673. The acute aocent falls on the first syllable of the reduplicate verbs when followed by an affix beginning with a vowel (the vowel being not ‘it ') and being a sârvadbâtuka personal ending. Thus i zafa faur ag (Rig Veda VII. 32. 15). aafa, tag, aufa, kun, stafa, wag, hufa, strug: 1 Before consonant afixes : zara i Before any afixes : - afada Though the word safe was understood here from the last aphorism, the repetition is for the sake of making this an invariable rule and not an optional rule as those in the foregoing. It being a subsequent sútra, debars the far aca. cent, as qurata (Rig Veda I. 4. 5), ३६७४ । अनुदात्ते च । ६।१।१९० ॥ अविटयमानोदात्ते लसार्वधातुके परेऽभ्यस्तानामादिरुदात्तः। 'दधासि रत्न दविणं च दाशुषे'। 3674. Also when the unaccented endings of the three persons in the singular follow, the first syllable of the reduplicate has. the acute. The endings fæą fax and fau are anudátta (III. 1. 4). This sûtra applies to those personal endings which do not begin with a vowel. Thus darfa, starfa, दधाति, जिं होते, मिमोते। The word अनुदात्त is to be construed here as a Bahuvrihi i, e., an affix in which there is no udåtta vowel, so that the rule may apply when a portion of the affix is elided or a semivowel is substituted: as an fe auta, and द॑धात्यत्र । दधासि रत्न द्रविणं च दाशुषे (Rig Veda. L. 94. 14). ३६७५ । भीहीभृहुमदजनधनदरिद्राजागरां प्रत्ययात्पर्व पिति । ६।१।१९२ ॥ भीनमतीनामभ्यस्तानां पिति लसावाधातुके परे प्रत्ययात्यर्वमुदात्तं स्यात् । 'योऽग्निहोत्रं जुहोति' । ममत्तु नः परिजमा' । 'माता यद्वीरं धनत् । 'जागर्षि त्वम्'। 3675. In at it, y, T, E, a, a, after, and art, in their reduplicates, the acute accent is, before the sârvadhâtuka unaccented endings of the three persons in singular, pit, on the syllable which precedes the affix. This debars the accent on the beginning. Thus fanfa, faizafa, fatta gaifa Hp #: ufasat (Rig Veda I. 122. 3). Here the root he has dirersely taken in the Chhandas the vikaraña sg, though it belongs to Divâdi class. 751aq, SEFI The verb is here ac or the Vedio Subjunctive, so also is the next example. quaq from wa utra, the g of fa being elided by III. 4. 97, and the augment at being added by III 4. 94. Haral zara (Rig Veda X. 73. 1). Zuad, afig fa, suffin In the case of other verbs we have šafa Before attires which have not the indicatory u (i, , all endings other than the three singular endings), the accent will be on the first syllable : as arraia ul. BEDE I fafa& IP 1963 l प्रत्ययात्यूर्वमुदात्तम्। चिकीर्षकः । 8676 The acute accent falls on the syllable immediately preceding the affix that has an indicatory l.

·ANPATIENRN Vor. III. CH. III.83860. AFFIX-ACCENTS. 103 Thus चिकीर्षकः, जिहीर्षक: with the afix गवुन (III. 1. 133), भारिविधम् and ऐषुकारिभक्तम् with the affixes विधल and भक्तल (IV. 2.54) accent on the कि und रि॥ ३६७७ । आदिर्णमुल्यन्यतरस्याम् । ६ । १ । १८४ । अभ्यस्तानामादिरुदासो वा णमुल परे । लोनयं लालयम् । पक्षे लित्स्वरः । 3677. The first syllable may be optionally acute when the absolutive affix 'namul' follows. Thus atrax or Arap 1 In the reduplicate forma arst, the second part = is unaccented by VIII. 1. 3. The present sûtra makes at accented, When IT is not accented, we will get the accent by fara accent. This rule is contined to polysyllabic the Absolutives, namely to the reduplicated Absolutives (VIII. 1. 4). ३६७८ । अचः कर्तृ कि । ६।१।१९५ उपदेशोऽजन्तानां कर्तृयकि पर श्रादिरुदात्तो वा । लयते केदारः स्वयमेव । 3678. The roots which are exhibited in the Dhatupatha with a final vowel, may optionally have the acute on the first syllable, before the affixes of the Passive ‘yak' when the sense of the verb is Reflexive. The word star is understood here. Thus न यते or लय ते केदारः स्वयमेव स्तीय or स्तीते केदारः स्वयमेव । When the acceut does not fall on the first syllable, it falls on Ø (VI. I. 186). ३६७९ । चड्यन्यतरस्याम् ।६।१ । २१८ । चन्त धातावुपोत्तममुदात्तं वा। 'मा हि चीकरताम्। धात्वकार उदात्तः। पक्षान्तरेचदात्तः॥ इति धातुस्वराः। 3679. The acute accent may be optionally on the penultimate syllable of the reduplicated Aorist in ‘chan' the word consisting of more than two syllables. Thus मा हि चीकरताम् or चीकरताम् । The augment se is elided by the addition of मा, VI. 4.74; हि prevents the verb from becoming anudatta. VIII. 1. 34 then cornes the चित् accent of चङ् ॥ The augmented form with #ç has acute always on the first syllable VI. 4. 71. When the word is of less than three syllables, the rule does not apply, as, माहि वर्धत् ॥ Here ends the Chapter of Root-accents. अथ प्रत्ययस्वराः । New Delhi CHAPTER III. AFFIX-ACCENTS. ३६८० । कर्षात्वता घजोऽन्त उदात्तः । ६ ।१ । १५८ । कर्षतेर्धातोराकारवतश्च धजन्तस्यान्त उदात्तः स्यात् । कर्मः । शापा निर्देशात्तुवाटेरायुदास श्व । कर्षः । पाकः। S * A ।

·104 THE SIDDHANTA KAUÜFUDÍ. [Vol. III. CH. III. $3680. 3680. A stem formed with the Krita-affix 'ghan' has the acute accent on the end-syllable, if it is formed from the root krish, (karshati) or has a long â in it. Thus id :, atem, qu: TT:, qui, : This is an exception to VI. 1. 197 by which affixes having an indicatory s have acute accent on the first syllable. The word is formed with the Vikaraṇa 79, is used in the aphorism instead of 379 to indicate that suit of Bhvādi gana is affected by this rule, and not amufa of Tudådigana. The word : derived from the Tudadi u has the acute accent on the first syllable. ३६८१ । उज्छादीनां च । € 191 qŠO it श्रन्त उदात्तः स्यात् । उञ्छादिषु युगशब्दो घजन्तोगुणो निपात्यते कालविशेषे रथाट्यवयवे I araiat: fnafuga da'i $77 arī atâ AaFITA' I Mais 85.71:1 1978: सोमस्य प्रथम' भक्षः' । उत्तमशश्वत्तमावपि ! 'उदुत्तमं वरुण' । 'शश्वत्तममी'लते । 3681. The words uchchha &c. have acute accent on the last syllable. Thus avarat: mistäfugâ ga (Rig Veda III. 26. 3). But in other places we have an AT AFATÆ (Rig Veda I. 30. 7). The word wat is formed by asi affix, as in the followinig na: IAR AVARI HE: (Rig Veda VI. 28. 5). So also gna and Tran as in sgari aku (Rig Veda I. 24. 15). Taphatað (Rig Veda X.70. 3). Note :-.1. 356., 2. :, 3. 5537, 4. These are formed by est, and would have taken acute accent ou the first. 5. 51d":, 6. av: are formed by w affix (III. 3, 61) which being grave (III. 1. 4.), these words would have taken the accent of the dhatu (VI. 1. 162), 2. e, acute on the first syllable. Some read u: also here, 7. gai: is derived from ys by est affix, the non-causing of guņa is irregular, and the word means a cycle of time', a part of a carriage. In other seuses, the form is avn: 1 8. må: - (prà); is formed by car, and has this accent when it means {poison', in other senses, the acute is on the first syllable. : azi, are: are:), and a :, TūI These words are formed by us by III. 3. 121. When denoting instrument (ITU) they take the above accent, when denoting via the accent falls on the first syllable: 10. yg aga afg, e. g. oferta ofiga ega, 11. axfa: Faila, the stotra means the Sama Veda, the word ania: occurring in the Sama Veda has acute on the last: in other places, it has the avount on the middle. 12. sai at:, the at: has end-acute when meaning “a cave', otherwise when formed hv pu affix it has acute on the first. 13. TEGATÛT Hiaefara, thus tik :, and":, in other senses, the acute is on the first. शश्वत्तमा सर्वत्रः, . g. उत्तमः, शश्वत्तमः । Som- read the limitation of Hanef into this also. 15. HAA-UT: (ainaat) 1 These are formed by us, ha though a qual root is here as I 1 354, 2 , 3 $53, 4 FFA, 5 su, 6 au (ou), 7 gn, 8 dir qu, 9 वेदवेगवेष्टबन्धाः, (चेष्ट वेष्ट) करणे, 10 स्तुयुद्वश्छन्दसि (परिष्टुत्, संयुत्, परिगुत), 11 वर्तनि: 9. 14. 377- in SES re ·Von. III. CH. III.S3684. AFFIX-ACCENT'S. 105 As चतसः स्तोत्रे, 12 धमे दरः, 13 साम्बतापी भावगर्हायाम, 14 उत्तम शश्वत्तमा (उत्तम शश्वत्तमशब्दो) सर्वत्र, 15 भतमन्थ, भोगमन्थाः (भक्षमन्यभागदेहाः)॥ ३६८२ । चतुरः शसि । ६।१।१६७ ॥ चतुरोऽन्त उदात्तः शसिपरे । 'चतुरः कल्पयन्तः' । 'अति र:-' (२९६) इति रादेशस्य पूर्व विधा स्थानिवत्त्वाचे ह । चतस : पश्य । 'चतेस्रन' । नित्वादायुदात्तता ॥ 3682. The word chatur, followed by the accusative plural, has acute accent on the last syllable. Thus agt: mada: (Rig Veda X. 114, 6) the accent is ou a The feminine of धतुर is चतस (VII. 2. 99), which has acute acceut on the first (VII. 2. 99 Vart.), and its accusative plural will not have accerit on the last. syllable. This is 80, because चतुर has acute ou the first, as formed by 377 affix (Uņádi V. 59). Its substitute Bag will also be so, by the role of Eurfaaa ! The special entciation of प्रायुदात्त with regard to चतम in the Vatika चतसर्यायुदात्तनिपातनं कर्तव्य (VII. 2. 99) indicates that the present rule does not apply to gagi Another reason for this is as follows : चतस+शस् = चत+शस् । Now comes the present Sutra ; here,, however, the 7 (VII, 2. 100 S. 299) substitute of being sthånivat, will prevent the udatta formation of the y of a ; nor will #lie considered as town and take the acute, as there exists no vowel + but it consonant which cannot take an accent. Professor Bohtlingk plares the accent thus चतुर :, Pro. Max Muller चतुः। I have followel Prof. Max Muller in interpreting this sûtra; for Bohtlingk’s interpretation wouid make the ending you accented and not the Gnal of ३६८३ । झल्य पोत्तमम् । ६।१ । १८० ॥ षत्रिचतुया या झलादिविभक्तिस्तदन्ते पद उपात्तममुदात्तं स्यात् । 'अध्वर्युभिः चभिः निर्वाभर्वा नवती चं । 'सप्तभ्यो जायमानः' । 'श्रादभिर्दाि वस्यंतः' । 'उपौत्तमम्' किम् । 'प्राइभिई यमौनः' । 'विश्व'दस्तिभिः' । 'झलि' किम् । 'नवानां नवतीनाम् ॥ 3683. The numerals 'shat', 'tri' and 'chatur' when taking a case-affix beginning with a bh or s get the acute accent on the penultimate syllable, when the said numerals assume a form consisting of three or more syllables. The mumerals te, fa and agt when ending in a cage-affix beginning with a झल consonant, form a full word (पद), in such a word the penultimate syllable gets the acute accent. The very word penultimate shows that tne ud must be of three syllables at least. Thus पंचभिः, सप्तभिः, तिमभिः, चतुर्भिः ॥ श्रध्वर्युभिः पञ्चभिः (Rig Veda III. 7.7), नवभि जैनवतीच (Rig Veda x. 39. 10). सप्तभ्यो जायमानः (Rig Veda VIII 96. 16). प्रादभिर्विवस्वतः (Rig Veda VIII.72.8). Why do we say ' beginning with R and भू'? Observe, नवाना नवतीनाम् (Rig Veda I. 191. 13). Why do we say " the pennltimate syllable? Observe Observe श्राषभित य- मानः (Rig Veda II. 18. 4) विश्वे देवस्त्रिभिः (Rig Verla VIII. 35. 3). ३६८४ । विभाषा भाषायाम् । ६।।।११।। उविषये। । - प - N S सार S । उ ·Tup SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. CH. III. $3684. or ॥ . 3684. In the classical language this is optional. The netfa case-affixes coming after the above numerals पद yि and may make the words so formed take the acute on the peuultimate optionally, in the ordivary spoken language. Thus vafar: or data In the alternative, VI. 1. 179 applies. So also ayfa: or सप्तभिः, तिस भिः तिभिः ३६८५ । सर्वस्य सुपि । ६ । १ । १६१ ॥ सुपि परे सर्बशब्दस्यादिरुदात्तः स्यात् । 'सर्वे नन्दन्ति शसा' 3685. The acute is on the first syllable of sarva when the case-endings follow. Thus सर्वे नन्दति घशसा (Rig Veda X.71. 10). ३६८६ । नित्यानित्यम् ।६।१।१९७ ॥ जिदन्तस्य निदन्तस्य चाटा दात्तः स्यात् । यस्मिन्विधानि पौस्या' । पुसः कर्मणि ब्राझ. पादित्वारण्यञ् । सुते दधिण्वक्षनः '। चायतेरसुन । चायेरने हस्वश्च' इति चकारादसुनो नुडागमश्च ॥ 3686. Whatever is derived with an affix having an indicatory si or at, has the acute invariably on the first syllable, Thus ufu fagafa diRT (Rig Veda I. 5. 9). Here üiri is from gpp with the affix on because it belongs to the Brahmanadi class. (V. 1. 124. S. 1788.) सुते दधिष्व नश्चनः (Rig Veda I. 3.6). Here चन: is derived from the root चाय पूजानिशामन्योः with the afix अमुन (Unadi IV. 199), which takes the augment नुद alsoy by force of the word च and in the sutra above quoted (Upadi IV. 199), and then the य of चाय is elided. चनस means food.' १६८७ । पथिमयोः सर्वनामस्थाने।६।१ । १९९ ॥ आदिरुदात्तः स्यात् । अयं पन्थाः। 'सर्वनामस्थाने' किम् । 'ज्योतिष्मतः पथो रक्ष'। उदासनिवृत्तिस्वरेणान्तोदात्तं पदम ॥ 3687. The acute accent is on the first syllable of pathin and mathin when followed by a strong case-ending. The words ofx7 and #fea are derived by the Uņâdi affix gfa, (IV. 12, and 13, and are oxytone hy III. 1. 3. They become âdyudåtta before strong cases. Thus अयं पन्थाः (Rig Veda IV. 18. 1). Why do wo say ' when followed by a sarvanamasthina case-affix'' Observa पोतिष्मतः पयो रन, (Rig Veda x. 53.6), The accent is on the final by VI. 1. 162, there being elision of the udatta इन ॥ ३६८८ । अन्तश्च सवै युगपत् । । । १ । २०० ॥ सवैपत्ययान्तस्याटान्ती युमपदायुदात्ती स्तः। 'हर्षसे दातया 3688. The Infinitive in tavai has the acute on the first syllable and on the last syllable at one and the same time. । HARE म ·VoL. III. CH. III.83692.] ArriX-ACCENTS. 107 he - Thus र्ष से दातवा उ (Rig Veda IV. 21.9). This is an orception to III. 1. 3. by which a of na ought to have got the nocent, and it also countermaus rule VI. 1. 158. by which there can be only a single acute in a single word. ३६८९ । तया निवासे।६।१। २०१ ॥ श्रायुदात्तः स्यात् । स्व क्षये शुचिवत। एरजन्तः । 3689. The word kshaya has the acute on the first syllable in the sense of house, dwelling.' Thus स्वेनये शुचिवत । (Rig Veda X. 118. 1). The word is formed by y affix III. 1. 118. and would have had accent on the affix (III. 1. 3). When not meaning a house, we have : mar ana दस्यूनाम् । The word is formed by अच् (III. 2. 31). ३६०० । जयः करणम् ।६।१।३०२ ॥ करणावाची जयशब्द प्रायुदात्तः स्यात् । जयत्यनेन जयाश्वः ॥ 36.90. The acute accent falls on the first syllable of jaya, in the sense of ' whereby one attains victory.' Thus जयाश्वः, but otherwise जया वर्तते ब्राह्मणानाम् । Tho former जय is by घaffix, (III. I. 118), the second by अच् (III. 2. 31). ३६९१ । वृषादीनां च । ६।१ । २०३ ॥ प्रादिग्दात्तः । प्राक्षतिगणोयम् । वाजेभिर्वाजिनीवती'। 'इन्द्रं वाणीः ' 3691. The words vrisha &c., have the acute on the first syllable. Thus atsif etfaatant (Rig. Veda I. 3. 10) statut: (Rig Veda I. 7. 1). 1. पः, 2. जनः, 3. ज्वरः, 4. अहः, B. हयः, 6. गयः । These are formed by अच् (III. 1. 104). The word गय is from T-गायते, irregularly it is treated as गे। 7. नयः, 8. सायः, 9. तय;, 10. चयः, 11. अभः, 12. वेदः, 13. सूदः, 14. वठः, (formed by अच्, nume bers 8 to 11 are not in Kasika). सूद Is formed by क (III. 1. 135) 15. अंशः, 16. गुहा (formed by अङ् III. 3. 104). 17. शमरणा संज्ञायां संमती भावकर्मणोः :-शमः and रणः, 18. मन्त्रः (forrmed by अच III. 1. 134), 19. शान्तिः formed by किच, 20. काम, 21. both formed by घज, 22, पारा, 23. धारा, 24. कारा, (all three formed by अङ्क III. 3. 104), 25. वहः = गोचरादिषु formed by घन, 26, कल्यः, 27. पादः formed by ast which may either take the accent indicated by the affix or by VI. 1. 159, 28, पयः, 29. दवः । It is प्राकृतिगया। All words which are routely accented on the first, should be considerod as belonging to this class, if their accent cannot be nccountel for by any other rule. 2 जनः, 3 ज्वर, 4 राजः5 इयः, 6 मयः, 7 नयः, 8 ताय*. 9 तयः, 10 अय, 1 प्रम:. 12 वेदः, 13 मृद *, 14 अंशः, 15 गुहा, 16 शमयो संज्ञायां संमतो मात्रकर्मयोः, 17 मन्त्रः, 18 शान्तिः, 19 कामः, 20 यामः, 21 प्रारा, 22 धारा, 23 कारा, 24 घडा, 25 कल्पः, 27 पयः, 28 दवः, 29 प्राकृतिगया। ३६८२ । संज्ञायाम समानम् । ६ । ५ । २०४ ॥ उपमानशब्दः संजायामायुदात्त: । चचेव चचा । कनेत्रि नुप । एतदेव ज्ञापयति । • * चिस्व विधा प्रत्यय नक्षणं न ' इति । 'सजायाम्' किम् । अग्निम पावकः । 'उप- मानम् किम् । चैत्रः ॥ यामः, 1ः, 26 पाद ·108 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (Vor. III. Cæ. III. 93692. 3692 The acute accent falls on the first syllable of that word with which something is likened, provided that it is a name. This was, divni, de alati All these are Joh# words used as names of the guwa (the thing compare t). The affix ont (V. 3. 96) is elided here by V. 3. 98. It might be asked when ia elided, its mark, causing the first syllable to be acute (VI. 1. 197), will remain behind by virtue of I. 1. 62, where is then the necessity of this sâtra. The formation of this sûtra indicates tbe existence of the following maxim :- Vart:--The gamau rule is not of universal application in the rules relating to accent. When the word is not a Name, we have mafu: 1 When it is not an upomâua we have ê= (VI. 2. 118). 3803 : 20 7 JUNTIE 191 oy it निष्ठान्तस्य व्यचः संज्ञायामादिसतातो न त्वाकारः। दत्तः। pada:'fa fafan: 1 प्रमात्' किम् । जातः । ' संज्ञायाम' इत्यनुत्तेनेह । कतम् । हृतम् ॥ 3693. A dissyllabic Participle in ta (Nishthâ), when a Name has the acute on the first syllable, but not if the first syllable has an 8.? tene Thus g`at:, goz, aa: 1 This debars the affix accent (III. 1. 3). In nonparticiples. we have ča:, 14:1 In polysylla'sic Purticiple's we have fafa:, fan: In Participles having long ai iu the first syliable, we have, pidi, in When the Participle is not a Name we have, , EAFU ३६९४ | शुधकष्टा । ६ । १ । २०६ ॥ सतावायुदात्ता स्तः । प्रसंज्ञार्थमिदम् । ' असं न शुष्कम् 3694. Also 97 and uT have acute on the first syllable. These are non-Narues. Thus शुक and yष्ट । अतसं न शुष्कम (Rig Veda IV. 4. 4). 37691 PfTA: wat i gigi 909 1 মাক্সামিনা पायुदात्तः । i sofa ath sifaqa' 11 3695. The word ufua meaning .having eaten has acute on the first syllable. Thus 'sufaa na safana' (Rig Veda X. 117. 7). Bec& ifti furoT1 &1910c ( frece aiſghala: 1 fra: I GRTVÍ fazia unata' (a523) fa fanaia arini yafaafaida u 3696. The word rikta may have optionally the acute on the first syllable. Thus ti: or farm i Bit when it is a Name, then VI. 1. 205. S. 3693, will make it always first acute. No option is allowed then. 1 ·Vot. III. CH III. $3700.] AFFIX-ACCENTS. 109 ३६६७ । जुष्टापते च च्छन्दसि । ६ । १ । २०६ ॥ वायुदाते या स्तः॥ 3697. In the Chhandas, the words jushta' and 'arpita' have optionally the acute on the first syllable. ''hus *ष्टः or जुष्टः श्रतः or अर्पितः । In the clussical literature the acoent is always on the last syllable (III. 1. 3). २६९८ । नित्यं मन्त्र ।६।१।१०॥ सतत्सूत्रं शक्ष्यमकर्तुम् । 'जुष्टी दमूनाः' । 'पलर पाहु तिम' इत्यादेः पूर्वेणैव मिद्र: छन्दसि पाठस्य व्यस्थिततया विपरीतापादनायोगात् । 'अग्रि_ताः प्रष्टिन चलाचलासः' इत्या- দানীনালা । 3698. In the Mantras, these words jushta' and 'arpita' have always the acute on the first syllable. 'Thus नुष्टं देवानामपितं पितृ णाम् । Some Buy that this rule applies only to ge and not to sfua; in whiel" option is allowed even in the Mantra : so that it has acute on the last in the Maukra even : eg स्मिन्साकं त्रिशता न शंकवापिता ॥ This můtra is superfluous. For in the exaruples gzi agar: (Rig Veda V. 4. B). and पलर श्रारपितम &e., they will have acute on the first, by the preceding sutra, for the employment of the word pfe in that sûtru shows that in the Mantra the words have acute on the first, as opposed to the ordinary language. So there would never have been final acute. Moreover, in the Muntra, अपिताम्पष्ठिन चला- Pata: (Rig Veda I. 161. 48), we find that the word ufu'at: is end-acute, and this also is all argument against the present. sutra. For it shows that in the Mantra, these words are not invariably first-acute. ३६९८ । युष्मदस्मदोर्डसि । ६ । ५ । २११ ॥ श्रादिस्दात्तः स्यात् । ' नहुष स्तव ना मम ॥ 3699. The acute accent is on the first syllable of yushmad and asmad in the Genitive Singular. This applies when the forms are मम and तव, and not मे and ते । Thus मम तव The word युष्मद and स्मद् are derived from युष and अस by adding the uffix मदिक (Un. I. 139) युष्मद् + डम् - युष्मद् + अश (VII. 1. 27) = तव + श्रद + प्रश (VI. 2. 96) =तव + अश् (VII. 2.90) = तव (VI. 1. 97). Here liy VIII. 2, 5, a would have been uilâtta, but the present søtra makes a udätta, So also with ३७०० । यि च । ६।१।२१२ ॥ 'तुभ्यं हिन्वानः' । 'मह्य वातः पवताम् ॥ 3700. The acute accent is on the first syllable of yushmad and asmad in the Dative Singular. Thus तुभ्यं हिन्धानः (Rig Veda II. 36. 1). मनं वातः पवता (Rig Veda x. 128.2), 30 0 ·110 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [Vor. III. CH. III. 63701. - - . ३७०१ । यताऽनावः । ६ । १ । २१३ ॥ यत्प्रत्ययान्तस्य द्वयच प्रादिरुदात्तः। नावं विना । 'यु जन्त्यस्य काम्यां' । कमेर्णिकन्तादचे। यत् । 'अनावः ' किम् । 'नतिनध्यानाम' ॥ 3701. Whatever is formed by the affix yat, has, if it is a dissyllabic word, the acute on the first syllable, with the exception of '' navyah ' from .nau. The word व्यच is understood here from VI. 1. 205. Thus 95519PRETIUT (Rig Veda 1 6. 2). The काम्या is from कम + णि + यत् । चेयम्, जे यम् (III. 1. 97); घरट्यम्, प्रोष्ट्यम् (V. 1. 6). षट्यम् (V. 1. 6). This rule debars the Svarits accent required by तित (VI. 1. 185). But ना-नाव्यम् as नवति नाव्यानाम् (Rig Veda I. 121. 13). The rule does not apply to words, of more than two syllables thus : fantaa, TEIDE IL ३७०२ । ईडवन्दवृशंसदुहां ण्यतः । ६ । १ । २१४ ॥ एषां गयदन्तानामादिस्दात्तः । 'ईडयो नूतनरुत' । 'प्राजुह्वान ईडयो बन्दाश्च । 'भेष्ठं नो-. धेहि वार्य'म्' । उ कमिन्द्राय शंस्यम् ॥ 3702. The acute accent is on the first syllable of ईड्, बन्द, दू giz, and , when they are followed by the affix'nyat.' Thua इझम् बन्टयम, वार्य्यम्, शस्यम्, दयो धेनुः । The two letters पा and being indicatory, the nyat' is not included in yat' of the last sutra. The accent would be regulated by all The accent of a however is delarred by this rule. The q in the sđtra is a FAT of Kriyâdi class : the as of raifa claas, takes kyap affix. See III. 1. 109. ईयो नूतनस्त (Rig Veda I. 1. 2). अाजुद्दवान ईद्यो वंटाश्च (Rig Veda x. 110. 3) श्रेष्ठं ना धेहि वार्यम् (Rig Veda X. 24. 2). उक्थः मिन्द्राव शंस्य (Rig Veda I. 10. b). ३७०३ । विभाषा वेणिवधानयोः । ६।१ । २१५ ॥ आदिस्दात्तो वा । 'इन्धानो अग्निम् ॥ 3703. The acute accent is optionally on the first syllable of venu' and 'indhan.' Thus इन्धानो अग्निम् (Rig Veda II. 25. 1), वेणुः or घेणुः, इन्धानः. or पन्धानः or ईन्धानः। The word ay is derived by the Unâdi atfix y (III. 38), which being a faa would always have acute on the first. This allows an option. The word इन्धान, if it is formed by चानश will have the accent on the final. If it is considered to be formed by 18 the affix being a sarvadhâtuka is anailâtta and as it replaces Indatta final of the root, it becomes ulaita (VI. 1. 161), and thus grega gets acute on the middle. It would never have aoute on the first syllable, the present rule ordains that also. When घेणु is used as an upam.ina वेणुरिव घेणुः, then it is invariably ac.itely accented on the first (VI. 1. 204) ३७०४ । त्यागरागहासकुहरख ठक्रथानाम् ।६।१ । २१६ ॥ धादिदाता वा । अायाखया जत्ताः । त्रयः पचाटाजन्ता. ॥ ।

·VOL ITI. C. III. $3707.) AFPIX-ACCEXTA. 111 on the 1 8704. The acute accent is optionally on the first syllables of त्याग, राग, हास, कुह, श्वठ, and क्रय । Thus nimi, or raro, 18171. re: re: u These are formed by a aflix and by VI. 1. 159 would take acnte on the final, this ordains acute first syllable also. e or or not or sata, mis or ita; formed by va (II. 1. 13). ३७०५ । मतोः पूर्वमात्संज्ञायां स्त्रियाम् । ६।१ । २१७ ॥ HÄT: gATETT 321: alarfa i garanti peranto 3705. The a' before the affix 'mat' has the acute accent, when the word is a name in the Feminine Gender. Thus agrairant, gamanit, mirant (IV. 2. 85). The lengthening takes place by VI. 3. 120. वीरशाविती ॥ Why do we say the '? Observe sanat, gha at The words 5 (Un. III. 157) and GA (V. 2. 108) are end-acute, so the Accent is on Argu, by VI, 1. 176. Why do we say “when a name' ? Observe darantı azar is formed by en and has acute on the first (Un. I. 151). Why do we say “in the Feminine Gender'? Observe wat Why do we sny *when followed by a ? Observe nattaa# 390€ 1 Saat: 161Q u अवतीशब्दस्यान्त उदात्तः। धेत्रवती। डीपः पित्त्वाददात्तत्वं प्राप्तम् ॥ 3606. The Names ending in ‘avati' have the acute accent on the last syllable. Thus sferani". safatar, garl", Hugant 1 These words being forined by sa would have been unaccented on tho tinal (111. 1. 4). Why do we sant and not ant ? Then the rule would apply to traant also, for the word is really reant ending in aan, the subsequent elision of 7 is held to be nonvalid for the purposes of the application of this rule (VIII. 2. 2). But the change of into a (HR=aa) is considered asiddha for the purposes of this rule. ३७०७ । ईवत्याः ।।१।२२०॥ ईघत्यनस्यापि प्राग्वत् । प्रहीवती । मुनीवती ॥ 3707. The Names ending in Ivati have the acute on the last syllable. Thus dant; pateat u use ·अथ फिट् सूत्राणि । THE PHIT SUTRAS. । CHAPTER I. १। फिषोऽन्त उदात्तः ॥ प्रातिदकं फि । तस्यान्त उदात्तः स्यात् । उच्चैः 1. A nonminal stem is finally acute. As उच्चैः॥ The word for me is the name of Nominal stems or Prâtipadikas, in the terminology of the ancient Grammarians. २ । पाटलापालङ्काम्बासागरानाम् ॥ एतदर्धानामन्त उदात्तः । 'पाटला' 'फलेरुहा' सुरूपा' 'पाकला' इति पर्यायाः । 'लघावन्ते' इति प्राप्ते । 'श्रपालङ्क' 'व्याधिघात' 'पारेवत' 'पारग्वध' इति पर्यायाः । अम्बार्थाः । माता। 'उन- वनन्तानाम्' इत्यायुदात्तत्वे प्राप्त । सागरः । समुद्रः॥ 2. The synonyms of पाटला, अपालङ्का. अम्बा and सागर are finally acute. Pata. a is a kind of herb-पाटला, फलेरुहा. सुरुवा, पाकला ॥ By Phit II. 19 the heavy vowel would have got the accent : this makes these end acute. So also अपाल, घ्याधिघात, अश्वित, anil पारवध are synonymus meaning a kind of plant (Cassia fistula). So also अम्बा, माता। This last is an exception to Phit II. 9. So also सागरः, समुद्रः ॥ ३। गेहार्थानास्त्रियाम् ॥ गेहम् । 'नविषयस्य-' इति प्राप्त । 'अस्त्रियाम् किम् । शाला । श्रायुदात्तोऽयम् । इहैव पर्युटामाज्ज्ञापकात् ॥ 3. The words denoting house, are end-acute, provided they are not in the Feminine. This is an exception to Phit II. 3. 'Thus गहम् । Why do we say not in the Feminine ? Observe slat which is first-acute, because of this prohibition. ४ । गुदस्य च ॥ अन्त उदात्तः स्यान्न तु स्त्रियाम् । गुदम् । “अस्त्रियाम्' किम् । 'श्रान्त भ्यस्त गुदाभ्यः । स्वाशिटामदन्तानाम इत्यन्त रङ्गमायुदात्तत्वम् । ततष्टाप ॥ 4. So also the word ya, but not in the feminine, is end-acute. As गुदम् । But in the feminine it is first-acute by Phit II. 6. and then टाप is added. प्रान्त्र भ्यस्ते गुटाभ्यः । (Rig Veda X. 136. 3). ५ । ध्यपत्रस्य स्त्रीजिषयस्य ॥ धकारयकारपूर्ण योऽनत्योऽच स उदात्तः । अन्तर्धा । 'स्त्रीविषयवर्ण-' इति प्राप्त । छाया माया । जाथा । 'यान्त यान्त्यात्यूर्वम' इत्यादयुदात्तत्व प्राप्त । 'स्त्री' इति किम् । बाह्यम् । यजन्त- स्वादाट्युदात्तत्वम् । विषयग्रहणाम् किम् । इभ्या। क्षत्रिया । 'यतोऽनावः' (२००१) इत्यायुदात्त इभ्यशब्दः । क्षत्रियशष्टस्तु 'यान्तस्यानत्यात्पूर्वम्' इति मध्योदात्तः ॥ - ·- orमा acute; as अन्ती । This is an exception to Phit II. 20. So alsound u VOL. III. PAT C#. I. $7.1 THE PHIT SUTRAS. A feminine word ending in a vowel and preceded by is end- This is an exception to III. 13 which would have made these first acute. Why feminine? Observe बाद्यम् which is first-acute, because it ends in the affix यज्ञ । Why have we used the word fawn in the sûtra ? The rule is confined to those words only which are always feminine, and have no corresponding masculine forin. Tberefore, not here, mt, after the word gam is first-acute by VI. 1. 213, S. 3701. and aftu is middle-acute by Phit III, 13, ६। खान्तस्याश्मादः ॥ नखम् । उखा । सुखम् । दुःखम् । नखस्य स्वाशिटाम्' इत्यायुदात्तत्वे प्राप्ते । उखा नाम भागविशेषः । तस्य कृत्रिमत्वात 'खय्य वर्ण कृत्रिमाख्या चेत्' इत्युवर्णस्योदात्तत्व प्राप्त । भुखदुःखयोः 'नविषयस्य-' इति प्राप्ते । “अश्मादेः किम् । शिखा। मुखम। मुखस्य स्वाङ्गशि- टाम-' इति 'नविषयस्य-' इति वा श्रायुदात्तत्वम् । शिखायास्तु ‘शीङः खो निद्ध स्वश्च' इन्युणा- दिषु निस्वोक्तेरन्तरङ्गवाटापः प्रागेव 'स्वाशिटाम्-' इति वा बोध्यम् । 6. A word ending in ख is end-acute, provided it does not begin with a श Thus नखम, सुखम, दुःखैम्, उखा । The word नख would have been firstacute by Phit II. 6 ; सुख and दुःख would also have been first-a.cute by Phit II. 3. The word get which means a pot would have been also first-acute by Phit II. 8. because it is a manufactured article. Why do we say “if not begivning with T or a? Observe fiat, gay, governed by Phiț II. 6 or 3. The word ge being the name of a part of the human body is first-acute by Phit II. 6. Or because it is a Neuter noun, rule II. 3. of the Phit Sutras applies and makes it first-acute. The word fact is formed by Un. V. 24 with the addition of u to the root श्रीद। The affix being expressly taught as faq makes the word fra 6786 acute before the addition of the feminine ztu, as it is an antarauga operation, ko the word fuat is first acute. Or even by Phit II. 6. it is first-acute. । बंहिष्ठवत्सरतिशत्थान्तानाम् ।। सामन्त उदात्तः स्यात् । अतिशयेन बहुलो बंहिष्ठः । निन्वाटायुदात्तत्वे प्रासे । 'बंहिष्ठी व: सुध_1 रथेन' । 'यद्वरिष्ठं नातिविधे" इत्यादी ध्यत्ययाटाटा दात्तः। संवत्सरः। अध्यय- पूर्वपट प्रतिस्वरोऽत्रबाध्यत इत्याहुः । सप्ततिः। श्रशीतिः । 'लघावन्ते-'ति प्राप्त । चत्वारिंशत् । महापि प्राग्वत् । 'प्रभ्यू गर्वाना प्रभृथस्या योः' । अव्ययपूर्वपदप्रतिस्वरोऽत्र बाध्यत इत्याहुः । थाथादिसूत्रेण गतार्थमेतत् ॥ 7. A word ending in ति, शत, थ, as well as बंहिष्ठ and वत्सर are end-acute. Thus afare: (superlative of बहुल, the बंह is substituted by VI. 4. 157), It would have been first-acute, because of the fac affix eva (V. 3. 55). In ifto रथेन ; og fers arfafau, (Rig Veda V. 62. 9), the word is first-soute apomalously. In the word संवत्सरः, VI. 2. 2. is debarred, by which tha first member would bave retained its accent in an Indeclinable compound. With ति we have सप्ततिः, अंशीतिः। This debars Phit II. 19. With शत, we have चत्वारिंशैत् । Here also Phi, II. 19 is set aside. As regards words ending in a - । वे. सवता 15 । । m मा --- ·11 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDŽ. [VOL. III. PAIT CH. 1. 38. . Panini VI. 2. 144. would govern them; as अभ्यूगवान । प्रभृस्यायोः। (Rig Veda V. 41. 19). śåkatầyana's sútra, therefore, is superfluous so far. ८। दक्षिणस्य साधौ॥ अन्त उदात्तः स्यात् । साधुवाचित्वाभावे तु व्यवस्थायां सर्वनामतया 'स्वाशिटाम्' इत्या- युदाता । अर्थान्तरे तु 'लघावन्त-' इति गुरुमंदात्तः । 'दक्षिणः सरलोदारपरच्छन्दानतिधु' इति कोशः॥ 8. The word afau is end-acute when meaning skilful.' As बीणायां दक्षिाः - प्रवीगाः। When it has not this significance, it will be first-acu te, if it be a Pro. noun meaning "south,' right hand.' In this case Phit II. 6 would apply. In any other case Phit II. 19 would govern it. The word dakshina has other mean. ings, as sincere, courteous, submissive, &o.' । स्वाङ्गाख्यायामादिवी ॥ इह दक्षिणस्यादान्ती पर्यायेणोदात्ती स्तः । दक्षिणो बाहुः । 'श्राख्याग्रहणम् किम् । प्रत्यङ् मुंखस्यांसीनस्य वामपाणिर्दक्षिण भवति । The first-syllable of afau is optionally acate, when it is the name of a limb. When it means right hand, it may be either end-acute or first acutę. As aiaū arg: or zfaui aig! Why is the word åkhyâ used in the sutra ? In order to prevent the application of the rule to the left hand, though in one case it will be called dakshina, if a person sits facing west, for then his left hand will point towards dakshina or south, and may be called dakshina bâhu or the arn pointing towards south. १० । छन्दसि च ॥ अस्वाहामिदम् । दक्षिणः । इह पर्यायेणाढ्यन्तावुदात्ती ॥ 10. In the Chhandas also the word dakshina may be either first or end-acute. This is the case even when it does not mean right arm. As दक्षिणाश्वं दक्षिणा गां ददाति दक्षिणा चन्द्रमुत दिरंशयं क्षुणानं वनुते यो न अात्मा दक्षिणां वर्म' कृणुते विजानन् । (Rig Veda x. 107. 7). ११ । कृष्णस्यामृगाख्या चेत् ॥ अन्त उदात्तः । 'वर्णानान्तण-' इत्य'ट्युदात्तत्ये प्राप्त अन्तोदातो विधीयते । अण्णानां धीहो. याम् । 'कष्णो नो नाव बषभः' । मगाख्यायां तु । कृष्णो रात्र्यै ॥ 11. The word dat is end-acute, if it is not the name of an animal, This is an exception to Phit II. 10. As कृष्णानां ब्रीहीणाम् । कृष्णो'नो नाव बषभः। But when denoting a wild animal, we have कृष्णो रात्र्यै ॥ १२ । वा नामधेयस्य ॥ कृष्णास्यत्येव । श्रयं वा कृष्णो श्रश्विना' । कयार्षिः॥ 12. Optionally so, when Krishna is a Proper Name. As श्रयं वां क्षष्यों अश्विना हवते वाजिनीवसू (Rig. VIII. 85. 3). The Rishi Krishna invokes you two, O Asvinas ! O Lords of riches १३ । शुक्ल गारयोरादिः ॥ ।

·Vor. III. PHIT CE. I.819.] THE PHIT SUTRAS. नित्यमुदात्तः स्यादित्येके । वेत्यनुवर्तत इति तु युक्तम् । 'सरो गोरो यथापि वा' इत्यत्रान्तो- दात्तदर्शनात् ॥ 13. The first-syllable of Ta, and furt is acute. Some say it is a cumpul.. pory rule and not an optional one. Others read the anuvritti of at into it and make it optional. According to the first opinion, the rule is confined to Proper Names : and therefore in सरो गारो यथापि वा (Rig Veda VIII. 45.24), it is pro-. perly end-acute, as it is not a Name. १४ । अंगुष्ठोदकबकवशानां छन्दस्यन्तः ॥ श्रङ्गुष्ठस्य 'स्वाङ्गानामकुर्वादीनाम्' इति द्वितियस्योदात्तत्वे प्राप्तेऽन्तोदात्तार्थ प्रारम्भः । बसायहां नियमार्थ छन्दस्यति । तेन लोक श्रायुदात्ततेत्याहुः ॥ 14. The finals of अङ्गुष्ठ उदक, वक and वशा. Are acute in the Chhandas . The word अङ्गुष्ठ would have been middle-scute by Phit III. 3, this ordains final- Route So also with वक। It would have been first-acute by Phit II. 7. The. word aur is employed for the sake of niyama : it is end-acute in the Vedas oulys. in the elassical language, it is first-acuto. १५। पृष्ठस्य च ॥ छन्दस्यन्त उदात्तः स्याद्वा भाषायाम् । एष्ठम् । 15. And the word yg is end-acute in the Chhandas. In the classical: language, it is optionally so, s.e., it is first-acate also by Phit II. 6. As पृष्ठम् or ठम् ॥ १६ । अर्जु नस्य तृणाख्या चेत् ॥ 'उनर्वचन्तानाम्' इत्यायुदात्तस्यापवादः ॥ 16. अर्जु" is end-acute, if it is the name of straw. This is an exception to Phit II. 9. Why do we say 'when it is the name of straw' ? Observe अर्जुना वक्ष: where it is first-acute by Phit. II. 9. १७ । अर्यम्य स्वाम्याख्या चेत् ॥ 'यान्तस्यात्पूर्वम्' इति 'यतोऽनावः, (३७०९) इति वाट्य दाते प्राप्ते वचनम् ॥ 17. प्रर्य is end-acute, when it means master.' Otherwise it is first*. acute by Phit III. 13 or Panini VI. 1.213 S. 3701. See also Panini III. 1. 103; for the word wu and its vârtika. १८। आशाया अदिगाख्या चेत् ॥ दिगाख्याव्यावृत्त्यर्थमिदम् । अत एव ज्ञापकाविपर्यायस्यायुधात्तता । 'इन्द्र श्राशाभ्यस्परि' 18. भाशा is end-acute, if it is not the name of a direction. This implies that when पाशा means direction, then it is first-acute. As इन्द्र श्राशाभ्यार सर्वा भयो भयं करत् । जेता शत्रू न विचर्षणिः। (Rig. II. 41. 12). • May the wise Indra, conqueror of enemies, niuke us free fronu fear from all directions.or sider: Here wit means direction. १६ । नक्षत्राणामाञ्चिषयाणाम् ॥ अन्त उदात्तः स्यात् । प्राग्लेषानुराधादीनां 'लघावन्ते-' इति प्राप्त ज्येष्ठाविष्ठानिष्टा ममिष्ठवन्तत्वनायुदाते. प्राप्ते. व वनम् ॥ 4 ·116 The SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. PAIT CA. I. $19. acute. 19. The names of Asterisms, which take the feminine affix श्रा, are end- 'The asterisms अश्लेषा, अनुराधा, &c. would have been otherwise governed by Phit II. 19%; while ज्येष्ठा, विष्ठा, धनिष्ठा, being formed by दृष्ठन, would have been first-acute by faa accent. २० । न कुपूर्वस्य कृत्तिकाख्या चेत् ॥ अन्त उदात्तो न । कृत्तिका नक्षत्रम् । केचित्तु क्रुपूर्वो य श्राद्विषयाणामिति व्याख्याय 'मार्यिका' 'बहुलिका' इत्यत्राप्यन्तोदात्तो नेत्याहुः । 20. Not so, if the final letter is and the asterism is the name of Křit tika. The final of an THEFIT is not acute ; it is first-acute by Phit II. 19. As कत्तिका नक्षत्रम् । Others hold that the words ending in का in the feminine are not end-acute; and they mention पार्यिका, बहुलिका॥ २१ । घृतादीनां च। अन्त उदात्तः । एतमिमिदं श्राकृतिगणोऽयम् । 21. घत and the rest are end-acute. As घत' मिमिक्षे घ तमस्य योनि से faat y ARIR U1A, (Rig. II. 3. 11). "I sprinkle ghee on fire, ghee is its birtaplace, ghee is its abode of rest, and ghee its luminosity &c. This is an Akri. tigana : all words which are end-acute, and do not fall under any other rule, should be classified uuder the Ghrítâdi class. २२ । ज्येष्ठकनिष्ठयोर्वयसि ॥ अन्त उदात्तः स्यात् । 'ज्येष्ठ श्राह चमसा' । 'कनिष्ठ आह चतुरः'। 'वर्यास' किम् । ज्येष्ठ श्रेष्ठः। कनिष्ठोल्पिकः। इह नित्त्वादायुदात्त एव ॥ 22. ज्येष्ठ und कनिष्ठ are end-acute when meaning age-oldest and youngest.' As ज्येष्ठ आह चमत्राद्वा कति कनीयान् त्रोन कणवामेत्याह। कनिष्ठ आह agrisnifa race #hapą daug ar a: 7 (Rig. IV. 33. 5) Here süts means the 'eldest,' and refers to Ribhu, कनीयान refers to his younger brother Bibhva, and निष्ठ refers to the youngest brother Vaja, ज्य in ज्येष्ठ here is the substitute of <a (V. 3. 62) and *for gaa in afars: by V. 3. 64. Why do we say 'when meaning age’? Observe su sitos derived from dur (V. 3. 61), and his fans frora अल्प (V. 3. 64)= अल्पिकः । These are first-acute by face accent. The pre- Bent sûtra is thus an exception to faa accent. २३ । विलवतिष्ययोः स्व रितो वा ॥ अनयारन्तः स्वरितो वा स्यात् । पक्ष उदात्तः ॥ इति फिटसूत्रेषु प्रथमः पादः ॥ 23. The finals of fara and fau are optionally svarita. In the other alternative they will be acute. As विल्व' or विल्व, तिष्य' or तिष्य ॥ CHAPTER II. १। अथादिः प्राक शकटः ॥ अधिकारोऽयम् । 'घटिशकट्यो:-' इति यावत् ।

·You. III. PHIT CH. II.$7.] THE PAIT SUTRAS, 117 तनुः ॥ 1. From this up to the end of Chapter III, the word sarfa exerts the gom verning influence. From this sutra. up to शकटियकट्य (IV. 1) exclusive, the acoent is on the first syllable of the words taught. २। स्वान्तस्य स्त्रीविषयस्य । प्रादिदातः स्यात् । बलिः । तनुः ।। A word ending in a light vowel, and used always in the feminine, is first-acute. As वलिः, ३। नबिषयस्यानिसन्तस्य ॥ "बने नवा यः। सन्तस्य तु सर्पिः। भवनपुंसकम् ॥ 3. An invariable neuter noun, with the exception of one ending in इस, is first-acute. The word नप means नपुंसक or Neuter. As aa a ata: (Rig Veda X. 39. I). But पिस्, शुचिस्, अर्चिस् &c. ending in इस् are end-acute, ४। तृणधान्यानां च व्यपाम् ॥ द्ध्यवामित्यर्थः । कुशाः । काशाः । माषाः । तिलाः । वहुचां तु गोधूमाः ॥ 4. Words denoting straw ' and grain' are first-aoute when consistiag of two syllables. The word द्ध्यः = द्ध्यच् । As कुशाः, काशाः, माषाः, तिलाः। But firytat: is acute on the middle by Phit II. 19. The word so is the Name given to vowels by Ancient Grammarians. ५।न:संख्यायाः॥ .. पञ्च । चत्वारः ॥ 5. A Numeral ending in न or r is first-acute. As पञ्च, चत्वारः। In चत्वारः the word is middle-acute by श्राम accent; see Panini VII. 1. 98. The proper ex. ample is चतुण्क्रपालः। For चतुरः is end aante by VI. I. 167, चतुर्भिः is middlaacute by VI. 1. 180. चतुणा म् is governed by VI. 1. 179, Hence example of a compound : which is first acute by VI. 2.29. ६ । स्वाङ्गशिटामदन्तानाम् ॥ शिद सर्वनाम । 'कर्णाभ्यां कुबुकादधि" । 'पोष्ठ विव मधु' । 'विश्वो विवाया: ॥ 6. The words denoting bodily organs and ending in , as well as the Pronouns are first-acute. The शिट् is the name given to Pronouns (सर्वनाम) by ancient Grammarians. As कर्णाभ्यां छुवुकावधि, (Rig Veda X. 163. 1); ओष्ठापित मधुः, (Rig Veda II. 39. 6) विश्वो विहायाः (Rig Veda I. 28. 6). छ। प्राणिनां कुपर्वम् ॥ कवर्गात्यूर्व प्रादिग्दात्तः । काकः । बकः । 'शुर्के में' । प्राणिनाम किम् ? ही सपि में- धूदकम । 7. The syllable preceding the n is acute in the names of animate beings, Thus **, **:, ya'ga' (Rig Veda I. 50, 12). Why do we say of living beings? Observe खीर सपि मधूदकम । (Rig Veda IX. 67. 32). Here उa is end-acute by Phit II. 14.

·1 HE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. III. PAIT CH. II. g& and त् । ८ । खय्युवर्ण कृत्रिमाख्या चेत् ॥ खयि पर उवर्णमुदात्तं स्यात् । कन्दुक: । 8. The I precedings खय् (th - surd letter) is acute, when the word in the name of an artificial thing. As कन्दु कः । ९। उनर्वचन्तानाम् ॥ उन । 'वरुणं वो रिशादसम्। ऋ। 'स्वसारं त्या कणवे। वन । 'पीवान सेषम् । 9. The words ending in 34, F, and an are first acute. As उन:-वरुण वो रिशा सम (Rig Veda v. 64. 1). ऋ-स्वसारं त्वा कणव (Rig Veda x. 108. 99. वन-पीवान मेषम् (Rig Veda x. 27. 17). १० । वर्णानां ततिनितान्तानाम् ।। धादिस्वात्तः । एतः । हरिणः । शितिः । एशिनः । हरित् ॥ 10. Worts denoting color are first-acute, when they end in त, या, ति, नि: Thus Qतः, हरिणः, शितिः, श्निः, हरित् ॥ ११ । हस्वान्तम्य हुस्वमनृत्ताच्छील्ये ॥ ऋतुज्यं हस्वान्तस्यादिभूत हस्वमुदात्तं स्यात् । मुनिः। 11. The initial short vowel is udatta when the word ends with a short vowel, and denotes : habit' : but not so, when the initial vowel is short | A2 "fa: 1 But not so in pris: u १२ । अतस्यादेवनस्य ॥ धादिम्दात्तः । तस्य नाक्षः । देवने तु। 'अर्मा दी व्यः । 12. The word aa is first-acute, when not meaning “to gamble." As ARI नाक्षः (Rig Veda I. 16 1. 13). But when it uneans देवन or play, we have अक्षर्मा दी व्य । (Rig Veda X. 34. 13). १३ । अर्धस्यासमझोतने ॥ अर्धा ग्रामस्य । समशके तु अध पिपस्याः ॥ 13. The word अर्ध is first-acute when meaning not equal,' As ? ग्रामस्थ, But when it denotes equal portions, i. e. when it meang 'half': we have पिप्पल्याः॥ १४ । पीतबर्थानाम् ॥ मादिरुवात्तः। पोतदुः । सरलः । 14. The words denuting tag or yellow-trees are first-acute. As di ag: # १५ । यामादीनां च ॥ ग्रामः। सोमः । घाम: 15. The words gia and the rest are first-acute. As ára:, :, al'A: # १६ । लुधन्त स्योयमेयनामधेयस्य । चश्व चया। स्फिगन्तस्य' इति पाठान्तरम् । स्फिगिति लुपः प्राचां मना । S ·Vot. III. Purr CHII. 22.] TER PRIT SUTRAS. 119 telision. , 16. The words ending in a 99. eliled-affir denoting the name of the thing compared are first-acute, Another reading is स्फिगन्तस्य । The स्फिक् is the name given by Eastern Grammarians to लुप, Thus a sar in which the affix small (V. 3.96) is elided by v.3.98. Why do we say 'a 74, ending word'? Observe লিমাখামঃ। १७ । न वृक्षपर्वतविशेषव्याघ्रसिंहमहिषाणाम् ॥ सषामुपमेयनामामाटिरुदाते। न । ताल इव सालः । मेडरिव मेरुः । व्याघ्रः । सिंहः । महिषः । 17. The words denoting trees and niountains, and the words व्याघ्र, सिंह and Afeu are not first-acute when objects of comparison. The word fasu qualifies aa and gaa, and means species of trees and mountains, and not th: wordforms or and पर्वत । व्याघ्र &c., are word-forms. Thus ताल इव तालः, मेरिव मेरुः, ध्याघ्रः, सिंह, महिषः। But when we have पक्ष इवायं वृक्षः, पर्वत वायं पर्वत:, then these two words would be first-acute by the preceding sutra. १८ । राजविशेषस्य यमनवा चेत् ॥ यमन्या पद्धः। श्राहामुदाहरणम् । श्रङ्गाः प्रत्युदाहरणम् ॥ 18. The name of any particular kingdom, ending with a ya elided oomperative affix, is first-acute, provided that the word has a Vriddhi letter in its first syllable. The word यमन्वा = वृद्ध । Thus #re, but sagt: is counter-example, because it is not a Vriddbam, १६ । लघावन्ते द्वयोश्च बहुषो गुरुः ॥ अन्त लघी द्वयोश्च लघवाः सताबकस्य गुरुरुदात्तः। कल्यागाः । कोलाहलः । 19. A word whose final syllable is light, or a polysyllabio word whose two syllables are light, gets the acute on the heavy sylla.ble, wherever that may be. Thus कल्याण or कल्याणः; कोलाहल: or कोल. २० । स्त्रीविषयवर्णातुपूर्वाणाम् ॥ एषां त्रयाणामायुदात्तः । स्त्रीविषयम् । मल्लिका। वर्णः। श्येनी। हरिणी। अक्षुशब्दास्प. वोऽस्त्येषां त अक्षुपूर्वाः । तचः ॥ 20. The words which are invariably feminine, the words denoting color and words stauding before the word na are first-acute. Feminine words, as- मल्लिका ; denoting color, as -- श्येणो, हरिणी ; followed by अक्षु as-तरतुः ।। २१ । शकुनीनां च लघु पूर्वम् ॥ पूर्व लघु उदासं स्यात् । कुक्कटः । तित्तिरिः ॥ 21. The words denoting birds have the acute on the light syllable preceding the final. Thus कुक्कुटा, सित्तिरिः॥ २२ । नत् प्राण्याख्यायाम् ॥ यद्यालक्षणं प्राप्तमुदासत्वं न। वसन्तः । सक्रमासः ॥ 22. The rules relating to aoute accent mentioned, however, do not apply to the names of seasons and animals. AB वसन्तः । ककलासः ॥ । -- ·120 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. III. PArT CH. III. 31. These are २३ । धान्यानां च वृद्धतान्तानाम् ॥ श्रादिदात्तः । कान्तानाम् । श्यामाकाः । षान्तानाम्। राजमाषा: ॥ 23. The words denoting the names of corns, and having a Vriddhi vowel in their first syllable and ending with a for a 1, are first-acute. Thus SUTHT#T:, TATUT: ending in an and u respectively. These are names of corns. the examples given by the author of the Siddhanta Kaumudi. JUTRICT: is how. ever governed by Phit III. 18. नैषादकाः would be a better example. According to another recension, the word = does not oocur in the sutra. In the Phit-vritti tbe sútra is explained as meaning « The heavy vowel of words denoting coru is acute, &c.. Thus the accent may be ने शादकाः or नषदकाः, कालाताः or कालाबाः ॥ २४ । जनपदशब्दानामषान्तानाम् ॥ श्रादिरुदात्तः । केकयः॥ 24. The words denoting countries and ending in a vowel, are first-acute. कयः। According to some, the accent of this word is governed by Phit II. 13 Their examples are अङ्गाः, वङ्गाः । २५ । हयादीनामसंयुक्तलान्तानामन्तः पूर्व वा । हर्याित हलसंचा। पललम् । शललम् । 'हयादीनाम्' किम् । एकलः । 'असंयुक्त-' इति किम् ! मल्लः ॥ 25. A word beginning with a consonant, and ending with the lettern, not being a conjunct consonant, has acute on the first syllable, or optionally on the penultimate syllable. Thus ललम् or पल लम्, शल लम्, or ललम् । The word. ह in the sutra is equivalent to हल । Why do we say ' beginning with a हल? Observe thet: 1 Why do we say a non-conjanct ? See Here Some read the anuvritti of the word Sauzta into this sútra. They give the examples पञ्चालाः, कोशल::, and the counter-example पलालम् ।। २६ । गन्तानां च व्यषाम् ॥ आदिम्दात्तः। षिः ॥ इति फिट्सूत्रेषु द्वितीय पादः ॥ 26. A word ending in इ, उ. ऋ or g long or short, is first-acute, when it consists of two syllables. Thus er fa: 1 Some read the anuvritti of the word जन- पदानाम् into this sutra : and so their examples are कुरवः and चेदयः (कुरु and चेदि), and their counter-exaruple is æfa i Because fa: is found to be end-acute in अक्षेर्मा दोव्यः कषिमित्कषस्व (Rig Veda X. 34. 13). CHAPTER III. १ । अथ द्वितीयं प्रागीषात् ॥ 'ईषान्तस्य इलादेः-' इत्यतः प्राग्द्वितीयाधिकारः ॥ 1. Up to SUTAR &o, (III. 17) .exclusive, the words second syllable' hava governing force. In all rules up to sutra 16 inclusive of this Chapter, tha words second syllable’ should be supplied.

·Vor. III. PHIT CH. III. $8.] TERE PHIT SUTRAS. 131 २। जयचां प्राङ्मकरात् ॥ 'मकरवरुढ-' इत्यतः प्रात यचामित्यधिकारः ॥ 2. Of a word consisting of three syllables' is the phrase to be supplied in the following sutras up to मकर &c. Sutra. 8. ३ । स्वाङ्गानामर्यादीनाम् ॥ कवर्गरेफवकारादीनि वर्जयित्वा यता स्वाङ्गानां द्वितीयमुदात्तम् । ललाटम् । कुर्वादीमा तु कपालः। रसना। वदनम् ॥ 3. Words consisting of three syllables and denoting limbs (or bodily Organs) get the acute on their second syllable, provided that they do not begin with a guttural, a र or aar As ललाटम् । But the guttural-beginning कपाल: is middle acute by Phit II. 19 and रसना and वदनं are first-acute by Phit II. 6. ४ । मादीनां च॥ A trisyllabic word beginning with #has acute on the second syllable; As मलयः । मकरः। महेन्द्रः॥ ५। शादीनां शाकानाम् । शीतन्या। शतपुष्पा । 5. A tri-syllabic word beginning with u and denoting vegetables, has acute on the second. As शीतन्या। शत पुष्पा । Some read the sûtra as patate and illustrate it by सर्षपा ॥ ६ । पान्तानां गुर्वादीनाम् ॥ पादपः । प्रातपः । लघवादीनां तु। अनूपम् । व्यत्रांतु । नापम् ॥ 6. A tri-syllabic word ending in u and beginning with a heavy syllable has acute on the second. As पादपः, श्रातपः But अनुपम् (VI. 2. 189), because the first-syllable is light : and नीयम् (VI. 2. 192), because the word consists of two syllables. ७ । युतान्यण्यन्तानाम् ॥ युते । अयुतम् । अनि । धमनिः। अणि । विर्याण ॥ 7. A tri-syllabic word ending in युत, अनि and अणि has acute on the second. As अयुतम्, धर्म निः, विपणी ॥ ८ । मकरबरूळपावतवितस्तत्वार्जिद्राक्षाकलोमाकाष्ठापेष्ठाकाशीनामादिर्वा ॥ एषामादिद्धितीयो वोदात्तः। मकरः । वरुढ इत्यादि। 8. Either the first or the second syllable of these may have the acute : मकर (or मकर), रूढ (or वट), या रेवत (or पार वत), वितस्स (or वितस्त), च (or इक्षु), पार्जि (or पार्जि), द्राक्षा (or द्वार्ता), कला (or कला), उमा (or उमा), काष्टा (or काष्ठा), पेंष्ठा (or पेष्ठा), काशी (or काशी ॥ 16 ·122 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. PHIT CH. III. $9. हा छर्दास च ॥ अमकराटार्थ प्रारम्भः । लक्ष्यानुसारादादिद्धितीयं चोदात्तं ज्ञेयम् 9. In the Chhandas, several other words than मकर &c., have acute either on the first or on the second. १० । कर्दमादीनां च॥ प्राद्धितीयं वोदात्तम् ॥ 10. The words HT &c., have acute either on the first or on the second. As कर्दमा (or कर्द मा), कुलटा (or कुलेंटा), उदकः or उदकः, गान्धारिः or गान्धारिः ॥ ११ । सुगन्धितेजनस्य ते वा ॥ श्रादिद्वितीयं शब्दश्त त्रयः पर्यायेणोदात्ताः । सुगन्धितेजनाः ॥ 11. The first, second or the fourth syllable of anfaasta may get the acute-accent. a means the syllable a of this word. Thus सुगन्धितेजनाः or सुगन्धि- तेजना: or सुर्गान्धत जना॥ १२। नपः फलान्तानाम्॥ प्रादिर्द्वितीयं वादात्तम् । राजाटनफलम् ॥ 12. Of a neuter noun ending in them, the first or the second syllable may be acute, The word नप means नपुंसक or Neuter. Thus राजादनफलम् or राजा- दनफलम् ॥ १३ । यान्तस्यान्त्यात्पर्वम् । कुलायः॥ 13. A word ending in u has acute on the syllable preceding such u i कुलायः॥ १४। थान्तस्य च नालघुनी ॥ সায়ন্তী लघु च उदात्ते स्तः । सनाथा सभा ॥ 14. A word-ending in y has acute on the syllable at (if any) and on the light syllable that may immediately precede it. As Tथा सभा। Others read this sutra as अान्तत्य च ना लघुनी 'a word ending in ा and having ना or a light syllable preceding such 1 has acute on such a7 and the light vowel.' They give examples of नं.ना, दिवा, मुंधा ॥ १५ । शिशुमारोदुम्बरबलीवर्दीष्ट्रारपुरूरवसां च ॥ अन्त्यात्यूर्वमुदात्तं द्वितीयं वा ॥ 15. The following words have acute either on the penultimate or the second syllable :--FETTATT: (or foru*Art: or शिंशु मारः or शिंशुमार), उदुम्बरः (or उदुम्बर), बलीदः (or बली वर्दः), उष्ट्रारः (another reading is उष्टारः), पुरूर वस. (or पुरूरवस.). १६ । सांकाश्यकाम्पिल्यनासिक्यदााघाटानाम् ।। द्वितीयमुदात्तं वा ॥ 16. The second syllables of the following are optionally acute. attu: (formed by गय of IV. 2. 80); so also काम्पिल्यः, नासिक्यः, and दावाघाटः। See Vartika दारावाहन under III. 2. 49, S. 2966. As ·Vor. III. PHIT CH. IV. $4.] TEE PHIT SUTRAS. 123 १७ । ईषान्तस्य हयादेरादिवां॥ हलीपा। लालीया ॥ 17. A word ending in gar and beginning with a consonant, may optionally have acute on the first syllable. As हनीषा, लाइलीया । १८ । उशीरदाशेरकपालपलालशैवालश्यामाकशारोरशरावहृदहिरण्यारण्यापत्य- देवराणाम् ॥ एषामादिस्दात्तः स्यात् ॥ 18. The following have acute on the first उशीरः, दाशेरः, कपालः, पलालः वाल, प्रामाक, शैरीर, शराव, हृदय, हिरण्य, अरयय, अपत्य, देवर ॥ १९ । महिण्याषाढयोर्जायेष्टकाख्या चेत् ॥ धादिसदात्तः। महिषो लाया । प्राषाढा उपदधाति ॥ इति फिटसूत्रेषु तृतीयः पादः ॥ The word #feet when meaning queen,' and HTUIET when it is the name of a sacrifice are first acute, As महिषी जाया। प्राषाढा उपदधाति ॥ 19. उ CHAPTER IV. १ । शटिशकट्यारतरमतरं पर्यायण ॥ उदात्तम् । शकटिः। शकटी। 1. Every syllable of the words taft and sat is acute by turns, Thug शकोटा, शर्कटिः, शाटः । शकटी: शेकटी: and शकटी: । २। गोष्ठजस्य ब्राह्मणनामधेयस्य ॥ अक्षरमक्षरं पर्यायेणादात्तम् । गोष्ठजो ब्राहमणः । अन्यत्र गोष्ठजः पशुः। कटुत्तरपदप्रकृति स्वरेणान्तोदात्तः॥ 2. So also the word 1663, when it is the name of a Brahmana. As गोष्ठजः, गोष्ठज: or गोष्टजा ब्राह्मणः । Otherwise it will be always end-acute by कदुत्तरपदयकतिस्वर (VI. 2. 139), as गोष्ठजः ३ । पारावतस्योपोत्तमवर्जम् ।। शेष क्रमेणोदात्तम् । पारावतः ॥ 3. So also the word untran, with the exception of its penultimate syllable. As परावतः, पावितः and पारावत:। But the penultimate syllable a is never acute. ४ । धूमजानुमुञ्जकेशकालवालस्थालीपाकानामधूजलस्थानाम् ॥ एषां चतुणी धूप्रभृतींश्चतुरो वर्जयित्वा शिष्टानि क्रमेणोदात्तानि । धूमानुः। मुजोशः । कालवालः । स्थालीपाकः ॥ 4. So also the words धूमजानु with the exception of धू, मुंजकेश with the exception of ज, कालवाल with the exception of ल, and स्थालोपाक with the exception of स्था get acute in turn on every syllable. Thus धूम जानुः, धूमजा नुः, धूमजानु । पशुः ॥

·124 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI: [VOL. III. PHIT CE. IV. 85. .. मुंजकेशः, मुंजकेशः, मुञ्जकेशः । कालवालः, कालवा नः । स्थालीपा का, स्लीपाक: or स्था- लोमाकाः॥ ५। कपिके शहरिकेशयोश्चन्द्रप्ति ॥ कपिकेशः । हरिकेशः ॥ 5. In the Chhandas, the words such and after get acute on every byllable in turn, As पिकेशः, कविकेशः, पिक'शा, कपिकेशः। So also with हरिकेशः ॥ ६ । न्य स्वरी स्वरिता ॥ स्यष्टम् । न्य कुत्तानः । 'व्यचक्षयत्स्वः' । 6. The words न्यङ् and स्वर् have svarita accent. As न्य हुत्तानः। व्यचक्षयत स्वः (Rig Veda II. 24.3). छ । न्यर्बुदव्यल्काशयोरादिः ॥ स्वरितः स्यात् ॥ 7. The first syllables of wiaz and on any are svarita. ८। तिल्यशिक्यमत्य कार्मर्यधान्यकन्याराजन्यमनुष्याणामन्तः ।। स्वरितः स्यात् । तिलानां भवनं क्षेत्रं तिल्यम्। वैश्वानर्या शिक्यमादत्ते। अभिनायमत्यम- नव्यायति । वजः काम योवज्रण। 'यतानावः' (३७०२) इति प्राप्ते ॥ 8. The finals of the following words are svarita; तिल्य, शिक्या, मत्य, कामय धान्य, कन्या, राजन्य, मनुष्य । The word तिल्यम्-तिलानां भवनं क्षेत्रं । वैश्वानर्या शिक्ष- मादत्ते, प्रभिन्नायमत्यमन्यास्यति, वनः कामावण । Some of these are exceptions to VI.1.213. ९ । विलवभावीर्याणि छन्दसि । अन्तवरितानि । ततो विल्व उदतिष्ठत् ॥ 9. In the Chhandas the following words are finally syarita : Farmen, hard, वीर्य | As ततो विल्व उदतिष्ठत् ॥ १० । त्वत्त्वसमसिमेत्य नुच्चानि ॥ स्तरं त्वत् । 'उत त्व: पश्य न्' । 'नभन्तामन्यके सेमें। सिमंस्मै ॥ 10. The words त्वत्, त्व, सम, and हिम are wholly anudatta. (Rig Veda VII. 101 3), उत त्वः पश्यन (Rig Veda. x. 71. 4), नभन्ताम न्यके समे (Rig Veda VIII. 39. 1), सिमस्मै (Rig Veda I. 115. 4). ११ । सिमस्याथर्वणेऽन्त उदात्तः ॥ अथर्वण इति प्रायिकम् । तत्र दृष्ठस्य त्येवं परं वा। तेन 'वासस्तनुते सिमस्ने' इत्यूग्वेढेऽपि भवत्येव॥ 11. In the Atharva Veda the word सिम is finally acnte. The rule is not confined to the Atharva Veda : it is so found in the Rig Veda algo, As घासस्त- मुते सिमस्मै (Rig Veda I. 115. 4). १२ । निपाता अायुदात्ताः ॥ . As स्तरीय ·VoL. III. PHIT CH. IV. $19. THE PHIT SUTRAS. 125 The Indeclinables are first acute. As स्वाहा १३ । उपसर्गाश्चाभिवर्जम् ॥ 13. The upasargas are first-acute with the exception of अभि १४ । एवादीनामन्तः । एवमादीनामिति पाठान्तरम् । एव । एवम् । नूनम् । 'सह ते पुत्र सूरिभिः' । षष्टस्य तृतीये सह । 'सदस्य सः-' (१००६) इति प्रभारणे सहशब्द प्रायुदात्त इति तु प्राञ्चः । तच्चिन्त्यम् ।। 14. The words ta and the rest are finally acute. Another reading is सधमादीनाम् । As एवं, एवम, नूनम, सह। सह ते पुत्र मु. In VI 3. 78 S. 1009, the word सह is first-acute according to Kasika, Thos there is an apparent contradiction. १५ । वाचादीनामुभावुदात्ता । उभा ग्रहयामनुदात्तं पदमेकवर्जमित्यस्य बाधाय ॥ 15. Both syllables of the words ata and the rest are acute. This debars the general rule by which, in one word only one syllable in accented. (VL. I. 158). १६ । चादयोऽनुदात्ताः ॥ स्पष्टम्॥ 16. The words a and the rest are anudatta, १० । यति पादान्त ।। 'त ने मिम भवो' यया' । 'पादान्ते किम् । 'यथोनी अदिति : करत् ॥ 17. The word uut is anudatta at the end of a Pada or As त' ने मि मुभवो यथा (Rig Veda VIII. 75. 5). But यथा नो अदितिः करत् where it is not at the end of a verse (Rig Veda I 43. 2). १८ । प्रकादिद्विरुक्तौ ॥ परस्यान्त उदात्तः । पटुपटुः ॥ 18. A double-word is finally acute when it denotes Th1T &c. Thus açag": This would have beeu finally acute by Påņini's rule also ; VIII. 1. 11 and 12. १९ । शेषं सर्वमनुतं । 'शेषं सर्व मनुदात्तम् । शेषांमत्यादिद्विस्तस्य यरमित्यर्थः। प्रप्रायम् । दिवेटिवे। ति ॥ इति फिट्सूजेषु तुरोयः पादः ॥ 19. All other double-words are auniliatta. As प्रप्रायम, (Rig Veda VII. 8. 4) दिवे दिवे (Rig Veda I. 1. 3). ॥ Here end the Phit Sutras, "verse.

·126 THE SIDDIANTA KAUMUDI, (VOL. IIL A COENTS CH. III. $3708, अथ प्रत्ययस्वराः । - CHAPTER III. AFFIX-ACCENTS-(continued). ३७०८ । आदादात्तश्च । ३।१।३ ॥ प्रत्यय पाट्युदात्त एव स्यात् । अग्निः । कर्तव्यम् ॥ 3708. That which is called an affix, has an acute accent on its first syllable. This sûtra may also be treated as a Paribhâshâ or an Adhikâra sâtra. The udātta accent falls on the affix, and if it consists of more than one vowel, then on the first of the vowels. Thus the afix तव्य has udatta on the first , as in कर्तव्यम् । So also अग्निः formed with the affix नि (Unadi IV. 50), ३७०९ । अनुदात्ता सुप्पिती । ३ । १।४॥ पूर्वस्यापवादः । यज्ञस्य । न यो युच्छति। शप्तिपोरनुदात्तत्त्व स्वरितप्रचयो । 3709. The case-affixes (sup) and the affixes having an indicatorypa (pit) are anudatta. This is an exception (apavada) to the last aphorism. As यज्ञस्य, so also न यो युच्छति (Rig Veda V. 54. 13). Here the root युच्छप्रमादे is end-acute by VI. 1. 162. To it is added शप which becomes svarita, as it is preceded by an udâtta (VIII. 4. 66). Then is added fau which becomes monotone by I. 2. 39. S 3668, as it is preceded by a syarita, So the afix far becomes monotone. ३०१० । चितः । ६।१।१६३ ॥ अन्त उदात्तः स्यात् । * चितः समकतेबहुकमर्थम् । चिति प्रत्यये सति प्रकतिप्रत्य यसमुदा यस्यान्त उदात्तो वाच्य इत्यर्थः । 'नभंन्तामन्य॒के संमे' । 'यके सरस्वतीमनु। तकत्सु ते ॥ 3710. A stem (formed by an affix or augment or substitute) having an indicatory 'ch', gets acute on the end syllable. Várt:-In the cases of affixes having an indicatory a, the acute accent falls on the final, taking the stem and the affix in an aggregate for the sake of affixes bahu' and 'akach'. Thus बहुपटुः। The afix is one of those few affixes which are really prefixes, (V. 3. 68). The accent will not, therefore, fall on हु, but on the last syllable of the whole word compounded of the prefix and the base. So also with the afix प्रकच् । It is added in the middle of the word, but the accent will fall on the end ; as उच्चकैः (V. 3.71). Thus: नभन्तामन्यके समे (Rig Veda VIII. 39. 1). यके सरस्वतीम् (Rig Veda VIII. 21. 18). तकत्सु ते (Rig Veda I. 133. 4). ३७११ । द्वितस्य । ६ । १ । १६४ ॥ चितस्तद्धितस्यान्त उदात्तः । पूर्वणसिद्ध जितस्वरवाधनार्थमिदम् । कोऽवायनाः ।।

·VOL. III. CH. ACCLATS III. $3714.] AFFIX-ACCENTE. 127 otho 3711. A stem tormed with a Taddhita-affix having an indicatory ch, has acute on the end syllable. Thus shtuar formed by the affixus (IV. 1. 98). Stura:, dual wisstunit, pl. a1ssiya1": (s a being elided by II. 4. 62, and thus giving scope to get accent ). In this affis there are two indicatory letters y and ; the has only one function, namely, regalating the accent according to this rule, while st has two functious, one to regulate the accent by VI. 1. 197, and an. other to cause Vriddhi by VII. 2. 117. Now arises the question, 'should the word get the accent of a or of ' The present rule declares that it should get the accent of a and not of st, for the latter finds still a function left to it, while if so war to regulate the accent, a would have no scope. ३७१२ । कितः । ६।१।१६५॥ कितस्तद्धितस्यान्त उदात्तः । यदाग्नेयः ।। 3712. A stem formed by a Taddhita affix having an indicatory ka has acute accent on the end syllable. Thus aquaa: 1 Here the affix an is added to sfia by IV. 2. 33 $. 1236. ३०१३ । तिसभ्यो जसः । ६।१।१६६ ॥ Fay 3219: 1 fa at arat afa ;' u 3713. The Nominative plural jas of tisri has acute accent on the last syllable. Thus far aia: afag: (Rig Veda I. 35. 6). The word fo is end-acute; the feminine fax being its substitute would also be end-acute. Before the affix 8, the # is changed to t by VII. 2. 100. Here VIII. 3. 4 would have made the ste svarita. This debars that syarita accent. Therefore the word faen: in the above example is end-acute. ३०१४ । सावेकाचस्तृतीयादिविभक्तिः । ६।१ । १६८ ॥ सार्वाित सप्तमोबहुवचनम् । तत्र य एकाच ततः परा तृतीयादिर्विभक्तिदाता । 'वाचा विरूपः' । सो किम्? राजेत्यादी एकाचोऽपि राजशब्दात्य रस्य मा भूत् । 'राजा नु ते। एकाच fæ ? fazua utafa Pa i antufa: f? a'i argą 3714, The case-affixes of the Instrumental and of the cases that follow it have the acute accent, if the stem in the Locative Plural is monosyllabic. The word 81 (locative of g) refers to the g of the Locative plural. Thus arár faaui Why do we say “if the stem in the Locative plural is monoayllabic'? Observe valg a afura afd aanma' EH UTHI (Rig Veda I. 91. 3) because the stem in the Locative Pl. of t1517 is not monosyllabic, but dissyllabio; though here it is monosyllabic. Why do wo say 'monosyllable ?? Observe fagua tiafa (Rig Veda VI. 1. 13). Why do say the Instrumentals and the rest'? Observe a qzi ard (Rig Veda x. 71. 4). The plural of Locative be'ng taken in the sûtra, the rule does not apply to aur and pafu, as in ·-- भित मः'। अन्वादेश न। 'अन्तोदात्तात् इत्यनुत्तेः । न च तत्रान्तोदात्तताप्यस्तो भिन THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [Vol. III. ACCENTS C. III. 83715, the plural of the Locative they have more than one syllable, though in singular locative their stem has one syllable. ३७१५ । अन्तोदात्तादुत्तरपदादन्य तरस्यानित्य समासे । ६।१।१६९ ॥ नित्याधिकाविहितसमासादन्यत्र यदुत्तरपदमन्तोदात्तमे झाच ततः परा तृतीयादि विभक्ति रन्तोदात्ता वा स्यात् । परमवाचा ॥ 3715. The same case endings may optionally have the acute accent, if the monosyllabic word stands at the end of a compound, and has acute accent on the final, when the compound can be easily unloosened. The phrases. T#Ta., and anturizia uffi: are understood here also. Tho nitya or invariable compounds are excluded by this rule. Thus परमवाचा, or परम- वाचा, परमवाचः or वा परमवाचः or वाच: So also परमत्वचा Or त्वचा &c. ३७१६ । अञ्चश्छन्दस्य सर्वनामस्थानम् ।६।१।१७० ॥ अञ्च: : परा विभक्तिरुदात्ता । 'इन्द्रो दधीचः'। चाविति पूर्वपदान्तोदात्तत्वं प्राप्नं वनीया- दिरित्यनुवर्तमानेऽसर्वनामस्थानयहणं शस्परिग्रहार्थम् । 'प्रतीचो बाहुन' ॥ 3716. In the Chhandas, the case-endings other than the saryanâmasthầna, get the acute accent when coming after añch. In the Vedas, a stem ending in the word 450, has the acute not only on the affixes previously mentioned, but on the accusative plural affis also. Thus इन्द्रादधीचा प्रस्थभिः (Rig Veda I 84. 13). Here the word दधीच had accent on धी by VI. 1. 222, but by the present sûtra, the accent falls on the case-affix a u Though the anuvritti of Instrumentals and the rest' was understood here, the word asaryanamasthana has been used here to include the ending 7 also. As प्रतीचों बाहून् प्रतिभध्येषाम् (Rig Veda x. 87. 4). ३७१७ । अडिदंपदामप्पुम्नै ट्युभ्यः । । । १। १७१ ॥ 'ऊ' 'इदं' पदादि' 'अप. 'घुम्' 'रे' 'दिव' इत्येभ्योऽसर्वनामस्थाविभक्तिदाता। कठ् । प्रष्ठाहः। प्रष्ठाहा। * उट्यु पधाग्रहणं कर्तव्यम् । इह मा भूत । अनुयुवा'। 'अक्षदावे'। इदम् । 'म भिनं. 'इदमोऽन्वादेशेऽशनुदाक्तस्तृतीयादा' (३५०) इति सूत्रेणानुदात्तस्याशाविधानात् । 'प्र ते वभू' । 'माभ्यां गा अनु' । ' पदनामारहन्निश-' (२२८) इति पट पदादयः। ‘प भ्यां भूमिः । 'द द्भिर्न जि हुा'। 'जायते मासिमासि'। 'मनश्चिन्मे ' द श्रा'। अप । 'श्रपा फेर्ने'न' । पुम् । अभातेव' पुसः'।रे। 'रा या व यम्' । 'रा यो धर्ता' दिव । 'दिवेदिवें ॥ 3717. The same (asar vanamasthana) case-endings have the acute accent, when the stem ends in ' vah'; also after idam, after pad &c. (upto 'nis' VI. 1. 63) after apa, purs, rai and div. Thus: (1.) ऊट:-प्रष्टीहः, प्रष्टीहा ॥ Vart:- In the case of 5the penultimate should be taken. Therefore not here : अक्षयुवा, अक्षयुवे ॥ .

·Vol. III. ACCENTS CH. III. $3719.) AFFIX-ACCENTS. 129 a &o. (2) -afhæfara ax: (Rig Veda IV. 17. 11). Not so in auvadesa (II. 4. 32 S. 350), because the anuvritti of STATA IN understood in this sûtra. Nor should it be said that there is final udåtta in the case of anvådeśa sam also. Because in anvadesa the ମ substitute of zy is expressly taught to be anudatta by II. 4. 32, and it can never be endacute, Thus in the following Rik verse (Rig Veda IV. 32. 22). faanut अंसामि गोषणा नपात् । माभ्यां गा अनु शियथः॥ Here spuit is used as atau referring to an of the preceding line. (3) 'These are the six words पद, दत्, नस, मास, हृद् and निश् (VI. 1. 63, S. 228). Thus uçuzi ufa: 1 afga frigt (Rig Veda X. 68. 6). sa Alfa ATFE (Rig Veda X, 52, 3). faza (Rig Vela I. 24. 12). (4):es sai taa (Rig Veda VIII. 14, 13). (5) : -ata ga: (Rig Veda 1. 124. 7). (6) - ttut C# (Rig Veda IV. 42. 10). Ta vaf (Rig Veda V, 15. 1). (7) fza--as feà fca (Rig Veda I. 1. 3). ३०५८ । अष्टनो दीर्घात । ६।१ । १२ ॥ parfata ufuatat i serfra afai' 3718. The asarvanâmasthâna case-endings after 'ashtan eight' have acute accent, when it gets the form · aslità. The word ya has two forms in the Acc. pl. and the other cases that follow it, namely meet and sai The affixes of Acc. pl. &o., are udâtta after the long formi ett and not after 8. Thus weth: (Rig Veda II. 18 4) opposed to que "far:, FET": con, pei, tetacon. gi The word suces has acute un the last syllable, as it belongs to the class of waite words (Phit I. 21); and by VI. 1. 180 the accent would have been on the penultimate syllable. This rule debars it. ३७१९ । शतुरनुमो नदाजादी।६।१ । १७३ ॥ अनुम यः शतृप्रत्ययस्त दन्तादन्तीदात्तात्परा नव्य जादिश्च शप्तादिर्वि भक्तिदाता स्यात WUAT Gant nad I' FRITTATA' fią i quata kataria:I (३६७३) इत्यायुदात्तः । अनुमः किम् । तुदन्ती । एकादेशोऽत्र उदात्तः । अदुपदेशात्परत्वाच्छतुः '-लसार्वधातुकम्-'(३७०३) इति निघातः ॥ 3719. After an oxytone Participle in at the feminine suffix 'i' (nadi) and the case endings beginning with vowels (with the exception of strong cases) have acute accent, when the participa affix has not the augment n (i. e is not nnt). The word Tiarata after an oxytoned word' is understood here. Th118 pana' va maat (Rig Veda III. 31, 6). So also maa (III. 2. 80 S. 2990). If the participle is not an oxytone, the rule does not apply. As taat, čunti Here the accent is on the first syllable by VI. 1. 189, S. 3673. Why do we say “uot lluving the augment fa Obserre på at Here also by VI. 17. & ske SER అంతకు ·-- being written ge, the sârvadhâtuka att 130 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI, (VOL. III. ACCENTS C#. III. $3720 1. 186, S. 3730, after the root तुद् which has an indicatory , in the Dhatapatha अत्, coalescing with the udatta of तुद (VI. I. 162), becomes udatta (VIII. 2.5); and VIII. 2. 1 not being held applicable there, the Participle gets the accent, aud Bot the feminine affix. ३७२० । उदात्तयणा हल्पवात् । ६ । ५। १७४ ॥ उदात्तस्थाने यो यणहल्पूर्वस्तस्मात्परा नदी शमादिर्विभक्तिश्च उदात्ता स्यात् । 'चोदयित्री मु नतीनाम् । 'एषाने त्री' । ऋतं देवाय करावते सवित्रे ॥ 37:20. The same endings have the acute accent, when for the acutely accented final vowel of the stem, a semi-vowelis substituted, and which is preceded by a consonant. Thus चोदयित्री मनतानाम् (Rig Veda I. 3. 11), एषा नेत्री (Rig Veda VII. T6. 71 ऋतं देवाय कन्बते सवित्रे (kig Veda II. 50. 1). All these are no ending words and have consequently acute acceut on the final (VI. 1. 163). ३७२१ । नाङ धात्वोः । ६ । १ । १७५ ॥ अनयोर्यणः परे शसादय उदात्ता न स्युः । ब्रह्मवन्ध्या । 'सेपश्निः सुव । 3721. But not so, when the vowel is of the feminine affix '' (IV. 1. 66), or the final of a root. After the semi-vowel substitutes of the udatta. ऊ (IV. 1. 66) or of the udatta final vowels of the root, when [receded by a consonant, the weak caseendings beginning with a vowel do not take the acute accent. Thus ब्रह्मबनध्या ब्रह्मबन्ध्ये. धीरबन्ध्वा, धीरबन्ध्वे from धोरबन्y, which has acute accent on ऊ, because ज़ is uda.tta. (III. 1. 3), and the ekadesa of it, when it combines with the preceding vowel is also udatta (VIII. 2. 5). The a substituted for a before the ending श्रा, is a semi-vowel substitute of an udatta (उदात्तयण); the affix after it would have become udatta. by the last sutra, but not being so, the general rule VIII 2. 4 applies and makes it svarita. Let us take an example of a semi-vowel substitute of the vowel of a root (धातु-या)-सुकलल्वा' सकलल्व' and खलप्या, खलवे from सक्षल्ल and खलपू' respectively formed by fat affix, the second member of the compound retaining its original accent, namely, the oxytone, the semi-vowel being substituted by VI. 4. 83. before the vowel case-endings. So also hatua: सुभबे (Rig Veda. VI. 66. 3). ३७२२ । इस्वनुड्भ्या मतुप । ६ । १ । १७६ ॥ हस्यान्तादन्ताटात्ताच टश्च परो मतुबुडात्तः । यो अब्दिमा 'निमा इर्ति' । नुटः । श्रत गवन्तः कर्ण वन्तः सखायः' । 'अन्तोदात्तात् किम् ? 'मा त्व विदिषुमान' । '+ स्वरविधी व्यजनविटा मानवत् ' इत्येतदत्र नेष्यते । 'ममत्वा इन्द्रः। नियुत्वान्या यथामहि । + रेशब्दाच ' | रे वा स्ट्रेवतः ॥ 3722. The otherwise unaccented mat (vat) takes the acute aocent, when an oxytoned stem ends in a light vowel, or the attis Dus before it the augment n (VIII. 2. 16). .

·YOX. III. ACCENTS CH. III. $3725.) AFFIX-ACCENTS. 131 So The word FPITATAra is understood here also. Th128 e fezăt afrất gufa (Rig Veda V. 42. 14). So also when aga takes JF, as wausar, pauda: para a: garu: (Rig Veda x. 71. 7). Here by VII. 1. 76, the word wat takes ang and becomes mal, then is added af by VIII. 2. 16, and we have waa quaq The preceding is elided. When the stem is not oxytone (autodâtta) this rule does not apply : as Ari Ater ferafagata (Rig Veda II. 42. 2). The word og has acute on the first syllable, as it is formed from ax with the affix 3 (Up 1. 10) which is fan (Un I. 9). the retains its anudatta here. So also in the case of Harakat, the affix does not become acute, though the word at a has acute on the final as the intervening a makes the 3 of heavy when the afix is added : the general maxim Fatfaür ananfaa man does not apply here, because the very fact that is only taken as an exception, shows this, as Recai # (Rig Veda III. 47. 1) Fagrargar vatni. (Rig. Veda II. 41. 2); Vartz -The aftix Fgo become i acute after the heavy vowel oft ; as wita = FUTRITTER There is vocalisation of u of tfu, as TFF, then substitution of one, as is, then gnņa, as ? in fant igan: (Rig Veda VIII. 2. 13). ३७२३ । नामन्यतरस्याम।६।१।१७०॥ मतुपि, याहस्वस्तदन्तादन्तादातात्परो नामुदातो वा । 'चैतन्ती सुमतीनाम, ॥ 3723. After an oxytoned stem which ends in a light vowel the genitive ending nâm' has optionally the acute accent. Thus :-angit guatara (Rig Veda I. 3. 11). So also attaię or salarą, argaimą, or argʻ19 mairą or ta'mia (see VII. 1. 54). ३७२४ । FUTERIA बहुलम् 1919 1998 या:परो नामुदात्तो वा। 'दे वसे नानामभिभज्जतीनाम् । वेत्युक्तर्नेह । 'जयन्तीनां महतो ' 3724. In the Chhandas, the ending ‘nâm' has diversely the acute accent after the feminine affix 1.' Thus aa@arata aanstaa, (Rig Veda X. 103. 8). Sometimes it does not take place, as Jurbarn Aga: (Rig Veda X. 103. 8), 3979 i uzfarrzi Farfa: 1819 1998 !! EAT T gafafa'ufRESTAT I '91 AşfATLAAT'a:'ı fafwasi a'a'ni 3725. The case-endings beginniny with a consonant, have tł acute accent after the Numerals called shaf (I. 1. 24), as well as after tri and chatun. The anuvritti of larg ceases : for the present ru'e applied even to words like uan and was which are aeute on the initial by Phit I [. 5. Thus AUTA बभिः, षड्भ्यः, पचानाम, मनानाम् त्रिभिः त्रिभ्य, त्रयाणाम, चतुर्णाम् (See VII. 1. 55) Why do we say *before case-affixes begiuning with consonanta.' ?. Observe dne ·arx ea formed word. Thus Bent rule will not apply Singular of u will be att by VI 1. 168 , this prohibition not applying, and the 132 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. III. ACCENTS CH. III. $3726. usu (VI. 1. 167 and VII. 2. 99). at mare 4A1: (Rig Veda II. 18. 4). fafataa aaa: (Rig Veda 1X. 67, 26). ३५२६ । न गोश्वन्साववर्णराडभ्यः । ६ । १ । १८२ ॥ सभ्य: प्रागुक्तं न । 'गवां शता' । 'गोभ्यं गातुम्' । 'शुन'भित्र च्छेप'म्' । सो प्रथमैकवचनेऽवर्णा- न्सात् । तेभ्यो यु नम्' । तेषां पाहि श्रु धी हवम् ॥ 3726. The foregoing rules from VI. 1. 168 downwards have no applicability after go, and 'svan' and words ending in them; nor after a stem which before the case ending of the Nominative singuar has a or å, nor after “râj,' nor after a stem ending in anch, nor after krun-/ and krit. Thus itat, ja, 193717 as in wat war (Rig Veda I. 122. 7). Hers by VI, 1. 168, the case-endings would have got otherwise the accent, which is however prohibited. So also eat, gjāand IF I DET SICH (Rig Veda VIII. 45, 30). Here VI. 1. 169 is prohibited. So also hat, a, MITE, UHTAT, UTPa an! uutta vafaa.(Rig Veda V. 2. 7). The word great: (ut wau:) meaus what has Or 31 before (1st sing.)' Thus *ūzzi, atti, TAT! ÄITIF (Rig Veda V.79. 7). aai aria pat gag (Rig Veda I. 2. 1). Su als) T31, Erå, utarstr 1 The word za is formed by fema, affix. = 49 + 1777; the prohibition applies to that formu of this word whereia the visit is not elided (VI. 4. 30). Thus laat, WIE ZIF Where the Diesel is elided, there the case. ending must take the accent ; as । । • is derived from a do' or from any to cut by feaq; asal, a an uhaat Why has the word van been especially mentioned in this sútra, when the rule would have applied to it even without such enumeration, because in the Nominative. Singular this word assumes the form sat and consequently it is waat: ? The inclusion of sag indicates that the elision of a slivali not be considered asiddha for the purposes of this rule, Therefore, the preto words like and fuę which in Nom. Sing, end in 1 asap and fuar after the elision of 7 of (VII. 3. 94). Thus the Locativa will get udatta after funt liy VI. 1. 176 as faqat. But rule Vi. I. 176 will be debarred by the present in the case of an ana, because ag is a ataa ३७२७ । दिवो झल।६।१।१३ ॥ दिवः परा झलादिवि भक्तिनादाता । 'युभिरक्तुभिः। 'झल' इति किम् । 'उप' त्वाम्चे feetcau 3727. After Idio' a case-ending beginning with bha or sa is unaccented. Thus a 21, a2, 'fu mfa: (Rig Verla. I. 34. 8). This debars VI. 1. 168. 171. Why do we say "beginning with a consonant'? Observe gurana faa iga Biz Veda I. 1 7). 1 ·133 - । or sa is VOL. III. ACCENTS CH. III. $3730.j AFFIX-ACCENTS, ३७२८ । नृचान्यतरस्याम् ।६।१।१८४ ॥ नुः परा झलादिभिक्तिदाता । 'भिमानः' । optionally anaccented. Thus - भिः or भिः, न भ्यः, नृभ्यः, न भ्याम्, नभ्याम्, नृषु, नधु । भिर्यमानः (Rig Veda IX. 75. 3). But nut so 71, त्र ३७२६ । तित्स्वरितम् । ६।१ । १८५ ॥ निगढव्याख्यातम् । 'के नूनम् ॥ 3729. An affix having an indicatory t, is svarita i. e., has circumflex accent. Thus विकीर्ण्यम्, जिहीर्यम्, formed by यत् (III. 1. 97). कार्यम, हार्यम् with dua (III. 1. 13+). This is an exception to III. 1, 3 which makes all áflizes adyudatta. For exception to this rule see VI. 1. 213 sc. क्वनूनम् (Rig Veda I. 38.2) २०३० । तास्यनुदान्डिददुपदेशान्न सार्वधातुकमनुदात्तमबिडो।६।१।१८६ ॥ अस्मात्परं लसार्वधातुकमनुदात्तं स्यात् । तासि । कर्ता। कतारी । कर्तारः । प्रत्ययस्वराप- वादोऽयम् । अनुदात्तेत् । य श्रास्ते । डितः। 'अभि चष्टे अन्न तेभिः' । अदुपदेशात् । पुरंभुज, चनस्यतम्'। चिस्वरोऽप्यनेन बाध्यते । 'वर्धमानं स्वेदमे ' । 'तास्यादिभ्यः किम् । 'अभिव उरणीतः' । उपदेशग्रहणान्नेह । 'हुतो वृत्राण्या'या' । 'लग्रहणम्' किम् । 'कतीह निघाना सार्वधातुकम् ' किम् । शिश्ये । 'अन्त्रिाः' किम् । हु ते । यदधीते । * विन्धिखिदिभ्यो ति वक्तव्यम् । इन्धे राजा' मतच्च ' अनुदात्तस्य च यत्र-' (३६५१) इति सून्ने भाष्ये स्थितम् ॥ 3730. The Personal-endings and their substitutes (III. 2. 124-126) are, when they are strvadhatuka (III. 4. 113 &c), unaccented, after the characteristic of the Periphrastic future tâsi' after a root which in the Dhâtupâtha has an unaccented vowel or a 'n' (with the exception of hnun 'and 'in') as indicatory letter, as well as after what has a final 'a' in the Graminatical system of Instruction (upadesa). Thus तासिः, कता-कारी, कतारः, this debars the affix accent (III. 1. 3). Anudattet: -as, आस श्रास्ते, वस-वस्ते । डितः-पड, ते. शीड़-शेते ; अभिचष्टे अन तेभिः (Rig Veda VII. 104. 8). अत् उपदेशः:-as तु दतः, नु दतः, पचतः, पैठतः । पुरु भुजा चनस्य म् Rig Veda I. 3. 1). A root taking शप. (अ) is considered as taught (upadesa) as if ending with an श्र, as the indientory letteran and प. are disregarded on the maxim अनुबन्ध स्थानकान्तिक त्वं ( = अनवयवत्वं)। Thus पचमानः, यजमानः । The augment मुक् is added by श्राने मुक् VII. 2.82 which is the explained in two wais ; first, the augment 97 is a ded to the final y of the base (anga) when 99 (2199 &e.) follows ; or secondly, the augment Fx is added to the base (angn) which ends in 4, when a follows. In the first otse मुक becomes part and parcel of श्र, and therefore अटुपदेश will mean and include in a haying such मुक, on the usxim यदागमास्तद्गुर्गा भूतास्तदय हणेन रहा That , उ :- , ·But we get अदुपदेश। 134 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. ACCENTS CH. IIT. 93730- to which an augment is added denotes, because the augment forms part of it not merely itself, but it denotes also whatever results from its combination with that augnient.' Therefore we will not prevent the verb becoming But if secondly and be taken as part of the base which ends in, then the parcurge does not follow an aguan, because a intervenes, rid of this difficulty by considering grot augment as Bahiranga and therefore asiddha when the Antaranga operation of accent is to be performed. The augmente, (#) in the last two examples consequently does not prevent the application of the rule, Though the affix 417 has an indicatory y, yet fan accent (VI. 1. 163) is debarred by this rule, as it is subsequent. As a GÀ (Rig Veda I. 1: 8). Why do we say after aifa &c. Observe sfüqa quia: (Rig Veda III 6. 10) faza The vikarana sz is fem (I. 2. 4) with regard to operations affecting the prior term, and not those which affect the subsequent. Therefore though s is considered as fea for the purposes of preventing the guga, of the prior term fr, it will not ha considered so for the purposes of subsequent: accent. Or the word fra in this sûtra may be taken as equal to faguèt and not the sifaafum fen like sal Why do we use the word upadeśa ? So that the rale may apply to ofera:, uzla:, but not to ga:, Eu: the dual of a which ends in 7 in upadeśa, though before ne and we it has assumed the form Therefore , zá: 1 gåtanınauf (Rig Veda VI. 60. 6). Why do we use the word a (Personal endings)? Observe et faarat formed by gran added to (III. 2. 128), which not being a substitute of eac, is not a personal ending like 1771 Why do we use the word Sårvadâtuka ? Observe fysù, fusta. fofauti wày do we say with the exception of age and co? Observe ena, ug puitäten Vārtēka :-Prohibition must be stated of fara, fa, and fac Thus can TTSTT (Rig Veda VII. 8. 1). This is explained in the Mahâbhâshya on sútra VI. 1. 161. S. 3651. ३७३१ । आदिः सिचोऽन्यतरस्याम् । ६।१।१८७ ॥ feSTiRTFEGZIFT ET Iarfar afatitaarn 3731. In 'sich' Aorist, the first syllable may optionally have the acute accent. The word gam is understood here. Thus, et fa operą, at feste; At fe fact# or at fe afati So also urfue afacraat (Rig Veda VII. 40. E and VII. 67. 10). ३७३२ । थलि च सेटीडन्तो वा।६।१।१६६ सेटि पलन्ते पदे इडुदात्तः अन्तो वा पादिर्वा स्यात् । यदा नेते त्रयस्तदा ‘लिति' (१६७६) इति प्रत्ययात्पूर्वमुदात्तम् । लुलविथ । अत्र चत्वारोऽपि पर्यायेणादाताः ॥ 3732 Before the ending tha of the Perfect, second person singular, when this ending takes the augmenti, the acute accent falls either on the first syllable, or on this i, or on the personal ending.

·VOL. III. Accents CH. IV $3735.) ACCENT OF COMPOUNDS. 135 1 Thusa, a fau, mafán, and mafai As we has an indicatory the syllable preceding the affix may have also the accent (VI. 1. 193). Thus we get the four forms given above. In short, with au termination, the accent may fall on any syllable. When the x is not #F, the accent falls on the root and we have one form oniy by faz acceut (VI. 1. 193 S. 3676): ate # ३७३३ । उपात्तमं रिति।६।१।२१७ ॥ frumurFIRIWINAFSI ha azteaza ?« STA TUUERT: 11 3733. What is formed by an affix having an indicatory ra has acute on the penultimate syllable, the full word consisting of more than two syllables. A penultimate syllable can be only in a word consisting of three syllables or more. Thus eui&# and #ua fornved by wmT (III. 1. 96); ugai átai, मदुना सीयः by जातीयर (V. 3. 19) यदाहबनीये ॥ This debars III 1. 3 Here end Affix-accents. अथ THTHEITT: 1 CHAPTER IV. ACCENT OF COMPOUNDS. ३७३४।समासस्य।६।१।३३।। TT 3417: CTG 1 gargar a 3734. A compound word has the acute on the last syllable. Thus un fuu (Rig Veda I. 4. 7). The consonants being held to be nonexistent for the purposes of accent; the udatta will fall on the vowel though it may not be final, the final being a consonant, ३७३५ । बहुब्रीही प्रकृत्या पूर्वपदम् । ६।३।१॥ उदात्तरितयोगि पूर्व पदं प्रमत्या स्यात् । सत्यश्चित्रवस्तमः' । 'उदात्त' इत्यादि किम् । सर्वानुदाते पूर्वपटे समासान्तोदात्तत्वमेव यथा स्यात् । समयाटः ॥ 3735. In a Babuvrihi, the first member preserves its own original accent The word पूर्वपदम् means here the accent whether udåtta or svarita - wbich is in the first member : WEPUT metus, . retans its own nature, does notbecome modified into an anudatta accent.' By the last rule the fival of a com pound gets the accent, so that all the preceding members lose their accent, and become annidatta, as in one word all syllables are unaccented except one, VI. 1. 158. Thus, the first member of a Babuvrihi would have lost its accent and brcone aludátta ; with the present sûtra commences the exceptions to the rule that the final of a compound is always udåt ta, Tbus afuur vaxa: # ·130 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. 1 a an Instrumental or (o) a Locative or (4) a word with WHICO [VOL. III. ACCENTS CH. IV. 93736. The words udâtta, and svarita are understood in this aphorism. Therefore if all the syllables of the pärvapada are anudatta, the present rule has no scype there, and such a compound will get udåtta on the final by the universal rule enunciated in VI. I. 223. Thus FFHTT:, here being all anudatta, the accent falls on 71 ३०३६ । तत्पुरुषे तुल्यार्थवृतीयासमभ्युपमानाव्यद्वितीयाकृत्याः।६।३।३॥ सप्तते पूर्वपदभूतास्तत्रूषे प्रकृत्या । तुल्य श्वेतः । 'कत्यतुल्याख्या अंजात्या' (७४८) इति सत्पुरुषः। किरिणा काण: किरिकाणः । ' त धन्म न्ट यत्नखम्। मन्दर्यात मादके इन्द्र सखेति agata sa: Teat SOIATO * अव्यये ननिपातानाम् +' । अयज्ञो वा एषः। 'परिगणनम् किम् । स्नात्वाकालकः । मुहूर्तसुखम् भोज्यो ष्णम् ॥ 37 36. In a Tatpurusha, the first member preserves its original accent, when it is a word (1) meaning 'a resemblance', or (2) second member is compared, (5) or an Indeclinable, or (6) an Accusative, or (7) a Future Passive Participle. Thus (1) Taa: 1 This is a Karmadhâraya compound formed under II. 1. 68, S. 749 and gou being formed by an is acutely accented on the first (VI. 1. 216). (2) When the first member is in the Instrumental case, as :- -fi fextu: (II. 1. 30). fanft: is formed by the Uņâdi affix to 3 (Uņ. IV, 143), and it being treated as a fria (Un. IV. 142) has udâtta on the final. (3) When the first member is a word in the Locative case, as JAUH- RCF (Rig Veda I. 4. 7). Here hadapan is a Locative Tatpurusha compound. Reun is an epithet of Indra. मन्दर्यात मादके - दुन्द्रे सखम् ॥ (4) When the first meinber is a word with which the second member is com. pared, as : -शस्त्री These compounds are formed by II. 1. 55. eat is formed by Gauradi stu and is final-acute. (5) When the first member is an Indeclinable as, Uniatza: 1 (Rig Veda VI. 67. 9). The Indeclinable compound has udátta on the first, it is formed by II. 2. 5. Vart: In cases of Indeclinable compounds, the rule applies only to those which are formed by the negative Particle , by , and by Particles (nipâta). Though t is one of the Nipätas, its separate mention indicates that 75%-accent debars even the subsequent ma-accent as Erfg: (III. 3. 112, S. 3389). Therefore, it does not apply to ATGT Tah: which has acute Od the final and belongs to Mayúrayvansakâdi class. (6) When the first member is in the accusative case, as :-'arax They are formed by II. 1. 29. Jgn belongs to guraufa class and is acutely accented on the last. (7). When the first member is a Kritya-formed word, as, HISUT CIĘ I The compounding is by 11. 1. 68. HTF is formed by pan and has svarta ou the ful: (VI. 1. 185). wa SUATUI ·AN NATO: 1 EU is formed by 79 sffix (Un. III. 4) And VOL. III. ACCENTS Ca. IV. $3739.] ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. 137 ३७३७ । वर्णो वर्णषवनेते । ६ । २।३॥ aviarferatua Tnafsia atafa पूर्व पदं प्रकल्या तत्युमपे । कृष्णासारङ्गः । लोहित कलमाषः । कृष्ण शब्दो नक्प्रत्ययान्तः । लोहितशब्द इतनन्तः । 'वर्णः' किम् । घरममाः । 'वर्गेषु' for anfaat: 1gaa' fia: # 3737. The first member of a Tatpurusha preserves its original accent, when a word denoting color is compounded with another color.denoting word, but not when it is the word eta. has acute on the final (III, 1, 3). Fifte is forroed by the affix an added to (Un. III. 94) and has acute on the first (VI. 1. 197). Why do we say color-denoting word? Observe at EU: (VI. 1. 223). Why do we say with another color-denoting word?? Observe anfaat: (VI. 1. 223). Why do we say · but not when it is ca' ? Observe em : The pounding takes place by II. 1. 69. 3935 i gauür: WATU ISI 18.00 एतयोस्त्तरपटयाः प्रमाणवाचिनि तत्युसंघे पूर्व पदं प्रमाता श्ररित्रगाधमुदकम् । ततप्र- Artfrau: 1 INTRAUT Luaq.materiet i frana 27 #Zra: 1 प्रमाणमियत्तापरिच्छेदमात्रं न पुनरायाम एव । 'प्रमाणे किम् । परमगाधम् ॥ 3738. The first member of a Tatpurusha preserves its original accent, when the second term is 'gâdha' or lavana, and the compound expresses a 'measure or mass.' Thus FUFCA# water as low or fordable as an Aritra é, e. of the depth of a pestle.' TAUF, 80 much salt as may be given to a cow.' These are Genitive Tatpurusha compounds. syft is formed by the aflix y added to (III. 2. 184), and has acute on the middle (III. 1. 3): it is formed by ST (Un. II. 68) and has acute on the final T1 The word valu here denotes quantity,' * measure,' mass,' limit,' and not merely the length. The power of denot. ing measure by these words is here indicated by and is dependent upou accent. When not denoting watu we have UTATTU'À (S. 3734). ३७३८ । दायाद दायादे।।२।५॥ Age WERT I NACIOTT: 1 YATZ: EURIUTTI: UNURIētiazma: 1 *ZIUITIN' किम् । घरमदायादः ॥ 3739. In a Tatpurusha compound, having the word dayada as its second member, the first member denoting inheritance preserves its original accent. Thus faa rajata:, taatura: 1 The word ya is derived by adding to UITS! (Un. II. 81). Though the Uņâdi Sútra 11. 81 ordains an after the root ut preceded by fa, yet hy the rule of aga (IIT. 3. 1) it comes after ut, also when it is not preceded by fa, and 27 has acute on the first (III. I. 3). 6 $ ·Why do we say 6 which experiences & hinder- 138 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [Vou. III. ACOENTS CH. IV. 33759 Why do we say when meaning inheritance ? Observe UthaTuta: (VL 1. 223) taking the final acute of a compound. pogoi mai facerea: 1811&m प्रतिबन्धवाचि पूर्वपदं प्रकत्या ससयोः परतस्तत्पुरुथे। गमनचिरम् । ध्याहरणकाक्रम । गमले #Tuia au faca fa karafuar afrafa staa sfaafar' FER* 3740. In a Tatpurusha compound, having the words chira or krichchhra as its second member, the first member, when it denotes that which experiences an obstacle, preserves its original accent. Thus itafary, or anroca. The words in and argu are formed by my affix, and have ferch accent (VI. 1. 193). This compound belongs either to the class of Mayûra-vyansakådi (II. 1. 72), or of an attribute and the thing qualified. When going to a place is delayed owing to some defective arrange. ment or cause, or becomes difficult, there is produced an obstacle or hinderance, and is called Tatiae or Observe GoT 3989 I wasay IEIRION eraarfafes uzva sarà gegziliani argou i ngaza afera: i semua i **: 5 TUET 51927: *72-' (2598) TERTUINZIE I wau'f*, favणु पदम् ॥ 3741. In a Tatpurusba compound, the first member preserves its original accent, when the second member is the word pada denoting "a pretext.' The word sa means a pretext, a contrivance. Thus quca van: auioa ufen: 1 Gone on pretext of voiding urine or excreta. The word sy is derived by adding the affix to the root 59, the being substituted for 3 of Fre, (Uņ. IV. 163), and has acute on the first (VI. 1 197) or it may be a word formed by os to the root rrafa The word FOTO is also formed by 7s and by VI. 2. 144, S. 3878, has acute on the final. The compoundiug takes place by II. 1. 72 or it is an attributive compound. Why do we say when meaning a pretext ?' Observe fawr: wą-fanya ance'? 6 1 30* 1 Fata STATTUI EISIE निवातशब्दे परे वातत्राणवानि सस्युरुषे पूर्वपदं प्रक्षात्या । कुटीनिक्षातम् । कुडा निवातम क्षुटीशब्दो गौराठिडीपन्तः । कुछ शब्दो अगन्तः । यगन्तः इत्यन्ये । 'वातत्राणे' किम् । रानियासे যয়ন। লিখানমন্ত্রী ও যায় । 3742. In a Tatpurusha compound, the first member preserves its original accent, when the second member is the word • nivåta ' a the sense of u protection from wind.'

·6 Observe VOL. III. ACORNTE (H. IV. $3744.] ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. 139 Thuis za faati = tfaatar'a hutas the only shelter from the winds." So also a afaanap or haata# .. The word foram is an Avyayibkiiva compound = a 1a: (II. 1. 6): or a Bahuvrihi=fax aratsferi The wordt Tax &c., are examples of compounds of two words in apposition, that is furthed by ssta (IV. 1. 41), and has acute on the last (III. 1.3). Some say that ya is derived from - by adding up with the augment on and treating it as fait, it has the acute on the first ; others hold that it is derived by the affix or Fi and the affix has the accent. The & here is not indicatory but part of the affir. Why do we say when meaning a shelter from wind'? wafae. he lives under the shelter of the king.' Here faaln=två or vicinity. 3083 | Jasa IERI #TRIX Hamafefa UZTE. A so geiagi wefan Raase NZE TITATE FATT: AARTEIafada: * TEST: 69 TDAH'ı ( 516 'बजेरसुन्ध' इत्यायुदात्तो व्युत्थादितः । नातवे' किम् । उत्तमशारदम् ॥ 3743. In, a Tatpurusha compound, the first member preserves its original accent, when the second member is the word Sarad' having any other sense than that of autumnal.' The word waa means appertaining to season (), e. when the word are does not refer to the season of a or autumn. Thus ** * fresh drawn water.' The word 72 means here fresh, new '; and it forms an, invariable compound. The word F is formed by 3 affix added to (Un. I. 15), they being elided. The affix 3 is treated as fara (Ur. I. 9) and the ascent falls on the first syllable (VI. I. 197), Why do we say "when not meaning autumnal'? Observe JNANZA the best autumnal grass be." (V1. I. 223). ३०४४ । अध्वर्युकषाययोर्जाती ।।२।१० ॥ paar: vrat sifaarfara area gave herracia1 STAY: 1 graifteku 9,1 बशष्ट पसाटा जन्तः । तस्मात्- वैशम्पायनान्तेवासिभ्यश्च' (१४८४) इति णिनेः 'कठचरकाल्नुक (१४८०) इति नुवा। द्वारि नियुक्त इति ठक्यन्तोदात्तो दीवारिकशब्दः । 'खातो' किम् । परमाध्वर्यु। 3744. In a Tatpurusha compound denoting a genus, the first member preserves.its original accent, when the second merr-. ber is the word way or : Thus užrag': This is an. A ppositional compound denoting ‘ganus or. kind,' with a fixed meaning: •is derivel by e affic (III. I. 36), and to it in added tha. Taldhita atfix fuja (IV, 3. 104, S. 1484), in the sense of a (IV. 3 101), and the affic is: then, elided; hy IV. 3: 107, S. 1487. Sn also an RFOTO: This is a, Genitive compound. The word ararfi is formed by an affixillel to yıt anl hag aoite on the final (Vti 1. 165). Why. do, we say when meaning a genua' 1: Observe, othTUA :, Taara: (VI. 1. 223). & ·140 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (Vop. III. ACCENTS CH. IV. $3745. क , . ३७४५ । सदृशतिरूपयोः सादृश्ये । ६।२॥ ११ ॥ अनयोः पूर्व प्रकृत्या । पितृसदृशः। 'सादृश्ये किम् । परमसदृशः। समासार्थोऽत्र पूज्यमानता नसादृश्यम् ॥ 3745. In a Tatpurusha compound expressing resemblance with some one or something, the first member preserves its original accent, when the second member is sadrića' or 'pratirdpa,' Thus पितृसदृशः The word fuck is formed by Uñadi affix a (Uņ II. 95) and is finally accented. Why do we say when meaning resemblance' ! Observe परमसदृशः (VI. 1. 223) : here the sense of the compound is that of honor' and notiesemblance, ३७४६ । द्विगौ प्रमाणे।६।२ । १२ ।। द्विगावुत्तरपदे प्रमाणवार्चािन तत्पुरुषे पूर्वपदं प्रतिस्वरम्। प्राच्यसप्तसमः । सप्त समाः प्रमाणमस्य । 'प्रमाणे लो द्विगार्नित्यम्' इति मात्रचो लुक् । प्राच्यशब्द अायुदात्तः । प्राच्यश्चासी सप्तसमश्च प्राच्यसप्तसमः । द्विगा' किम् । ब्रीहिप्रस्यः । 'प्रमाणे किम् परमसप्तसमम् ॥ 3746. In a Tatpurusha compound denoting measure or quantity', the first member preserves its original accent, when the second member is a Dvigu. Thus प्राच्यसप्तसमः। The word सप्तसमः सप्त समाः प्रमाणमस्य ! the affix मात्र denoting measure' (V. 2.37. S. 1838) is elided (See V. 2. 37. S. 1838 Vart) ute- प्रवासी सप्तसमश्च प्राच्यसप्तसमः an Eastern se yen-years old'; aren has acute on the first. Why do we say before & Dvigu' ? Observe af me: I Why do we say * when denoting measure | Observe परमसप्तसमम् । ३७४७ । गन्तव्यमण्य वाणिजे ।६।२।१३ ॥ वाणिजशब्द परे तत्पुरुधे गन्तव्यवाचि परामवाति च पूर्वपदं प्रतिस्वरम् । मद्रवाणिज सप्तमीसमासः । मद्रशब्दो रक्षप्रत्ययान्तः । 'गन्तव्य इति किम् । परमवाणिजः॥ 3747. Before the word vânij' a trader,' the first member of a Tatpurusha preserves its accent, when it is a word specifying the place whither one has to go, or the ware in which one deals. Thựs parfus:=Agifag prat maging the Madra-merchants i, è oppho, trade by going to Madra " All these are Locative compounds. मद्र is derived by to affix: (Un II. 11 ) and is acuteiy qocented on the last (VI. 1. 165). In the seuse of qug we have : ritarfus: ' a dealer in cowe;' fr is finally accented (Un II.67). Why do we say : the place whither one goes, or the goods in which org deals ?" Observe परमवाशिजः ॥ ३७४८ । मात्रोपज्ञोपक्रमच्छाये नपुसके।६।२॥ १४ ॥ मात्रादिषु परतो नप सकवाचिनि तत्यु रुधे सथा। भिक्षायास्तुल्य प्रमाणं भिक्षामात्रम् । भिक्षाशब्दो 'गुरोपच हलः (३२८). इत्य प्रत्ययान्तः । पाणिन्युपज्ञम् । पाणिनिशष्ट बाटा टात्तः । . .

·also with But, 11. 4. 21. So when the second term is sukha VOL. III. AOCENTS CH. IV, $3751. ACCEXTS OF COMPOUNDS. FE14A I EUGI I TATTIST: 1 Sgama i sync learnit farata na किम् । कुडाच्छाया॥ 3748. The first member of a Tatpurusha preserves its accent before the words 'matra,' upajña,' 'upakrama', and 'chhâyâ' when these words appear as neuter. Thus faits The word ## is here synonymous with grea, the phrase being = fuerareITAT, and is a Genitive compound. The word fuam is derived from faa, by the feminine affix (III. 3. 103, S. 3280), and has acute on the final (II. 1. 3). So also with 3ort, as unfaayu A (see II. 4. 21). All these are Geuitive compounds. The word off is acutely accented on the first. So also with 3UR, as ai mare parfa i The word #3 is formed by va (III. 1. 144). The as पुच्छायम्। The word sy is derived from go by 3 affix (Uo. I. 13),and it being treated as fria (Un. I. 9) the acute falls on the first syllable (VI. I. 197). The compound is a Genitive Tat purusha--gui &TUT; and it is Neuter by Il. 4. 22. When the compound is not a Neuter we have FeteraT (II. 4. 25). ३७४६ । सुर्खाप्रययोहिते । ६ । २ । १५ ॥ एतयोः परयोहितवाचिनि तत्युरु तथा । गमनप्रियम् । गमनसुखम् । गमनशब्द लित्स्वरः हिते किम् । परमसुखम् ॥ 3749. The first member of a Tatpurusha preserves its accent delight, or is good, Thus Hagethe pleasure of going.' wafuap i These are appositional compounds. The word ta is formed by me affix aud has acute ou the sylia le preceding the affix (VI. I. 193). The word sukha and priya have the sen e of form or 'well' good, beneficial, e when the thing deuoted by the Erat term the cause of pleasure or delight. When this is not the sense we have otage 3840 i atat a 1819€ 11 atât pennui arga I Auge uuem i afrāTSAATA: I ATHITVăn WATARATOIATTATI stay fa trigo 3750. The first member of a Tatpurusha preserves its accent, the second term being sukha or priya in the sense of agreeable to one, or desired. Thus atqug prag "the sweetmilk desired by or agreeable to the Brähmanns,' erfaTs Hizia: &c. The words aimu and 277 have acute on the final being formed by the affixes wu and u respectively (V_4. 62 iud [II, 1, 3). When not meaning ayrouable to or desired, we have tragda, u १७५१ । स्वं स्वामिनि । ६।२ । १७ ॥ स्वामिशब्द परे स्ववाचि पूर्वपदं तथा । गोस्वामी । 'स्वम्' किम् । परमस्वामी ॥ & ·THE SIDDHANTA RAOwudr. [Vol. IIL AOCENTS CH. TV.93757. 3751. In a Tatpurusha compound, having the word '888. min' as its second member, the first term, when it denotes the thing possessed, retains its original accent. Thus गोवामी। When the first member is not a word denoting ponsorsion, we have utapatan geyr i prarata , CIRI PE I 'दमूना गहपतिर्द में। 3752. In a Tatpurusha ending in pati when it means masa ter' or 'lord,' the first member preserves. its original accent. Tbus at tegia (Rig Veda I. 60. 4). The word mais formed by w (III. I. 144) and has acute on the final (III I. 3). ३७५३ । न भवाधिदिधिषु। ६।२।१६ । afana ap guadafafas nga Amir wafari ya wanafa: 1 ar UFAE I faxfa: i fafugofa: 3753. The words #, atk, faa, and fatua, however, do not preserve their original accent in a Tatpurusha, when coming bą. fore the word pati denoting lord.' This debars the accent taught by the last aphorism. Thus pufa', agafar fæąufa": fafuuufa': # All these are Genitive compounds and are finally accenk ed by VI. I. 223. ३७५४ । वा भुवनम् ।६।२॥ २० ॥ 3rface i panufa: ' '*7*:-'fa uni yanaa: 3754. The word bhuvana may optionally keep its accent in a Tatpurusha, before parti denoting lord? Thus yamaha: or natafa: 1 The word wat is formed by anyon (Um. II. 80), and has acute on the first (VI. I. 197). ३५५ । आशङ्काबाधनेदीयस्सु संभावने । १२ । २१ ॥ अस्तित्वाध्यवसाय: संभावनम् । गमनाशङ्कमस्ति । गमनाबाधाम । गमननेदीयः । गमनमा wiarza Faaitafan ar $112Huraa' f & utraata: 3755. Before 146 PETU, and aatur, the first member in a Tatpurusha compound preserves its original accent, when it treats about a supposition. The word Awaan = wftratuu: "the hesitation about the existence of a thing.' Thus Hatag ‘one feurs the jóirneg'; Similarly khatalun # # = 187 #rxa çfa ÅHITÀit has stepped in as an obstacle to journey. s milarly aa =mafafa firmuärfafa dureza "the journey stands directly before!

·Vou. III. ACCENTS CH. IV $3758) ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. 14 1 Why do we say when a supposition is meant'? Observe uraato: the above words are formed by sy affix and have fax accent. (VI. 1. 193). ३५६ । पूर्वे भूतपूर्व । ६।२ । २२ ॥ भाग भूतपूर्व : श्रान पूर्वः । पूर्व शब्दो त्तिविषये भूतपूर्व वर्तते । भूतपूर्वो' किम । waga': * 3756. The first member of a Tatpurusha compound preserves ita original accent when the word 'půrva 'is the second member, and the sense is this bad been lately- Thus wicht paga:=lega': ' formerly had been rich.' The compound must be analysed in the above way. The compounding takes place by II. 1. 57 or it belongs to Mayura-vyatsakâdi class. Why do we say when weaning bad been lately. Observe maya?", which should be analysed as thatêr ya safari If it is analysed as TAT vaya': then it becomes an example under the rule and not a counter-example. In order therefore, to make this rule applicable we must know the sense of the compound. ३७५७ । सविधसनीडसमर्यादसवेशसदेशेषु सामीध्ये । ६।३।२३ ॥ uu ya wamati #zefauh! mataatex I ftohtaagażu मदसवेशम् । 'सामीप्ये किम् । सह मर्यादया समर्यादं क्षेत्रम् । क्षेत्रसमर्यादम् ॥ 3757. The first member of a Tatpurusha compoưnd preserves its original accent, when the second member is afau, waite, wuta, way, and an in the sense of what can be found in the vicinity thereof. Thus faux, maica, Eritraua, wax and The accents of theso words have been taught before in Sûtras VI. 3. 12, 13. The words afav &c., are derived from or fauu &o., but they all mean in the widipity': wget - HEITT UTHURI Why do we say when meaning in the vicinity thereof? Observe 88 Auteur ana = quia in a field having boundary.' @ge #xua= and the bounded field of Chaitra.' ३७५८ । विस्यष्टादीनि गुणवचनेषु ।६।२।२४॥ Farca facem fAlA-T' (3952) Faragara: 1 * Fare-pla FI UTFRAUH ITU-' fa fafin i fagetAt: 1 Faenza faieti si guv i ofQcA 1 FUEi vua i fayu # 3758. The words ' vispashta ' &c. preserve their accent when followed by an Adjective word in a compound. Thus fa face The compounding takes place by II. 1. 4. and it should be aualysed thus विस्पष्टं कटुकम । The word fage bas acute on the first by VI. 2. 49. The word (2) faux is also acute on the first as it gets the autent of the Iudeclinable, Somo read the ·The SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. III. ACCENTS CH. IV. 93758. un (5) or Of these, * word as fare:, which being a Babuvrihi has also first acute. The word (3) * has svarita on the first by VIII. 2. 4. The remaining words of this class are (4) (6) ufuga", 17) Fun (8) aun and (9) Fargo. the word piva has acute on the final by VI. 2. 114 ; og is formed by 3 (Un 1. 18), which being considered as fara (Up. 1. 9), it has acute on the first ofaza is formed by to the roct us, and is finally acute (VI. 2. 144). Te has accent on the final, being formed by a křit affix (917 afa=te:, at arzta, or Uņ I. 106). gua being formed by a fan affix (Um. 1. 111), has acute on the final (VI. 1. 163), for fan is understood in the Uņadi sâtra Uņ. I. 111 from sútra On. I. 106. The word fagu has acute on the final by VI. 2. 144, being formed by * affix added to you do. Why do we say of fake &c., ? Observe ATATTH having acute on the final. Why do we say when followed by a word expressing a quality'? Observe fauciEHU: 11 ३७५६ । श्रज्यावमकन्यापवत्सु भावे कर्मधारये। ६ । २ । २५ ॥ 6 gan hay? Parayata uruarfara atua taaifa gaud জন্মা। মালা,। মনভায়। লাল,। আনননিতম। মানবায়িত। ‘গ’ इत्यादि किम । गमनशोभनम । भावे किम् । गम्यतेनेनेति गमनम् । गमनं श्रेयो गमनश्रेयः । कर्म-ति किम । षष्ठीसमासे मा भूत् ॥ 3759. In a Karmadhâraya compound, the first member consisting of a Verbal noun 'bhậva' preserves its original accent before adjective forms built from ‘śra’(V. 3. 60), 'jya' (V. 3. 61) "avama' and ' kan' (V. 3. 64), and before a form built from the word' papa. Thus thro, 1950ta:, ATA, HAS AUTES I Jam is a z formed word and has fata accent i.e., on the first syllable, (VI. 1. 193). The words 7, 6, and an are substitutes which certain adjectives take in the comparative and superlative degrees, and the employment of these forms in the sutra indicates that the comparative and superlative words having these elements should be taken as second members, and so also of go, the comparativa and superlative are taken, for this is the meaning here of the word utdan 11 Why do we say " &c.'? Observe #TTHREI Why do we say a verbal Noun' ? Observe awa:, Aa:= naga: a better carriage where the word Ha is - nraa aa a carriage' here in the sense of hu and not BTA (III. 1. 117, S. 3293). Wby do we say a Karmadharaya compound' ? Not 80 in the Genitive compound. ३७६० । कुमारश्च ।६।२ । २६ ॥ ÁUTTUI SFATUHUTI FATTTEŽISIETA: u 3760. The word 'kumâra' preserves its original accent, when standing as a first member in a Karmadhâraya compound. Thus an uauri The word aati has acute on the final, as it is derived is is $ ·Vol. III. ACCENTS CH. IV. $3763.) ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. from the root FATT ISTUTE with the afiis 7 of gate By II. 1. 70, S. 753 it is ordaiued that EAT is compounded with TT c. NOTE: Some commentators hold that the word must be followed by (II. 1.70) to make this rule applicable. They refer to the maxim 2 a UNbiacarfür: wfautieS UTCW * whenever & term is employed which might dunote both something original and also something else resulting from a mule of Grammar, or when at tern is einployed in a rule which inight denote both sonte thing formed by another rule in which the same individual tein has been enployed, and also something else formed by a general rule, such a tern should be taken to denote, in the former case, only that which is original, and in the latter case, only that which is formed by that rule in which the sale individual terin has been employed.” Other Grammariaus, however do not nuke such linnt ation, but apply the rule to all Karnadhara ya compounds of Air 3999 1 urta: wafeleins a कुमारस्यादिस्दात्तः प्रत्येनसि परे कर्मधारये। प्रतिगतमेनोऽस्य प्रत्येनाः । सुमारप्रत्येनाः ।। 3761. In a Karmadhâraya compound of Kumâra followed by pratyenas, the acute falls on the first syllable of Kumara, The word wrap = ufananatsku 1 Thus ETTUfar: 11 ३७६२ । पगेमवन्य तरस्याम् । ६ । ३ । २८ ॥ GOT TUTERIUPR ar a barrainat: I thigar: 1 SlaziaraTarên Fairtāmia Hafa u 3762. The first syllable of Kumâra is acute optionally, when the second member is a word denoting 'the name of a horde.' The word y means a rnultitude, a collection &c. Thus कुमारचातका: or Faltanat: (vi. 2. 26), or FATTUTAFI*: So also with matáignar: Here OTAT &c, are horde-names ; and the affix su is added to them by V. 3. 112: which is elided in the Plural by II. 4, 62. In the above examples when the word “Kumára is not accented on the first syllable, it gets accent on the last hy VI. 2. 26, wben the ofruari maxim is not applied : when that waxim is applied, the final of the compound takes the accent by the general rule VI. 1. 223. ३७६३ । गन्तकालकपालभगालशरावेषु द्विगौ । ६।२।२८ ॥ एषु परेषु पूर्व प्रकत्या । पञ्चारत्नयः प्रमाणमस्य पञ्चारनिः। दशमासान्भूतो दशमास्यः । uqqatarn: UNDIR: 1 Fait -' safunt fanzia, usamurai gFauna: पञ्चशरावः नः संख्यायाः' इति पञ्चञ्छब्द वायुदात्तः। 'दगन्तादियु' किम । पञ्चाश्वः । द्विगा किम् । परमानिः ॥ 3763. In a Dvigu compound, the first member preserves its original accent, before a stem ending in a simple vowel, with the exception of a (ik), before a word denoting time, as well as be. fore 'kapâla,' bhagala ' and 'sarava. 19 d ·oais second members. THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. III. ACOENTS Cr. IV. 53763. Thus osarta: 1 The above is an example of Taddhitârtha Dvigu (II. 1. 62) equal to d'arcat: WATUAR, the WATU denoting affix #77 is always elidel in Dvigu (V. 2. 3 Vârt). So also &TAT: 20 A1817 RT I So also in ATE | This is also a Taddhitârtha Dvigu (II. 1. 52), formed by the affix up (V. 1.80-82 S 1744-46). So also ** 21:, sauna, o'saytia: 1 These are also Taddhilartha Dvigu formed by IV. 2. 16, the affix s being elided by IV. 1. 88. The word is first acute by Phit (II. 5). Why do we say "before an stem &o"? Obgerve uafarra: a:=far. ta:, : Why do we say "in & Dvigu Compound ?" Observe Crata: ३७६४ । बहून्यतरस्याम्।६।२ । ३० । बहुशब्दस्तथा वा । बहुनिः । बहुमास्यः । बहुकपालः । बहुशब्दोऽन्तोदात्तः । तस्य पणि fa 'sitefcat: -' (2449) sfa wala u 3764. In a Dvigu compound, the word bahu may optionally preserve its accent, when followed by an ik-ending stem, or by a time-word, or by kapala, bhagala and sarava. This allows option where the last rule required the accent necessarily. Thus ayxfa: or agafa', ag #12: or agna", agura: or बहुँ कपालः or बहुकपालः, बहु भगाल: or aghna, azucra: or ap: I The word az, has acute The word ae has acute on the tinal being forined by the affix (Uņ. I. 29). When the is changed to a as in the first example, the anudatta sis chauged into syarita by VIII. 2. 4. S. 3657, when the first member preserves its accent. Iu the other alternative, the accent falla on the last syllable. 3084 fariztaAFTET I CIB99 na एतयोः परतः पूर्व पदं प्रकृत्या वा द्विगा। पञ्चर्दािष्टः । पञ्चविनस्तिः ॥ 3765. In a Dvigu compound, the first member may optionally preserve its accent, when followed by the words dishti' Thus usafice or usafare, a fante: or usafanta: The affix #17e is elided after the WATU denoting words dishți and vitasti (V. 2. 37). ३७६६ । सप्तमी सिद्धशुषकपकबन्धेष्वकालात । ६ । २ । ३२ ॥ armaifa ATP Temat faziati aiasutag: Jitsufa Tut: 1 sau: T6: 1 EURI: 1 100 fa i ! amari: 1 ZISTITIH: I ara fata gateufe: 1 Falu afuan: agstat: wargaan 3766. A locative-ending word, when it does not denote time, preserves its original accent, when followed by siddha, “sushka pakva, and bandha, in a compound. Thus afwisutae: or fietsafas:, faz: or affufa: , The word afisa is formed by the aflix yuq added to PTT (IV. 2. 80). The words, sâmkasya and kampilya have acute on the final, and by Phit Sätra (IIT. 16) in the alternative the accent falls on the middle. So alsó utauqua 1 The word a 9 ·Yoz. (IC: ApoexTS CH. IV. $3768.] ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. भाष्ट्र is formed by ष्टुन affix, and has acute on the beginning. So also चबन्धः The word chakra, bas acute on the final. Why do we say when not denoting time.?? Observe gaffemfaz': The compounding takes place by II. 1. 41. The accent of the Locative Tatpurushia taught in VI. 2. 1. was debarrel by Krit-accent daught in VI. 2. 144. The present aîtra debars this last rule regarding Krit-accent and reordains the Locative Tatpurusha accent when the Kit-words are fas &c. ३७६७ । परिप्रत्युपापा बळमानाहोरात्राबयवेषु । ६ । २ । ३३ ॥ एते प्रकत्या. वयं मानवार्चािन अहोरात्रावयववाचिनि चोत्तरपदे । परित्रिगत्तं वृष्टो देवः ।। अतिपूर्वाहणम् । प्रत्य पररात्रम् । उपपूर्व रात्रम् । अपत्रिगर्तम् । उपसर्गा प्राट्युदात्ताः । बहुव्रीहि- सत्य रुपयोः सिद्धत्वादव्ययीभावार्थामदम् । अपर्योरेव बळमानमुत्तरपदम् तयोरेव वज्यमानार्थ- स्वात् । श्राराचावयवा अपिः वयमाना एव तयोर्भवन्ति । 'वयं-' इति किम । अग्निं प्रति wrafia II 3767. The particles pari, prati, upa; and apa, preserve their accent before that word, which specifies an exclusion, or a portion of day and night, (in an Avyayîbhậva compound also). Thus aftfahazt aa: It rained all round (but not. in) Trigarta. (See II. 1.1.and 12). So also रिसीवरम् परिसार्य समि, परिपूर्व रात्रम् । So also प्रतिपूहिणम्, प्रत्यपररात्रम् उपपूर्वाहणम्, उपपूर्व रात्रम्, ॥ अपत्रिगत वृष्टो देवः, (II. I. 11.. and 12). By Phit Sutras IV. 12; and: 13 all Particles (Nipata) have aeute on the firsti syllable. So also upasargas with the exception of afwi Therefore off &c, llave acute on the first. In a Tatpurusha and Bahuvrihi compounds, these words 6. pari' prati &c. as first members would have retained their accent, by thy rules already gone before, the present sûtra, therefore, extends the principle of the preservation of the accent to Avyayibhà va compounds also. The prepositions u and oft alone denote the limit exclusive or asia, and it is therefore with these two prepositions only that the second member can denote the thing excluded, and not with ura and 30:. With these prepositions and oft, the second term if denoting a member of day or night, is also taken, eveu as excluded, therefore no. separate illustrations of those areare given.. Why do we say « before a word which is excluded, or is a part of a day and! night? Observe प्रग्नि शलभाः पतन्ति । ३७६८ । राजन्यबहुवचनद्वन्द्वेऽन्धकष्णिधु। ६।२ । ३४ ॥ राजन्यवाचिन बहुवचनान्तानामन्धकवृष्णि यु वर्तमाने द्वन्द्व पूर्वपर्ट प्रकत्या । श्वाफलक । चैत्रमाः । निवासुदेवः। चिनिरायुदात्ता लक्षण था तदपत्ये वर्तते । 'राजन्य -' इति किम् । द्वीप्य भेमायनमः । द्वीप मवा ? प्याः । भैमेरपत्यं युग भै मायनः । अन्धक्रष्णाय गते न तु राजन्याः । राजन्य प्रहमिहाभिषिक्त वंश्यानां क्षत्रियाणां ग्रहणार्थम् । नैते तथा । बहुवचनम् किम् । संकर्षणवासुदेवी । 'द्वनडे किम् । वृष्णीनां कुमारा कृष्णिकुमारः । 'अन्धकवृष्णिा' किम् । कुड घचालाः ॥ 3768. The first member of a Dvandva compound, formed of names denoting the Kshatriya (warrior) clans in the plural num. .

·148 THE SIDDEANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. ACCENTS CH. IV. 93768, युवा। to ber, retains its original accent when the warrior belongs to the clan of Andhaka or Vrishni. Thus sarnafati, *:, fffaargean: The word Śraphalka ia formed by yu affix (IV. 1. 114) and has acute on the last (III. 1. 3). The word fifa has acute on the first syllable, and does not change in denoting Patropymic. Why do we say in denoting & Warrior clan? Observe द्वय हेमायनाः । Here @ प्य is derived from द्वीप by the affix यज्ञ (IV. 3. 10) = द्वोघे भवाः । मायनः- हमरपत्यं These nam-s belong to Andhaka and Vrishại clans, but are not Simon the warrior-names. The word 1752 here means those Kshatriyas who belong the family of anointe:l kings and warriors (parfumia 'sut:); these (Dvaippa aad Haimåyana) do not belong to any such family, Way do we say in the Plural number' ? Qbserve enduargaat Why do we say 'in a Dvandva compoun?? Observe quiat FAITT:=TTEL- कुमार Why do we say of Andhaka and Vrishni clans' ? Observe us azan : 1 ३७६ । संख्या ।।२।३५ ॥ संख्यावाचि पूर्वप्रदं प्रकल्या हुन् । द्वादश । त्रयोदश । स्वयमादेश प्राय दात्ती नियात्यते ।। 3.769. The numeral word, standing as the first member of a Dvandva compound, preserves its accent. Thus thai, TET, Sac or qurati The guy is the substitute of a VI. 3. 18) and has acute on the final. 3990 TOUTO Salatat 1 & ISI BEI ataridhiamarfani ana yaua RT I ufuata tratar: I grita #VIATAY वेश। श्राचार्योपसर्जन ग्रहणं इनविशेणाम् । सकलो द्वन्द्व प्राचार्योपसर्जना प्रथा विज्ञायत । तेने ai grfwataaaarti said — fa figāUTEKTUIT: 1 atat fapt for Forfu EU 2 & 3770. When words denoting scholars are named after their teachers and are compounded into a Dvaņdva, the first member retains its accent. The word gaat means La pupil a boaréir; not a day scholar.' When the scholaw is named by an epithet derived from the name of his teacher, that name is suaraivasia: or teacher-derived name, Thus ufu fa-aut: 1 Both words have acute on the middle as formed by & affix, The word metata. 2017 qualifies the shole. Dvandva compound and not the first member only. That is, the whole compound in all its parts should denote scholars, whose names are derived from those of their teachers, Therefore not in ufualu-ancat where though the first is a teacher-derived name, the second is not, Why do we say "names derived from the teacher's' ? Obserye gizada ·Vot. III, ACCENTS CH. IV. $3771.1 ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS, Who do we say sa scholar? Observe for TOATE TRIO ३७०१ । कार्तिकोजपादयश्च । ६।२ । ३७ ॥ Tai våtrå RRITI Târrât i Egå Hurafwaturtāär i grafi- #igfar ? 3771. Also in the Dvandvas kârtkaujapau' &c, the first members retain their accent. Those words of this list which end in a dual or plural affix have been so exhibited for the sake of distinctness. The following is a list of these words. 1. tūT (formed by mu IV. I. 114 in the sense of Patronymic, from a and au these being Rishi wames). 2. gratuATIEAAT (savarni is formed by a Patron, afix and Aragão by IV. I. 119). 3. a AT: The word Avanti is end-acute, to which is added the Patron affis ñyav by IV. I. 171, which being a Tadráj is elided in the plural; gaitai Fatar Sauz: = wafat the quadruple significant su being elided. 4. Aasgutar: (Paila is derived from Pila; the son of Pilk is Prile, the yuvau descendent of Paila will be formed by adding a IV. I. 156, which is however, elided by II. 4. 59.) The word Syáparna belongs to Bidadi class IV. 1. 104, the female descendant will be Śyaparnî the yuvan descendant of her will be Śyâparņeya. It is not necessary that the compound should be plural always. We have soutrar also 5. #fordtouaT: Kapi has acute on the final. The son of Kapi will be formed by us IV. 1. 107, which is however elided by II. 4. 64. This compound must, therefore, be always in the plural. 6. Gawiaciaraat: (ſitikiksha is the name of a Rishi, his son will be Saitikáksha by say, IV. I. 114, the yuvan descendant of the latter will be formed by 351 which is elided by II. 4. 58, Pânchala's female descendant is Påñobali, her yuvao descendant is Pâñchâleya, The plural number here is not compulsory. We have Tastaamaan also.) 7. कटुकवाधूलेयाः or कटुक्रवार्चलेयाः (The son of Katuka will be formed by EST IV. I. 59, which is elided in the Plural by II. 4, 66. The son of Varobala is Vârchaleya). 8. Tiara: (The son of Sakala is sa kalya, his pupils are Sakalaby SUIT IV. 2. 111. The son of Sanaka will be Saunaka by sa IV. I. 104, which will be elided in the Plural by II. 4. 64). Some read it as THE FUT:, where the ss affix after Sanaka is elided by II. 4. 66. So also शुनकधात्रेयः ॥ 9. yunanat: (the son of Babhru iş Babhrava), 10. Jaffrenat: (Archåvinah are those who study the work prodared hy Richa vathe affis fafa being added by IV. 3. 104. Mulgala belongs to Kanvardi clasa IV. 2. III, Mandgalâh are pupils of the son of Mudgala). 11. EFTIRTIET:. This a Drandva of Kanti and Suráshţia in the plural or of the country-names derived from them like A vanti, Kuuti and Chinti have aoute on the final, ·150 TRE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDL (VOL. III. ACCENTS CH. IV. 83771. 12. famigtigt: as the last. 13. Augaadet (Buth belong to Pachadi class formed by va III. 1. 134, from afs aiga Bhvâdi 300, anug is formed from the same root with the prefix a, they being elided, and both have acute on the final: and are enumerated in the Gargâdi list IV. 1. 105. In the plural the patronymic affix an is elided by II. 4. 64. 14. mar : Here also us affix is elided by II. 4. 64. 15. Safa ATTETREUT: or "fast: 1 Aviin.atta has acute on the first being formed by the 25, particle. Both the words lose st. patronymic ly II. 4. 66, 16. aTaTESTUA: The son of Babhru is Babhrava, and the son of Salanku or śalauka of 3rfæ IV. 1. 99 is salarkåyana. 17. antaamaaar: Dånchyuta takes as in the patronymic which is elided by II, 4. 66. 18. CATATOT:, Kathah aze those who read the work of Katha, the affix: fufa (IV. 3. 104.) being elided by IV, 3. 107. Those who study the work of Kalapin, are Kalâpâh the sun being added by IV. 3. 108, which required the 3 of Kalapin to be retained by VI. 4. 164 but by a Vârtika under VI. 4. 144 the 2 portion is elided before : 10 19. JAGAT: 1 Those who study the work of Kathumin are ergar: formed by HT (IV. 1, 83, the 5 being eiided before we by VI. 4. 144 Vârt already referred to above. 20. Igualtat: Those who study the work of Lokåksha are Lauka kshih. Or the son of Lokåksha is Laukâkshi, the pupils of latter are Laukakshih. 21. FFAITĘ 1 Stri has accent on the final. 22. Êqùu iar: 1 The son of Muda is Maudi, the pupils of latter are Maudâh. So also Paippalà dâh. 23. Riquaerat: The double reading of this word indicates that Rule VI. 1. 223 also applies. 24. arasta Or IT77: = a + 2a. Vatsa has acute on the final. 25. So also âgauitat: The pupils of Suscuta and Prithu are so called ;. they take au IV. 1. 83. 26. ATHU, 27. ursatgan Yajya is formed by Tums. added to us, the 5t is not changed tu a Guttural by VII. 3. 66. It has svarita on the final by faq, acceut (VI. 1. 185). Avuvâkya is derived from anu + vach + nyat. ३७७२ । महाब्रीह्मपरागृष्टीनासजाबालभारभारतलिहिलरोरवप्रवद्वेषु । & Il gen महच्छब्दः प्रकत्या वोयादिषु दशसु । म हाब्रीहिः।महापराहणः । महाष्टि: । महेष वासः । महाहेर्लािहलः । महच्छ दोऽन्तोदात्तः। सन्म हत्-" (०४०) ति प्रतिपातसमास एवायं स्वरः । नेह । महतो वीहिर्महट्टीहिः । 3772. The word AT (ATT) retains its accent before the following : व्रीहि, अपराहण, गृष्टि, इक्ष्वास, जाबाल, भार, भारत, हैलिहिल, cita, and Tag $ 1 ·VOL. III. AOCENTS CH. IV 33776.] ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. 151 -- - Thus महानीहिः, महापरायाः, महाष्टिः, महेपवासः, महाजाबालः, महाभारः' महाभारत:, महालिहिलः, महागरवः, महाप्रवद्रः, ॥ The gn has acute on the final (Un II. 84.) On the wave maxim already mentioned under VI. 2. 26. S 3760, this nccent will apply to that compound of Rea which it forms under rule II. 1.61. S. 740 for that is the particular rule of Karmadhara ya compounding elating to mahat (pratipadokta). This rule therefore, will not apply to Genitive Tatpuru. sha. Thus Axtatie: = Attare: which has accent on the final by VI. 1.223. ३७०३ । क्षुल्ल कश्च वैश्वदेवे । ६ । २ । ३९ ॥ चान्महान् । क्षुल्लकवैश्वदेवम् । महावैश्वदेवम् । क्षुधं लातीति क्षुल्लः। तस्मादज्ञातादिषु केन्तोदात्तः। 3773. The words malhat and kshullaka retain their accent before the word Vaišvadeva. Thus महविश्वदेवम, and तुन लकवैश्वदेवम् ॥ The word kshallaka is derived thus क्षुधं लाति = क्षुल्लः to which the Diminutive क (V. 3.7 3. &e) is added : and the word has udatta on the final. ३७७४ । उष्ट्रः सादिकाम्ययोः । ६ । २ । ४० ॥ उष्ट्रसादो। उष्ट्रवामी । उपेः ष्ट्रनि उष्ट्रशब्द अायुदात्तः । 3774. The word. ushtra' retains its accent before sâdi: and vami'. This उष्ट्रसादी and उष्ट्रवामी ॥ The word gebring is derived from 3° by affix (Un IV. 162 ) and has acute on the first ( VI. 1. 197.) ३७७५ । गाः सादसादिसारथिषु । ६।२।४१ ॥ गोसादः । गासादिः। गोसारथिः ।। 3775. The word go retains its accent before “sâda', 'sâdi', and sarathi'. : Trus गो:सादः or गां सादति गोसादः, गोः सादिः-गो सादिः, and गोसारथिः॥ साद is formed from सद् with the affix घi and forms a Genitive compound (गोः मादः). Or from the causative veri) सादति, we get गोसादः by adding अण (III. 9. 1) गोसादी is formed by fufa from the same causative root. The Krit-accent is debarred in the case of साद and सादिन; the Samasa-accent VI. 1. 223 in the case of सारथि ॥ ३७७६ । कुरुगार्हपतरिक्तगुर्वसूतजरत्यश्लीलदृढरूपा पारवडवा तैतिलकद्रू : पण्य- कम्बलो दासीभाराणां च । ६।२।४२ ॥ एषां सप्तानां समासानां दासीभारादेश्च पूर्वपदं प्रकृत्या । कुरूणां गाईपतं कुरुगार्हपतम् । उप्रत्ययान्तः कुरुः। * बजेरिति वाच्यम्' । वृजिगाईपतम्। वजिरायुदात्तः । रित्तो गुरुः रिक्तगुरुः । रिक्त विभाषा' (३६६६) दतिरिक्तशब्द नाट्युदात्तः । अमृता जरती अमूतजरती । अमलीला दृढरूपा अश्लील दृढरूपा। अश्लीलशब्दे। नञ्समासत्वादाट्युदात्तः । श्रीर्य स्या- स्ति तत् श्लीलम् । सिध्मादित्वाल्ल चकपिल कादित्वाल लत्वम् । पारे वडवेव पारवडवा । निपा- तनादिबार्थ समासो विभक्तपलोपश्च । पारशब्दो घृतादित्वादन्तीदात्तः । तैतिलानां कद्रुः । तेती- मलकटू । तितिलिनोऽपत्यं छात्रो वेत्यगणन्तः । पण्यशब्दो यदन्तत्वादायुदात्तः । पण्यकम्बलः । ।

·152 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (Vol. III. ACCENTS CH. IV, 93776. * संज्ञायासित वक्तव्यम् ' अन्यत्र णितव्ये कम्बले समासान्तोदात्तत्वमेव । प्रतिपदोक्त ERIÊNeur:' (2439) ia fair faiaa: 1 atent atêr aratant: idazka: 1 URI APIEuri gausumfaaiefAmi a faino asa farza a gafsfa zituztízy zez: 'स राये सपुरन्ध्याम । पुरं शरीरं लियतेऽस्यामिति कर्मगधिकरण च' (३२७२) इति किप्रत्ययः । अलुवछान्दसः । नविषयस्यैत्यायुदात्तः पुरशब्दः ॥ 3776. The first member retains its accent in the following: 1. Kuru-gârhapata, 2. Rikta-guru, 3. Asûta-jaratî, 4. Aśliladridha-růpå, 5. Påre-vadavá, 6. Taitila-kadrůh, 7. Panya-kambalah, and Da-i-bhâra &c. The first seven words are compounds, the first two of these are exbibited without any case-ending, the remaining five are are in Nom. Singular. Thug 1116994 (mui 111n, Kurn is foruled by an affix added to y Uh. I. 24,) and has acute on the final. Part :-So also A#, the word Vriji bas acute accent on the first. So also feat TF:=fir : or fts: for rikta has aente either on the first or on the second (VI. 1. 208 S. 3696). So also waar statusaastat, aztarge- FUT - ta saat i Asûtâ aud aslîlâ being formed by a particle have acute ori the first: VI. 2. 2. That which has it is called sata, the afix na being added by its belonging to Sidh mâdi class, ant changed to my by its belonging to kapilakâdi class (VIII. 2. 18.) Su also uti acat, this is = uttagãau This is a samâsa with the force of ga, and there is irregularly no elision of the case-ending. It is not a compound under II. 1. 18, S. 672 The word uit belongs to Ghritâdi class, and las acute on the final. Faarui तैतिलानां कटूः-तैतिल कद्र :, the son or pupil of Titilin is Taitila formed by HU afix. uouOF617:, panji ends in on and has acute on the first (VI. I. 213). Várt: -107aa: has acute on the first only when it is a name. Other" wise in ufuna afilata compound, the accent will be on the final by the general rule VI.1. 223, The word gou being formed by up affix (III, 1. 101) is acute“ ly accenter on the first (VI. 1. 213). The word onzza: 18 a Name when it means the market.blanket i. a blanket of a well known determinate size and fixed price, which is generally kept for sale by the blanket-sellers. But when the compound means a saleable blanket, it takes the samâ sa accent (VL. 1. 223). If it be olijected what is the use this Vartika, for the word uiu being formed by a kritya affix, will retain its accent in the Tatpurusha, hy VI. 2. 2, we reply that the so used in VI. 2. 2 relates to pratipadokta kritya compounds such as ordained by FazFZ1 ms (II. 1. 68), while here the compound is by facut. faga (II. 1. 51) and is a general compound. So also TIRTHTT:=TIŠMHT: 1 The words belonging to Dåsi bhà pâdi class are all those Tatparusha compound words, not governed by any of the rules of accent, in which it is desired that the first meniber should retain its accent A8:- Tiù e grazity (Rig Veda I. 5. 3). The word gefaced means The affis is Ferie and the case-euding of ge is retained as a Vaidic anomaly. The word oºr is first acute by Phiç II, 3. पुरं शरीरं धीयते स्याम्।

·1 3778. second member denoting the material is modified ineup VOL. ITT ACCENTS CA. IV. $3781.) ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. 3969 i aqui na TE IR 183 चतुर्यतार्थाय तत्तद्वाचिन्युत्तरपदे चतुर्थ्यन्तं प्रसत्या । यूपाय दास यूपदारु ॥ 3777. A word in the Dative case as the first member retains its accent, when the second member expresses that which is suited to become the former. Thus यूपदारु। The word gu has ncute on the first syllable, as it is formed by # (Un. III. 27) treated as a faa (Uņ. III. 26). This accent applies when the the first by workmanship. The composition takes place by II. 1. 36. 8995 I ISTRI 88 # अर्थे परे चतुर्यन्तं प्रत्या। देवार्थम् ॥ Before the artha', the first member in the Dative retains its accent. Thus aan; daar being formed by a fræ affix (V. 4. 27) has acute on the middle, 385 1 684 कानो परे चतुर्थ्यन्तं प्रकृत्या। गोहितम् ।। 3779. The first member in the Dative case retains its accent before a Past Participle in kta.' Thus hilfegg i The compounding takes place by II. 1. 36. ३७८० । कर्मधारयनिष्ठा । ६।२।४६ ॥ FIT vê gåafana WHMITI TEAT: 1 fuvat rajata: 1 gukat: 1 994- SICIA: 1 urtā fin IhUUT E FAI FEST' famæ I ARTEFAH I 3780. Before a Past Participle in 'kta,' the first member, when it itself is not a Past Participle, retains its original accent in a Karmadbâraya compound. This role is confined to the Past Participles and the Noung specifically mentioned in II. 1. 59. on the maxim of pratipadokta &o. Thus far: पूर्ण कताः। The word for has acute on the first as it is formed by the affix fa which is considered fary (Un. IV. 51). The word got is end-acute as it is formed by the affix stan (Uņ 1. 121). Why do we say in a Karmadhiraya compound'? Observe our ma = siusiai Why do we say' when it is a non-uishtha word'? Here the compounding is by II. 1. 60. ३७८१ । अहीने द्वितीया । ६।२ । ४७ ॥ setaatafa Faig Gilah gi faätuia un mefa: 1 DIANA: Iesarsara: UATÈ faretot, la fariqi #triata: 1 '* अनुपसर्ग इति वक्तव्यम् ' । नेह । मुखप्राप्तं । 'याथ-' (३८०८) इत्यस्यापवादो ऽयम् ॥ Observe कताकतम् । 20 ·6 aod has acute on the foal. 154 TAB SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. III. ACOENTS CH. IV. 83781 3781. Before a Past Participle in kta, 'a word ending in the Accusative case retains its accent, when it does not mean a separation. Thus we fun:, FATA: has acute on the end ; # 19 has acute on the first, as it is formed by the fan afix A7 added to ग्रस, the final being replaced by FT (Un. I. 143). Why do we say when not meaning separation'? Observe antala, because one has taken himself beyond kautâra. Várt :- This rule does not apply when the Past Participle has an upagarga attached : as pauv':, (VI. 4. 144). This is an exception to rule VI. 2. 144. ३७८२ । तृतीया कर्मणि ।६।२।४८ Hata 12 u antarari FERIT I 'ratare:' | GUA: 1 FPEITTSTEA: I FT (71977: I fu' fain I TOT OTÄT TYUTA: Il 3782. A word ending in an Instrumental case retains its accent before the Past Participle in 'kta’ when it has a Passive meaning Thus ramata: = FAUT sat: fann 'protected by thee,' &A: I Aa: is formed by 57 affix (Up II. 22) added to the causative Tifa ; HEIG is formed by the Samâsânta affis za, Why do we say when having a Passive signification * ? Observe quauta:=TUIN: 1 The «ita' is added to a verb of motion with an Active significance, 39531 fataanT: IETRI 8€ 0 कर्मार्थ तान्ते परेव्यर्वाहतो गतिः प्रसत्या । पुरोहितम् । 'अनन्तरः किम् । अभ्युद्धतः । कारकपूर्वपदस्य तु तिशिष्टस्थाथादिस्वर एव । दूरादागतः । 'थाथ-' (३८७८) इत्यस्यापवादः ॥ 3783. A word called Gati (1. 4. 60) when standing immediately before a Participle in 'kta' having a Passive significante retains its accent. Thus gerigaz! The word gee is end-acute, as it is formed by the affis safe added to gai by V. 3. 39. Here one of the following rules would have applied otherwise, namely, either (1) the Samâsa end-acute IV. 1. 223 (3) or the Iudeclivable first member to retain its accent VI. 2. 2, (3) or the end-acute by VI. 2. 139 and 144. The present sûtra debars all these. Why do we say 'immediately ?' Observe mi zen: 1 Where the distant Gati word af does not preserve its accent, but the immediately preceding Gati, sa does retain its accent, though it is not the first member of the compound word. Compare also VIII. 2 70. But in acra + ora: (âgata being governed by this rule) we hava zriama": (II. 1. 39 and VI 3. 2). where VI. 2. 144 has its scope though it had not its scope in fa+iara: = q** qua: u Note :- In the former case the following maxim applies Fugű faxraya- RaTFT UEU 1 A Křit affir denotes whenever it is employed, a word-form which begins with that to which that Krit aftix. Las been added, and which euls with the Krit ·FOL. III. ACCENTS CH. IV. $3786.] ACCENTS OF COMFOUNDS, 155. 6 affix, but moreover should a Gati or a noun such as denotes a case-relation have. been prefixed to that word-form, then the Krit affix must denote the same wordform together with the Giti or the noun which may have been prefixed to it. In the second example, this maxim is not applied, because scope should be givet, to the word waar in this aphoriam. When the Participle has not a Passive siguificance, the rule does not apply because the word safer is understood here algo; as what: fi aca: 8 This gâtra debars VI. 2. 144, 3958 i arar = fafa UĦT IERI 90 तकारादा निति तुशब्दवर्जिते कति परेऽनन्तरो गतिः प्रकत्या। 'अग्नेरायो नतमस्य प्रभूती.. inför:'I EFETIVATE: 1 atar' fan i *: 1 fara' fofinaf 1977: 6, अाता' किम् । अागन्तुः। 3784. An immediately preceding Gati retains its original accent before (a word formed by). a Kșit-affix beginning with t which has indicatory n, but not before tu. Thus fra Trêt Fawn wat (Rig Veda III. 19. 3). naaf (with m) na (with तमन, fa: (with fr) i This sůtra debars the Kyit-affix accent (VI. 2. 139). Why do we say " before an affix beginning with a? Observe us a TEF: formel with the affix 17h (IIL. 2. 155), and the Gati w, the accent being governed by VI. 2. 139. Why do we say which is faa'? Observe pekat formed by aa affis. When a Krit-affix takes the augment , it does not lose. its character of beginning with a on the Vartika raait at alaUHET Thus मलपिता, प्रलपितुम्। Why do we say " but not before I' ? Observe #1074with. the Uņadi affix G7 H ३७८५ । तवै चान्तश्च युगपत् । ६ । ३। ५१ ॥ तवेप्रत्ययान्तस्यान्त उदात्तो गतिश्चानन्तरः । प्रकृत्या युगपञ्चैतदुभयं स्यात् । 'अन्तवा उं'। छतस्वरापवादः॥ 3785. An immediately preceding Gati retains its original accent before. an Infinitive in tavai (III. 4. 14) but whereby simultaneously the final has the acute as weh. Thus saat, All u pasargas have. acute on the first except «abbi. which therefore has &cute on the final. (Pnit IV. 13) which declares guant qazat Hasa! This debars in accent (VI. 2. 139) and is an exception to the rule that in a single word, a single syllable only has acute. 895€ If artSSETT TOT IN 19= lt अनिगन्तोगतिवं रत्ययान्तेऽजनता परे प्रसत्या। ये पराजचस्तान' । 'अनिगन्तः' इति किम् । प्रत्यञ्चो यन्तु । कास्वरात्य रेल्वादयमेव । विष्णया नि कृणुही परा'चः' । 'वप्रत्यये किम् । उदजचनम् ॥ 3786: An immediately preceding Gati not ending in 'i'or u'retains its original accent before 'añch' when an affix having Bey' follows.

·150 ginal accent before anch'followed by a 'vi THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [Vol. III ACCENTS CH. IV 98787. Thus *atista: in 3 The accent is acute UTTS A FIT (Rig Veda I. 164. 19). and optionally svarita by VIII 2. 6. Why do we say not ending in for 3?' Observe upisa, here by VI. 2. 139 the second member retains its original accent. Why do we say before an affix * Observe 3057A: ) When the nasal of * anch' is elided, then rule VI. 1. 222 presents itself; but that rule is superseded when a Gati pot ending in 5 or 3 precedes, because the present rule is subsequent. Thus na: in sig ganufa kuat utra: (Rig Veda VI. 25. 3). In some texts, the reading is vaataTau. The affix 2 is like faro &c., (VI. 1. 67). 3969 i quali i 43 ! FW91fissaalfam arafa zit vaati FAT: 1' 3717Ritauidu:-(1849) efa ssaätart: afia: I TEH 3787. The Gatis 'ni' and 'adhi' however, retain their ori- Thus wie The u becomes svarita by VIII. 2. 4. S. 3657. So also JE 1 394€ , BUZETACRIFICII 98 al urhett i Ufarza#PICIA: 1 SUB spiêt sarat da » 3788. The word 'Ishat,' when first member of a compound, may optionally preserve its original accent. Thus fumangit: or anwezigua has acnte on the final. But in Suiz: &c, the Krit-aocent will necessarily take place (VI. 2. 139); no option being allowed ; lęcause the compounds to which the present rule applies are, on the anaxing of pratipadoậta, those formed by an with non-Kșt words under II, 6 1 on ३७८८ । हिरण्य रिमाणं धने ६ ।। ५५ ॥ सुवर्णपरिमाणवाचि पूर्व पदं वा प्रकल्या धने । सुवर्ण परिमाणमयोति द्विसुवर्ण । तदेव धनं द्विसुवर्णनम् । बहुव्री हापि परत्वाद्विकल्प एव । हिरययम् ' किम् । प्रस्थधनम् । 'परि HUH' Fi Enisa#UARI ya Fir famFATATII 3789. The first member, (denoting the quantity of gold retains optionally its original accent, before the word ya u Thus fagan"zag or fagaziualai This is a Karmadbâraya compound उसुवर्ण परिमागमस्य = हिसुवर्ण, तदेव धनम्। It may also be treated as a Bahuvrihi cipound, then the govent will be of that compound, as fe gardua: cr fegatu : Why do we say • gold'? Observe FRY##: Why do we say quantity'? Observe aia va T Why do we say 'ya'3 Observe fat 3500 | UASATT TITLE ISI VE ! प्रथमशब्दो वा प्रत्याभिनवत्वे । प्रथमवैयाकरणाः। संप्रति व्याकरणमध्ोतुं प्रवृत्त इत्यर्थः । प्रथमशः प्रथैरमजन्तः । 'अचिर-'ति किम् । प्रथम वैयाकरणः ॥

·* Why • Karmadha raya ? Vol. III. AOCENTS CH. IV. $3793 ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. 157 3790. The word 'prathama when standing first in a compound, retains optionally its original accent, when meaning & novice.' The word gratref=wati or waar Thuê xe খাজখ or uu T50:- fa&T UAE waone who has recently commenced to study Grammar.' The word or is derived from wu by (Un V. 68) and by fan accept the acute falls on the last. Why do we say " when meaning a Novice ?! Observe bunu: (QUTAUITATE EU at 0: 8:) the first Grammarian ur & Grammarian of the first rank. It will always have aouts on the final. 39enni athaÀT FÁUTTI EITI 48 वा एकत्या। कतर कठः । कर्मधारयग्रहणमुनगर्थम् । इह तु प्रतिपदोक्तत्यादेव सिद्धम् ।। 3791. The words and कतम, standing as the first member of a compound, retain optionally their original accent, in a Karnadhåraya. Thus fatxa: or trans, Fans: or na: 1 The word Karmadharaya is used for the sake of the next sâtra, this sûtru could have done without it, as katara' and • katama' by the maxim of pratipadokta, form ouly Karmadharaya compound, by II. 1. 63. ३७६२ । भार्या ब्राह्मणकुमारयोः । ६ ।। ५८ ॥ wart: muo: f JUHATTmafia: :' FEL DTH #14 U: I 'aqufa-' gfa fra i qidala: 1 Unta gua 3792. The wordârya' optionally retains its original accent in a Karmadhâraya, before the words Brahmana' and 'kumâra.' Thus urd'1u: or váriau, mºderate: प्रार्यकुमारः The word 78 is formed by un afix and has svarita on the final. Why do we say · Arya' Observe TIANTYHU, TAKA: 1 Why do we say before Brâbniaņa.' and Ku mira'? Observe utafa: Observe ATOR HHu: =UTONU: L According to the Accentuated Text the accent is rá (Pro. Bohtlingk). ase3 TaT a igen WIW GATOT: QÂT 1787 AT VERT UT, T&TAT: 1 TINHAC 1 din fani ZRTTU: 1 3793. The word ' râjan,' retains optionally its accent before the words · Brâhmana' and 'Kumâra', in a Karmadhâraya. Thus 120ma: or tingimu, farar: or zimeat. The word 278 in forſed by the uffix af added to trs, (On I. 156). Bat 17 20:2012- #18: where the compound is not Kaimadharaya. The making of this a beparate aphorism is for the sake of the subsequent súrra into which the anuyřitti of 176971 runs and not that of PTO N 6 or ·168 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. ITI. ACCENTS, Cs. IV.9371. 6 6 6 ३७ । षष्ठी प्रत्येनसि ।।२।६० ॥ UZZI GT RATE 07 at RT I TISOWat: ' ' faiman, 3794. The word "râjan' ending in the Genitive case, optionally retains its accent, before she word 'pratyenas." The words 7757 and RATRATE are understood bere also. Thus far: Uriat: or 18: war: 1 ufania ya: UT' -aa The sign of the Geni. tive is not elided by VI, 3. 21. When is not meant, we have, KFUR #1: or ITHAI T: Why do we say ending in the Genitive ? ? Observe 115T OTOT *198 = Taruar: no option. ३७९५ । के नित्यार्थ । ६।३।६१॥ HET GE Faratē EATÊT ga ai vrei faraitfen: FTETT: ' (EEC) द्वितीयासमासोऽयम् । नित्यशब्दस्त्यबन्त श्रायुदात्तः। इसित इति यथादिस्वरेणान्तोदात्तः । 'नित्यार्थे ' किम् । मुहुर्त प्रहसितः ॥ 3795. A word having the sense of always', retains optionally its accent, before a Past Participle inkta.' Thue falamuafea: or faropfen: These are Accusative compounda. formed under Rule II. 1. 28. S. 690 ; fara is formed by pau afix, added to the upasarga fa (IV. 2. 104 Vârt) ; and has aoute on the first, the upasarga retaining its accent, the affix being anudàtta (III. 1, 4). sfan as end-acute.by VI. 2. 144. S 3878. Why do we say 'wheụ the first term means always ?? Observe på wafan: Note:--- In the case of farrafua: &c., the samása accent VI. 1. 223 was. first set aside by the Accusative. Tatpurusha accent VĮ % 2 ; this in its turn was set aside by th accent VI. 2. 144, which is again debarred by the present, ३७९६ ग्रामः शिािन।६।३।६२॥ वा प्रत्या। ग्रामनापिसः । यामशब्द माझुदात्तः। 'ग्रामः' किम् । परमनापितः। शिल्पिनि' किम् । सामरथ्या 3796. The word 'grâma' when first member of a compound, optionally retains its accent, before a word denoting a "profesa sional man or artisan.' Thus draatida: or atharfoa":, Tama1a: or Utamara: 1 The word #1 was acute on the first as it is formed by the affix #faa (Uņ I. 148). Why do he say 'IT' Observe urraTfn: 1 Why do we say a kilpi, a professional Forkman Observe TTAT2211; where there is no optiou. ३७६७ । राजा च प्रशंसायाम् । ६ ।२।६३ ॥ शिल्पिवाचिनि परे शंसाथै राजपद वा प्रकृत्या । राजनापितः। राजकुल्लालः ।' प्रशंसायाम किम्' । राजनायितः । 'शिल्पिनि' किम् । राजहस्ती ॥ 3797. The word ' râjan 'followed by a profession denoting: noun, optionally retains its accent, when praise is to be ex 6 3 pressed.

·VOL. III. A OCENTS CH. IV 53792.] ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. 5 Thus tonifaa: or 117latfun", fra: or or tifata* A royal buider , a skilful barber or one fit to serve the king even' &c. It may be either a Karnadhårbja or a Genitive comi onnd. Why do we say 'TFS="? Observe ataan: Why do we say when denoting praise'? Observe istatica : • king's barber. Why do we say a professional man'? Observe Tereta royal elephant. jocs i ATESTI IPI €8 a FUERTETSUA 3798. In the following up to VI. 2. 91 inclusive, the phrase * the first syllable in the word standing in the Nominative) has the acute,' is to be always supplied. This is au adhikâra aphorism. The first syllable of the man will get the acute in the following aphorisms. In short, the phrase âdirudálta’ should be supplied to complete the sense of the subsequent sútras. The word of the first syllable’ is understood upto VI. 2. 91, the word gera has longer stretch : it governs upto VI. 2. 237. ३७ । सप्तमीहारिणो धर्म्यहरणे । ६।। ६५ ॥ सप्तम्यन्त हारिवाचि च श्रायुदात्तं धर्म्य परे । देयं यः स्वीकरोति स हारोत्युच्यते । धमि स्याचानियत देयम् । मुकटेकार्षापणम् । हलेद्विदिका । 'संज्ञायाम' (७२५) इति सप्तमो- सासः । 'कारनाग्नि च-' (६८) इत्यलुक । याज्ञिकाश्वः । वैयाकरणहस्ती । कचिदयमा- चारी मुकुटादिषु कार्षापणादि दातव्यं याजिनादीनां त्वश्वादिरिति। धमये-' इति किम् । स्तम्बे- TA: 1 tü' fa UTEUTETUX | agaia warga: 1 pe atafall it witgustinato agrofaryza i niisfu hratt tifatu arza ruxtu af faaaa uñiña algaarfafa afegit: fezfa 3799. The first member of a compound, if in the Locative case or denoting the name of the receiver of a tax, has acute on the first syllable, when the second member is a word denoting "what is lawful', but not when it is 'harana." The word Erfe means he who appropriates the dues or tazes': and धम्र्यम् means the due or tax which has been determined by the custom or usage of the country, town, seot or family, that which one is lawfully entitled to get.' The word er is formed by an under IV. 4. 91 and 92, and has the sense of both. Of Locative words we have the following examples :-990-TAFUUR, हले-द्विपटिका। These compounds are formed under II. 1. 44, S. 721 and the sign of the Locative is not elided by VI. 3. 9 and 10, S. 968, With the name of a due-receiver prêt we have the following: -T17: the horse which is the customary due of the sacrificer." So also वयाकरणहस्ती। In some places the estalilished usage is to give a kârshipaņa coin in a Mukuta &c or to give a hor-e to a she is cer đc. Why do we say what is lawful'? Observe स्तम्बरमः Why bat not before XTU ? Observe argaridæ 'that which is given to a mare. KTU is that customary food, which is given to a mare, after she has been $ cm do we bay ·160 THE SIDDHANTA KAUXubi. [Vol. II. ACCENTS CA, IV. 93800 covered, in order to strengthen her. The word Tu is Krit-forrned word, its exclusion here indicates that other Kțit-formed words, however, are governed by this rule, when preceded by a trét denoting word; and this this sútra supersedes the Krit accent enjoined by VI. 2. 139, 80 far. Thur atentů: hag acute on the first by this rule, the subsequent VI. 2. 139 not applyiug. २८०० । युक्त च । ६।३।६६ ॥ युक्तवाचिनि समासे पूर्व मायुदात्तम् । गोबल्लः । अर्तये तत्परो युक्त 3800. The first member of a compound has acute on the first syllable, when the second member denotes that by whom the things denoted by the first are regulated or kept in order. The word gek nieang he who is prompt in the discharge of his appointed duty' is e. the person appointed to look after, Thus itata: & cowherd looking after cow.' 3509 i faxur LEIRIES I UT: 3801. The acute is optionally on the first syllable when the word viu follows. Thus farza: or statza: . a superintendent of cows ' # ३८०२। पापंच शिल्पिनि।।३।६॥ पापनापितः। 'पापाणके-' (७३३) इति प्रतिपदोक्तस्यैव प्रणालषष्ठीसमासे । 3802. The word 'pâpa' has optionally acute on the first syllable, when followed by a word denoting a professional man. Thus tida: or otuara : This rule applies to the pratipadokt samasa of any, in the sense of censure, as taught in II, 1. 54. S. 733 when it is an appositional compond; and not when it forms a Genitive compound. Thus VigRafon:=Utoafua : ३८०३ । गोत्रान्तवासिमाणवबाह्मणेषु ते । ६।२ ॥ ६ ॥ wrafata: 1 saan valuuraui au: 1 atent, Fadaiar: o raz पाणिनीयाः । कुमादिलाभकामा ये दास्यादिभिः प्रोक्तानि शास्वागयधीयन्ते त एव विप्यन्ते । fraintua: , fuai Rūs Efæfa #ma: I aimu: 1 THU: Fuadi TTT विधु' लिम् । दासीधानियः । वे किम् । परमब्राहाणः ॥ 3803 The first syllable of the first member of a compound bas the acute accent before a Patronymic name or a scholar-name, as well as before • Mâņava' and Brâhmaņa,' when a reproach is meant. Thus hratê : ' a descendant of Susruta, under the petticool government of his wife, Tlie comp:uudiug takes place by the analogy of pleafua: i Tho ·VOL. III. ACCEKTS CH. IV. $3806.] ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. 161 . 6 above is an example of a Gotra word. Now with scholar pames. En Aitteret: the pupils of Daksha, for the sake of marriage é e. who study the work of Daksha or make themselves the pupils of Daksha, for the sake of girls.' and i zauferatur: &c, martua:fuatarres afAFR TUQT Hafa i HUSET: he who being a Brahmaņa hy birth, acts like a Brâhmana not willingly, but through fear of punishment '=aT HUR BHU: vaai The compounding is by II, 1, 4 where no other rule applies. Why do we say when followed by a Gotra word?' Observe crewfou: Why do we say when reproach is meant ? Observe TTASTAO: 11 ३८०४ । अङ्गानि मेरेये । ६ । २ । ७० ॥ Hafa här : i wyła: 1 ayfaxite AR ### ! sagtfa' ff ! UTH #TU: TU' faiyoutga: 11 3804. The first syllable of the word preceding Maireya' gets the acute, when it denotes the ingredient of the same. Thus yait: the maireya prepared from honey.' Why do we say when denoting an ingredient'? Observe OTAHU: N Why do we say before Aty ?! Observe quotaa: u ३८०५ । भक्ताख्यास्तदर्थेषु । ६ । २ । ७१ ॥ #27 FHOT : 0 pratenie: i faigütsafastur: 'WFUT:' F#FI ERITraz: 1 A77 gat2 gfa fanaarayana i mazing fai faalfwa: 1 setiarug! अन पूर्वपदमन्तोदानम् ॥ 3805. A word denoting food, gets the acute on the first syllable, when standing before a word which denotes a repository suited to contain that. Thus IE:, fee:, The words like fuar, 17 dc. are names of food. Why do we say 'wben denoting the name of food' '? Observe gATJE: dining halls, (the word FATI = HAN is the name of an action and not of a e gubstance ). Why do we saytadartheshu suited to contain that'? Observe fuafuu:, which is Bahuvrihi and the first member gets acute on the final. ३८०६ । गोविडालसिंहसैन्धवषयमाने ।६।२।७२ ॥ Utrana: 1 irfagra: i quan: i E212: 1 vizi arfrafa faag: 1 s19tfa: गवाकत्या सनिवेशित धान्यं धान्यगवशब्देनाच्यते। 'उपमाने किम् । परम्मसिहः ॥ 3806. A word denoting the object of comparison gets the acute on the first syllable when standing before cit, fagia, #s, and सैन्धव ॥ Thus Hauna: = ya siffra i The compounding takes place by II. 1. 56 the words in &o, being considered to belong to Vyâghràdi class, which is an Aku ritigana. The meaning of the compound must be given according to usage and appropriateness, Thus धान्यगव: means गवाकत्याऽवस्थित धान्यं । So also ifaETE. 21 > $ ·162 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. ACCENTS CE. IV. 83806. ह्णसिंहः, सक्तुसैन्धवः । Why do we say : when denoting the object of coniparieion!? Observe utwff : ३E09 | अके जीविकार्थ।।२।७३ || waruia saa silfaatdarfa fa gatê ya ugaiQUINH I can i RA namaa atams Farg' 15-' (99) fa AT&: i confort i Tratamente 'जीविका!' किम् । इक्षुभक्षिकां मे धारयसि ॥ 3807. The first member of a compound has the acute on the first syllable, when the second-member is a word ending in the affix 'aka,' and the compound expresses a calling by which one gets his living Thus : == সুনাবল হয় জানি।। The compounding takes place by II. 2. 17. S. 711. Why do we say when meaning inneaps of living? Observe Tufari ÂuTTUTS I All afixes which ultimately become on by taking substitutes, are called wo affixes. Thus 197, 9, do, are se affixes (VII. 1. 1). Why do we say 'ending in the affix ?? Observe cutanat Here the compound. ing takes place by II. 2. 17, and the affix ay is added in the sense of sport and not of livelihood. ३८०८ । प्रायां क्रीडायाम् । ६।३।७४ || uragarfaat op met agtraf# FATE TRUFAUTE wî ya piazza Ropa उहालकयुष्पतिका । 'संज्ञायाम' (३२८६) इति वुल । 'प्राचाम् किम् । जीवपुत्रप्रचायिका । अयमुदीनां क्रीडा । 'क्रीडायाम् किम् । तव पुथ्वप्रचायिका। पर्याये गच् ॥ 3808 A compound the second member of which is ai word ending in #affix, and which denotes the sport of the Eastern people, gets the acute accent on the first syllable. Thus igienyatufisat i These are formed by Tem affix (III. 3. 109. S. 3286,) and the compounding takes place by II. 2. 17. S. 711. Why do we say of the Eastern Folk'? Observe itaqzuattuat, which is a sport of the Northern People. Why do we say when denoting a sport' ? Observe nagyonatfukti thy turn for do, which is formed by uga (III. 3. 111) and denotes rotation or turn, 350€ i ufu fruti 1€ 1 3 1 89 a नगणन्ते परे नियुक्तवाचिनि समासे पूर्व मायुदात्तम्। छन्त्रधारः । 'नियुक्ते' किम् । कापड } 8809. A compound, the second member of which is a word ending in the Kțit-affix zu and which denotes a functionary, gets the acute on the first syllable. Thus UIT:1Why do we say when meaning “a functionary' ? Observe ·YOL. IIT. ACCENTS CH. IV. $3814.) ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. 163 . Thus तन्तुवायः : ३८१० । शिल्पिनि चासत्रः ।६।३ । ७६ ॥ शिल्पियाचिनि समासेऽगणन्त परे पूर्वमायुदात्तं स चेदराना परो न भवति । तन्तुवायः । शिल्पिनि' किम् । काण्डलावः । अशजः' किम् । कुम्भ कारः॥ 3810. And when such a compound ending in अण affix denotes the name of a professional man, but not when the second terin is Site (derived from 1731), the acute is on the first syllable of the first word. Here also the second term ends in su affix, Why do we say when denoting a work-man or professional person' ! Observe काण्डलावः । Why do we say s but not when the affix अप. comes after a } Observe कुम्भकारः ।। ३८११ । संज्ञायां च ।।३।०७।। अपान्ते परे । तन्तुवायो नाम कमिः । 'अ' इत्येव । रथकारो नाम ब्राह्मणः । 3811. Also when such an upapada compound ending in अण aflix denotes a Name, the acute falls on the first syllable : but not when the second term is HIT Thus सन्तुवायः, a kind of insect, spider.' But not so अण with a; RS कार: the name of a Brahmana caste.' ३८१३ । मोतन्तियवं पाले।६।२।७८ || गोपालः। तन्तिगालः। यवपालः। अनियुक्तार्थो योगः। 'गो' इति किम् । वत्स.पाल। पाले' इति किम् । गोरक्षः ॥ 3812. The words गो, तन्ति and यव get the acute on the first syllable when followed by पाल । Thus"गोपालः, तन्तिपालः, वपालः । The word afar is the rope with which. calves are tied. (a faevit + fine). This applies to words not denoting a funotionary, which would be governed by VI. 2. 75. S. 3809. Why do we say it &c. ? Observe drur: I Why do we say followed by ute'? Observe na: a. १८१३ णिनि।६।२।७॥ पुष्पहारी॥ 3813. A compound ending in the Krit-affix fufa (CT) has the acute on the first syllable of the first member. Thus पुष्पहारिन । ३८१४ । उपमानं शब्दार्थग्रहतावेज।६।२।८० ॥ उपमानवाचि पूर्व पदं णिन्यन्ते. पर अायुदात्तम् । उष्ट्रक्रोशी। ध्वाक्षरावी । उपमानग्रहण- मध्य पूर्वयोगस्य च विषविभागार्थम् । 'शब्दार्थप्रकता' किम् । धुकवञ्ची । 'प्रतिग्रहणम्' किम । प्रतिरेव यत्रोपसर्गनिरपेक्षा शब्दार्था तत्रैव यथा स्यात् । इह मा भूत् । गर्दभाचारी ॥ 3814.. When the first member of a compound expresses that with which resemblance is denoted, then it has acute on the first , .

·THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. ACCENTS CH. IV. $3814. syllable, before a word formed by fufa affix, only then, when such latter word is a radical without any preposition, and means 'giving out a definite sound like so and so.' The word GUAT means the objeot with which something is likened : quam means "expressing a sound '; vefa means root, without any preposition. Thug EETF317, virgatian The word JUHTFT shows the scope of this sútra as distinguished from the last. So that; when the first term is an 399 word, the preceding sútra will not apply, though the second member may be a fuf* formed word, When the second term is not a word denoting sound, the rule will not apply. At grafa, which retains krit accent (VI. 2. 139). Why do we say a radical word without any preposition'? Observe ta* Bramkiai Here the second term radically (s. e., chårin) does not denote sound, but it is with the help of the Preposition so that it means sound. The force of E is that the Supra words are restricted. Such words get aoute on the first syllable only then, when the second member is a radical sound name. ३८१५ । युक्तारोह्यादयश्च । ६।२।८१ ॥ श्रायुदात्ताः । युक्तारोही। श्रागतयोधी। क्षीरहोता। 3815. The compounds yuktárohin &c, have acute on the first syllable. Thus 1 ATÂT, 2 AMATE, 3 Maret, 4 mag-7, 5 maaat, 6 ftyarat, 7 Maget i These are formed by fufa affix, and at'e illustratious of Rule VI. 2. 79. Some say, these declare a restrictive rule with regard to the first and second members of these terms. Thus tiga &c. must be preceded by you &c. and gri &c. followed by difam &c. to make. VI. 2. 79 applicable. Thus Qattie #though ending in fufæ does not take aoute on the first, so युक्ताध्यायिन्। THATUA HAKI or , 9 attêtat, 10 *fofaraf i The last two are Genitive cum. pounds under Rule II. 2. 9, 11 fiya, 12 sainiai, 13 sifax17:, 14 a cir 17=:, 16 Tara: (TIUQIZ:), 16 A1: All these are genitive compounds. 17. tafanura=#fufa:Waise This is a Baluvrihi of three terms. The word एकfafa: is a Taddhitârtha Samasa (II. 1.51), and being a Tatpurusha, required acute on the final, as the Tatpurusha accent is stronger, This declares acute on the first. Moreover by VI. 2. 29, this word ufufa: would have acute on the first as it is a Dvigu ending in a simple vowel. But the very faot that this word is enumerated here, shows that other Dvigu compounds in fufa are uot governed by VI. 2. 29, therefore fatsura org has acute on fa i The enumeration of the team farfagra further proves by implication that the wefufagra ataaa' ataxi fafaa RTANTE FRA) accent for the application of which a case is present is stronger (See Mahâbhâshya II. 1. 1). The class of compounds known as a Taafan &c, (II 1. 48) also belongs to this class, 1 GARITTET, 2 SITUATIET, 3 HINAUTH, 4 ginagat 5 winaaret (winnaaf), भागतापहारी, 7 श्रागतमत्त्यः (भागतमत्स्या), 8 नीरहोता, १ भगिनीभर्ता, 10 ग्रामगोधुक 2 ·Vor. III. ACCENT CH. IV53819.] ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. 165 ७ 11 अश्वत्रिरात्रः 12 गर्गत्रिरात्रः, 13 व्युष्टित्रिरात्रः, 14 गणा पादः (शणपादः), 15 एकशितिपात, 16 पात्र संमितादयश्च (पात्रेसमितादयश्च), 17 समपादः ॥ ३८१६ । दीर्घकाशतुषाष्ट्रवटंजे । ६ । २ । १२ ॥ कुटोजः । काशजः । तुषजः । भ्राष्ट्र जः । वटजः ॥ 3816. When the first member is a word ending in a long vowel, or is 'kasa,' tusha, bhrashtra' or vata, and is followed by bja' the acute falls on the first syllable. 'Thus कुटीजः, *.राजः, तु पञः, भाष्ट्रमः, वटज: । These are formed by the affix added to जन् (III. 2.97). ३८१७ । अन्त्यात्यवे बहुचः । ६।२ । ३ ॥ बहुचः पूर्व स्यान्त्यात्पूर्व पदमुदात्तं जे उत्तरपदे । उपसरजः । श्रामलकीजः। 'बहवः' किम् । दग्धजानि तृणानि । 3817 In a word consisting of more than two syllables, fol. lowed by ja, the acute falls on the syllable before the last. Thus उपसरजः, आमलकीजः, and वडयाजः (though the last two words have upapadas ending in a long Vuwel, the accent is governed by this sûtra and not the Jast). Why do we say "& Polysyllabic first quember" ? Observe gruaifa तुणानि॥ ३८१८ । ग्रामनिवसन्तः ।६।२।८४ ॥ यामे परे पूर्व पदमुदात्तम् । तचनिधद्वाचि न । मल्ल सामः । ग्रामशब्दोऽत्र समूहावाची देवयामः। देवस्वामिकः । 'अनिवसन्तः किम । दाक्षिग्रामः। दाक्षिनिवसः॥ 3818. Before : grâma’ the first syllable of the first member has acute, when thereby inhabitants are not meant. Thus मल्लयामः | Here ग्राम is equal to समूह an assembly'. देवग्रामः-देव- स्वामिकः। Why do we say s when not meaning inhabitants'. Observe दाक्षिणाम, (a village iohabited by the decendants of Daksha'. ३८५९ । घोषादिषु च।६।२। ८५ ॥ दाक्षिघोषः। दाक्षिकटः। दाति हृदः ॥ 3819. The first member has acute on the first syllable when followed by ghosha &c. Thus दाक्षिघोषः, दाक्षिकटः, दाक्षिपल्वलः, दाक्षिबदरी, दाक्षिवल्लभः, दाक्षिहदः, दाक्षि- पिङ्गलः, दाक्षिपिशङ्ग "दाक्षिमाला, दाक्षिरक्षा, दाक्षिशाला, or ( रक्षः or शालः), दाक्षि- शिल्पी, "दाक्ष्यश्वधः, दाक्षिशाल्मली, कुन्दवणम्, आश्रममुनिः, दाक्षिपुमा, दानि कूटः ॥ Of the above, those which denote places of habitation, there the first members though denoting inhabitants get the acute accent. Some do not read the unuvritti of अनिवसन्तः in this aphorism, others however read it. 1 घोष, 2 कट (घट), 3 वल्लभ (पलवल), 4 हृद, 5 बदरी (बदर). 6 पिङ्गल, 7 पिशङ्ग, 8 माला, 9 रक्षा (रक्षः), 10 शाला (शालः), 11 कूट, 12 शाल मलो, 13 अश्वत्थ, 14 तृण, 15, शिल्पी, 16 मुनि, I प्रक्षा (मक्षाकू, पूसा) ॥ क ।

·166 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. III. ACCENTS CE. IV. 33820. ३८२० । छाजयादयः शालायाम् । ६.२॥८६॥ छोत्रिशाला । ध्याडिशाला । यदाधि शालान्तः समासो नपुंसकलिङ्गो भवति तदापि शालायां नपुंसक (३८५७) इत्येतस्मात्यूर्व विप्रतिषेधेनायमेव स्वरः । छात्रिशाला ॥ 3820 The words 'chhatri' &c, get acute on the first syllable when followed by the word ' śâlâ..? Thus छात्रिशाला, ऐलिशाला, माण्डिशाला ॥ Where the Tatpurusha compound ending in a becomes Neuter, by the option allowed in II. 4. 25 ; there also in the case of these words, the acute falls on the first syllable of the first term%3 thus superseding VI. 2. 123. S. 3857 which specifically applies to Neuter Tatpurushas. Thus छात्रिशालम्, एलिशालम् ॥ 1 छात्रि, 2 प्रेलि (ऐलि), 3 भाण्डि, 4 व्याडि, पाखविड, 6 टि, गम (गामि) ३८२१ । प्रत्येऽद्धमार्यादीनाम् । ६।२।८७ ॥ प्रस्थ शब्द उत्तरपदे कादिर्जिलमवृद्ध पूर्व पदमागुदात्त स्यात् । इन्द्रप्रस्यः । अबुद्धम किम् । दाक्षिप्रस्थः । 'अकादीनाम्' इति किम् । कार्मोनस्यः । मकरोग्रस्यः ॥ 3821. The first member, which has not a Vriddhi in the first syllable, or which is not 'karki.' &c, gets the acute on the first syllable before 'prastha.' Thus qui: ( But not in ziareni, which has Vriddhi in the first syllable ; nor also in कर्कीप्रस्याः, मधीप्रस्थ: 0. 1 कर्की, 2 मधी (मघी), 3 मकरी, 4 कर्कन्धु (कर्कन्धू), शमी, 6 करीर, 7 कन्दुक (कटुक), 8 कवल (कुबल ; कूरल), 9 बदरी (बदर) ॥ ३८२२ । मालादोनां च।६।२।८८ वृद्धार्थमिदम् । मालाप्रस्थः । शोणाप्रस्थः ॥ 3822. The first syllable of 'mala' &c, gets the acute when prastha' follows. Thus मालाप्रस्थः, शालाप्रस्थः । This sûtra applies even thougb the first syllables are Vriddbi vowels, In the word pen and TTUT the letters x and I are treated as Vriddhi (1. 1. 75). 1 माला, 2 शाला, 3 शोणा (शोण), 4 द्राक्षा, स्नाना, 6 क्षामा, 7 काञ्ची, 8 एक, 9 काम, 10 क्षामा॥ ३८२३ । अमहनवं नगरे ऽनुदीवाम् । ६।२।८६ ॥ नगरे परे महनवन्वर्जित पूर्वमायुदात्तं स्यात् तच्चेदुदीचां न । ब्रह्मनगरम् । श्रम-' इति किम । महानगरम् । नवनगरम् । 'अनुदीचाम्, किम् । कार्ति नगरम् ॥ 3823. The first member has acute on the first syllable before the word nagara but not when it is the word mahat, or mava, nor when it refers to a city in the lands of the Northern People. Thus ब्रह्मनगरम् । But not in महानगरम् and नवनगरम्, Why do we say - but not of Northern People' ? Observe नान्दोनगरम् कार्तिनगरम् ॥

·VOL. III. AOCENTS CH. IV $3827.] ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. 167 । . The ३८२४ । अर्म चावणे यच्च्यच । ६ । २ । ६० ॥ धर्म परे व्यच्यचपूर्वमवर्णान्तमायुदात्तम् । गुप्त मम्। इलामम्। 'अवर्णम् किम् बृहदम् । 'हायच्यच् किम् । कपिज्जलामम् । श्रम हनवमित्येव । महार्मम् । नवार्मम ॥ 3824. A word of two or three syllables ending in 'a' or a' (with the exception of — maha.' and nava'). standing before the word 'arma' has acute on the first syllable. Thus गुप्तार्मम, कुक्कुटार्मम । Why do we say 'ending in अ (long or short)i' ? Observe वहटर्मम Why do we say consisting of two or three syllables' ? Observe कपिजलार्मम । The words महा and नव are to be read here also. rule therefore does not apply to महार्मम, and नवार्मम ॥ ३८२५ । न भूताधिकसंजीवमद्राशनकज्जलम् । ६।२ । १ ॥ अर्मे परे नेतान्यायुदात्तानि भूतार्मम् । अधिकार्मम । संजीवार्मम् । मद्राश्मयहणं संघात. विपचीतार्थम् । मद्रार्मम् । अमार्मम् । भद्रायमर्मम् । कञ्जलार्मम् ॥ * श्रायुदात्तप्रकरणे दिवोदासादीनां छन्दस्युपसख्यानम् -' । 'दिवोदासाय ठाशुधे" ॥ 3825. The following words do not get acute on the first syllable, when standing before ' arma' viz. भूत, अधिक, संजीव, मद्र, अशमन्, and कज्जल ॥ Thus भूतार्म म, अधिकाम म, संजीवाम म, मद्रामम्, नश्माम म्, मद्रामा म (becau e the sitra shows the compounding of those words in madrasmam) कजल्लामम् । All these compounds have acute on the final by VI. 1. 223. Vart:- In the Vedas the words feature &c., have acute on the first syl- Thus faätatera atyü (Rig Veda IV. 30, 20). lable. अधिकारोयम् । प्रागुत्तरपदादिग्रहणात् ॥ 3826. In the following sutras up to VI. 2. 110 inclusive, is to be supplied the phrase "the last syllable in a word standing in the Nominative case has the acute.' This is an adhikâra aphorism. Io the succeeding sútras, the last syllable of the first member of a compound gets the acute accent. Thus in the next sútra the word på gets acute on the final. This adhikara extends up to VI. 2. 110. inclusive ३८२७ । सबै गुणकात्स्नये । ६ । २.६३ ॥ सर्वशब्दः पूर्वपटमन्तोदात्तम् । सर्व श्वेतः । सवम हान। 'सर्व म' किम् । परमश्वेतः। प्राश्रय- ध्याप्त्या परमत्वं श्वेतस्यति । गुणाकात्सर्य वर्तते । 'गुण-' इति किम् । सर्व सावर्णः । 'कात्स नर्य किम् । सर्वेषां श्वेततरः सर्व श्वेतः ॥ 3827. The acute is on the final of the word 'sarva, standing as first member before an attributive word, in the sense of 'whole, through and through.' ।

·168 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. ACCENTS Cm. IV.58827. Thus सर्व श्वेतः सर्वमहान् ॥ Why do we s&y pa' ? Observe orrièni, bere the attributs of a pervades through and through the object referred to, but the accent is not on the final of परम् ॥ Why do we say "attributive mord'? Observe u 18:, golden, e (54: silvery', which do not denote any attribute in their original state but modification. In fact it is not yuaraka za here at all, but a falta para Why do we use the word Kârtsnya or complete pervasion.' Observe maar anat: - Baran: here the compounding takes place by the elision of the afix Ara denoting comparison, and as it shows only comparative, not absolute, whiteness, the rule does not apply. Moreover, in this example, the 'kårtsnya' is not that of 'gona' but of 'guni', pot of the attribute', but of the substance'. ३८८ । संज्ञायां गिरिनिकाययोः।।२ सतयोः परतः पूर्व मन्तोदात्तम । श्रजनागिरिः । मौण्डिनिकायः । 'संज्ञायाम, किम, । परमfuft: 1918ufTo: 3828. The last syllable of the first member before giri and nikåya has the acute, wben the compound is a Name. Thus sarfafc: . The finals of añjana is lengthened by VI. 3. 117. alfa- Why do we say when it is a Name' ? Observe qtainft: 1eua mu: ३८२९ । कुमायो वयसि । ६।२।१५ ॥ पूर्व पटमन्तोदानम, । वृद्धकुमारी। कुमारीशब्दः पुंसा सहा प्रयोगमात्र प्रतिनिमित्त भुपादाय प्रयुक्तो वृद्धादिभिः समानाधिकरणाः । नच वय इह गृह्यते न कुमारस्य मेव ! 'धर्यात किम । परमकुमारो॥ 3829. The last syllable of the first member gets the acute when the word 'kumâri' follows, the compound denoting age. Thus &z HTCT an old maid'. an old maid'. The compounding is by II. 1. 57. The word agt becomes masculine by 3. 42 in the example. Q. The word gift was formed by a by IV. 1. 20 in denoting the prime of youth, how can this word be now applied to denote old age by being coupled with qet; it is a contradiction in terms. Ans. The word art has two senses ; one denoting 'a young maiden' and second unmarried virgin'. It is in the latter sense, that the attribute aur is applied. Why do we say when the compound denotes age'! Ohserve TTHEATËT 11 3530 | 3GS DRIENI अकेवलं मिनं तद्वाचिनि समासे उदके परे पूर्व मन्ताटात्तम । गुडोदकम । स्वरे कृतेऽत्र एकादेशः । 'स्वरितो वानुदाते पदादी (३६५६) इति पक्षे स्तिः। 'अकेवले' किम । शीतोदकम् । 3830. Before the word udaka, when the compound denotes a mixture, the last syllable of the first member has the acute, 1 ·Tror.. III. ACCENTS CH. IV.53834.] ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. 169 . - Thus k डोदकम् or गु'डोदकम् । When we have already made the 3 acute by this rule, then the spacita accent may result optionally, by the combination of the aente of guda and the subsequent grave उ of उदक, by rule VIII. 2.6. S. 3659. The word अकेवल means mixture. Wheu mixture is not meant, this rule does not apply. As शीतोदकम् । ३८३१ । द्विगौ तौ।६।३।८७ । । द्विगावुनरपठे ऋतुमाचिनि समासे पूर्व मन्तोदात्तम । गत्रिरात्रः। द्विगा' क्रिम । अति- रात्रः । क्रतो किम् । बिल्वहोमस्य सप्तरात्रो बिल्बासप्तरात्रः ॥ 3831. Before a Dvigu, when the compound denotes a sacrifice, the last syllable of the first member has the acute. Thus गोत्रित्र = गर्गाणां त्रिरात्रः Why do we say before a Dvigu compound' ! Observe अतिरात्र (त्रितिक्रान्त इति प्रादिसमासः) which being formed by the Sainasinta affix अन्च (V. 4. 87) has acute on the final (VI. 1. 163). Why do we say — when denoting a sacrifice ' ! Obserre बिल्वसप्लरात्र: बिल्वहोमस्य सप्तरात्रः॥ ३८३२ । सभायां नपुंसके ।६।२।८॥ सभायां परतो नपुंसकलिङ्ग समासे पूर्व मन्त्रोदात्तम । गोपालसभामा । स्त्रीसभम । 'सभा याम' किम । ब्राह्म गासेनम् । 'नपुसके' किम् । राजसभा। प्रतिपदोक्तन पुसक्रग्रहणान्नेह । रमणो यसमम् । बाह्मणकुलम् ॥ 3832. Before the word sabhå when it is exhibited as Neuter, the first member of the compound gets acute on the last syllable. Thus गोपाल सभम, स्त्री सभम् ॥ Why do we say before सभा' ! Observe ब्राह्मणसेनम् ॥ Why do we say when in the Neuter' ? Observa राजसभा। The word wat becomes Neuter under rules II. 4. 23-24 ; therefore when the word wat does not become Neuter under those rules, then by the maxim of Pratipalokta &c: the accent does not fall on the final of the preceding terin, as, रमणीयसभ, here the word सभा is neuter not by the force of any particular rule, but because the thing designated (अभिधेय) is neuter. ३०३३ । पुरे माचाम् । ६।२।९६ ॥ देवदत्तपुरम । नान्दीपुरम । 'प्राचाम' किम । शिवपुरम ॥ 3333. Before the word pu a, when the compound denotes a city of the Eastern People, the final of the first member has the acute. Thus देवदत्त पुरम, कार्णि"पुरम्, नान्दि पुरम्। Why do we say of the. Eastern people ' ? Observe शिवपुरम । ३८३४ । अरिष्टगौडपर्वे च । ६।३।१०० ॥ पुरै परेऽरिष्टगोडपूर्व समासे पूर्व मन्तोदात्तम । अरिष्टपुरम, । गाडपुरम, । 'पूर्व' ग्रहणं किम । दापि यथा स्यात् । अरिष्टाश्रितपुरम । गाडभृत्य पुरम, ॥ 22 ·1.70 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. ACORN'TS CE. IV. F3834, - - 3834. When the words arishta' and gauda ' stand first, the first member has the acute on the final before the word "pura. Thus अरिष्टपुरम गो. पुरम । By the force of the word ya in the aphorism, we can apply the rule to अरिष्टशित पुरम, गोडभृत्यपुरम् ॥ ३८३५ । न हास्तिनफलकमार्दयाः। ६।३।१०१ ॥ पुरे परे नेतान्यन्तोदात्तानि । हस्तिनपुरम् । फलकपुरम् । मार्दयपुरम् । म दैरपत्ति सुधादित्वात् टक 3835. But when the word hastina.' 'phalaka anil — mardeya' precede 'pura' the acute does not fall on their final. This is an exception to VI. 2. 99. Thus हास्तिनपुरम , फलकपुरम , मार्दयपुरम The son of ag is. Hiša formed by 5, the word belonging to śubhiâdi cluss, The उ is elided by VI. 4. 147. ३८३६ । कुसलकमकुम्भ शालं बिले।६।२ । १०३ ॥ एतान्यन्तोदात्तानि बिले परे ! वसूलबिलम् । कृबिलम । कुम्भबिलम् । शालाबलम् । 'कृभू लादि किम् । सर्पबिलम् । 'बिल' इति किम् । कुसू लस्वामी ॥ 3836, The words कुसल, कूप, कुम्भ, and शाला bave the acute on the last syllable before the word bila. Thus कुसलँबिलम , कूप बिलम, कुम्भबिलम, शालाबिलम , । But not so in रुप बिलम । Why do we say ' before बिल'? Observe कुमूलस्वामी ॥ ३८३७ । दिक्शब्दा ग्रामजनपदाख्यानचानराटेषु । ६।३ । १०३ ॥ दिशब्टा अन्तोदात्ता भवन्त्य षु । पूर्व षुकामशमी । अपर कृष्णा मत्तिका । जनपदः । पूर्व प- चालाः । श्राख्यानम । पूर्व यायातम् । पूर्व चानराटम् । शब्दहणं कालवार्चािदकाब्दस्य परिव- हार्थम् ॥ 3837. Words expressing direction (in space or time) have acute on the last syllable, when followed by a word denoting a village, or a country or a narrative, and before the word "châna rata.' Thus पूर्वेषुकामशामी or पूर्व" (VIII. 2. 6). The compounding takes placeby II. I. 50. স্ময় মনিকা। Country name -पूर्व पञ्चालाः । These are Karmadhara ya compounds (IT, 1.58). Story name :-- -पूर्व धायातम् । So also ga zlazz# ! The employmen of the term ya in the aphorisa shuws that time-denoting faoi words as in ga याबात should also be included, ३८३८ । प्राचार्योपसर्जनश्चान्तति । ६ ।। १०४ ॥ प्राचार्योपसर्जनान्त वासिनि परे टिकछन्दा अन्तं दाता भवन्ति । पूर्वप्राणिनीयाः । 'प्रा. चार्य-' इति किम् । पूर्वाना वासी । “अन्त वालिनि' किम् । पूर्व पाणिनीय शास्त्रम् ॥ 3838. The direction denoting words have acute on the final.

·समास 7. $ By the Vol. III. A COENTS CH. IV. $3840.] ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. before the names of scholars, when such names are derived from, those of their teachers. Thus ya'uffuatar: i Compare VI. 2. 36. Why do we say when derived from the names of their Teachers'? Observe gata ar Why do we say * Scholar-1:ames' ? Obæerve ya urfumaria TER' (uifwatci organ ga faqat जम्) ३८३८ । उत्तरपदवृद्धौ सर्व च । ६ । ३ । १०५ ॥ उत्तरपदस्य त्यधिकृत्य या ािर्वहिता तद्वत्युत्तरपदे परे सर्वशब्दो दिक्छब्दाश्चान्तो ani waimaa 0719*: | Ju0101: 1 funtz' TEU सर्व कारकः । 3839. Words denoting direction and the word «sarva have acute on the final, before a word which takes Vriddhi in the first syllable of the second term by VII. 3. 12 and 13. dained when the 'Taddhita affixes having su, or 5. follow, the Pârvapada being खु, सर्व and अर्ध। The word ntuzafe: therefore, means that word which takes Vriddhi, uniter the rule relating to uttarapadı, 2.e, ander rule VII. 3. 12 and 13: Thus अपरंपांचालकः, सर्व पाञ्चालकः। These are formed by as affix (IV. 2. 125) Why do we say which takes Vșid lhi in the second term under VII. 3. 12 and 13 ?." Had the word 37Trifa fuam not been used by us in explaining the søtra, then the sätra, wonld have run thus aut nae, and would have ap: plied to cases like a t#3, STT: where Aip: and.it: are Vriddhi words not by virtue of VII. 3. 12. ३८४० । बहुव्रीही विश्वं संज्ञायाम् । ६.३ । १०६ ॥ बहुवी ही विश्वशब्दः पूर्व पदभूतः सजायामन्तोदात्त: स्यात् । पूर्व पदप्रकृतिस्वरेण प्राप्त म्याट्युदात्तस्यापवादः । विश्वकर्मा विश्व'वः' । । 'अविश्वदेव सत्पतिम् । 'बहुबोहे किम् । विश्वे च ते देवाश्च विश्वे देवाः । 'संज्ञायाम् किम् । विश्व देवः । प्रागव्ययीभाव बहु au 14:17: 3840. The word 'visva 'has acute on the final, being first member in a Bahuvrihi, when it is a Name. This is an exception, to vI. 2. I by which the first member in , Baburihi woold have retain:d its original accent. Thus: -faracat faizka: (Rig Veda VIII, 98, 2, fassa quiao Why do we say in a Bahuvrihi compound ? Observe farà gar: = ſarà देवाः Why do, we say w name? Observa fasaza - fasada: 1 Bit fasaria: aulfasalis have acute on the final as they are governed by the subsequent rule VI. 2. 165 which superseries this. The word Buhuvrihi governs the succeeding sütras up to VI. 2: 120 inclusive, $ 9 when a ·THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. ACCEN'T'S CH. IV. 83841, V 6 ३८४५। उदराश्वेषुषु । ६ । २ । १०७ ।। संज्ञायामिति वर्तते । वृकोदरः । हय श्वःम। हेषुः ॥ 3841. The first member in a Bahuvrihi, before the words udara' 'ašva' and 'ishu' gets acute on the final syllable, when the compound denotes a Name. Thvs का दरः, हर्घ श्वः, and महेषुः । This sûtra is also an exception to VI. 2. 1 by which the first term would have retained its original accent. The word a ti has acute on the first by Phit II. 7. The word oft is also first acute as formed by 5 (Uņ IV. 118). The word Ata is end-acute by V. 2. 38. Its mention here izppears redundant, ३८४२ । क्षप ।६।२।१०८ ॥ उदराश्वेषुषु पूर्वमन्तोदात्तं बहुब हो निन्दायाम् । घटोदरः। कटुकाश्वः । चलाच्लेषुः अनुदर इत्यत्र नसुभ्याम्-' (१९०६) इति भवति प्रतिषेधेन । 3842. A word before udar'aśva' and 'ishu' in a Bahuvrihi gets acute on the final, when reproach is meant. Thus aëiati, ai sai, awraag: · The word az is formed by a (III. 1. 134) and has acute on the final, and so it would have retained this accent by VI. 2. 1. even without this sutra. The word कटुक being formed by कन् (V. 3. 75) has acute on the first. In this and the last sûtra, all the aciities may optionally be changed into svarita by VIII. 2. 6. But अनुदरः and सूदर: have acute on the final hy VI. 2. 172, S. 3906 which being a subsequent sâtra, supersedes this pre- Sent, so far as अन् are concerned. ३८४३ । नदी बन्धुनि । ६।३ । १०६ ॥ बन्धुशब्दे परे नट्यन्तं पूर्वमन्तोदात्तं बहुवी ही। गार्गीबन्धुः । 'नदी' किम् । ब्रह्मबन्धुः ब्रह्मशब्द पाट्युदात्तः । 'बन्धुनि' किम् । गार्गीप्रियः ॥ 3843. In a Bahuvrihi compound, having the word 'bandhu' as its second member, the first member ending in the Feminine affix 'i' ( nadi' word) has the acute on its final syllable. Thus गागी बन्धुः। The word गार्गी is formed by adding डीप (IV. 1. 16) to गार्य ending in यज्ञ (IV. 1. 105), and therefore, it is first acute By VI. 2. I this accent would have been retained, but for the present sûtra. Why do we say 'a Nadi (Feminine in ई) word' ? Observe बहाबन्धुः, the word ब्रह्म has acute on the first syllable as it is formed by मनिन् (Un IV. 146) and it retains that accent (VI. 2. 1). Why do we say ' before बन्धु' ? Observe n Triffeo: u ३८४४ । निष्ठोपसर्गपूर्वमन्यतरस्याम् । ६ । २ । ११० ॥ निष्ठान्त पूर्वपदमन्तोदात्तं वा । प्रधातपादः । 'निष्ठा' किम् । प्रसेवकमुखः । 'उपसर्गपूर्वम् किम् । शुष्कमुखः ॥ and be ahmen ·VOL. III. A OCENTS CH. IV $3847.) ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS, 173 3844, In a Bahuvrihi con.pound, a Participle in kta' preceded by a preposition, standing as the first member of the com pound, has optionally acute on the last syllable. Thus vür UTC. Or yürauté: (VI. 2. 169). Why do we say a Nishtha'? a Nishthê? ? Obse: ve vaazha: which is acute in the middle by the krit accent being retained after wiVI. 2. 139). Why do we say preceded by a preposition'? Observe शुष्क मुखः which has acute on the first by VI. 1. 206. 389 | CTITIE: 1831999.11 SATUZITUATT SITATZITII ZIFUFTTET 'YEZT HITTA' (2008) uafum: 1 3845 In the following sâtras, up to VI. 2. 136 inclusive, should always be supplied the phrase the first syllable of the second member has the acute.' This is an adhikůra aphorism and the word Jr. Tuz exerts its influence up to the end of the chapter, while the word safe has scope up to VI. 2. 187 exclusive, ३८४६ । कर्णा वर्णलक्षणात् । ६ । ३ । ११२ ॥ agarfaât mauaifease ut: TTC Tavarat apate a: na किम् । श्वतपादः । 'वर्ण लक्षणात्' किम् । शोभनकर्णः ॥ 3846. In a Bahuvrihi compound, the word 'karna 'standing as second member, has acute on the first syllable, when it is preceded by a word denoting color or mark. Thus with color we have all and with mark-name, we have to: the lengthening of sia takes place by VI. 3. 115. The marks of scythe, &c, are made on the ears of cattle to mark and distinguish them. mark? which is meant here. Why do we say ? Observe saadra:, Tk: here saa heing formed by (19, 1. 134) is end acute, and it being formed by H (III. 1. 135) is also end-acute and these accents are retained in the compound. Why do we say when preceded by a word denoting color or mark'? Observe T'Hall where TTH9 being formed by yą (III. 2. 149) is end-acute and this accent is retained (VI. 2. 1). ३८४७ । संज्ञापम्ययोश्च । ६।३।११३ ॥ कर्ण अायुदात्त: । मणिकर्णः । श्रीपम्ये । गोकर्णः ॥ 3847. In a Bahuvrihi, the second member' karņa' has acute on the first syllable, when the compound denotes a Name or a Resemblance. Thas afuu, is a Name : Thu, denotes resemblance i, e., persens having ear's like a cow.' .. arrow It is such a 6 $ ·174 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDT. (VOL. III. AOCENTS CH. IV. $3850. : " - ३८४८ । कण्ठपृष्ठग्रीवाजवं च । ६२ । ११४ ॥ संज्ञापंध्ययोबहुव्रोहा। शितिकण्ठः :। काण्डएष्ठः । सुग्रोक । नाडीजङ्घः । औपम्थे । खर काठः । गोएष्ठः । अश्वग्रीवः । गोजयः ॥ 3848. In a Bahu vrihi expressing a Name or comparison. the second member कण्ठ, पृष्ठ, योवा and जया have acute on the first syllable. Thus Name : शितिकण्ठः Comparison : Narne काण्डपष्ट Resemblance गोष्ट । Name guia: Resemblance wada: Name नाडी- जयः । Resemblance गोजचः, ॥ The sutra कण्ठपष्टग्रीवाजंचं is in Neuter gender, and जंघा is shortened, as it isa Samihira Dvandva. In the case of gura, the accent would have fallen on, the final a by VI. 2. 172, this ordains acute on it a ३८४८ । शृङ्गमवस्थायां च । ६ । २ । ११५ ॥ शङ्गशब्दो विस्थायां संजौपम्ययोश्चायुदात्तो बहुतो हा । उद्गतः। दृ.यॉलङ्गः । श्रयः शोदगमनादिकतो गवा देवयाविशेषो ऽवस्था । संज्ञायाम् । ऋष्यशङ्गः । उपमायाम् । मेषङ्गः । अवस्या-' इति किम् । स्थलङ्गः ।। 3849 In a Bahuvrihi denoting age, (as well as a Name or a Resemblance), the second member sriiga' gets acute on the first syllable. Thus उट्गत श्रा, दृ.यंगुल नः । Here the word denotes the particular age of the cattle at which the horns come ous, or become one inch long. Name : ऋष्य तः। Comparison : मेष | Why do we say when denoting 'age sc' स्थूलङ्गः ॥ ३८५७ । नजो जरममित्रमृताः । ६।२।११६ ।। नञः परास्ते श्रायुदात्ता बहुबोहा । 'ता. मे जराद्वजरम् । अमरम्। 'अमित्रमर्दय' । 'यो देवेष्वमतम्' । 'न' किम् । ब्राह्ममत्रः । 'ज-' इति किम् । श्रशत्रुः । 3850. After a Negative Particle, in a Bahuvrihi, the acute. falls on the first syllable of sit, HT, FAT and un ir Thus अजर, अमरः, अमित्रः and अमतः । Why do we say after a Negative Particle ? Observe बाहा गामित्रः । Why do we Say 'जरc.' Observe अश when the final gets the acute by VI. 2. 172. ३८५१ । सोमेनसी अलोमोषली ॥६।२१ ११७ ॥ सोःपरं लोमोपसी वयित्वा मन्नन्तमसन्तं चायुदातं स्यात् । 'नसुभ्याम' (३६०६), इत्यस्या पवादः । सु' कर्माणः सुरुव: । स नो वक्षदनिमान: सुब्रह्मा । शिवा प शुभ्यः सु मनाः सुवीः । सुधे सस्करति' । 'साः किम् । सतकर्मा । ‘मनसो' द्विाम् । प्र_राजी'अलामोधमी किम् । सुलामा सूयाः । कपि तु परत्वात् ‘कपि पूर्वम (१९०७) इति भर्वात । सुकर्मकः । सु सात स्कः' । 3851. After the adjective stu in a Bahuvrihi, a stem ending in min and as with the exception of loman and ushas has acute on the first syllable. .. - 1 ·VOL. III, ACOents C1. IV $3853.] ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. atter do we say and अस. and उपत्? : Thus सकाणः सुरुक्षः (Rig Veda IV. 1. 17). सुना वक्षनिमानः सुब्रह्मा (Rig Veda VI. 22.7. शिवा पशुभ्यः सुमनाः सुवर्चा (Rig Veda X. 85.41). सुपेशस्क- रति (kig Veda II 35. 1). सुकर्मन, सुधमन सुप्रथिमन्, सु यस, सुयशस. सुस्रा तस. ७० nisu pronta and gata from the root ve and can with the aftis faoi The final is changed to by VIII. 2. 72. But this substitution is considered asiddha for the purposes of accent, and these words are taken as it still ending in अस. Why ?' Observe तर्मन, कतयशम् । Why do we say ding in Observe सुराजन सुतक्षन forined by the affix कनिन् (Un. I, 156), and the acceut is on 7 ani 7, but with o, the accent is thrown on the final by VI.2, 17283906. Why do we say with the exception of 172 and Observe para a and (VI. 2. 127). The following maxim applies here : अनिनस्मन ग्रहणान्यर्थवता चान केन च तदन्तविधि प्रयोजयन्ति 'whenever अन्. or इन or अस, or मन्, when they are employed in Gummar, deuote by I. 1. 72, something that ends with अन् or इन् or अस, or मन्, there (अन्, इन्, अस. and मन्) represent these combinatious of letters, both in so far as they possess and also in 80 far as they are void of, a meituing.' Therefore the and se void of meaning are also included here. Thus धर्मन् is fortuned by मन (UR I. 140), but कर्मन् is is forrned by मनिन (Un. IV. 145), and प्रथिमन is fornned by इमनिच् affix (V. 1. 122) in which मन् is only a part. Similarly यशम is formed by असुन (Un IV. 191), and sy also स्रातक (Un IV. 202) ; but in सुयस. (सुध्वस from ध्वस with the affix क्विज III. 2.76) the rule applies also, though अस. is here part of the root. But when the samâ sånta affis an is added (V. 4. 15t), then the accent falls on the syllable immediately preceding for there the subsequent Rule VI. 2. 173 S, 3907 supersedes the present rule : thus सुक्रर्म कः, सुन तस्कः ॥ ३८५२ । क्रत्वादयश्च ।६।२1११८ ॥ सोः पर भाटा दात्तः स्युः । 'सामाज्याय सु क्रतु':' । 'सु प्रतीकः' । 'सु हव्यः' । 'म प्रतूति मने हसम् । 3852. After sú in a Bahuvrihi, the acute falls on the first syllable of kratu &c. Thus साम्राज्याय सुक्रतुः (Rig Veda I. 25. 10) सुहध्यः, सुप्रतीकः। सुप्रर्तिमनेहसम् (Rig Veda I. 40. 4). ३८५३ । अायुदात्तं यच्छ दास । ६।२ । ११९ ॥ यदायुदात्तं व्यतत्सोरुत्तरं बहुबोहायुदानम्। 'अधा स्वश्वा':'। 'सु_रयाँ 'प्रातिथिग्वे' निरस्वरेणाश्वरथावाट्युदात्ती । 'प्रायुदात्तम' किम् 'यासुबाहुः'। 'ध्यच' किम । सु गुरंसत्सु हिरण्यः । हिरण्यशब्दसत्यच ॥ 3853. In a Bahuvrihi compound, in the Chhandas; a word of two syllables with acute on the first syllable, when preceded by Su, gets acute on the first syllable. In other words, such a word retains its accent. Thus :-अधास्वश्व सुर wfafara (Rig Veda VIII. 68. 16). Beie palºsa: and Fru: have acute on y aud र, which they had originally also, for अश्व and रथ ure formed by किन (Un. I. 151) and धन U.. II. 2) respectively and have the नित् accent (VI. 1. 197), . । रथा ·176 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. ACCENTS CH. IV.53853 , Why do we say 'having acute on the first syllable ?? Observe ar g'a 1: स्वगुरिः Rig. II. 32. 7). Here बा बाहु has acute on the final (Up. I. 27 foruned by 3 affix and has the accent of the affix ]II. 1. 3). Why do we say having two syllabies ' Obserre gitaa, gierzu: (Rig Veda I. 125.2). This sutra is an exception to VI. 2. 172. ३८५४ । वीरतीय च।।३।१२० ॥ सोः परी बहुव्रीही छन्द स्यायुदात्ती । ‘सु धोरेण रयिंणा' । ‘स वीर्यस्य गोम'तः' । वीर्य- शब्दो यत्प्रत्ययान्तः । तत्र — यतोऽनावः' (३७०१) इत्यादय दात्तत्वं नेति वीर्य ग्रहणं ज्ञापकम । तत्र हि सति पूर्वेणैव सिद्ध स्यात् ॥ 3854 In a Bahuvrili compound in the Chhandas, after su the words — wita' and ' vriya' have acute on the first syllable. Thes सुवोरेण रयिणा (Rig Veda x. 122. 3). So also सुबीर्यस्य गोमतः (Rig Veda VIII. 95.4). The word atá is formed by an affix and by VI. 1. 213, S. 3701 it would have acute on the first. But its enumeration in this sûtra shows that Rule VI. 1. 213, does not apply to ali i The word at's has svarita on the final in the Chhandas, by Phit IV. 9. In the classical literature it is ady udatta. ३८५५ । कुलतीरतलमलशालाक्षसममव्ययीभावे ।६ ॥ २ ॥ १२१ ॥ उपकूलम् । उपतीरम् । उपतलम । उपमूलम् । उपशालम । उपाक्षम । सुधमम । निषः मम । तिष्ठ द्रुप्रतिव ते । “कूलादि' महणं शिमः । उपकुम्भम । अव्ययीभावे किम । परम । । - कूलम .. कूलम् । 3855. In an Avyayibhava compound, the following second terms have acute on their first syllable : कूल, तीर, तूल,मूल, शाला, अक्ष and सम॥ Thus उपकू लम, उप तीरम्, उपतूं लम्, उपमू लम्, उपशालम्, सुषमम्, निःमम् | These last four are to be found in Tishthadgu class of compounds (II. 1. 17) Why do we say &c. ? Observe GURE Why do we say "in an Avyayil hava compound ?' Observe OTTA, JAH After the prepositions परि, प्रति, उप and अप, the words कूल &c. world have becomes accentless thy VI. 2. 33, the present sutra. supersedes VI. 2. 33, and we have aceent on कूल &c. and not on the Prepositions. ३८५६ । अंसमन्थशूर्पपाय्यकाण्डं द्विगौ । ६ । । १२२ ॥ टिकंमः । द्विमन्थः । दृशूर्प: । द्विपाध्यम । द्विकाण्डम ।' द्विगी' क्रिम । परमकंमः ॥ 3856. In a Dvigu Compound the following second members get acute on their first syllable : - कंस. मन्थ, शूर्प, पाय्य and काण्ड । Thus fait, (anazt hizi zita: the affix fesa V. 1. 25 is elided hy V. 1. 28) हिमन्यः, (the atlix # V. 1. 19 is ejided by V. 1. 28) fanta':; (the afix ମମ୍ 1. 26 is elided) द्विधा य्यः, हिका गडः । Why do we say in a Dvigu ? Observe परम: कंसः ॥ y.

·Why do we say in a Tatpurusha | Observe & STUFF waich is Vot. III. ACCENTS CH. IV$3860. ACCENTS OF COMPOUNTDS. ३८५७ । तत्पुरुषे शालायां नपुंसके।६।२॥ १३ ॥ शालाशब्दान्ते तत्यु रुषे नपुंसकलिङ्ग उत्तरपदमायुदात्तम । ब्राहमणशालम । तत्युरू किम । दृढशालं ब्राह्म शकुनम ! शालायाम किम । ब्राह्म गाशाला ॥ 3857. The word sala' at the end of a Tatpurusha compound when exhibited in the Neuter, has acute on the first syllable. Thus ब्राह्मणाशालम् । The compound becomes Neuter by II. 4. 25. , *3858. । Bahuvrihi compound and therefore the first member retains its accent (VI. 2. 19) and as the first member is a Nishtha word, it has acute on the final. Why do we say the word TIHT?' Observe BAUARI Why do we say " in the Neuter ?? Observe HUJTAT I Compare VI. 2. 86. ३५८ कन्याचा६२।१२४ ॥ सत्यु को नयु समलिङ्ग कन्धाशब्द उत्तरपदमा दात्तम । सौमिकन्थम । प्राहुरकन्धम, । 'नसके' किम । दाक्षि कन्या ॥ In a Neuter Tatpurusha ending in kantha 'the acute falls on the first syllable of the second member. Thus सोशमिन्यम्, प्राहरकन्यम् । The word utofa: denotes the descendant of सुशमः (शोभनः शमा यस्य) आतुर is formed by the preposition ा with the verb हर and the affix क (III. 1. 136) The compound is Neuter by IT. 4. 20. These are Genitive compounds. When the word is not Neuter we have a fa&ret ! ३८५९ । आदिश्चिहणादीनाम् । ६।३।१२५ ॥ जान्थान्त लत्यु रुप नपुंसकलिको चिहणादीनामानिरुदात्तः । चिक्षणकन्धम, । मन्ट कन्धम घे प्रादिरिति वर्तमाने पुनग्रहणं पूर्व पदस्याय दातार्थम ॥ 3859. In a Neuter Tatpurushâ ending in 'kantha' the first syllable of chihana' &c. have the acute. As चिहणकन्यम, मँडरकन्थम , में डुरकन्थम । The repetition of the word आदि if this sûtra, though its anuvritti was present, indicates that the first syllable on the first member gets the acute. The word fagu is derived from the root faifa with विप, which gives सित् and हन is formed by adding पाच (III. 1. 134) to हुन् । wa+®* = f**u the elision of a is irregular. ३८६० । चेलखेटऋटुककाण्डं गहायाम् । ६।३ । १६ ॥ चेलादीन्युत्तरिपदान्यायुदात्तानि । पुत्रचेलम । नगरखेटम । धिकटुकम, । प्रजा कावडम, । लादिसादृश्येन पुत्रादीनां गर्यो । व्यायदिनात्समास: । 'ग याम्' किम् । परमचेलम ॥ 3860. The words चेल, खेट, कटुक and काण्ड at the end of a Tat purusha have acute on the first syllable, when a reproach is meant. Thus पुत्रचेल म, नगरखें टम , (खेट ति तणनाम, तद्वन दुबल) दधिकटुकम् (कटुकम- स्वादु) प्रजाकाण्डम, । "he reproach is denoted of the sons &c. by comparing them to घेल &c. The auulysis will be पुत्रालमित्र ... बेलबत् तुच्छम, and the compounding 23 ·HITS TER SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. ACCENT'S CE. IV. F3861. । takes place under II. 1. 56: the Tyaghradi class being an aktigamii. When reproach is not meant, we have परमचेलम् ॥ ३८६१ । चीरभुपमानम् । ६।२ । १२७ ॥ वस्त्रं चीमिव वस्त्रचोरम कम्बलचीरम । 'उपमानम किम । घरमचौरम 3861. The word "chira’ at the end of a Tatpurusha, has acute on the first syllable, when something is compared with it. Thus वस्त्रन, चोर्रामव= वस्त्र चरम , कम्बलचीरम ! Why do we say when com- •parison is meant ?' Observe परमचीरम ३८६२ । पललसूपशा मित्रे । ६।३।१२८ ॥ एतपललम । एतसूपः । एतशाकम । 'भन येणा मिश्रीकरणाम' (१९७) इति समासः । मिथे किम । घरमग्रनलम ॥ 3862 In a Tatpurusha ending in Tan, and than the acute falls on the first syllable of these, when the compound denotes a food mixed or seasoned with something. Thus इतनलम , तसूयः, ताकम - छतेन मिश्रं पलल &c. The compounding takes place by II. 1.35. S. 697. Why do we say when meaning mixed or seasoned ?' Observe परमपललम. ३८६३ । फलसूदस्यलकर्णाः संज्ञायाम् । ६।३ । १२६ ॥ श्रायुदासा स्वत्युरुपे। दाक्षिकूलम । शाण्डिसूदम् । दाण्डायनस्थलम । दाक्षिकर्षः। याम- संक्षा सताः । 'संज्ञायाम' किम । परमकूलम 3863. The words कूल, सूद, स्थल and कर्ष have acute on their first syllable, when at the end of a Tatpurusha denoting a Name Thus दाक्षिकूलम् ण्डि दम्, दाण्डायनस्थलम, दाक्षिकर्षः। All these are names of villages. When not a name we have परमकूलम ॥ ३८६४ । अकर्मधारये राज्यम् । ६ ।। १३० ॥ कर्मधारयर्जिते तत्पुरुषे राज्यमुत्तरपदमायुदात्तम । ब्राह्मणराज्यम । 'श्रक-' इति किम । घरमराज्यम चेलराज्यादिस्वरादव्ययस्वरः पूर्व विप्रतिषेधेन । कुचेलम । कुराज्यम, ॥ 3864. The word 'rajyam' has acute on the first syllable, when at the end of a Tatpurasha compound, which is not a Karmadharaya. Thus ब्राह्मणराज्यम् । In a Karmadharaya we have परमराज्यम । yârl : --The accent taught in VI. 2. 126 to 130 S 3860 to 3864 is superseded by the accent of the Indeclinable tanght in VI. 2. 2, though that rule stands first and this subsequent'. As कु चेलम , कु राज्यम । ३८६५ । बग्योदयश्च । ६।२ । १३१ ॥ अर्जुनवर्य: । वासुदेवपक्ष्यः । श्रकर्मधारय इत्येव । परमवः। वार्यादिर्दिगाड्यन्तर्गणः। ॥ ।

·Vor. III. ACCENTS CH: IV$3868] ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. 179 3865. At the end of a non-Karmadharaya Tatpurusha compound, the words vargya &c. have acute on the first syllable. 'Thus अर्जुन ग्य, वासुदेवपक्ष्यः। In a Karmadhāraya we have परमवयः। The words aEc. are no where exhibited as such ; the primitive words. वर्ग, प्रग, गा. & sul-division of fefe (IV. 3.51) are here referred to, as ending with an affix. ३८६६ । पुत्रः पुमभ्यः ।६।२। १३२ ॥ पुशब्देभ्यः परः पुत्रशब्द आटा दात्तस्तत्पुरुष । दाशक्रिपुत्रः । माहिषपुत्रः । 'पुत्रः' किम । कोटिमातुलः । 'पुम्भ्यः' किम । दातोपुत्रः । 3866. The word putrů coming after a Masculine noun in a. Tatpurusha has acute on the first syllable. Thus दानिपुत्रः, महिषपुत्रः। Why do we say a पुत्र' ? Observe कोनटिमा- ga: Why do we say “after a masculine word?? Observe greitga: u. ३८६७ । नाचार्यशर्जाव कसंयुत्शनात्याख्येभ्यः । ६ । २ । १३३ ॥ प्रभ्यः पुत्रो नाटा दात्तः । पाख्याग्रहणात्यायाणां तद्विशे प्राणां च ग्रहणम । श्राचार्य पुत्रः उपाध्यायपुत्र। शाकटाय नपुत्रः । राजपुत्रः । ईश्वरपुत्रः । नन्दपुत्रः । ऋत्विपुत्रः । याजकपुत्रः हेतुः पुत्रः। संयुक्ताः संबन्धिनः । श्यालथुन्नः । ज्ञातयो मातापित बन्धेन बान्धवाः । ज्ञातिपुत्रः भातुःपुत्रः॥ 3867. The word putru has not acute on the first syllable when preceded by a word which falls under the category of teachers, kings, priests, wife's relations, and agnates and cognates. The word ward means ' teacher,' TTSTT prince, king's #fras' a sacrificing priest', zyrt: relations through the wife's side' as sarat brother-in-law' &o. जाति means (all kinsmen related through father and mather or blood-relations. The worl प्राख्या shows that the rule applies to the synonyms of e teacher' &c., a weli as to particular teacher' &c. Thus प्राचार्य पुत्रः, उपाध्यायपुत्रः, शाकटायनपुत्रः राजपुत्रः, ईश्वरपुत्रः, नन्दपुत्रः, ऋत्वि कात्र, याजकपुत्रः', हातुःपुत्रः, (VI. 3. 23) संयुक्तपुत्र: संबन्धिपुत्रः, स्यालकपुत्र:, जातिपुत्रः, भातुषपुत्रः, (VI. 3. 23). Here the special accent taught in the last sîtra being prohibited, the accent falls on the last syl. la.ble by the general rule VI. I. 2 23. ३८३८ । चूर्णादीन्यप्राणि षष्ठ याः । ६ । २ । १३४ ॥ एतानि प्राविभिन्न षष्ट्यान्तात्पराण्यायुदात्तानि तत्य रूपे । मुद्गचूर्णम् । 'अप्र-' इति किम् । मत स्वचूर्णम् ॥ 3868. The words chtirnat' &c. in a Tatpurusha compound lave acute on the first syllable, when the preceding word ends in a Genitive and does not denote a living being: Thus मुद्ग गाम , मसू रचूर्णम, but मत्स्यचूर्णम् where the first term is a living being, and परमयूँ म. where it is not Genitive. Another reading of the sutra. is चूर्णादीन्य प्रागयुप हात, the word उपग्रह being the ancient name of षष्ठो given by old Grammarians, ७ .

·180 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VoL. III. ACCENTS CH. IV. 83868. . 1 चूर्ण, 2 फरिय, कारण, 4 शाकिन, शाकट, 6 द्राक्षा, 8 कुनदुम (कुन्दम), 9 दलप, 10 चमसी, 11 चक्कन (चकन चक्वन) 12 चाल ॥ The word gratis derived fun the root gat ate (Div 50) with the affix pi; करिव and करिय are formed with the upapada करि and ths verbs धा' to go' and या + to protect' respectively, and the affix क (करिणवाति = करिव) (III. 2.3); शक with the afix दुरण added diversely (On II. 56); शक with अटच (Un IV. 81) gives शकट; this with अण (तद्वति) gives शाकट द्राक् क्षति द्राक्षा (Prishodaradi); तुस (शब्द) with a gives तूस्त the penultimate being lengthened ; the word is formed thy the affix विw added to the root दु with the upapada कु (कुदुनोति कुत्सित' या दुनोति) the augment मुम् being added to कु । कुन्दु मिमीते = कुन्दुमः। दल with the affix कपन gives ढलपः, चम with असच forms समस, then is added डंग । चक्कन is formed by श्रद (HI. 1. 134) added to an and reduplicution, चोलस्थापत्य चालः ॥ ३८६६ । षट् च काडादीनि । ६।२॥ १३५ ॥ प्रमाणिषया आयुदातानि । दर्भ काण्डम् । द.चोरम । तिलपललम् । मुट्गसू पः । मूलक शाकम् । नदीकूलम् । “पद' किम् । राजसू दः । 'अन-' इति किम् । दत्तकाण्डम ॥ 3869. The six words काण्ड, चीर, पलल, सूप, शाक and कुल of Sutras VI. 2. 126-129_preceded by a non-living genitive word have acute on the first syllable. As दर्भागडम, वभ चीरम् । In the last example चीर is not used as a comparison, that case being governed by VI. 2. 127, तिलपललम्, मुद्गसूपः, मूलकशाम् । Here पलल, भू and शाक do not denote mixing, which is governed by VI 2. 128, a21***, heve the compound does not denote a Name, which would be the onse under. VI. 2. 129. Why these 'six only ? Observe t148 2: # Why 'non-living'? Observe दत्तकाराम ॥ ३८७० । कुण्डं धनम् ।६।२।१३६ ॥ कुराडमायुदात्तं बनवाचिनि तत्पुरुषे । दर्भकुण्डम । कुराडशब्दोच सादृश्ये । 'वनम' किम । मत्कुण्डम ॥ 3870. The word kunda' at the end of a Tatpurusha compound denoting' a wood or forest', has acute on the first syllable. The word कुगड here denotes 'a wood' by metaphor. Thus दर्भकुगडम । Why do we say when denoting 'a wood'? Observe सतकुण्डम । ३८७१ । प्रात्या भगालम् ।६।२।१३७।। Poland भगालवाच्युतरपदं सत्युरूपे प्रकृत्या। कुम्भीभगालम् । कुम्भीनदालभ । कुम्भीकपालम् ।। मध्योदात्ता एते । प्रत्येत्यधिकतम् 'अन्तः' (३८७७) ति यावत् ॥ 3871. The word ' bhagala.' at the end of a Tatpurusha, preserves its original accent. The synonyms of unite are also included. As कुम्भी भगालम , कुम्भीकपालम , कुम्भीनवालम । The words भगाल (c., have acute the middle, Phit II.9 The word प्रकल्प governs the subsequent attras up to VI. 2. 143. S. 3877. on NA ·181 Vol. III. ACCENTS CH. IV 33873.] ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. * 6 $ * ३८७२ । शिर्नित्याबहुजबहुव्रीहावभसत् । ६ ।। १३८ ॥ Fra: offerraraga Warat i fofauts: 1 furia: i gigua वृषादित्वादायुदात्तः । vz: Xdea farata farat:' fa' avataara: 1 **'FF futawaai fufariazia: ga'aquafakaritats di ütat: 3872. After siti' a word retains in a Bahuvrihi its original accent, when it is always of not more than two syllables, with the exception of bhasad.' Thus fuíndra:, frag: i The word ola belongs to quite class (VI. 1 203) and bas auute on the first, and sig: being formed by 87 (Un V. 21) affix has aoute on the first (VI. 1. 197). Why do we say after fofa'? Observe zratauia; which being formed by the affix atac has acute on the penultimate syllable 7 by VI. 1. 217 ! Why do we say with the exception of wea'? Observe fufpuha I The word fifa has acute on the first syllable (Phit II. 10). This sûtra is an exception to VI. 2. 1. ३८७३ । गतिकारकोपपदात्त । ६।२ । १३९ ॥ 932: Kati wafaet Fungsa I WATCH: 1 VETU I TT 2 qat'et'i Puntaa?: 1 gouam ! TAI UMAT: tefa' gfa ferita dar #TEE: 1 sja att i FEICU Serix i Trafantifra atarania FAIÊ A pia afaface- स्वादामस्वरो भवतीत्येके । प्रपतिदेश्यार्थ तु कदग्रहमित्यन्ये ॥ 3873. In a Tatpurusha, a word ending in a Krit-affix preserves its original accent, when preceded by an Indeclinable called Gati (I. 4. 60), or a noun standing in intimate relation to a verb (Karaka), or any word which gives occasion for compounding (Upapada see III. 1. 92). Thus wani, watu#I TOT WATET (Rig Veda I. 6. 2). pounding is here by II 2. 18. With käraka-word we have :-ryna'sum: (III. 3. 117). With upapada words, we have :- guaan 1 All these are formed by faa affixes and the acceut is governed by VI. 1. 193. 8.e., the word araa is formed by ल्युट (इध्मं प्रवृश्च्यते येन)। Why do we say "after a Gati, Karaka, or an Upapada word ?" Observe Cagata: = a akce: 1 Here the Genitive in ga does not express a kâraka relation. The genitive is here a Thu FUT ut denoting a possessor and not a za Faut one : for had it been the latter, there would have been to compounding at all, by II. 2. 16 see also II. 3. 65. The word en is employed in the sûtra for the sake of distinctness ; for a gati, karaka or upapada could not be followed by any other word than a kritformel word, if there was to be a samâsa. For two sorts of affixes come root (thậtu) namely fag and sai A samasa can take place with krit-formed words, but not with tiñanta words. So that without employing an in the sůtra, we The comafter a ·३८७४ । उभे o fa:, by including it in Sarangrava class (IV. 1. 73), (4) the final, as visvava yas is a Bahu vrihi. 182 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. III. ACCENTS CH. IV. $3873. could have inferred that it was meant. Therefore, it is said the Kțit is em. ployed in the sûtra for the sake of distinctness. According to this view we ex.- plain the acceut in प्रपचतितराम, प्रपचतितमाम, by saying that first compounding takes place with w and the words aafaat and wafaqa ending in acu, and apu and then a, is added and the accent of the whole word is regulated by cute by the rule of afface (see V. 3. 56, and V. 4. 11). According to others, the is taken in this sutra, in order to prevent the gati aocent applying to verbal compounds in words like ouata asa:, or wrafa àutz (V. 3 67), or quafa sam (V. 3 66). The accent of these will be governed by the rule of the Indeclinable first term retaining its accent. बनस्पत्यादिषु युगपत् ।६।३। १४० ।। og gafatuê yraquarati apela az 1'.. cara 'a:' i acasa दात्तो निपात्यते । 'हर्षया शचीति'म्' । शारिवादिस्वादायु दात्तः शचीशब्दः । 'शचीभिने' इति दर्शनात् । 'तनपादुच्यते । 'नराशंसं वाजिनेम्' । निपातनादीर्घः । 'शुनःशेष म्' 3874. In vanaspati, &c, both members of the compounds preserve their original accent simultaneously. NOTE :-_-"Thus aasta aa 4 (Rig Veda X. 101. 11). aceta a: (Rig Veda IV, 50.7) Edat matfag (Rig Veda VIII. 15. 13) maauiga (Rig Veda III) 29. 11); ETT E aisa (Rig Veda I. 106. 4) 14:14 (Rig Veda V. 2. 7 hatufa:, both ga anl ofa have acute on the first syllable, and the są augmentcomes by VI. 1. 157. (2) på fa: or agafa:=ągai ufa: (VI. 1. 157). The word बृहत is acutely accented on the final, some say it has acute on the first. (3) hofa: (suchỉ being formed by Fla) some make Sachi acute on the first hat formed by 5 Un I 80 has acute on the fival, according to others it has acute on first and napât = na på ti or na palagati with two and has acute on the first). (5) नराशनसः (नरा अस्मिन्नासीनाः शंसन्ति or नरा एव शंसन्ति) (nara is formed by अप and has acute on the first, Sinsa is formed by us, the lengthening takes place by VI. 3. 137). (6) *a: 57°a:=Ta ga Tūtser is a Bahuvrihi : the Genitive is not elided ny (VI. 3. 21. Várt), and both have acute on the first. (7) TETETT both Sande' and · Marka ' being formed by us have acute on the first : the lengthezing takes place by VI 3. 137. (8) anaer Trishna has acute on the first, gaat has acute on the final. The lengthening here also is by VI. 3. 137. (9) Trifasciati Bamba is finally acute, aut viśva by VI. 2. 106 has acute on The lengthening takes place as before by VI. 3. 137. (10) 3:1 RT is formed by faa afix and up has acute on the final. The words governed by this sutra are those which would not be included in the next two stras, 3esy i warga I&IS1989 m उभे युगपत्प्रकत्या स्तः । श्राध इन्द्रावणा' । 'इन्द्राय हस्पतो व यम्' । 'देवता' किम् । प्ल चन्ययोधा । 'द्वन' किम् । अग्निष्टोम ॥ 3875. In a Dvandva compound of names of Divinities, the both meinbers retain their original accent.

·VOL. III. ACCENTS CH. IV $3875.] ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. 183 । । । This surasti (Rig Veda VI. 68..) Erat ai (Rig Veda IV. 49, 5). The word 57 has acute on the first (loy nipatata), aste is formed by 377 (Uņ, III. 53) and by VI. 1. 197 has acute on the first ain has two acutes by VI. 2. 140, and Indra-Brihaspati has three neutes. Why do we say of divinities'? Observe yorgurut Why do we say sa Dvandva'? Observe अग्निष्टोमः॥ ३८७६ । नोत्तरपोऽनुदात्तादाथि जीभद्र षषशिषु । ६ । २ । १४२ ॥ पथिव्यादिर्जितेऽनुदानादावुत्तरपदे प्रामुक्तं न । 'इन्द्र_ग्निभ्यां के वर्मणः' । 'अथिध्यादी' किम । 'ट्यावापृथिवी जनयन्' । प्राबुदात्तो यात्रा निपात्यते । मृथिवीत्यन्तोदात्तः । सदसोमी। रोटेणिलुक्च' इति रगन्तों रुद्र शब्दः । दन्द्रोपमा । 'श्वनुशन्धूयन् --' इति पृषा अन्तोदातो निपात्यते शुक्रान्यिनो । मन्भिनन्तत्वादन्तोदात्तः। उत्तरपदग्रहणमनुदानादावित्युत्तर पदव- शेषणं यथा स्यादद्वन्द्वबिशेषणं मा भूत् । अनुदानादानिति विधिप्रतिये धार्बिपविभागार्थम ॥ 3876. In a Dvandva compound of the names of divioities both members of the compound siinultaneously do not retain their accent, when the first syllable of the second word is anudatta, with the exception of fui, पूर्वन and मन्छिन् । Thus seni #aam: (Rig Veda I. 109. 3). Agni has acute on the final. Why do we say with the exception of prithivi' &e ? Observe a ratyfuat *** (Rig Veda X. 66. 9.) dryà râ has acute on the first, 'prithivi' being formed by 'nish', has acute on the final. Atagi", Rudra is formed by 'rak' aftix (Un. II. 22.), and has aente on the final. इन्द्रापूपणा (Rig Veda VII. 35. 1) Pashain has acute on the end. (Un. I. 159) शुका मन्यि नों, the words ukra and manthin have acute on the final. The word uttara pada ja repeated in the sutra, in order that it should be qualified by the word tanudâtta dau', which latter would otherwise have qualified Dvandva. The word canudâttâdau' shows the scope of the probibition and the injunction. Hotpa स अधिकारोऽयम ॥ 3877. In the following sûtras up to the end of the chapter should always be supplied the phrase the last syllable of the second member has the acute. ३८७८ । थायधक्ताजबित्रकाणाम् । ६।२ । १४४ ॥ '' 'अर्थ' 'घ' 'त' 'अच्' 'अप''इन्त्र''क' एतदन्तानां गतिकारकोपपदापरेषामन्त उदात्तः । ''भू स्यायो' । श्रावस यः । घज । प्रभेदः । क्त । 'धर्ता व जो पुरुष्टु तः' । पुरुषु बहुप्रदेशेषु स्तुत ति विग्रहः । अन् । प्रक्षयः । अप । प्रलवः । इत्र । प्रलभित्रम् । के। गोषः । मूर्लावभुजादि स्थास्कःगतिकारकोपपदादित्य व । सुस्तुत भवता ।

·184 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. ACCENTS CH. IV. $3878 lands'. cam 3878. The last syllable of the second member has the acute in the verbal nouns ending in 2, 4, EST, P, war, w, and eft, when preceded by a Gati, a Kâraka or an Upapada (VI. 2. 139). Thus snurrar: (Rig Veda V. 41.19). wwi formed by a afix (Uạ. II. 2 and 3), and but for this sûtra, by VI. 2. 139 this word would have retained its original accent, which was acute on the first. 99:- : formed by 407 affix (Un. III. 116). ETS! -!, wataat gaga: (Rig Veda I. 11. 4). The word gega: should be analysed as gey aguay ga: 'praised in many (11.3. 56):-ads, the word dwelling,' is end acute, otherwise on the first (VI. 1. 201, 202). Una: 59.-afara i-frau:- mi auta, (III. 2. 5 Vårt) : (*-being added by III. 1. 135). The word au has acute on the first, as it belongs to quita class (VI. 1 203). When the preceding words are not Gati, Kâraka or Upapada, this rule does not apply : as a Hant, where being Karmapravacbaniya, the word gets the accent of the In declinable. ३८७ सूपमानातकः । ६।२ । १४५ ॥ सापमानाञ्च परं क्तान्तमन्तादात्तम । तस्य aja's ghaRTH অমলন: 3879. The participle in kta has acute on the final, when it is preceded by suor by a word with which the second member is compared. Thus gaan, in the following Rik az arat gain (Rig Veda X. 85, 24- With Upamâna words we have-ar This dehars VI. 2. 49 and 48. Wheu p is not a Gati, the rule does not apply, as gen HæAT ! ३८८० । संज्ञायामनाचितादीनाम् ।६।२ । १४६ ॥ fa# #VTCTTF1RHlematieavataasfurat Jua: The i afrou: fogal: - efa fr « surfants i Werful # 3880. The Participle in ‘kta' has acute on the last syllable when preceded by a Gati, or a Káraka or an Upapada, if the cor Pound denotes a Name, but not in achita* &c. This paga": uthani, aftsre: enfreza: This debars VI. 2. 49. Why do we say 'when it is not fan &c.' Observe fane &c. 1 fan, 2 guffer, 3 stratfort, 4 afruata, 5 fag, 6 ufaa, 7 wfman, 8 of me, 9 sufea (3), 10 sufra, 11 #fgaria (afeagaÌ TZT Dari &*at तदान्तोदात्तो न भवति । यदा तु fit: p*ET NEITTIZIA La) The word great in the above list does not take acute on the final, when it is the namof anything else than a “cow' ; but wheu it denotes 'a cow' it bas scute on the final, ३८८१ । प्रवृद्धादीनां च । ६।२। १४७ ॥ DWI FITRATUTAITita i 1 ggr i daİSLATIH: 1 Tufa- TUTSUA mais ·2 ܘܡܣ 9 6 e read along with V014 III. ACCENTS CH. IV. $3882.] ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS, 3881. The words pravriddha' &c., ending in ‘kta' have acute on the final, Thus प्रदः, प्रयुक्तः । The rule is applicable to compounds which do not deuote & name. It is an Akritigana. The words have acute on the final, even these words. Some hold it is only in connection with any &c. that these words bave acute on the Anal. This being an Akritigana we have garaaa a araraa, gafasan tu: &c. 1 nazwą, 2 wat aan:, 3 Try Tewa: or dyrt: arka:, 4 safen: ð afgat ay, 5 221€3, 7 fauna:, wafanua. 35471 STEHTgazariatfuta el 1985.11 EHTATHTI 3217: haza forma: EFTTEFTA FT तो रामायणः । AVANT:' FH auf F1 STUF127 ESTIUT - (acco) fa a l'ant- धाकर्मणि' (३७८२) इति तु भवति । एव' किम् ।कारकावधारणं यथा स्याद तश्रुतावधारणं # ya shitatafa aayai ZIāt vafa i tra: 1 tafa' FA 1 àa: urat देववाता । आशिष्य वेत्य वमत्रेप्टो नियमः । तेनानारती नदीत देवदत्त इत्यत्र न। शडविशेषस्य संज्ञेयमः । ततीया कर्मणि' (३७८२) इति पूर्वपदप्रतिस्वरत्वमेव भवति ॥ 3882. The final of Past Participles 'datta' and 'sruta' alone has acute, in a compound denoting a Name and a benediction, the preceding word being a word standing in close relation to an action (kâraka). Thus देवा एनंदेयासुः = देवदत्तः, विष्णुरेवं श्रूयाद = विष्णुशूत | Why do we say spreceded by a karaka' ? Observe BHNT. TTATUU: 1 The word tan indicates that the rule will not apply when a gati or upapada precedes. Why do we say of an and ya? Observe äa ufaa: (VI. 2. 48), which, though a Name, is not governed by VI. 2. 146, and does not take acute on the fiual, for the present rule makes a restriction with regard to that rule even. So that where a Participle in mi is preceded by a kâraka, and the compound denotes a benediction and a Name, the accent is not on the final, as required by VI. 2. 146, S, 3880 but such a word is governed by VI. 2. 48, S. 3782 unless the Participle be Datta and śruta, when the present rule applies, Why do we use a (alone)? ? So that the restriction should apply to *käraka', and not to Datta and, Śruta. For the words Datta and śruta will have acute on the final even after a nonkiraka word. As सधृतः Why do we say “when denoting benediction ? The rule will not apply where benediction is not meant. As aa: @T=aagia This rule applies to Datta and Sruta after a karaka-word, only when benediction is meant. It therefore does not apply to aa aa 'the name of Arjuna's conch', as migâra afa aa 28, which is governed by VI. 2. 48. 24 ·186 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. III. ACCENTS CH. IV. 88883, ३८५३ । इत्थंभूतेन कृतमिति च । ६ । २ । १४८ ॥ इत्थंभूतेन कतमित्य तस्मिन्नर्थ यः समासस्तत्र तान्तमुत्तरपदमन्तोदात्तं स्यात्। सुप्तप्रलपितम्। paitafafa fwatejar atifa afurerguía ga i ha vafaatata wa wafa igatar sau' (4-2) SFRITTA12: 3883. The Participle in kta has acute on the final, when the compound denotes 'done by one in such a condition: The word grzya means "being in such a condition.' Thus सुप्तप्रलपितम्, hartaa, as Adjectives and Abstract verbal nouns. This is an exception to VI. 2. 48. When the words gafua &c. are used to denote Noun of Action (H19) then by VI. 2. 144 they get of course acute on the final, ३८८४ । अनो आवकर्मवचनः।।२।१५० ॥ कारकात्यरममन्नत्ययान्त भाववचन कर्मवचन' चान्तोदात्तम् पयः पानं भुखम् । राणा- *7321: J120: 1 'किम । हस्तादायः । भा-'इति किम । दन्तधावनमः । करणे ल्युट् कारकात्' जिम । निदर्शनम् ॥ 3884. After a kâraka as mentioned in VI. 2. 148, the second member ending in the affix , and denoting an action in the Abstract or the object (i. l. having the senses of a Passive Adjective), has acute on the final. Thus पयपानं सुखम । This is an example of aia or Abstract Verbal Noun, TIETTERS: TCU:, is an example of aca or Passive Adjective. This is forme ed by pp under III. 3. 116. For the Sátra III. 3. 116 may be explained by saying that (1) yg is applied when the Upapada is in the objective case and bhar va is meant, (2) as well as when object is to be expressed. When the first explanation is taken, the above are examples of Bháva ; when the second explaza. tion is taken they are examples of Karma. Why do we say ending in a'? Observe Eett'iagafaan 1 Why do we say “when expressing an action in the abatract (bhava), or an Object (karma)? Observe 2017, here after an Iustrumental kâraka (III. 3, 117). Why do we say after a kâraka' ? Observe faalan In al the counter-examples, the second members retain there original accent. ३८८५ । मनक्तिव्याख्यानशयनासनस्थानयाजकादिनीताः । ६।३।१५१ ॥ SHITETTATIONarvatuaztarfa argeü I FITRATTILIZ: I TU I arfurfwesifa: E TEAT921947 1 TISTI I TISTAX STIURNAH DIGUUSH: I TIN: FTTHig किम् । 'प्रभूता संगतिम् । अत्र 'तादी च निति-' (७८४) इति स्वरः ॥ 3885. The words ending in FF ar fi affixes, and the word BATAT, qua, a, para and sia as well as ETSIT &c. have acute on the final, when at the end of a compound, preceded by a karaku word. 6 U is added ·VOL. III. ACOENTS C#. IV. $3887.) AOCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. 187 1 Ottens 2 Thus 7-TUR, -ufufta : 1 102T-TETUTA 1997- राजशयनम् । श्रासन-राजासन म । स्थान-अश्वस्थान म । याजकादि words are those which form Genitive compounds under II. 2. 9, and those compounds only are to be taken bere ; as araudia, a facut, ateitysal':, aftaste i sita - ima: This is an exception to VI. 2. 139, and in the case of min, rule VI. 2. 48 is superseded. The words 211a &c. do not denote here ata or it, bad they done so, rule VI, 2. 149 would have covered them, When the first meniber is not a karaka, we have maar afAA, Here the accent is governed by VI. 2. 50, S. 3784. 1910, 3 ufrata, 4 ofruan giat, 5 atu ata, 6 TU10, 7 SATEH (SRICH) 8 3gp, 9 era, 10 , 11 TATU, 12 affinch, 13 dia, 14 gia. 15 a 3eca i qarT: पुण्यम् ।६।२। १५२ ॥ trana 1 zzzaguur 1 arta gazte- (1978) sta nag apat: कम् । वेदेन पुण्यं वेदपुण्यम् ॥ 3886. The word 'punya' has acute on the final when preceded by a noun in the Locative case. Thus szuä = xuagoài The compounding takes place by II* 1. 40 by the process of splitting the sútra (yoga vibhaga), taking it there as a full sútra, and Dius: another. Here by VI. 2. 2, S. 3736 the first member would have preserved its accent, the present sâtra supersedes that and Ordains Route on the inal, The word gou is derived by the Uạidi atfix an (Un V. 15) and would have retained its natural accent (VI. 1. 213) and thus get acute on the first syllable by krit-accent. (VI. 2. 139). Why do we say a locative case ? Observe वेदेन पुण्यं = वेदपुण्यम् ॥ ३८८७ । जनार्थकलह तृतीयायाः । ६।२ । १५३ ॥ माषानम् । माषविकलम, । वाकलहः । वतीयापूर्व पदप्रतिस्वरापवादोयम । अन्न कोच auf RIETTUASI TUT: ca rufalztiva naziai suivia ufa- पादाक्तत्वादेव सिद्ध तृतीयाग्रहणं स्पष्टार्थम । 3887. The acute falls on the final of words having the sense of ûņa,' and of kalaba' when they are second members in a compound, preceded by a term in the instrumental case. Thus मायोनम, माविकलम . वाक्कल हैः । The compounding takes place by II. 1. 31. This is an exception to VI. 2. 2 by which the first member being in the third case, would have retained its original accent. Some say that th word अर्थ in the sûtra means the word form »u, so that the aphorisın would mean—' after an Instrumental case, the words 57, su, and yet acute on the final.' The examples will be in addition to the above: -धान्यनार्था:=धान्यायः । If this be 30, then the word-form 5 alone will be taken and not its synonyms like fame &o. To this we reply, that 59 will denote its synonymus also, by the fact of its being followed by the word in By sâtra II. 1. 13, Futů and mat always take the 5 ·Observe गुडधानाः। . THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. VOL. III. ACCENTS CH. IV. $3887 the word mián 186 Instrumental case, so we could have omitted the word चुतीयायाः, from this sutras for by the maxim of pratipadokta &c. ऊनार्थकल हं would have referred to the com pound ordained by II. 1. 31. The mention of antar here is only for the sake of Clearness ३८८८ । मिश्र चानुपसर्गमसंधौ ।।। ३ । १५४ पण बन्धनकायं संधिः । तिलमिश्राः । सर्पिमिश्राः । मिश्रम ' किम । गुडधानाः । 'अनु- पसर्गम ' किम । तिलसंमिश्राः । 'मिश्रग्रहणे सोपतर्गग्रहणस्य इदमेव ज्ञापकम । 'असंधा' किम् । ब्राह्मणमिश्री राजा। ब्राह्मणोः सह संहित ऐकार्यमापनः ॥ 3888. The word ' misra.' has acute on the final after an In. strumental case, when it is not joined with any Preposition and does not mean a compact or alliance.' Thus तिलमित्राः सपिमिश्राः । Why do we say मित्र? Why do we say not having a Preposition'? Observe faaa* far: The ema ployment in this sutra of the phrase ' anupasargam' implies, that wherever else, 1. 31 where the word मिश्र is used, we can form the Instrumental compounds with fao preceded by a preposition also Why do we say not denoting a compact?! Observe ब्राह्मणमियो राजा- ब्राह्मणैः सह सहित ऐकार्यमापनः ॥ ३८८८ । नओ गुण प्रतिषेधे संपादाहहितालमाहिताः । ६ ।२। १५५ ॥ सपाट्याट्यर्थतद्धितान्तानजो गुणप्रतिषेधे वर्तमानात्परेऽन्तोदात्ताः । कर्णवेष्टकाभ्यं तपादि कार्णवेष्टकिकम । न कार्णवेष्टक्रिकमकार्णवेष्टकिकम । छेटमर्हति छैदिकः । न की दकोच्छदिकः । न वत्सेभ्यो हितोऽवात्सीयः । न संतापाय प्रभवति असंतापिकः । नञः' किम् । गर्दभरतमर्हति गार्दभरथिकः । विगार्व भरथिकः । 'गुणप्रतिषेधे किम् । गार्दभराधिकादन्योऽगार्दभरथिकः । गुणो हि तचितार्थे प्रतिनिमित्तं सौंपादितत्वाट्युच्यते । तत्प्रतिषेधो यन्त्रोच्यते तत्रायं विधिः । कर्णवेष्ठ- काभ्यं न सौंपादि मुखमिति । समादि-इति किम् । पाणिनीयमधीते पाणिनीयः । न पाणिनीय श्रपाणिनीयः । तद्धिताः किम् । वोठुमर्हति वोढा । न वाढावोढा ॥ 3889. The words formed with the Taddhita affixes denoting fitted for that' (V. 1. 99), ' deserving that' (V. 1. 63), 'good for that' (V. 1. 5), 'capable to effect that' (V. 1. 101), bave acute on the final, when preceded by the Negative Particle nan 'when it makes a negation with regard to the abovementioned attributes. Thus संपादि ( suited for that' (V. 1. 99) -अकार्णवेष्टकिक मुखम् = न कार्ण वेष्टकिक (कर्ण वेष्टकाभ्यां सम्पादि)। The affix is ठज । अर्ह ' deserving that ' (V. 1. 63) :-अच्छेदिन कैदि कः (छेदमर्हति). The affix is ठक् (V. 1. 64 and V. 1. 19). हित 'good for that' (V. 1. 5) :-वात्सीय: =न वत्सोभ्यो हितः। The affix is ov. 1. 1. अलमर्थः 'capable to effect that' (V. 1. 101):-असतापिकः =नस- तापिकः । The affix is 33 (V. 1. 18). Why do we say ' after 75' ? Observe ग:भरथमह तिगाहभरथिकः, विगाभरथकः, where the negative वि is used and therefore the avyaya fa retaing its accent by VI. 2. 2. Wby do-we say “negation of - । । Posumi .

·? . Why die VOL. IIl. A OCENTS CH. IV. $3892; ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDŠ. 189 that attribute' ? Observe गाई भरथिकादन्यः = अगाळ भर्राथकः । The word here means the attribute denoted by the Taddhita affix, and not any attribute in general, the sense of sama padi &c? Observe पाणिनीयमधीयते - पाणिनीयः- अपाणिनीयः । Why do we say Taddhita affixes Observe कन्यां वोढुमर्हति = कन्याबोढा, न वोळा आवाटा। Here aa a křit is added in the sense of deserving '(III, 3. 169). ३८९० । ययताश्चातदर्थ । ६ ।। १५६ ॥ ययता यो तद्धिता तदन्त स्योत्तरपदस्य नजो गुणप्रतिषेविषयात्यदस्यान्त उदात्तः स्यात् पाशानां समूहः पाश्या अपाश्यान पाश्या प्रदत्यम् । अतदर्थ 'किम् । श्रपादाम् । 'द्धितः' किम् । अदेयम् । · मुशातिधेधे' क्रिम् । दंत्यादन्यददंत्यम् ॥ + तदनुबन्धग्रहणे नातदनुबन्धकस्यति । नेह । अवामदेव्यम् 3890. The words formed with the Taddhita affixes 4 and u when not denoting 'useful for that,' have acute on the last syllable, after the particle as negativing the attribute. Thus पाशानां समूहः = पाश्याः, न पाश्या: अया:, (IV. 2. 49) दन्तेषु भवं-दन्त्यम् मदनत्यं अदनत्यम , (V. 1. 6). Why do we say atadartha:--not useful for that, Observe पाटार्थ मुदकम =पाटयम , न पाठाम = अघाटाम (V, 4. 25). Why do we say • 'Taddhita'? This rule does not apply when the affixes are not Taddhita, as अदेयम् formed with the krit-affix up 1 Why do we say ' negativing the attribute'There must be negation of the attribute, otherwise garaa=FÅTA, I Paribhasha:- “When a term with one or more Anubandhas is employed in Grammar, it does not denote that which in addition to those one or more anubandhas has another Anubandha attached to it." The affix 2 and un, one without any anubandha and the other with the anubandha a being specifically mentioned, excludes all other affixes having y as their effective element, such as a &c. (IV. 2. 9), thus न वामदेव्यं वामदेव्यम । See IV. 2. 9. ३८९५ । अचकावशक्तौ । ६ । २ । १५७ ॥ अजन्तं कान्तं च नजः परमन्तोदात्तमशक्ती गम्यायाम् । अपचः पक्तमशक्तः। अविलिख: अशक्तो किम् । अपचा दीक्षितः । गुणप्रतिषेध इत्येव । अन्योऽयं पचादपचः ॥ 3891. A word formed with the krit affix अच and क, preced: ed by the particle 2757, has acute on the final, when the meaning is 'not capable'. Thus अप:=य पक्तुं न शक्रोति, so also अविलिखः- (III. 1. 134 &c). Why do we say when meaning not capable'? Observe par afaa: 1 À afaa does not cook his foud, not because he is physically in capable of cooking, but because by the vows of his particular order he is prohibited from cooking. ३८९२ । आकाशे च ।। २ । १५८ ॥ नञः परावच्कावन्तोदात्तावाक्रोशे। अपचा जास्मः । पक्तुं न शनोतीत्येवमाम्रोश्यते । विक्षिपः ॥ pan । ।

·190 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [Vol. III. ACCENTI CE. IV. 83895. : क .. . 3892. A word formed by the kțit-affixes Ty or st, preceded by the Negative particle, has acute on the final when one abuses soinebody by that word. Thus अपचे। ऽ जाल्मः * this rogue does not cook, though he can do so. Here avarice is indicated, the fellow wants more pay bofore he will cook : and not his incapacity. So also ufafao": 1 ३८८३ । संज्ञायाम् ।६।२ । १५८ ॥ नञः परमन्तीदातं सजायामाकोशे। प्रदेवदत्त 3893. When abuse is meant, a word preceded by naö' has acute on the final, in denoting a Name. Thus अदेवदतः No Devallatta, not deserving of this name.' ३८९४ । अयोकोच्चादियश्च । ६।३ । १६० ॥ नजः परेऽन्तोदात्ताः स्युः। अकर्तव्यः । उक। अनागामुकः । इष्णुच् । अनलकरिष्णुः । दृष्णजग्रहणे खिष्णुचो व्यनुबन्धकस्यापि ग्रहणामकारादेवि धानसाभयात् । श्रनायभविष्णुः । चार्वादिः । अदाः। 'राजाहोछन्दसि' । अराजा । भानहः । 'भाषायाम 3894. After the Negative particle, words formed by the kritya, affixes (III. 1. 95), by उक, and इष्णुच. and the words चार &c. have acute on the final. Thus kritya:--अकर्तव्यमः। उक: अनागामुकः । इष्णुचअनलकरिष्णुः । The afix para includes frau also : though the latter contains two anubandhas. sâtru III. 2. 57 famnar is ordained after I but instead of fema with 3, the affir might have been well exhibited as a without . As is udåtta, + खष्णुच - भू + इ + खष्णुच् । So that we would have got the required form. as a matter of fact the affis is exhibited there with an 3 for the sake of the present sâtra only, so that saya here may include Frasva also I arciufan", HTS Aca-प्रचार, प्रसाधुरः, अयोधिकः, श्रवदान्यः, अननङ्गमेजयः (double negation). अन- कस्मात् (double negation). The words वर्तमान, वर्धगान त्वरमाणा, ध्रीयमाण, रोचमान क्रीयमाण, and शोभमान preceded by (नझ) when denoting names have acute on the final. अविकार :, असदृश: and श्राविकारसदशः (विकार and सदृश taken jointly and separa tely). अग्रहर्यात, अग्रहत्तिकः अराजा and अनहः in the Vedas only. In the Vernacular they have the accent of नज, i. e. udattar on the first. चारु साधु, 3 योर्धा क (योधिक) 4 अनङ्गमेजय, 5 वदान्य, 6 अकस्मात, 7 धर्त मानवर्धमानत्वरमाणध्रियमाणक्रीयमाणरोचमानशोभमानाः (क्रियमाण क्रोयमाण) संज्ञायाम, 8 विकारसदृशे ब्यस्ते समस्ते (अविकार, असदृश अविकारसदृश), 9 ग्रहपति, 10 हपतिक, 11 राजाहोशछन्दसि ॥ ३८८५ । विभाषा तृबनतीक्षणशुचिषु । ६।२ । १६१ ॥ सन् । प्रकर्ता । अन्न । अननम् । अतीक्षणम् । अशुचि । पक्षेऽव्ययस्वरः ॥ amaee In But 1. 2 ·191 VOL. III. AOCENTS CH. IV. $3897.] ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. अशुचिः - 3895. After the Negative particle, the final of the follow. ing is optionially acute :-a word formed with the affix 'trin,' and the words अन्न, तीक्ष्ण, and चि ॥ Thus तन-प्रalf or *कर्ता ; अन्न &c-अनम् or अनन्नम्, प्रतीक्षणम्, or ती- क्षणाम, अचिः The alternative accent is that of the Indeclinable (VI. 2.2). ३८८६ । बहुव्रीहाविदमेतत्तद्वयः प्रथमपूरण योः क्रियागण ने । ६।३।१६२ ॥ सम्भ्योऽनयारन्त उदात्तः । इदं प्रथममस्य स इदंप्रथमः। एतद्वितीयः। तत्पञ्चमः । बहुव्रीही ' किम् । अनेन प्रथम इदंप्र यमः। · तृतीया-' (६६२) इति योगविभागात्समासः । 'इदमेतत्तद्भयः' किम । यत्प्रथमः । 'प्रथमपुरणयोः' किम । तानि बहून्यस्य तद्वदुः। ' क्रिया गणने' किम । अयं प्रथमः प्रधानं सवांत इदंप्रथमाः । द्रव्य गणमिदम । 'गणने' किम । अयं प्रथम एघांत इदंप्रथमाः । इदंप्रधाना इत्यर्थः । उत्तरपदस्य कार्य त्वात्क्राप पूर्व मन्तोदात्तम । इद प्रथमकाः। बहुव्रीहाविधिकारी वन समासे (३६५२) इत्यतः प्राग्बोधयः ॥ 3896. In a Bahuvrihi, after the words इदम, एतद् and तद the last syllable of TUA and of a proper Ordinal Numeral, has the acute, when the number of times of an action is meant. Thus इदं प्रयमं गमनं भोजनं वास इदमप्रथमः · this is the first time of going or eating.' एतद्वितीयः, तत्पञ्चमः । Why do we say “in a Babuyrihi ?! Observe अनेन प्रथमः इदंप्रथमः । Here the compounding takes place under S. 692 by dividing that sûtra into two parts by the method of yoga-bibhâga. Here the first member, being in the third case, retains its accent by VI. 2. 2. Why do we say after idam &c.' Observe यत्प्रथमः = यःप्रथम एषाम, here the first term retains its accent by VI. 2. 1. Why do we say of prathanna and the Ordinals: ? Observe तानिबहून्यस्य % A Why do we say (in counting an action '? Observe श्रयं प्रथम एषांत इद WORT: ! Here substances are counted and not action. Why do we say in counting'? Observe अयं प्रथम एषां इदं प्रथमा: ... इदं प्रधाना: und the word प्रथम means here foremost, and is not a numeral. When the am affix is added, the acute falls on the last syllable preceding As इदं प्रथमकाः | Tue Bahuvrihi governs the subsequent sutras up to VI. 2,178,S.3912. ३८९७ । संख्याया: स्तनः । ६।३। १६३ ॥ बहुवोहावन्तोदात्तः । द्विस्तना। चतुस्तना । 'सख्याया:' किम् । दर्शनीयस्तना । 'स्तनः' किम् । द्विशिराः। 3897. In a Bahuvrîbi, after a Numeral, the word 'stana' has acute on the final. Thus द्विस्तना, चतुःस्तनाः। Why do we say after a Numeral ' ? Observe वशनीयस्तना। Why do we say 'स्तन'? Observe द्विशिराः ॥ ।

·TEE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. III. A GCENTS CH. IV. $3898 । ३८१८ । विभाषा छन्दसि ।।३।१६४ ॥ 'द्विस्तनाः करोति । 3898. Optionally so, in the Vedas, the stana after a Numer al has acute on the final. Thus द्विस्तनी or द्विस्त ना, चतुःस्तनों or चतुःस्तना ॥ ३८९। संज्ञायां मित्राजिनयाः।६।३।१६५ ॥ देवमित्रः । कृष्णाजिनम् । 'मज्ञायाम किम् । प्रियमित्रः ॥ * ऋषिप्रतिषेधोत्र.मित्रे विश्वामित्रर्षिः ॥ 3899. In a Bahuvrihi, ending in mitra' and ajina' the acute falls on the last syllable, when the compound denotes a Name. As देवमित्रः, कृष्णाजिनम् । Why do we say a Name' ? Observe fuufan: Part:-Prohibition must be stated in the case of fat when the paine is that of a Rishi, As विश्वामित्र: which is governed. by VI. 2. 106॥ ३९०० । व्यवायिनोइन्तरम् । ६ । २ । १६६ ॥ व्यवधानवाचकात्परमन्तरमन्तोदात्तम् । वस्त्रमन्तरं व्यवधायकं यस्य स वस्त्रान्तरः । धायिनः किम् । श्रात्मान्तरः । अन्यस्वभाव इत्यर्थः ॥ 3900. In a Babuvrihi ending in 'antara' the acute fails on the final, after a word which denotes that which lies between.' Thus वस्त्रान्तरम् ' through an intervened cloth or drapery, वस्त्रमन्तरं व्यव- धायक यस्य &c. Why do we say when meaning lying between '? श्रात्मान्तरम = श्रात्मा स्वभावान्तरोऽन्यायस्य । ३९०१ । मुखं स्वाङ्गम् । ६।२। १६७ ॥ गौरमुखः 'स्वाङ्गम् किम् । दीर्घमुखा शाला॥ 3901. In a Bahuvrîhi the acute is on the final, when the sea cond member is. ' mukha' meaning mouth i. e. the actual bodily part of an animal and not used metaphorically. Thus गौरमुखः । Why do we say actual part of a body'? Observe: दीर्घमुखा शाला। Here मुख means • entrance'. ३९०२ । नाव्यदिक्छट्ठगोमहत्स्थूलभुष्टिपृथुवत्सेभ्यः । ६ । २ । १६८ ॥ उच्चैर्मु खः । प्राङ्मुखः । गोमुखः । महामुखः । स्थूलमुखः । मुष्टिमुखः । पृथुमुखः । प्रत्सा मुखः । पूर्वपटप्रकृतिस्वरोऽत्र । गोमुष्टिवत्स पूर्वपदस्योपमानलक्षणोऽपि विकल्पोऽनेन वाध्य ते ॥ 3902. In a Bahuvithi, the acute does not fall on such. mukha ' denoting a real mouth, when it comes after an Indeclin. able, and a name of a direction, or after गो, महत, स्थल, मुष्टि, पृथु and am । Thus अध्ययः उचैर्मुखः। The word उच्चैः is finally acute and retains its accent. ठिक-प्राङ्मुखः। The word nig has acute on the first by. VI, 2, 52, IĪT &c i ·VOL. III. ACIENTS Ca. IV. $3904.] ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. 1 $ गोमुखः, म है।मुखः' स्थूल मुखः, मुष्टि मुखः, पृथु मुखः, and वत्स मुखः In these the first members of the Bahu vrihi preserve their respective accents, under Role VI. 2. ani in the case of compoun is preceled by itt, Fre, and area, the optional rule taught in the next sätra is also superseded by anticipation, though the words may denote comparison. 3003 i faciataTZPATROTRIEDNIEC II निष्ठान्तादुरमानवाचिनश्च पर मुब स्वार वान्तोदात्तं बडुबो हो । प्रक्षालितमुखः । पत्रे 'निष्टोपसर्ग -' (३८४५) इति पूर्व पदान्तोदात्तत्सम । पूर्व पदप्रतिस्वात्वेन गतिस्वरोऽपि भवति । उपमानम् । सिंहमुखः ॥ 3903. In a Bahuvrihi, the word mukha' denoting an actual mouth,' has optionally the acute on the final, when prece led by a participle in 'ta' or by that wherewith something is compared. Thus warga: or warraga: or warnaga: 1 When the final is not acute, then Rrle VI. 2. 110 S. 3844 applies which makes the first member have aonte on the final optionally ; and when that also does not apply, then by VI. 2. 1. the first member preserves its original accent, which is that of the gati (VI. 3. Thus there are three forms, So also with a word denoting comparison : frega: or fa ega: ३९०४ । जातिकालसुखादिभ्योऽनाच्छादनाततोऽसमितीतपत्राः । ६ । २ । 1 ভয়াল OTTESTU: I F1#Sta: 1 aasta: I : 4:1 'stfara-' gfa foræl ga67a: 1 ATESTAA' PER I BERET: 1 en- sfa far कुण्डलतः । कुण्ड मतः U#: 1 F1530ETAG 1787 utfara: in 3904. After a word denoting a species with the exception of a word for garment or covering', and after a time-denoting word, as well as after “sukha' &c. the Participle in ‘kta' has acute on the final, in a Bahuvrihi, but not so when the participles are कृत, fan and afaga u Thus FITTES: 1 TT: --HesIÀ: 1 genia': 1 grasra': 1 Why do we say * after a Species, a time or go &c. word '? Obserye : (II. 2. 37), the participle being placed after the word Putra Why do we say when not meaning a garment' ? Observe Era: front the root at with the affixes 67. Why do we gay when not that &c.' ? Observe হযঞ্জন, asfaa:, **03 waua: Fus is first acute by Phit II. 3. being neuter. These three participlex do not staud first in a compound (contrary to II. 2. 36). This sûtra implies that as a special cage Nishtha participles may stand second in a compound. the counter-examples, above given, the first members retain their original accent (VI, 2. 1). The words great fe are given under III. 1. 18. &c. : " ·THE SIDDEANTA KAUxupI. [Vors. III. ACCENTS CH. IV 33904 ཆུ་ཚོག1: 6 P!His 6 cm I gu,2 3:03, 377, (ap ära) 4 , 5 , 6 474, 7 miles, watu, EU, 10 mu, 11 818, 12 a. BCOVI a ara 1499 11 Sifa taguim OT SAADET anlama:'! 6a: 1 fiesta: I 3905. After a species (with the exception of garment) or a time denoting word, or after - sukha'&c. in a Bahuvrihi, the word játa ' has optionally acute on the final. Thus ansia: or 291a:, AT2917" or **19517:, pasia": or fusra*: or AIA: &c. The word za is first-aoute by Phit II. first-acute by Phit II. 15. The words go and ca are end.acute by Phit I. 6. ३९०६ । नसुम्याम् । ६।२! १७२ ।। azaleigaTTTATIZIA ! Falfe: i gara: 1 3906. A Bahuvrihi formed by the Negative particle 'Daii or by by ' su' has acute on the last syllable of the compound. Thus fatit, pria": $cos i afa gaiei PI $3_1 मजसुभ्यां परं यदुत्तरपदं तदन्तस्य FABRA gagari afu w 557aF#: 1 g मारीकः॥ 3907. A Bahuvrihi, formed by nañ' or su and ending ni the affix kap' (V. 4. 153) has acute on the syllable preceding the affix. By the last sútra, the accent would have fallen on ma, this makes it fall on the vowel preceding it. Thus nanan*, * 101*: # REDE | हत्वान्तेऽनत्यात्पर्वम् । ६।३। १०४ ॥ इस्त्रान्त उत्तरप्रदे संसपसे चान्त्यातपूर्वमुदात्तं कपि नासुभ्यां परं बहुचीही। अधोहिकः । मुमाषकः। पूर्वमित्यनुवर्तमाने पुनः पूर्वग्रहणं प्रतिभेदेन नियमार्थम् । हस्वान्तेऽन्स्यादेव पूर्व पदम दातं न कपि पूर्व मिति । अज्ञ कः । कबन्तस्य वान्तोदात्तत्वम् ॥ 3908. When the compound ends in a light vowel, the acute falls on the syllable before such last, in a Bahu vrihi preceded by nafi' and 'su' to which added. Thus ma" fə, går: 1 The repetition of gå in this sûtra, though its apuvritti was present from the last, shows, that in tlie last aj horism, the xyllable preceding zu takes the acnte, while here the syllable preceding the short-comel-ending final syllable has the acute and not the syllable preceding This is possible with a word which is, at least, of two syllables (not counting, of couise, and ifi or *U). Therefore, in **: and a**:, the acute is on the syllable preceding, Fita by VI. 2. 173, because it has here no autyátu PILIV?107, 1 kap’is ·क 3909. A Bebuvrihi with bahu ' has the same accent as VOL. III. ACCEXTS CE. IV". $3911.] ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDS. ३९०६ । बहोनवदुत्तरपदभून्नि । ६ । २॥ १०५ ॥ उत्तरपदार्थबहुत्य बाविना बहोः परस्य पदस्य नजः परस्येव स्वरः स्यात् । दुबीहिक अमित्रकः । 'उत्तरपद-' इति किम । बहुषु मानोस्य स वहुमानः । when it denotes muchness of the object expressed by the second member. In other words, Bahuvrihi with the word as in the first member, in governed by all those rules which apply to a Bahuvrihi with a Negative Partiola such as Rules VI. 2. 172 &c, when this gives the sense of multiety of the objects, denoted by the second member. Thus बहुव्रीहिकः by VI. 2. 174. बहुमि प्रतः ॥ Why do we say * uttara.pada bhâmni-when multeity of the object denoted by the second member is meant' ? Observo sहुषु मानोऽस्य - बहुमानः श्रमज (VI.2.1). ३६१० । न गुणादयोऽप्रयाः । ६ । २ । १७६ ॥ अवयववचिनो बहोः परे गुणादयो मान्तोदाता बहुधीहो । बहुगुणा रज्नः । बहुदरं- पदम । बध्यायः । गुणादिरातिगणः । 'अवनवाः ' क्रिम बहुगुणो द्विजः। अध्यमश्रुतसदा- . चारादयो गुणाः॥ 3910 In a Bahuvrihi, after babu,' the acute does not fall on the final of 'guņa' &c. when they appear in the compound as ingredient of something else. Thus बहु गुणाः रज्जः, बहतर पदम , बहुध्यायः (VI. 2. 1). गुणाठि is all Akrtigant. Why do we say " when it denotes an avayava or ingredient'! Obr serve बहुगुणे ब्राह्मण : अध्ययनश्रुतसदाचाराटयात्रगुणाः ॥ गुण, 2 अक्षर, 3. अध्याय, 4 सूक्त, छन्दोमान, श्राक्रतिगया । ३८११ । उपसर्गात्स्वाझं ध्रुवमय ।। २ । १७७ ॥ प्रयुष्ठः । प्रललाटः । ध्रुवमेकरूपम् । ' उपसर्गात ' क्रिम् ! दर्शनीयष्ठः । 'स्वादुम् ' शिम् । मशाखा वक्षः। 'ध्रुवम् ' किम् । उद्याहुः । अपर्यु' किम् । विपशुः । 39 11. A. word. denoting a part of the body, which is constant (and indispensable), with the exception of “ parsu ' has, after a Preposition in a Bahuyrihị compound, the acute on the last syllable. Thus प्रष्टः; प्रललाट । सतत घस्य: प्रगतं पृष्ठं भवति स नएष्ठः ॥ Why do we say after a Preposition' } Obserre दर्शनीयपृष्ठः॥ Why do we say part of the body' ? Observe प्रशाखा वत्तः ॥ Why do, we say 'dhruva-constant and indispensable' 3. Observe giti सोशति । Here the hand is raise l up only at the time of cursing and not always $ the state of 2017 is temporary and not permanent, Why do we say with the exceptiou of ej? Observo fa ui: (VI, 2, 1), ·TEE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [Vol. III. ACCENTS CH. IV. {$917. इलप२ । वनं समासे।६।३।१७८ ॥ समासमात्रे उपसर्गादुत्तरपद धनमन्तोदात्तम् । तस्य दिमे प्रथयो । 3912. After a preposition,' vana' has acute on the final in compounds of every kind. Thus प्रवर्ण यष्टध्यम, निर्वाँ प्रविधीयते, the न changed to or by VIII. 4.3 Te void sama:a is used in the sutra to indicate that all skirts of compounds are neant, otherwise only Bahuvrihi would have been meant. १ अस्मात्परं धनमन्तोदात्तम् । अन्तर्वणा देशः । अनुपसार्थमिदम, ॥ 3913. After antar' the acute falls on the final of vana.' Thus अन्तर्वणी देशः। This sutra is made in order to make वन Oxy toued, when a preposition (upaserga) does not precede, ३९१४ । अन्तश्च ।६।२।१८० ॥ उपसर्गादत्रः शब्दोऽसीदासः पन्तः। समन्तः॥ 3914. The word antar ' nas acute on the final when preceded hy a Preposition. Thus पर्यन्त:, समन्तः । This is a Bahuvrihi or a प्रादि compound. ३६१५ । न निविभ्याम् ।६।२ । १८१ ॥ म्यन्तः ! यन्तः । पूर्वपदप्रतिस्वरे यणि चकते उदात्तरितमार्ययः- (३६५७) इति क 3915. The word antar has not acute on the final, after the prepositions ni and vi. Thus न्यन्तः, व्यन्तः, here the first member retains its acute, and semivowel is then substituted for the vowel then the subst quent grave is changed to Sarita by VIII, 2. 4.S. 3657. ३९१६ । पररभिताभावि मण्डलम्।६।२।१८२॥ परेः परमभित उभयतो भावो यस्यास्ति तत्कूलादि मगइल चान्तोदात्तम् । परिकूलम परिमण्डलम् ॥ 3916. After ' pari' a word, whicb expresses something, which has both this side and that side, as well as the word 'waidala' has acute on the final. Thus परिकूल म्, परिमण्डलम ॥ ३६१७ । प्रादस्वाझं संज्ञायाम् । ६ । २ । १८३ ॥ मटकम् । अस्वाङ्गम किम् । प्रपदम् ॥ 3917. After prix, a word, which does not denote a part of body, has acute on the final, when the compound is a name.

·III. ACCENT CL. T21. ACCENTS OF CONTOUNDS Thuis waar. 1 Why do we say not denoting a bully part? Oi serve ३० । निस्तकादीनि च।६।३।५८४ ॥ श्रान्तोदात्तानि। निरुदकम् । निरूपलम् ॥ 3918. The words airu laks &c, have acule on the final, Thus निदम, निहलमनिरुपलम . 1 निन्दक, 2 निरूपल निरूलए 3 निर्मक्षिक, 4 निर्मशक, निष्ककादक 6नक कालिका, निय पेध, दुस्तरीप, 9 निस्तरोप, 10 निस्तरीक, 11 निरांजन, 12 उर्दाजन, 13 उपाजिन, ! খুন লজমজমা নিহা, । NOTE: -These may the considered either as आदि समास or Bihivrihi. If they be considered Ravjayi błáva do compounds then they are en 1-10ute aja really by VI. I. 223. The word Tech 77: निकान्तः कालकात, is a Pralli-sanuaka with the word my ending in the affix . The word gacio: is thus formed : tu the ruot is added the ans and we have act (Un 111. 158) Ata utia = सरोपः ; कुत्सित स्तरीय = तुस्तरीयः । The word नितरीकः is fime : Ly udding the fie u to the Babavribi fima , The words 997, uia, sis and so have acute un the finaal atter परि, , परिक्षा परिणाद, परियोशः, ail परिधः ॥ ३८१८ । सो खन् । ६ । २ । १८५ ॥ अभिमुखम । 'उपहात्स्याङ्कम -' (३६११) ति सि बहुरर्थमध्रुवार्थ मस्वाहार्थं च अभिमुखा शाला॥ 3919. The word mukha has acute on the final when preced. ed by abhi. As, afaga, 1 It is a Bahuvrihi or a urfa sanåsa. If it is an Avyayibháva, then it would have acute on the final by VI. 1. 223 also, By VI. 2. 177, even he would have oxytone after an upasarga, the present sutra makes the additional declaration that he is oxytone even when the coin pound is not a Bahuvrihi, when it does not denota an indispensable part of body, or a part of body even, as was the case in VI. 2. 177. Thus अभिमुखा शाला ॥ ३९२० । अपाच्च।६।। १८६॥ अपमुखम । अपमुखम, योर्गावभाग उत्तरार्थः । 3920. The word 'n ukha' has acute on the final, after the preposition apa. Tbus mort". The separation of this from the last sätra, is for the enke of the subsequent aphorism, in which the aquvridii of my only gues. ३८२१ । फिरपूतकीणाजी निसीरनाम नाम च । ६।२ । १८७ ॥ अपादिमान्यन्तोदात्तानि । अस्फिगम् । अधपूतम् । अग्रवीणम् । अजस् । अपाजः । अध्यन् । अपाध्वम् । उपसर्गादध्वनः' (१५३) इत्यस्याभाव इदम् । एतद । च ज्ञापन समासान्तानित्यत्व । अपक्षि । सीरनाम । अपसोरम । अपहलम । नाम । अपनाम । फिगपूतकुक्षिग्रहणमबहुध वय. मधुवार्थमस्वाक्षार्थ ॥ । -- ·THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI (VOL. III. ACCENTS CH. IV. $3927. 3921. The words फिग, पून, वीणा, अञ्जस्, अध्वम्, कुति, नामन् and a word denoting 'a plough', have acute on the final, when preceded by apa. Thus suffering, aagaw, suatha, #9153":, 71127* (This ordains acute on the final, where the compound a pâdhwa does not take the samâsanta afix na by V. 4. 85, when it takes that affix, the acute will also fail on the final because wa is a faz affix.) This further shows that the samâsanta affixes are not compulsory. (mfarasa ga11#:), nufa:, writi, que, বঙ্গাল, muath These are wire compounds or Bahu vrihi or Avyayibhavits. Some of these viz. f6587, ga and afa: will be end-acute by VI. 2. 177, also when they denote parts of body and a permanent condition and the compound is a Bahovrihi. Here the compound must not be a Bihuvrihi, 2r slạould these words denote parts of body aud permanent condition of these parts, ३९२२ अधेपरिस्थम् । ६।२।१८८ ॥ Wazt antsfuza: 1 artuft sját a:1 'soft' f I feUÆ 3922. After wu, that word, which denotes that thing which, overlaps or stands upon, has acute on the final. Thus ufuar := heiufT ÊTSHUTCHİT ET a tooth that grows over another tootb. Why do we say when nieaning standing upon ? Observe अधिक रणम। Here the acute is on 57, the krit-formed second member retaining its accent (VI. 2. 139). ३८२३ अनारप्रधाननीयसी।६।२।१८।। अनोःपरमप्रधानवाचि कनीयञ्चान्तोदात्तम । अनुगतो ज्येष्ठमनुज्येष्ठः । पूर्वपदार्थप्रधानः प्रादिसमासः । अनुगतः कनीयाननुक्रनीयान् । उत्तरपदार्थप्रधानः । प्रधानार्थ च कनीयाग्रहणम् 'अप्र-' इति किम् । अनुगतो ज्येष्ठोऽनुज्य ष्ठः। 3923. After ‘anu'a word which is not the Principal, as well as 'kaniyas' has acute on the final. The word mula means a word which stands in a dependant relation in a 'eompound. Thus sanat İSA = 7e': These are ulfa samâsa in which the first member is the principal or Prathậua. अनुगतः कनीयान् = अनु झनीयान, here the second member is the Principal : the purd malog is taken as yunA, Y Had it been non-pradlêtia, it would be covered by the first portion of the sûtra, anul there would have been no necessity of its separate emuneration. Why do we Bay 'ytuja'? Observe sanat zãos:=wasio, where this is the Principal. ३९२४ । पुरुषश्चानवादिष्टः । ६ । २ । १९० ॥ अनाः परीत्वादिष्टघाचो पुरुषोऽन्तोदात्तः । अन्वादिष्टः पुरुषोऽनुपुरुधः । श्रन्त्रादिष्टः frei VINA: grāts795u: x 1 :

·TOL. HIT. ACCENTS. CH. IV.$5527.] ACCENTS OF COMPOUNDI. * 3924. After anu' the acute falls on the final of purusha,s when it means a man of whom mention was already made. The word a means of a secondary importance, inferior,' or 'mer, tioned again after having already been mentioned.' Thus i tia: 980:- ya; buit hang : = *a: 30 YI HAZICI 1969 sä: OTHER 62782321-izra: 1 h at: fwaar gasiti maa ক্ষম। গাঙ্গোহ্ম:। * अतेतुलेोप पति वाच्यम' । दृहमा भूत् । शोभनो गार्यो तिगायः । दुध च स्यात् । গুনগান: স্বাক না ভাঃ ॥ 3925. After 'ati' a word not formed by a krit-affix, and the word 'pada' have acute on the last syllable. This su atiti, afacer mit Why do we say nonkrit.word and Obserre fami*: a Vært:--The rule is restricted to those compounds in which a root bas been elidel. That is, when in analysing the compound, a verb like is to be ern ployed to conxplete the sense. Tberefore, it does not apply to 1 THÔT 11110: = xfart: 1 But it would apply to faktami, which when analysed becomes equal to wait: 3167 365 FUTA IL 1962 FHUTAAVATI I nasza faunai #rafaat: 1 far I FUA, I fuit fefio, i fartar zuer fazat: 3926. After 'ni' the second member has the acute on the last syllable, when the sense is of not laying down.' The word fauri=21ai not making manifest.' Thus निमलम्, न्यम् । Why do we say when meaning not laying down'? Observe fazos:=fafta! The force of fe is that of futa here. ३९२७ । प्रतेरंवादयस्तत्पुरुषे । ६ ।२। १९३ ॥ प्रतेः परेंऽश्वादयोऽन्तोदात्ताः । प्रतिगलोऽ शुः प्रत्यंशुः। प्रतिजनः । प्रतिराजा । समासान्तस्य Farurate za 3927. In a Tatpurusha compound, the word "ansu' & have acute on the final when preceded by “prati.' Thus urit", wasa:, warisan In the case of via this rule applies: when the Samásânta affix za is not added, when that affix is added, the acute will also be ou the final by virtue of zą which is a fan affix. 1 , 2 57, 3 1797, 4 se, 5 azz (üzm), 6 mfsit, 7 saat, 8 sau, 9 #fanfit, 10 , 11 gr (Frågt tågt:) 11 The würå stig is formed by the afoix es under the general class Eng! (U1. 37), Tag is formed by the affis af54 (Un I. 158), zĘ by adding a to 6 ·200 . सोमस्य स THE SIDDILANTA KAUMUDI. [VoL. IIT. ACCIRNTS. CH. IV. 83927. उघ to buin' (Un IV. 162), रिख, + ण्वुल = खेटक ; अजिर is formed by किर (Up I. 53) श्रा+ ट्रा+अड़ (III. 3. 106), with the angment र dded to भाद्री | श+स्युट. = श्रवणा ॥ सत + सिकन् = कृत्तिका (Un III. 147) ऋध्+अच् (IIL 1. 134) Why do we say in the Tatpurusha'? Observe प्रतिगता अंशवोऽस्य प्राय शुग्यमुष्टः॥ ३९८ । उपादयजिनमगौरादयः । ६ । २ । १८४ ॥ उपात्यरं यः दुश्च कजिनं चान्तोदात्तं तत्युसमे गौरादीन्वयित्वा । उपदेवः उपेन्द्रः । उपालि नम । ‘अगारादयः' किन । उपगारः। उपतषः । तत्पुरुषे' किम । उपगतः उपसामः॥ 3928. Iu a Tatpurusha, the words of two syllables and ajina ' have acute o on the final when preceded by upa' but not wlien they are ' gaura ' and the rest. Thus उगता देवः= उपदेव:, उमेन्द्रः, उपजिन । But not so in उपगारः, उपनेषः &o. 1 गौर. 2 नेष (नघ) 3 तेल, 4 लेट, 5 लोट, 6 जिहा, 7 कृष्ण, (शष्या) 8 कन्या, 9 गुध (गुड) 10 कल्य, 11 माद Why in a Tatpurusha.' ? Observe उपगतः सोमोऽस्य - उपसामः ॥ ३९२६ । सोरवते पणे।६।२ । १९५ ॥ सुप्रत्यवसितः । सूरत्र पुजायामेव । वाक्यार्थस त्वत्र निन्दा असूयया तथाभिधानात् । 'सो सिम । अत्राह्मणः । 'अत्रने प्रणे' किम । सुवषणम् ॥ 3929. After su,' the second member has acute on the final in a Tatpurusha compound, when reproach is meant, in spite of the addition of 'su' which denotes praise. Thus इह खल्विदानी, सुस्थण्डिले सुसफिताभ्यां सुप्रत्यासितः । The word सु here verily denotes praise, but it is the sens: of the whole sentence that indicates re. proach or censure. Why do we say ? Observe सुब्रालयः I Why when reproach is meant ' ? Ouserve शोभनेषु तोषु = सुतणेषु So also सुवृषणम्॥ ३९३० । विभाषोत्युच्छे ६ । २ । १६ ॥ तत्युरुये। उत्कान्तः पुच्छादुत्युच्छः । यदा तु पुच्छमुदस्यति उत्युच्छयते । 'एच' (३२३१) । उत्पुछ तदा था यादिवरेशा नित्यमन्तादात्तत्वे प्राप्ते विकल्पोऽयम । सेयमुभयत्र निभाषा । 'तत्पुरुधे झिम, । उदस्तं पुच्छ येन स उत्युच्छः ॥ 3930. In a Tatpurusha, the word 'utpuchha' may optionally have acute on the final. Thus उत्कान्तः पूच्छाल-उत्युच्छः or or उत्युच्छः (VI. 2. 2). When this word is derived by the afix अच् (III. 3. 56 S. 32 31) from पुच्छमुदस्यति-उत्युच्छति, then it would always have taken acute on the final by VI. 2. 144, the present sûtra ordains option there also, The rule does not apply to a nou-Tatpursha : :6, 32A पुच्छमस्य- उत्युच्छ ः ॥ " ७ safter सु ·201 VOL. III. ACCENTS CH. IV. $3933.) AOCENTS OF COMPOUNDS, . - ३९३१ । त्रिभ्यां पावन्मूर्धसु बहुव्रीहो । ६ । २ । १७ ॥ श्राभ्यां परेष्व वन्तोदाता वा। द्विपाच्चतुष्पाच्च रथाय' । 'त्रिपादृय:' । द्विदन *त्रिमूर्धान" सप्तरश्मिम्' । मूर्धनित्यकृतसमासान्त एव मूर्ध शब्दः। तस्य तत्प्रयोज मसत्यपि समासान्त अन्तोदात्तत्वं यथा स्यात् । एतदेव जापकम 'xअनित्यः समासान्तो भवति' इति । या पि च समासान्तः क्रियते तथापि बहुव्रीहिकार्यत्वात्तदेकदेशत्वाच समासान्तोदानस्य पने भवत्य व । हिमूर्धः। द्वित्रिभ्याम् ' किम् । कल्याणमूर्धा । ' बाहुबोहा' किम् । द्वयोमर्धा हिमर्धा ॥ 3931. In a Bahuvrihi, the words are, and a have optionally acute on the final after द्वि and त्रि || Thus at viztak = foræ or feara as in fauir gaura a Tua (Rig Vedit IV. 51. 5) त्रिपाद or त्रि Pure as in faurgu (Rig Veda X. 90. 4) fra or fala द्विद्ध or द्विमूर्धा as in त्रिमूर्धानम् सप्तरश्मिम् (Rig Veda I. 146, 1). The worl पाद is पाद with its elided, (V. 4. 140) दत् is the substitute of दन्त (V. 4. 141) and मूर्धन retains its न not allowing samāsanta affix. This also iudicates that the sanasanta rule is not universal, When the samâsanta affix is added, then also the acute is on the final, for the graf is here the Babuvrihi compound, and this is only a part of it. Thus fare:, faue': Why after fg and F# ? Observe it! मूर्धा here the first rnember is middle acute by Phit II. 19 and this accent is retained (VI. 2. 1.) Why Bahuvrihi' ? Observe qui ei=fapef a ३८३२ । सक्थं चाक्रान्तात् ।६।३। १९८ ॥ गरिसक्यः । श्लच्यासक्थः । 'श्राक्रान्तात् किम । चक्रसक्थः । समासान्तस्य पश्चित्तवा अत्यमेवान्तोदात्तत्वं भवति । 3932. The word 'saktha' has acute on the final optionally, when preceded by any word other than what ends in ‘kra' The word सक्थ is the samisanta form of सथि (V. 4. 113). Thus गौरसक्थ or गरिसक्थः, श्लक्ष यासक्थैः or लक्षणसक्थः The word मार being formed by प्रज्ञादि श्रण and श्लक्षण by कस्त्र (Un. III. 19) are both end-acute. Why not after a word ending in o'? Observe चक्रसक्थः which is always oxytone as it is formed by पच् (V. 4. 113) चित् affix. ३६३३ । परादिश्चन्दास बहुलम् । ६ ।। १६ ॥ छन्दसि परस्य सक्थशब्दस्यादिम्दातो वा । 'अजिसक्थमालभेत' । अत्र वार्तिकम्- '* घरादिश्च परान्तश्च पूर्यान्तश्चापि दृश्यते । पूर्वादयश्च दृश्यन्ते व्यत्ययो बहुलं ततः ॥ दति । परादिः । 'तुविजाता उक्षया' । परान्तः । 'नियेन मुष्टिहुत्यया' । 'यस्त्रिचक्रः' । पूर्वान्तः विधायुधेहि। निसमासस्वराः। 3933. The first syllable of the second member is diversely acute, in the Vedas. The word पर "the second member" refers to सक्थ, as well as to any other word in general. Thus अञ्चिसक्थमालभेत, but लोमसक्थः so also ऋजुबाहुः, वाक्पतिः, चित्पत्ति ॥ SHARE -- 26 ·TAE SIDDHANTA KAUNUDI. (VOL. III. AOCENTS Ca. IV. $3933 In the non-Vedio literature these last two compounds will be fipal acute by VI. 1. 223, rule VI. 2. 18 not applying because of the prohibition contained in VI. 2. 19, The rule is rather too restricted. It ought to be: "Io the Vadas, the first syllable and the final syllable of the second member, as well as the final syllable and the first syllable of the preceding member are seen to have the acute accent, in supersession of all the foregoing rules." (1) As to where the first syllable of the second member (utifa:) takes the socent, we have afastar Jeau (Rig Veda I. 2. 9.) (2) As to where the final of all the second terms (aTi:) takes the acuta we have faast fearit (Rig Veda I. 8. 2.) ufedex: (Rig Veda I. 183. 1.) (3) As to where the final of the preceding (gara:) takes the acute, we have fasa ry: üfen () As to where the first syllable of the preceding (gaffa:) takes the acute we have as fearry10 STATTU À I Here end the Accents of Compounds. CHAPTER V. ACCENTS OF VERBS. ३९३४ । तिडो गोत्रान कुत्सनाभीक्षाययोः ! ८।१।२७ ॥ तिङन्तास्पदादगोत्रादीन्यनुदात्तान्यतयाः । पचति गोत्रम् । पतिपति गोत्रम । एवं Tat##*Page1a12u: 1 Frantatuto TETETUTA I Qarifu #191fau Eų garaaa Te aan 191fa-' gfa fanar i vafa umuhiainee' gfa feia i खर्चात गात्रं ; समेत्य कूयम । 3934. The words gotra &c., become unaccented after a finite verb, when a contempt or a repetition is intended. Thus uefa ft H, when contempt is meant. Here qafa ina means 'he proclaims his Gotra &c., so that he may get food &c.! Qafa is from the root ofa auffhitu 'to make evident' (Bhu. 184). Where contempt is not meant, it has the force of repetition, i. e, he repeatedly utters hig Gotra as one is bound to do, in marriage-rites &c. And uefa cafa il 17 #, when repetition or intensity is denoted. Similarly uafa gas, uafa gafa qapı Thie word ga is a noun derived from the root a by the afix *7, the ua substitution for a has not taken place, as an anomaly. 1 5117, 35a, 3 gaan, 4 TEK, 5 99a, 6 urua, 7 995, 8 PIÙ, 9. 712 10 qua, 11 fazau, 19 magu, 13 pina, 14 ufae, 15 at ATA (FIA an) 18 Waga, 17 79677 | ·VOL. III. ACCENTS Ca. V. $3937.] ACCENTS OF VERBS. 203. AU The word at optionally becomes anudatts : in the alternative, it is first acute. Thus uafa 91H or gefa The words "contempt and repetition in the text qualify the whole sentence or sútra, and not the word itaifa nor the word vara understood. For we find that wherever the word irrifa is used in this Chapter, it always implies the sense of contempt or repetition. Thus the word iftafa is used in VIII. 1. 57 and there also the sense is of contempt and repetition. Why do we say "Gotra and the rest' 1 Obaerve uafer. TTQF. Here are is an adverbi Why do we say then contempt or repetition is meant'? Observe wafa VÄRI #1 He digs a well, having assembled the Gotrs.' 3039 i fagstag: 151.91.250 নিজনান্তরায় নিজ নিন। মলমীন। 3935. A finite verb is unaccented, when a word precedes it, which is not a finite verb: Thus sfratriz gürferi (Rv. I. 1. I). y rzagafa (Rv, I. 1. 4), si Fural na (Rv. V. 1. 1), Naiari 1997 off! ३८३६ । न लुट ।।१।२९ ॥ नुहन्तं न निहन्यते । स्का 3936. But the Periphrastic Future is not unaccented, when it is preceded by a word which is not a finite verb. This restricts the scope of the last stitra which was rather too wide. Thus na: wt, sa: niet, da mi fe: 1. The Sarvadhâtuka afires ET, TT, T8, are anudatto after the affix aria by VI. 1. 186, the whole afix are becomes udâtta (III. 1. 3) and where the fa portion of ares, e. the syllable ute, is elided before the afix &T, there also the st of or becomes udâtta, because the udatta has been elided. See VI. 1. 161. ३९३७ । निपातैर्यादिहन्तकुविच्चेच्च गनिमयुक्तम् । ८ ॥ १॥ ३० ॥ gafa'ara fata cuara EUTATAR ', ' gat wat su:' ' fagr আমন’ 'भचितिभिश्चलमा कच्चिन' । पत्रासो यत्र यि तरो भवन्ति '.. 3937. The finite verb retains its accent in connection with the particles 77,' that," · because,' ufi, 'if', , “also' !, 'O!» omfaa, well', aa, í not', ža, 'if, a 'if', maa (interrogative particle, implying I hope' or ' I hope not)', and yatra ' where,' Thus uzjarraira (Rig Veda VIII. 44. 23). gai uat : (Rig Veda V 74. 5). mfaa 918a (Rig Veda VII. 91. 1). e faxat I want dat Nir. I. 11), g ga y, a mutÄ ; GETËT OY fanir hafa (Rig Veda I. 89. 9. ME ·204 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [Vol. III. ACCENTA CA. V. 83938 Here it is pure The particle su with the indicatory y, has the force of @ą i Thus यं चमरिष्यति = अयं चेन मरिष्यति ॥ ३६३८ । नह प्रत्यारो।।१।३१॥ नत्यनेन युक्त तिङन्त नानुदात्तम । प्रतिषेधयुक्त प्रारम्भः प्रत्यारम्भः । 'नह भीक्ष्यसे । प्रत्यारम्भे क्रिम नह वैतस्मिल्लेोके दक्षिणमन्ति । 3938. The finite verb retains its accent in connection with 'naha' when employed in the sense of forbidding. When something urged by one, is rejected insultingly by another, then the reply made by the first tauntingly, with a negation, is pratyarambha. Thus A says to B: 'Eat this please.' B rejects the offer repeatenly,in anger or jest. Then A iu anger or jest says . No, you will eat '-~as नह भक्ष्यसे। Here भोयसे retains its accent, which is acute on the middle, for becomes accentless as it Tollows अदुपदेश (VI. 1. 186), and स्य becomes udatta by the प्रत्ययस्वर (III. 1. 3). Why do we say, when asseverative' ? Observe मह वैत मिश्च लोक वैक्षिण- मिच्छन्ति Verily in that world they do not wish for fees negation तस्मिन् is first acute by फिट accent, लोक is final acute because it is formed by अ of पचादि (III. 1. 134), दक्षिण is first acute, because it is a Pronoun ending in अ (स्वाङ्कशिटामदन्तानास, Phit II. 6) and इच्छन्ति is anudatta by VIII. I. 28. ३८३८ । सत्यं प्रश्ने । ८।१॥३२॥ सत्ययुक्त तिङन्त नानुदात्तं प्रश्ने । सत्यं भोक्ष यसे। 'प्रभने ' किम । 'स त्यमिद्वा उत घयमिन्द्रं स्तवाम ॥ 3939. The finite verb retains its accent in connection with satya' when used in asking a question. Thus सत्यं भोक्षध से • Truly, will you eat'? सत्यमध्येष्यते । Wby do we say " in questioning * } Observe स यामदाउ तव र्यामन्दं स्तवाम ॥ ३८४० । अङ्गाप्रातिलोम्ये । ८।१॥ ३३ ॥ अत्यनेन युक्त तिङन्तं नानुदात्तम । अङ्क कुछ। 'अप्रातिलोभ्ये किम । 'श्रा कूर्जा वृषल इदानों ज्ञाठि जालम अनभिप्रेतमसो कुर्वन्प्रतिलोमो भवति ॥ 3940. The finite verb retains its accent in connection with anga' when used in a friendly assertion, Anything done to injure another is pratilomx, opposite of this is a pratiloma, or friendliness. In fact, it is equal to anuloma. Thuis अङ्गकुरु yes, you may do." Here anga has the force of friendly perinission, But when it has the force of pratiloma, we have:-श्रङ्ग कूजा ३ वषल । ftrat prefe STAR 'Well, chaokle O siuner! s00u wilt thou learn, a caril.' Here अङ्ग is used in the sense of censure, for chuckling is a thing not lired by the person and is pratiloma action : for gluta-vowel see VIII. 2, 46. है क ·VOL. III. A OCENTS Ch. V. $3944; V. $3944; ACCENTS OF VERES. B81 हिच।।१।३४ ॥ चियुक्तं तिङन्तं नानुदात्तम, । ' त्राहि मा याति ''श्रा हि रूहन्तम 3941. The finite verb retains its accent in connection with hi' when used in a friendly assertion. Thus : -wet uifa (Rig Veda IV. 29. 2). Serca" (Rig Veda VIII. 12.५). ३९४२ । छन्दस्यनेकर्माच साकाक्षम् । ८।१।३५ ॥ होत्यनेन युक्तं साकाइतमनेकमपि नानुदात्तम्। 'अन्नत हि मत्तो वदति' । 'पाप मा चेनं नयुनाति । तिमन्तद्वयमपि न निहन्यते ॥ 3942. In the Vedas, the finite verb retains its accent (but not always), in connection with hi', when it stands in correlation to another verb, even more than one. That is, sometimes que verb, sometimes more than one verb retain their accent. Thus of more than one verb, we have the following example :--- -अनतवि मत्तो वदति । पाथमा एन वि पुति Because the drunkurd tells falsehood, therefore sin will make him impure : i. e, he does inonr sin." Here both verbs acra and fagarfa retain their accent : and it has the force of ug “because". According to Kaiyyata' the meaning of this sentence is यनान् मत्तोऽनत वदति, तस्मादऋतवदन दोषेण न युज्यते i. e. a drunkard does not ineur the sin of telling a falsehood, because he is not in his senses. See Maitra Sannita I 11. 6. ३९४३ । यावाथाभ्याम् ।८।१।३६ ॥ आभ्यां योगे तिङन्तं नानुदात्तम । 'यथा चित्करावमावतम' 3943. A finite verb retains its accent in connection with sya vat' and 'yatha'. The meaning is that the rerb retains its accent, even when uraa and ZUT followed after it. Thus यथा चित् करायमावतमः । The word प्रावतम is the Imper- & tive (ATC) Second Person Dual of the root wa, ३८४४ । पूजायां नानन्तरम् । ८।१ ॥ ३० ॥ याघट्यथाभ्यां युक्तमनन्तरं तिङन्तं पूजायां भानुदात्तम । यावत्पति शोभनम । यथा धचति शोभनभ । पूजायाम' किम । यावभुङ्क्ते । 'अनन्तरम' किम । याव वदत्तः पचति योभनम । पूर्वणात निघातः प्रतिषिध्यते । 3944. But not so when these particles 'yavat' and 'yatha' immediately precede the verb and denote 'praise'. That is, the verb loses its accent, and becomes apudâtta. Thus utapu a fa शाभनम , यया पचति शोभनम ॥ Why do we say when denoting 'praise' ! Observe यावद मुक्त ॥ Why do we say 'imniediately'? Observe aiag gaan: deia înai Here the verb retains its accent by the last sútra.

·206 The SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. ACAENTS CR. V. 83945. ३९४५ । उपसर्गव्यपेतं च।८।१॥ ३८॥ पूर्वेणानन्तरमित्युक्तम । उपसर्ग व्यवधानार्थ वचनम । यावत्प्रपति शेोभनमः । अनन्तर- मित्येवा यावदेवदत्तः प्रपति शोभनमः ॥ 3945. A finite verb loses its accent, when it denotes 'praise" and is joined immediately with yâvat and yatha, through the intervention of an upasarga (or verbal preposition). The last sûtra taught that the verb loses its accent wben immediately pre™ ceded by gran and aut! This qualifies the word 'immediately' and teaches that the intervention of a Preposition does not debar iminediateness. Thus यावत अपचति शोभनम The word 'immediately' is understood here also. Thus यावद् देवदत्तः पति शोभन॥ The upasarga #has idâtta accent, ३६४६ । तुपश्यपश्यताहैः पूजयाम् । ८।१३॥ एभियुक्त तिङन्तं न निहन्यते पूजायाम । 'श्रादहं स्वधामनु- पुन गर्भ त्वमेरिरे । 3946. A finite verb retains its accent in connection with तु पश्य, पश्यत, and अह, when meaning 'praise'. Thus प्रादह स्वधामनु पुन गर्भ त्वमेरिरे । ३६४७ । अहो च । ८ ॥१॥ ४० ॥ एतयोगे नानुदात्तं पूजायाम । अहो देवदत्तः पति शोभनम । 3947. A finite verb retains its accent when in connection with aho meaning praise'. Thus अहो देवदतःचति शोभन । REYe शेष विभावा ।।१।४१ ॥ अहो इत्यनेन युक्तं तिङन्तं वानुदात्तं पूजाधाम । श्रहो कटं करिष्यति ॥ 3948. A finite verb retains its accent optionally, when in connection with aho in the remaining cases (i. e. where it does not mean praise). What is the Ts alluded to here ? The a means here senges other than पूजा or ' praise.' Thus कटमहो करिस or कटमहा करिष्यसि । This is a speech uttered in anger or envy and not in praise (अमूया वचन) ॥ ३६४६ । पुरा च परीपसायाम् । ८ ।। ४२ ॥ पुरेत्यनेन युक्तं वानुदात्तं त्वरायाम । अधीषवा मायावक पुरा विटयोतते विद्युत् । निकटा गामिन्यत्र पुरशब्दः । 'परापसायाम किम । न त स्म पुराधीयते । चिरातीतंऽत्र पुरा ॥ 3949. A finite verb retaius its accent optionally in connec. tion with 'purà' when it neaus ‘haste' (i, e. when 'purâ' means before '). 'The word परीप ना means स्वरा or quick.' Thus अधीष्व माणवक पुरा विटो तते. विद्युत् । The word gti here expresses the future oocurrance which is imminente AAMAN .

·Vol. III. ACCENTS CH, V. $3952.] ACCENTS OF VERBS, 207 Here ननु or very near at hand. It is against the rule of Dharmasastras to study while it thunders or lightens. Why do we say when meaning haste'? Observe नतेन स्म पुराधीयते । Here the word get expresses a past time; that is, it means long ago.' See III.2.118 and 122, for the employment of gtr in the Past Tense, aud III. 3. 4, for the Present ३९५० । ननिवत्यनुज्ञेषणायाम् । ८।१ । ४३ ॥ নিল निहन्त नानुदात्तमनुज्ञाप्रार्थनायाम । ननु गच्छामि भोः । अनुजानीहि मां- गच्छन्तमित्यर्थः । अनु-' इति किम । अकार्षाः कटं त्वम् । ननु करोमि । पृष्टप्रतिवचनमेतत् ।। 3950. A finite verb retains its accent in connection with nanu, when with this Particle permission is asked. The word pour means asking, praying. The word a means 'permission.' 'The eompound अनुजेषणा means — asking of perrnission,' meaus asking of permission. Thus 7 Taifa #1: "can I go sir.' The sense is give me permission to go.' Why do we say when tasking for ' permission ? Observe अकार्षी कटं त्वम? 57 Epife ÀT: • hast thou made the mat? Well, I am making it.' hns the force of an answering particle, and not used in asking permission and hence the verb loses its accent. ३९५५ । किं क्रियाप्रश्नेऽनुपसर्गमप्रतिषिद्धम् । ८ । १ । ४४ ॥ क्रियाप्रश्ने वर्तमानेन किंशन्वेन युक्त तिडन्त नानुदात्तम । कि द्विजः पचत्याहास्विद्ग छति । क्रिया-ति किम् । साधनप्रश्न मा भूत् । किं भक्तं पचत्य यूपान्त। 'प्रश्ने किम् । कि पठति । 'पोऽयम्' । 'अनुपसर्गम् किम् । किं यपति उत प्रकरोति । 'अपिद्रम् किम् । किं द्विजो न पचति ॥ 3951. A finite verb retains its accent in connection with kin, when with this is asked a question relating to an action, and when the verb is not preceded by a Preposition or by a Negation. Thus किं हिजः पंचति, अहा स्विट् गच्छति ।। Why do we say when the question relates to a faror or action ? The rule will not apply, when the question relates to an object or साधन । Thus किं भक्त पचति अयूपणन धा॥ Why do we say when a question is asked !? Observe किम पठति । Here fai is used to express contempt, and not to ask a question. Why do we say not preceded by a Preposition' Observe किन यति उस জানি। Why do we say "not preceded by a negative particle.' Observe, fari fear न पठति ॥ ३९५२ । लोप विभाषा।८।१॥ ४५ ॥ জিমাsয়া ও মা। ঔৱন: রিয়াানিনি । 3952. When however kim is not added in asking such a question, the finite verb may optionally retain its accent.

·208 TEE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDr. [VoL III. ACCENTS CH. V. 83953. When frie is elided in asking a question relating to an action, the finite verb which is not preceded by a Preposition or a Negative Particle, optionally does not become anudatta. When is there the elision of this foną because no rule of Panini has taught it? When the sense is that of an interrogation, but the word font is not used. In short, the word - lopa ' here does not mean the Grs. mmatical substitute, but merely non-use. As देवटतः चति (or पति) अहा. स्वित् ठति (or पठति) Here the sentence is interrogative, even without the em. ployment of किम् । The option of this sutra, is a Prapta-vibhasha, as it is connected with the sense of किम् ॥ ३९५३ । एहिमन्ये प्रहासे लृट् । ८।१।४६ ॥ हमन्यइत्यनेन युक्तं लुडन्त नानुदात्त क्रीडायाम । हि मन्ये भक्त भोल्यो भुक्त तत्त्व तिथिभिः । 'महासे' किम् । शह मन्यसे ।दनं भक्ष्य इति सुष्ट मन्य से। 'गत्यर्थलोटा- (३९५८) लडित्यनेनैव सिद्ध नियमार्थोऽयमारम्भः । हिमन्येयुक्त प्रहास एव नान्यत्र । 'एहि मन्यसे ओदन भोक्षये ॥ 3953. In connection with ehimanye' used derisively, the First Future, that follows it, retains its accent. The word प्रहास means great laughter, i. e. derision, mookery, raillery, jeer. iog, gibing, sneering, Thus एहि मन्ये भक्त भोई यसे, नहि भुक्तंतत्वतिथिभिः । The word ure is the Imperative, second Person of the root su preceded by the preposition आङ् ॥ Why do we say 'used derisively'? Observe यहि मन्य से प्रोदनं भोध्ये इति । सुष्ट मन्यसे, - युक्त तिङन्त By sātra. VIII. 1. 51, S. 3958 after the Imperative रहि which is a verb of motion '(TRIZ) the following First Future (77) would have retained its aocent, The present sutra makes a niyama or restriction, namely, that in connection with the Imperative एहि मन्ये, the is accented only then when derision is meant and not otherwise. Thus the ne, luses its accent here : -fa fa श्रोटनं भक्षिये ॥ ३८५४ । जात्वपूर्वम् ।।१।४७ ॥ अविटामान पुर्व यज्जातु तेन नानुदात्तम । जातु भाक्षयसे। 'अम. किम । कटं जातु करिष्यसि ॥ 3954. A finite verb retains its accent after tjatu' when this 'jatu' is not preceded by any other word. Thus जातु भोद यसे। Here से is anudatta by VI. 1. 186, as it is a sarva. dhâtuka afix coming after an juu; the word gig is first aoute, as it is a Nipata. Why do we say when not preceded by any other word'? Observe -कटं नातु करिष्यति । The word and is end-acute as it is a fue or noun. ३९५५ । किंवृत्तं च चिदुत्तरम् । ८।१ । ४८ ॥ विदयमानपूर्व चित्तरं यत्किं वृत्तं तेन युक्त विहन्त नानुदात्तम । विभक्तयन्त इतर- इतमान्त किमो रूप कि वृत्तम । कश्विद्भक्त । कतरश्चित् । कतश्चित् । चिदुत्तरम, क्रिम । का वक्त । अपूर्व मित्येव । रामः किंचित्पठति ॥ ARImedya ·VOL. III. ACCENTS CH. V. $3958.) AOCENTS OF VERB. 209 3955. Also after a form of kin' when the particle chit follows it, and when no other word precedes such form of 'kimi the finite verb retains its accent. 'The word किमवृतं is a Genitivs 'ratpurusha meaning किमोशुस । The word किमवसं means any form of किम् with its case-affixes, as well as the forms of किम when it takes the affixes डसर and इतम | Thus कश्चिद भुङ्क्त". कलरश्चित करीति, कस- त्रिच भूत Why do we say followed by fax'? Observe Ent Observe को भुक्त The word aan of the last sûera qualifies this alsu; therefore, the perb 10ses its accent here :- रामः किचित् पठति ॥ ३९५६ । आहो उताहो चानन्तरम् ।।१।४९ ॥ शाहो उसाहो प्रत्याभ्यां युक्त तिडन्त नानुदात्तम । श्राहो उताहा. या भुङ त मन्तर- मिले। यो विभाषां वइति । 'अपूर्व-'ति किम । देव पाहो भुङ ते ॥ 3956. Also after an immediately preceding 'aho' and utaho when these follow after no other word, the verb retains its accent. The prohibition of nighala or want of accentuation is uuderstood here, 80 also there is the anuvšitti of saya from the last. Thus आहो or उता भुक्त। Why do we say immediately preceding ' ? In the following sâtra will be taught option, when these particles do not imme. diately precede the verb. Why do wa saywhen no word prevedes thema' ? Observe देव माघr or उमा भुक्त ३९५७ । शेषे विभाषा ।।१।५०॥ श्राभ्यां युक्तं व्यक्षिस लिइन्स धानुदासम, । श्राहो देवः पचति ॥ 3957. When the abovementioned particles 'aho' and 'utaho' do not immediately precede the verb, the verb may optionally retain its accent. Thus बाहो देवः चिति or पचति । ३९५८ । गत्यर्थलोटा लणनचेत्कारकं सर्वान्यत । ८॥१५५ ॥ मावार्थानां लोटा युक्तं तिङन्तं नानुदात्तम् । यत्रेव कारके लेाद तन्नेव लुडपि चेत् । आगच्छ देव याद्रपला हान्सा देवदत्तेन शालयः । रामेण भक्षयन्ते । 'गत्यर्थ-'किम् । पच देव श्री. व भाष्यम् । 'लोटा किम । श्रागच्छदेव ग्राम द्रक्ष्यस्येनम् । "लुद' किम । पागच्छ देव देव ग्राम पश्यस्येनम । 'न चेत्' इति किम । प्रागच्छ देव ग्राम पिता ते ओठनं भोक्ष्यते । 'सर्वम,' किम । श्रागच्छ देव याम त्वं चाहं च द्रक्ष्याव एनमित्यचापि निघातनिषेधे। यथा स्यात् । सल्लोडन्तस्य कारक सञ्चान्यच्च लुडन्तनोच्यते ॥ 3958. The First Future retains its accent in connection with the Imperative of a verb denoting 'inotion' (stu go''to como' * to start' &c), but only in that case, when the subject and objeot of both the verbs are not wholly different one from another.

·210 TEE SIDDFANTA KAUMUDY. [VOL. III. ACCENTS CH, V. $3958. Those verbs which have similar meaning with the word na motion' are called गत्यर्थाः ॥ The Imperative of the गत्यर्थ verbal roots, is called गत्यर्थ-लोट । In connection with such an Imperative of verbs of 'motion', the First Future does not become anudatta, if the kåraka is not all different. The sense is, with whatever case-relation (kâraka), whether the Subject or Object, the Imperative is employed, with the same karaka, the First Future must be employed. In connection with the finite verb here, the word FTTH denotes the Subject and Object ouly, and not any other káraka, such as Instrument, &c. Thus ita a arra, gaufs "Come O Deva, thou shalt see the village.' Hera the subjects of both verbs in and agafa are the same, anil the objects of both verbs are also the same, namely rain is a Preposition and is accented, at and a both lose their accent (VIII, 1. 19 and 28,) WA is first-acute being formert by the नित् affix मन | Similarly उह्यन्तां देवदत्तेन शालयः, रामेण भोक्ष्यन्ते "Let the rioa be carrier by Devadatta, they will be eaten by Râma." Why do we say 'verbs of motion? Observe पच देव भोदनं, मो नये से अन्नम ॥ Why do we say “after the Imperative? Observe 16 a JIA, CR- A 1 Here the Potential mood is used. Why do we say the First Future'? Observe as an ua, quafa QAA ! Here the Present Tense is used. Wby do we say if the kâraka is not wholly different"? Observera aaan ua, fuar ñ #1aa #laza # Why do we use the word as 'wholly? Observe 11 aaan UTH, अहं च ट्रॅक्ष याव एनम । Here also there is prohibition of righata and the First Future retains its accentfor the subject of the Future is not wholly different from that of the Imperative. For here the subject of the Imperative is the subject also of the Fature, though only partly, in conjunction with another. More. over, the object here in both is the same. Had not been used in the sutra, where the sentence would have remained the same, there the rule would have ap. plied, and not where the sentences became different, ३५९ । लोट् च । ८ ।। ५२ ॥ लोडन्त गत्यर्थलोटा युक्तं नानुदात्तम । श्रागच्छ देव ग्रामं पश्य । 'गत्यर्थ-' इति किम । पच देवोदन भुत्वैनम । लेाद' किम । प्रागच्छ देव ग्रामं पश्यसि । न चेत्कारकं सर्वान्यदित्येष। श्रागच्छ देव ग्रामं पश्यत्वेनं रामः। सर्वग्रहणात्त्विह स्यादेव। प्रागच्छ देव ग्राम स्वं चाहं च usura: FCHT ATS: # 3959. Also an Imperative, following after an Imperative of verbs of ‘motion', retains its accent, when the subject or object of both the verbs, is not wholly different. Thus 15 aa ma su i But not here पच देवदत्तौदनं, भुडक्ष वेनम because the first Imperative is not one of pati verb. Nor here, पागच्छ व ग्राम पश्येनम् becauss the first verb is not Imperative but Potential.

·VOL. IIT. ACOENTS CH. V. $3962.] ACCENTS OF VERBS. 211 2 6 If the subject and object of both Imperatives are wholly different, the rule will not apply. Thus we aa u#*, qug va TIA: 1 By the force of the anuvritti of the rule will apply to the following: ATTE aa UTA, and a quaTa.. IL The separation of this sitra from the last, is for the sake of the subsequent sutra, by which the coption is with regard to are and not लद ३९६० । विभाषितं सोपसर्गमनुत्तमम् ।। १ । ५३ ॥ Tea TVÄTTT GFR fasa argatan, I 172 Ta afati igrafx? fm 1. ha ur#1921 War Forfa aa afanfall 3960. An Imperative preceded by a Preposition, and not in the First Person, following after an Imperative of verbs of 'motion', may optionally retain its accent, when the Kâraka is not wholly different. The whole of the preceding sútra is understood here. This is a Praptavibhasha. Thus *1770 aa utå afast or upfa yi When the verb is accented the upasarga loses its accent by VIII, 1. 71. Why do we say Toe joined with a Preposition't When there is no Preposition, there is no option allowed, and the last rule will apply. As 10 aa- UTAUIONI Why do we say tanot a First Person" ? Observe a fa aa, uta afata ३९६१ । हन्त च।८।१।५४ ॥ इन्तेत्यनेन युक्तमनुत्तमं लोडन्तं वानुदात्तम् । हन्त प्रविश । सेोपसमित्य व । हन्त कुरु । नपातर्थ यदि-' (३६३७) इति निघातप्रतिषेधः । 'अनुत्तमम्' किम् । हन्त प्रभुनजावहे ॥ An Imperative, with a Preposition preceding it, may optionally retain its accent, in connection with ‘hanta, but not the First Person. With the exception of an arzt &c., the whole of the preceding sâtra is i understood here. Thus & fat or ofas But no option is allowed bere ", as it is not preceded by a preposition. Here rule VIIT, 1. 30, S. 3937 makes the accent compulsory after So also z məntaa, where the 1st Person is used, the verb retains its accent compulsorily by VIII, 1. 30 S. 3937. The word nanra is Imperative First Person, Dnal of the root us in Atmane pada (I. 3. 66) The Personal ending ad is an udâtta by VI. 1. 186, because the verb is anudâ tta.it. The vikarana 7 therefore retains its accent. 30I TA TENTATATATAHARIS19.1 99 a श्रामः घरमेकपटान्तरितमामन्त्रितं नानुदासम् । श्राम । पचसि देवदत्तः । “एकान्तरम् fra ! Stauafa àaan: i pafazan' fempi spafa aaaa: 1 salinan fari utrefa quan Wette su ·THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL III. ACCENTS CH. V. $3969. 3962. After 'âm,' but separated from it by not more than one word, the Vocative retains its accent, when the person addressed is not near. Thus wyn vefa aa are The nighata being hereby prohibited, the vocative gets accent on the first syllable by VI. 1. 198. Why do we say "TE? Observe ut vafea FI Here it is apudatta. by VIII. 1. 19. Why do we say # separated only by one word "? Observo was qafe aauni 31 Why do we say & the Vocative '? See 2 rafa Zacm: * Why do we say walang not near " See se vufa daze u ३९६३ । यद्वितुर छन्दति । ८।१।५६ ॥ fremi aratm'a uzig: 1 33 frame fa' I TRITA faunadz- (1939) sfa 'fea (€89) fa gasu-' (?€87) sta a fost furtüÍAZH i ga रेव परभूतैर्योगे नान्यैरिति । जाये स्वराहावैहि । एहीति गत्यर्थलोटा युक्तस्य लोहन्तस्य निघाते Hafa 3963. A finite verb followed by yat or hi or tu retains it accent in the Chhandas. The anuvritti of watan' should not be taken in this sâtre, but that of fre 1 Thus with यत्परं we have :-गवां गोत्रमुदसजो याङ्करः। The verb is the Imperfect (**) 2nd person singular of sp of the Tridâdi class. With fg we bave, szar ai qui fa (Rig Veda 1. 2. 4) The verb 3 ta is the Present (7) Plural of ay of the Adâdi clas.3. The samprasarana takes place because it belongs to the class. With a we have, 71@trif# gà, Byt By the previous sůtra VIII. 1. 30. S. 3937 a verb in connection with or would have retained its accent, so also in connection with fg by the sâtre VIII. 1. 34, S. 3941 and in connection with y by VIII. 1, 39, S. 3946; the present sûtra is, therefore, a niyama rule. The verb retains its accent when these three Particles only follow and nct any other. If any other Particle follows, the verb need not retain its accent. Thug BTC Far frutafa Here treta is the 1st Person Dual of the Imperative of tr(58 +49 +48 = 18+ € + ax III. 4. 92=77&ia the & being elided, as FTZ is like me, III, 4. 85 and 99). The verb pfe is the 2nd Person Singular of the Imperative of the root su, preceded by the Particle 13 1 Here in the treta ( = tr• H12 fa), the verb trata is followed by the Particle 91, and does not retain its accent But for this rule, it would have retained its accent. Because there is a full arç VIII, 1. 61), treia is another are in connection with it, and therefore, by VIII. 1, 52 it would have retained its accent. But now it loseg its accest be. cause it is a fae following after a non fas word ! The viſarga of 3: 18 -lided before by VIII. 3. 14, then the preceding is lengthened and we have it (VI. 3. 111). Another reading is par tigrafa i It is a Vedio anomaly, the viáarga is obanged to 3N उदराज et ·. । The list of Gotradi Vol. III. ACCENT CH. V. $3966.] ACCENT OF VERDE. ३९६४ । चचिदिखगोजादितद्विताम्रडितेवगतः ।।१।५७ ।। एषु षट् परतस्ति हन्त नानुदात्तम् । देवः पञ्चति चन । देवः पचति चित् । देवः परतोय । देवः पर्थात गोत्रम् । देवः पचतिकल्पम् । देवः पतिपवति । श्रगतः किम् । देवः प्रपति चन। 3964. A finite verb retains its accent, when it is not preeeded by a Gati Particle (I. 4. 60 &c), and when it is followed by चन, चित, दव, गोत्र &c., a Taddhita affix, or by its own doubled form. Thus देवः पति उन ; देवः ति चित्, देवः पचती। words is given moler sû tra VIII. 1. 27. Thus देवः पचति गोत्रम , देवः पचति अधम, देवः पचति प्रवचनम &c. The Gotradi words, here also, denote censure and contempt With a Taddhite affix, देवः पञ्चति कल्पम रुपम । The examples should be given with anudatta Taddhhitaafi.xes, like रूपय, कल्पण (V. 3. 66 anil 67). Any other Taddhita affix added to the verb would cause the verb to lose its acoent, the Tadihita accent overpowers the verb accent : as qufaa na (V. 3. 67). With adoubled verb, as3देवः पचति पति Why do we say when not preceded by a Participle called Gati'? Observe देवः प्र पति चन । ३८६५ । चादिषु च ।।१।५८ ॥ ववाहाहेवेषु परेषु निहन्त नानुदात्तम । देवः पचति च खादति च । प्रगतरित्यव । देवः प्रपति च प्रवाति च । प्रथमस्य ' चवायोगे-' (arre) इति निघातः प्रतिषिध्यते द्वितीयं तु निहन्यत सव 3965. A finite verb, not preceded by a gati, retains its accent before the Particles च (वा, ह, अह and एव VIII. 1. 24). The gra words are those inentioned in sûtra VIII. 1. 24. Thus da: प्रति चखादति च। But when preceded by a gati, we have देवदत्तः प्रचलि चप खाद ति च । Bere the first verb retains its accent by virtue of the next sätra, but the second Verb loses its accent. BEEN चायोगे प्रथमा ।।१।५९ ॥ वधेत्याभ्यां योगे प्रथमा तिविभक्तिर्नानुजाना। गाश्च नारयति वीणा वा वाटयति । "पता वा सातिमीम' । उतरवाक्ययारनुषज्जनीतिइन्नापेक्षयेयं प्राथमिकी । । योगे किम् । पूर्वभूतयोपि योग। निधातार्थ प्रथमायणं द्वितीयास्तिङन्तम्य मा भूत् ॥ 3966. The first finite verb only retains its accent in connection with ' cha' and 'va.' The annvritti of ma: which was drawn in the last gútra, does not ran into this. Thur गाव धारयति, वीणां चबाट यति । इतो वा मासिमीमहे ।

·214 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. ACCENTS. CH. V. $3966. । ७ The word dit in the sutra indicates that the mere connection with the verb is meant, whether this connection takes place by adding these words a and at be fore the verb, or after the verb, is immaterial for the purposes of this sutra, (not so in the last). The word wupt shows that the first verb is governed by this rule and not the second. ३९६७ । हेति लियायाम् । ८।१।६० ॥ आयुक्ता प्रथमा तिङ विभक्तिर्नानुदात्ता धर्मध्यतिक्रमे । स्वयह रथेन याति । उपाध्याय पवाति समयति । चियाशी:-' (३६२३) इति सतः ॥ 3967. In connection with ha,' the first verb retains its ac cent, when an offence against custom is reprimanded. The word faut means an error or mistake of duty, a breach of etiquette or a fault against good breeding. Thus स्वयं हरथेन यांति', उपाध्यायं पदाति, गम र्यात • He himself goes or a car, while he causes his Preceptor to trudge behind on foot. Here the nighâta of the first yerb is prohibited. The verb becomes evarita-pluta by VIII. 2. 104 S. 3623. ३६८ | अहति विनियोगे च।।१।६१॥ श्रहयुक्ता प्रथमा तिज विभक्ति!नुदात्ता नानाप्रयोजने नियोगे क्षियार्या च । स्वमह या गच्छ। त्वमह रथेनारययं गच्छ। क्षियायां स्वयमह रथेन याति ३ । उपाध्याय पदाति नयति ॥ 3968. In connection with the first verb retains its ac. cent, when it refers to various commissions, (as well as when a breach of good manners is condemned). The word fafat means sending a person to perform several commissions, The word च in the sutra draws in the anuvritti of क्षिया also. Thus त्वं, अह ग्राम, गच्छ, स्वग्रह रथेन परययं गच्छ । Soalso when क्षिया is. meant, स्वयमह रथेन याति , उपाध्याय पवाति नयति: ३९६९ । चाहलोप एवेत्त्यवधारणम् ।।१।६२ ॥ 'च' 'श्रह' एतयोलापे प्रथमा तिङ विभक्तिनानुदोत्ता। देव एव या गच्छतु । देव सवारपर्य गच्छतु । ग्रामसरगर्य च गत्वित्यर्थः । देव एव ग्राम गच्छतु । राम एवारययं गच्छतु । याम केव- लमरणयं केवलं गच्छत्वित्यर्थः । इहाहलोपः सच केवलार्थः । 'अवधारणम् किम् । देव पाव भो- क्षयसे । नचिदित्यर्थः । अनवक लग्नावेव ॥ 3969. When cha and aha are elided, the first verb still retains its accent, when eva with the force of limitation, takes their place. When does this to take place ? Where the sense of an or v is connoted by the sentence, but these words are not directly employed, there is then: the elision of च and ग्रह । There the force of च is that of aggregation (समुच्चय), and of ग्रह is that of only' (केवल) The ® is elided when the agent is the same; and he is elided when the agents are several:

·VOL. III. ACCENTA CF. V. $3972.) ACCENTS OF VERES, Thus where w is elided:-देव व ग्राम गच्छतु, देव पवार ययं गच्छतु ग्राम भारवयं So where Gr is elided : ns--देव राक्ष बाम गच्छतु, राम एव भरपयं गच्छतु - ग्राम बोधलं, अरण्यं केवलं गच्छतु इति यः ।। Why do we say अवधारयः when limitation is meanta See देव क्वेव भोक्ष The word ya here has the sense of 'never an impossibility: The first sentence means न क्वचिद भौच यते । बच+सत्र-क्वेध by पररूप (VI. 1. 94. Vart). TES । धादिलोपविभाधा।८।। ६३ ॥ चराहादेवानां लाये प्रथमा हिल जितिर्नानुदात्ता । चलाये। 'इन्द्र वाजेयु नोsa' । शुक्ला ब्रोहयो भवन्ति । श्वेता गा पाए हामी । वालाये। श्रीहिभिर्यजेत । यवैर्यजेत ॥ 3970. When a, (ar, T, and qa) are elided, the first verb optionally retains its accent. Thus with च लोप:--हुन्द्र वाजेपु नाय । शुल्का वोहयो भवन्ति or भवन्ति, श्वेता 111 718912 geil Bere 1967 optionally ning either lise or retain its accent, So also when ar is elided, as :-átfein sain or 25 , nada So also with the remaining, ३८७१ | वैवावेति च च्छन्दसि ।।१।६४ ॥ 'श्रहों देवानामासीत् । 'श्रयं वाय हस्त मासीत् ॥ 3971. Also in connection with — vai' and ' vava' may optionally, in the Clhandas, the first verb retain its accent. Thus अश देवानाम अासीत् (or अामील), अयं याच हस्त नासीत् (or श्रासीत)। वे has the force of स.फूट and क्षमा, and वाव that of प्रसिद्धि and स.फुट ।। ३९७२ । एकान्याभ्यां समर्थाभ्याम् । ८।१।६५ ॥ श्राम्यां युक्ता प्रथमा तिविभक्तिर्नानुदाता छन्दसि। 'अजामेको जिवन्ति' । प्रनामेको रक्षति' । 'तयारन्यः पिप्पलं स्वाति' । 'समर्थाभ्याम् किम् । एको देवानुतिष्टत् । एक इति संख्या पर नान्यार्थम ॥ 3972. Also in connection with eka and anya, optionally in the Chhandas, the first verb retains its accent, when these words have the same meaning (' the one-the other'). Thus प्रजामेकां जिन्वति (or जिन्वति), उर्जमेकारक्षति। तयोरन्यः पिण्यलं स्वात्ति (or त्ति), अनननन्या अभिचाकशोति (Rig Veda. I. 164. 20, Mundaka Upanishad IIL Why do we say समर्थाभ्यां - having the same meaning ? See एको देवानुपातिष्टत Here yen is a Numeral and has not the sense of an the one another." Tha word समर्थ is used, in fact, to restrict the meaning of एक, for it has varions meanings : while there is no ambiguity about the word अन्य । एकोऽन्यार्थे प्रधानेच प्रथमे केवले तथा । साधारयो समानेऽल्ये यायां प्रयुज्यते ॥

·Te- SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. III. ACCENTS CH. V. 93973. । ६९७३ । यवृत्तचित्यम् ।।१।६६ ॥ पत्र पदे यच्छब्दस्ततः परं तिवन्तं नानुदासम । यो भुड त । यदद्या वायुति । अण 'ध्यवहित कार्यामध्यत' ।। 3973. In connection with yad in all its forms, the verb re. tains its accent always. The anuvritti of VAT and f& ceases. The prohibition of nighâta, In what ever which commenced with न लुट. (VIII. 1. 29) is present here also. sentence the word यद occurs, that is called यवत्तं । The word af denotes here the form of ac in all its declensious with case affixes. See also the explanatiou of किंवत्तं in VIII. 1. 48. Thus यो भुक्त, यत् कामास्ते जुहुम : (Rig Veda x, 121. 10) चढ़या, बापुर्वाति (T. S. V. 5. 1. 1.) यद वायुः पवते । For the form यद्रयङ, see VI. 3. 92. Ishti:--Though the sutra is in the Ablative (पदत्तात) and therefore requires that the verb should immediately follow it, yet in eque, any affer, the in terventiou of ary: does not prevent the operation of this rule, according to the opinion of Patanjali. ३८७8 । पूजनात्यजितमनुदात्तं काष्ठादिभ्यः । ८।१।६७ ॥ पूजनेभ्यः काष्ठादिभ्यः पूजितवचनमनुदात्तम । काष्ठाध्यापकः ॥ * मलापश्च वक्तव्यः । दारुणाध्यायकः। समासान्तादात्तत्वापवादः । एतसमा एण्यते नेह । दारुणमध्यापक ति वृत्तिमतम् । पूजनादित्येव पूजितग्रहणे सिद्ध पूजितग्रहणमनन्तरपूजि सलाभार्थम । एतदेव चापकमत्रप्रकरणे पञ्चमोनिर्देशेऽपि नानन्तर्यमाश्रीयत इति । 3974. After a word denoting praise belonging to kasthadi class, the word whose praise is denoted, becomes anudatta. This refers to compounds, the first members of which are praise-denoting words. The word काष्ठादिभ्यः, is added to the sutra front a Vartika. Thus काष्ठोध्यापक, काष्ठाभिरूपक, दारणाध्यापकः, दारुणाभिरूपकः॥ श्रमातापुत्र। श्रमातापुत्राध्यापकः। श्रमातापुत्राभिरूपकः । अयुताध्यापकः । अयुताभि- रूपकः । प्रभुत । श्रद्ध साध्यापकः । अनुक्त । अनुक्ताध्यापकः । भृश । भृशाध्यापकः । चोर। चोराध्यापकः । सुखः । सुखाध्यापकः । परम । परमाध्यापकः । सु। स्खध्यापकः । ति । प्रत्यक्षा. पकः । टोः । योरध्यापकः । टयारभिरूपकः । खध्यापकः । अपुत्र । अयुनाध्यापकः । कल्याणा- कल्याणाध्यापकः ।। Vart : The final a should be elided in forming these words. The word ang is an adverb, and therefore in the accusative case, like yI# na: 1 Iu such a case, there can be no compounding : hence the elision of is taught. This becoming of game takes place in the compound, and after composition. In fact an exceptiou to the general rule by which a compound is finally acute (VI. 1. 223). But there is no elision in दारुणमध्यायकः &c. and there is no loss of accent also of the second word. By the Vartika. 'मलापश्च', this further fact is also de. noted, where the 048e-affix is not emploved and 89 the x is not hearł, there the second member beconies anudatta, When there uo compouuding, there is no elision of म ३५ दास्पामधीत, दारुणमध्यापकः । ॥

·word may be exihibited in the Ablative case, it does not follow that there should YorIII. Acesta C#. V. $3976.) ACCENTS OF VexBg. Though the word gua would bave implied its correlative term fan, tha specific mention of gfiat in the aphorism indioates that the word denoting gfstan abould follow inmediately after the word denoting * In fact, this peculiar coostruction of the sutra, is a jñipaka of the existence of the following rule:- प्रकरण पञ्चमी नि शेऽपि नानन्तर्यमाश्रीयते “In this subdivision or context, though & Smammin - - be consecutiveness between the Ablative and the word indicated by it." This has been illustrated in the prerious rule of यवत्तान नित्यम, in explaining fornis like यतयह वायुर्वाति &c. Though the anuvritti of anudatta was current, the express employment of this term in the sůtra indicates that the prohibition (of anudatta) which also was current, now ceases. The words काष्ठ, &c. are all synonyms of ' श्रत, meaning soonderful, prodigious : and are words denoting praise. 1 काष्ठ, दारुणं, 3 श्रमातापुत्र, 4 वेश, अनाजात, 6 अनुतात, 7 अपुत्र, 8 अयुत, 9 भुत, 10 अनुक्त, 11 भृश, 12 घार, 13 मुख्य, 14 परम, 15 सु. 16 अति, 17 कल्याण ३२७५ । सतिस्प लिङ । ८।१।६८ ॥ पूजनेभ्यः काष्ठादिभ्यस्तिङन्तं पूजितमनुवात्तम् । यत्काळ प्रपति । तिङ कति: ( 34) इति निघातस्य निपातैर्यत्र--' (३६३०) दति निषेधे प्राप्ने विधिरयम् । सतिग्रहणाच्च गतिथि निजन्य ते । गतिग्रहण उपसर्गग्रहणमिष्यते । नेह । यत्काष्ठा शुलीकरोति ।। 3975. (After such words denoting praise) the finite verb (which is praised) becomes anudatta, even along with the gati, if any, that may precede it. Whether a finite verb is compounded with a gati or stands single, both the compound and the simple verb lose their accent, when it is qualified by the adverbs काष्ठं. Thus यत् काष्ठं पर्चात, यत् काष्ठं प्रपचति ॥ By VIII. 1. 28, S. 3935 the finite verb would have lost its accent after the word 6, but this loss was prohibited by VIII. 1. 30 S. 3937 in connection with यत् ; the present sutra reordains the loss, by setting aside the prohibition of VIII. 1. 30. S. 3937. The word anfa ‘along with its Gati', indicates that the Gati even loses its accent, Ishti : The word Gati here is restricted to Upasargas. Therefore not here यत् काष्ठां शुक्रो करोति ॥ ३९७६ । कुत्सने च सुष्य गोत्रादौ ।।१।६६ ॥ कुत्सने च सुबन्ते परे सगतिरगतिपि तिनुदातः । पति पूति । अपचति पूति । पचति मिथ्या । 'कुत्सने किम् । प्रपचति शोभनम् । 'सुपि' किम् । पचति निनाति । 'अगोजादी' किम् । पचति गोत्रम् ॥ * क्रियाकुत्सन इति वाच्यम् ' । कर्तुः कुत्स ने मा भूत् । पतिपूतिर्देवदत्तः ।। '* पूतिश्चानुबन्ध इति वाच्यम् *' तेनाय चकारानुबन्धत्वादन्तीदात्तः ॥ * वा बहुर्थमनुदामिति वाच्यम् *' पचन्तिपूति ।। 3976. A finite verb, along with its preceding Gati, if any, becomes anudatta, when a Noun, denoting the fault of the action follows, with the exception of 'gotra' &c. 28 ·a Gati becomes icc'? 218 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. ACCENT'S CH.V.83976. The anuvritti of data (VIII. 1. 17) ceases. But the anuvritti of the last sutra is current. Thus पति पूति, प्रपति पूति, पचति मिथ्या, प्र पचति मिथ्या। Why do we say mê denoting the fault of the action": See पचति शोभ- Why do we say सुपि a noun'? Observe पंचति लिश्नाति॥ Why do we say with the exception of गेत्र &c. See ,चति गोत्रम्, पति अवम्, पचति प्रवचनम् ॥ Vart :- It should be mentioned that the fault' mentioned in the sätra, must be the fault relating to the mode of doing the action, denoted by the verb. The role will not apply, if the pa refers to the agent and not to the action. 'Thus पंचति पूतिर्देवदत्तः ॥ Vart : -It should be stated that पूति has an indicatory च । The effect of this is that the word gfe is finally acute, because of the indicatory au Vårt :-A finite verb in the plural number, loses its accent optionally: when it loses its accent, then yta is end-acute. Thus पचन्ति पूति:, or पर्धान्त पूतिः, अप चन्ति पूति : or प्रपचन्ति पूतिः । ३९७७ । गतिर्गती।८।१।७० । अनुदात्तः । श्रभ्युद्धति । 'गतिः' किम् । दत्तः पति । 'गतो' किम् । 'श्राम न्द्ररिन्द्र हरिभिर्याहि म यूरोमभिः' । 3977. A Gati becomes unaccented, when followed by another Gati, Thus अभ्य धरति । Why do we say गतिः Observe देवदत्तः पचति Here aage is a Prâ ti padika and does not lose its accent. Why do we say when followed by a Gati?? Observe श्रा मन्ट्रैरिन्द्र हरिभिर्याहि मयूर रामभिः (Rig Veda IIT. 45. 1.) Here yn is a Gati to the verb wife, the complete verb is प्रायाहि। But as ar is not followed by a Gati, but by a Pratipadika मन्द्र, it retains its accent. Had the word dat not been used in the eûtra, this would have lost its accent, because the rule would have been too wide, without any restriction of what followed it. ३९७८ । तिडिचोदात्तवति ।।१।७१ ॥ गतिरनुदात्तः। यत्पति । तिङ ग्रहणमुढात्तवतः परिमाणार्थम् । अन्यथा हि क्रिया युक्ताः प्रादयस्त प्रत्येव गतिस्तत्र धातावेवोदात्तवति स्यात् प्रत्यये न स्यात् । 'उदात्तर्वात' किम् । प्रपति॥ মুনি নিঙলাসে। 3978. A Gati becomes anudatta, when followed by an accented finite verb. The word sfa: is understood here. Thus यत् प्र पचति ॥ Why have we used the word face in the sûtra ? In order to restrict the scope of the word उदात्तर्वात ; so that a Gati would not become accentless before udatta root only, but before udåtte conjugated verbs. The employment of the ·VOL. III. ACCENTS CH. V. $3978.] ACCENTS OF VERBS, term fafs is necessary, in order to indicate that the verb must be a finite verb and not a verbal root.. So that though a verbal root be udåtta, yet if in its conjugated form (लिडन्त) it is not adatta, the गति will not lose its accent, Thus in यत् प्रकरोति, the root a is. anudatta, but the तिङन्त form करोति is udatta, hence the rule will apply here: which would not have been the case bad garrafa not been qualified by fate i For the maxim is यक्रियायुक्ताः प्रादयस तेषां त प्रति TIYUE FR naa: 1. Therefore in a fast, the designation of what is with regard to धातु or verbal root. Why have we used the word sarafa ? Observe maafa i Here the verb. loses its accent by. VIII. 1. 28 hence the Ceti retains its accent. Here end the Accents of Verbs. A VAIDIC ILLUSTRATION ON ACCENTS. अथ वैदिकवाक्येषु स्वरसंचारप्रकारः कथ्यते-'अग्निमीळ" इति प्रथम । तत्राग्निशब्दो- seय त्यत्तिपक्ष · फिष -' इत्यन्तोदात्त पति माधवः । वस्तुतस्तु एतादित्वात् । व्युत्पत्ती तुः नित्यत्य- यस्वरेण । अम्सुप त्वादनुदात्तः। श्रमिः पूर्वः' (१८४) इत्येकादेशस्तु, 'एकादेश उवातेन-' (३६५८) इत्युदात्तः । ईळे । तितिक' (६३५) इति निघातः । संहितायां तु ' उदासा- दनुदात्तस्य-' (३६४०) इतीकारः स्वरितः। 'स्वरितासहितायाम -'(are). इति' इत्यस्य प्रचयापरपर्याया एकश्रुतिः। पुरःशब्दोऽन्तोदात 'पूर्वाधरावराणाम-' इत्यसिप्रत्ययस्वरात् । हितशब्दोऽपि धाजो निष्ठायां 'दधातेहिः' (३०७६) इति ह्यादेशे प्रत्ययस्वरेणान्तीदात्तः । 'पुरो ऽव्ययम, (७६८) इति गतिसंज्ञायां 'कुति-' (७६२) इति समासे समासान्तोदात्ते 'तत्यु को तुल्यार्थ-'(३७३६) इत्यव्ययपूर्वपदप्रतिस्वरे 'गतिकारकोपपदात्कृत' (१८७३) इति कटुत्तर- पदप्रतिस्वरे थाधादिस्वरे च पूर्व पूर्वीपमर्दन प्राप्त गतिरनन्तरः' (३७८३) इति पूर्व पदप्रकृति- स्वरः । पुरःशब्दोकारस्य संहितायां प्रत्ये प्राप्त : उदात्तस्वरितपरस्य सन्नतरः' इत्यनुदात्ततरः । यज्ञस्य । महः प्रत्ययस्वरः । विभक्तोः सुपस्वादनुदासत्व स्वरितस्वम । देवम् । पचाटाच् । फिट्- स्वरेण प्रत्ययस्वरेण चिस्वरेण वान्तोदात्तः । ऋत्विकुछब्दः कटुत्तरपदप्रकृतिस्वरेणान्तोदात्तः । हाल शब्दस्तृन्प्रत्ययान्तो नित्स्वरेणायुदात्तः। रत्नशब्दो नविषयस्य त्यायुदात्तः। रत्नानि दधातीति रत्नधाः । समासस्वरेण कटुत्तरपदपतिस्वरेण वान्तोदात्तः । तमपः पित्त्वादनुदात्तत्वे स्वरितप्रचया वित्यादि यथाशास्त्रमुन्नेयम् ॥ इति स्वरप्रकरणम । इत्थं वैदिकशब्दानां दिङमा मह दर्शितम् । सदस्तु प्रीतये श्रीमद्भवानीविश्वनाथयोः । Now we shall give an illustration from the Vedas, to show the application of the rules of accent. Thus the first verse of the Rig Veda is the following: अग्निमी पुरोहित यज्ञस्य देवमूत्विज। होतारं रत्नधातमम् ॥ 1. Agni : – Here if aftap be considered a word without any derivation then it is finally acute by Phit I. 1. This is the opinion of Madhava (Sayanâcharya). But as a matter of fact, अग्नि is end-acute : because it is auumerated in the Ghritali list of words (see Phit I. 21.) Gademinde ·375). The word fan also is end-aoute, because it is the Nishthá 220 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. III. ACCENTS, But if sofa be considered a derivative word, formed by the Upâdi aför for then it is end-acute, (IIL. 1. 3. S. 3708), because of the affix. The accusative afix p in sfar, is anudåtts because it is a case-affix (ITI. 1. 4. S. 3709). aia + = ## (+9= S. 194). The ekâdeśa z becomes udâtta by VIII. 2. 5. S. 3658. Thus sa # is end-acute even in its declined form. 2. is a verb. It loses its accept by S. 3935 (VIII. 1. 28) as it is preceded by a noun agnim. When ufaf + stare combined in the Sanhita text into wafh, then the anudatta becomes svarita by S. 3660 (VIII. 4. 66) while the anudatta of becomes ekabruti by S. 3668 (1. 2. 39). Thus we have grada 3. gifgar: -The word gt: is end-acute because it is formed by the affix of ut, the fa is substituted for up by S. 3076 (VII. 4. 42) the affix # makes it end-n.cute. Then gt: + fea: Here yt: is a gati by S. 768 (I. 4. 67) and it is compounded with fea by S. 761 (II. 2. 18). Then the compound gifaa vould be end-acute by S. 3734 ; but S. 3736 (VI. 2. 2) requires the Indeclinable first member yr: to retain its accent; but S. 3873 (VI. 2. 139) requires the second meinber faa which is a křit-formed word to retain its accent also VI. 2. 144 ; but this last accent is set aside by the final rulo S. 3783 (VI, 2, 49) and thus the first member retains its recent, as yii fea a It becomes anudattatara by I. 2. 40 S. 3669. 4, UTTET:-The word ug is derived from us with affix. Therefore it is end-acute. The afis being a case-afix (III. 1. 4. S. 3709) is anudatta and it bocomes svarita ve 5. aa: It is forned from the root fza, with the afix a It is end acute, either by Phit I. 1; or by the affix-accent (III. 1. 3. S. 3708) or by the fan accent (VI. 1. 163 S. 3710) of net In any view, it is end-acute. 6. #frasi:- be word #fear is end-soute, because of the krit-aocent (VI. 2. 139, S. 3873). 7. Hata : -The word gereg is formed by adding the afix a to i It has accent on #r, because the affix has an indicatory 7 (VI. 1. 197 S. 3686). 8. TAUTAAH | Il means Taifa tuta I It is finally acute, either by samasa accent (VI. 1. 223, S. 3734) or krit-accent of the second member being re. tained by VI. 2. 139 S. 3873. The affix Fau, being fun is anudatta, the ~ of a becomes svarita, and that of becomes ekaśruti, ta is first acute being Neuter (Phit II. 3.) Here ends the Section on Accents. Thus here has been shown a brief outline only of Vaidic words and the rules applicable to them. Let it find favor with the Lord of the Universe and Bhayani, ·अथ लिङ्गानुशासनम् ॥ Ora ON RULES OF GENDERS CHAPTER I. FEMININE GENDER. The Gender, NOTE:---There are three Genders, vis :- Masculine, Feminine and Neuter. Biati fuzitai ta The Feminine (Gender). These two are Adbikara Sûtras. The jurisdiction of the word "gender extends up to the end ; but of "feminine“ up to the end of this chapter only ३। 'ऋकारान्ता मातृदुहितस्वसयातननान्द र । कारान्ता एते पञ्चैव स्त्रीलिङ्गाः । स्वमा दिपञ्चक्रस्यैव डोन्निधेधेन कर्नी त्यादेर्डीपाईकारान्तत्वात् । तिसचतमोस्तु स्त्रियामादेशतथा विधाने sfu wehraifeaugirarThiar 3. Hiç 'mother,' giaz daughter,' rare “sister,' arz ka husband's brother's wife,' ननन्द्र a husband's sister,' these five nouns ending in x are feminines. These five words are the only examples of feminines that naturally end in i By IV. 1. 10, S. 308, the seven words belonging to the syasrådi class do not form their feminine by stu or ztu, like the nouns kartși &c. which end in long in tbe feminine. Hence they are feminine in their original form. A refer ence to the Svasrâdi list will show that it includes all these five words, in ad. dition to fax and ang I As these two are secondary derivatives, from fa and agy they are not originally feminine but have become so by derivation. The primitive words fa and agt do not end in *; and hence far and one are not. shown in this sútra. 81 SURUHI OTTi' i fra Uri FUFIUTP1a uig: Fani kaza i wafa: , e: 1 WUUTEUE' f I aqua: ferata i a: i farofag: # Verbal nouns formed with the affixes fa and a are feminines, Thus wafa: the earth' (Uộ. II, 102). as: fan army.' (Uạ. I. 80). Wby do we say “formed with affixes”? Observe a which is formed by adding the affix fæau to the root faa (to shine). The word ar: is feminine and of special gender. 41 quâHTTzTUT: 1 g fg a'i aufa: u 5. The nouns vafa, 'Indra's thunderbolt,' wtfu 'Bharani' afu 'a piece of wood used for kindling sacred fire,' are also masculiues (in addition to being feminines).

·ho ** Thus ut#: (the earth 222 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL III, GenDER CH. I. $5. Thus eu or wo afa: This sûntra is an exception to the preceding. These three words though formed by the affix if (Uə. II. 102) are yet both masculine and feminine. Ifum:' fearr FaUFIU94 91g: fui rataifa: 1 taifa: u 6. Verbal nouns formed with the affixes fo and fat are feminines. ७ । वहिष्ण यग्नयः | Taridatz: 1 7. But the nouns afg fire' (Un. IV. 51), oferta cloud, (Uņ IV. 49) and fra 'fire' (Uņ. IV. 50) are masculines. This is an exception to the last. Cifuaran'a: g'falei qund at Aff: u 8. The nouns vifo 'the hip,' (Un. IV. 5) alfa "the source'. (Un. IV. 51) and if the wave' (Uə. IV. 41) are also masculines (in addition to being feminines). Thus st or अयोणिः॥ Effi' FUVCHI frumfa 1 9. Nouns formed with the affix fme are feminines. Thus ara: &o. qe i NTTI RIC1: Rai: 10. Nouns ending in long affix are feminines. Thus लक्षमीः॥ The here must be an afis: as in adät the affis gis added by Uņ. III. 160. ११ । 'ऊयानन्तश्च । कुरूः। विट्या ।। 11. Nouns formed with the affixes 36, (IV. 1. 66) and you are feininines. Thus a: (See IV. 1. 66. S. 521) and facit. The u inoludes all the three affixes टाप, OTV and 921 qavataTA' : 1 : 1 "ESTATE formi gat: it 12. Monosyllabic noups formed with the affixes and F are ferainines. Thus ft: (Uņ. II. 57) U: 1 Why do we say 'monosyllabic nouns? Observe yyat: “Přithu's luck” which is masculine. Q3 fárrafatiaaa; 1 eu faufa: i fata Fralfira i unaga net: wafa: i wtfa: 1 para u 13. Numerals from "twenty" to ninety" are feminines. Thus gu' faufa: 'twenty'. So also fainą “thirty'. Grafiua <forty, Usai 'fifty'; ufe: 'sixty', ayfa: "seveuty,' : eighty', wafa: 'ninety.' The list of the words sofa fa and the rest is given in Pâņini's Sûtra V, 1. 89. S. 1725. 981 gefrag ieu gefa: day' ferimento y fuatafa statsgür ard: 14. The word auf when used in the sense of an asle pole is feminine Thus इय' दुन्दुभिः ॥ Why do we say in the sense of ya for axle? Observe a' gha: 1 It is masculine when it means a musical instrument or an Asura. १५ । 'नाभिरक्षत्रिये । इयं नाभि॥ 15, The word af navel is feminine when it does not mean a Kshatriya, STU. 1 ·- Rames how do you justify its use as a masculine in the VOL. III. GENDER CH. I.$19.] FEMININES. 223 Thus इयं नाभिः 'navel'. २६ । 'उभावण्यन्यत्र पुसि' । दुन्दुभिर्नाभिश्चक्तिविषधादन्यत्र पुसि स्तः। नाभिः क्षत्रियः । कथं हिं 'समुल्लसत्पङ्कजपत्रकोमलैरुपाहितश्रोण्युपनीविनाभिभिः' इति भारविः। उच्यते । दृढ़ भक्तिरित्यादविव कोमलैरिति सामान्ये नपुंसक बोध्यम्। बस्तु तस्तु, 'लिङ्गमशिष्यं लेकाश्रयत्वा. 'ल्लिङ्गस्य' इति भाध्यात्युस्त वमपीह साधु । अत एव 'नाभिर्मुख्यनपे चक्रमध्यत्रिययाः पुमान'। ह.योः प्राणिप्रतीके स्यास्त्रियां कस्तूरिकामदे' इति मेदनी। रभसोऽप्याह- 'मुख्यरात्रिय नाभिः युसि प्राण्यङ्गको द्वयोः । चक्रमध्ये प्रधाने च स्त्रियां कस्तू रिकामदे' इति । एवमेवंविधेऽन्यत्राधि बोध्याम् ॥ 16. Otherwise gefa and arfu are masculines. Thus afa: afa: Nabhi--a Kshatriya.' If the word alfa: be feminine in all senses other than that of a Kshatriya, "समुल्लसत् पङ्कजपत्रकामले रूपाहितीण्युपनीवि नाभिः ॥ To this we say, "The words कोमलः &c. here are really Neuter, denoting indiscrete gender, or having no reference to any gender, just like auftr:" I Or we may say, as a matter of fact the gender of words need not be taught, for it is a well-known maxim of grammar as enunciated by Patanjali that “the gender depends on the usage of the people : and so need not be taught:" and there fore the masculine use of the word is also correct. Thus we find in the Medini Kosha:--- “Nabhi is masculine when meaning a paramount sovereign, or the nave of a wheel, or a Kshatriya. But wheu meaning inavel' of a living being, it is of both genders. And it is ferninine only when meaniny 'musk.' Rasabha also says to the same effect :- The word nâbhi is masculine when it means a paramount lord, or a Kshatriya : it is both masculine and feminine when meaning the navel of a living being, the nave of a wheel, and a leader or chieftain. It is purely feminine when meaning "musk". Thus it should be understood in other cases also. १७ । 'तलन्तः'। अयं स्त्रियां स्यात् । शुक्लस्य भावः । शुक्लता। ब्राह्मणस्य कर्म ब्राह्मणता ग्रामस्य समूहे। ग्रामता । देव एव देवता ॥ 17. Nouns formed with the affix तल (V. 1. 119 S. 1781), are feminines. Thus शुलता (whiteness), ब्राह्मणता (Brahmanical), ग्रामता (rural) देवता which has the same meaning as देव ॥ १८ । भूमिविटा सरिल्लतावनिताभिधानानि'। भूमिभूः । विटा त्सोदाम नी । सरिनिमगा। लता वल्ली। वनिता यषित् ॥ 18. Nouns synonymous of भूमि (the Earth), विद्युत् (lightening), सरित (20 stream or rivulet), gat (a creeper), afaat (wife) also are feminines. Thus मूमिभूः । विद्युत् सौदामनी ; सरित निमगा ; लतावल्लो ; बनिता योषित, १६ । 'यादो नपुंसकम । यादःशब्दः सरिद्वाचकोऽपि लीबं स्यात् ॥ 19. यादस, although meaning a stream,' is Neuter and not feminine. - ·THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. III. GENDERS CH. 'I. $20. २० । 'भानु वनग्दिगुष्णिगुपानहः । एते स्त्रियां स्य: :। सूयं भाः इत्यादि। The nouns भास, सुक, दिक, उष्णिह, and उपानह, are feminines, Thus gu »T: &o. २५ । 'स्थूणर्ण नपुंसके च' । एते स्त्रियां लीलो च स्तः । स्यू णा-स्थूणम । ऊर्णा-ऊर्याम णा काष्ठमयी द्विकर्णिका। उर्णा तु मेषादिलोमम् । 21. The nouns puuT (a post or pillar) and OT (Wool) are Neuter (in addition to being feminine). Here sthûnå means a wooden forked stave or pillar and úrnå means the wool of sheep &c. २२ । 'गृहशशाभ्यां लीडे' । नियमार्थमिटम । ग्रहशशपूर्वे स्यू गाणे यथासंख्यं नपुसके स्तः । रहस्य णम्। 'शशोणं शशलामनि' उत्यमरः । 22. The words स्थूणा and T after et and शश are Neuter. Thus TERTUX (a pillar of a house) and yte (the hare's hair). This is a niyama or a restrictive rule. See Amarakosha II. 9. 107. २३ । प्राविण दवदवित्वषः। एते स्त्रियां स्य: ॥ 23. The words yrag, the rainy season', faux drop of liquid,' ang thirst,' faz foeces, excrement,' and fraz light' are feminine. २४ । 'दर्विविदिवेदिनिशान्य त्रिवेशिकष्योधिकट्यङ्गुलयः । एते स्त्रियां स्युः । पक्षे डीए । दा-दावरित्यादि 24. The words afa, a ladle,' fala, knowledge () ara, altar,' safa a mine,' safa.colocynth'; fa a corner, afu kan entrance' (?) fa agriculture, 'fiafy herb,' fc loin' and safer fuger' are feminine. These words take optionally the affix डीप. Thus zaf or afa&o. २५ । 'तिधिनाडिविधीचिनालिलिकिकिलिच्छविरात्र यादयः । एते प्राग्वत् । इयं तिथि. रित्यादि । अमरस्त् वाह-तिथयो द्वयोः' इति । तथा च भारवि:-'तस्य भुवि बहुतियास्तिथयः' इति । स्त्रीत्वे हि बहुतिथ्य इति स्यात् । श्रीहर्षश्च-निखिला निशि पैर्णिमातिथीन इति ॥ 25. The words fafu the day of the moon,' as a vessel or pulse,' afa • taste,' alfa 'a wave,' at a drain,' ya dust,' fanfar the coconnut tree,' कलि play,' छवि hue, color,' रात्रि • night' are feminines. AS इयं तिथि:&c. But the author of Amara kosba says the word fafu is both masculine and feminine.' (Amax. I. 4. 1). So also Bhåravi in the following line : 'तस्य भुवि बहुतिथास, तिथयः | Had it been feminine the word would have been ayfam: in the Plural and not as लिया: ॥ So also Śri Harsha in the following line : fafaar fara utfoat fasita uses the word tithi as a masculine. A , , .

·VOL. III. GENDERS CĦ. I. $29.] FEMININE, 225 REI! The farTristenau wfaata fea fzafaus Fa:' 1 râsfa fendi enfer: 0 26. The words fa auditory passage,' erfest 2 streak,' fa' a cotage,' # lightening,' afHa pad, mfc frown,' fe cutting,' ata * sacrificial offering,' u'ffi & line' are feminines. Thus szwa: २७ । 'प्रतिपदापद्विपसंपच्छरसंसत्परिषदुषःस विलक्षुत्युन्मुत्समिधः' । इयं प्रतिपवित्यादि । zu 38ti 307: WTATUT Zaat 11 27. The words wfaut entrance,' ue calamity' faux « misfortune, Fru wealth,' Tre the autumn' (U» I. 129). Ja assembly,' परिषद a meeting,' sua "Dawn,' sfan' koowledge,' qm grinding; crushing,' gm'a particular division of Hell,' ga joy; delight,' #ywood ; fuel,' are femiops $ nines. * water,' she Thus go wrce শুয়া না। The Usha is the presiding deity of the dawa, २८ । 'श्राशी): पूर्गोरः । इयमाशीरित्यादि । 28. The words siutę, blessing,' y 'a yoke,' TT a city,' vite 'speech and IT dooc' are feminines. As gu grat: २६ । 'श्रय सुमनस्ममासिकतावर्षाणां बहुत्वं च । अबादीनां पञ्चानां स्त्रीत्व स्याहुत्वं च श्राप बमाः । "स्त्रियः सुमनसः पुष्यम्' । 'सुमना मालती जातिः' । देवघाची तु पुस्य व । सुपर्वाण सुमनसः' । बहुत्वं प्रायिकम् । 'एका च सिकता तैलदानेऽसमर्थी' इत्यर्थवत्सूत्र भाष्यप्रयोगात् । 'समांसमां विजायते' (१८९३) इत्यत्र 'समायां समायाम् इति भाध्याच्च । विभाषा प्राधेट्- (3896) siờ em THTT GÌ KHỚT cf Hang-Tai Gamisaag " 29. The words 0. a flower' (jasmine), FAT a year Fahat sand, gravel,' and auf rain, are ferninines and used in the plural number only. Thus 9: SAT: 1 The word sumanas in the feminine means "a kind of: flower '-namely, the flower called mâlati or jâti-jasmine, as fau: F#78 guc Amarakosba II. 4. 17. When it means a Deva or a divine being, it is masculine only. As सुपर्वणः सुमनसः। See Aurarakosha I. 1. 7. Here the Present sútra is debarred by sůtra 9 of the next chapter, with regards to words denoting Devas, These words are generally found, in usage, in the plural number : but sometimes they are used in the singular also ; as THT fazat Qazi HAUT one grain of sand is incapable of producing oil.' This example is given by Patanjali in his Mahá bhåshya under sütra I 2. 45. Similarly ani pa fantaa (V. 2. 12. S. 1813) has been explained in the Bhâu shya by Faf gruf in the singular number, 29 + ·226 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL III. GENDER CH. I. $30, Kasika uses the word सुमनस in the dual also, under shtra II. 4. 78. in the example अघ्रासालाम सुमनी देवदतेन । Harada.tta. in his Padamanjari, on commenting on this justifies the use of the dual, by saying “ according to Amarasinha sumanasah in the plural is feminine. According to Paniniya sutra apsumanasa, &c., this word requires to be always plural. That plurality is not, however, universal : as we find the Mahabhashya using the word sikatá in the singular, (स्त्रियः सुमनसः पुष्पमित्यमसिहः। अप्सुमनः समासिकता वर्षाणां बहुत्वं चेति पाणि नीय सूत्रं, तद् बहुत्वं प्रायिक मन्यते 'एका च सिकता तेलदानेऽसमर्धा' इति भाध्ये प्रयोगात् ।) ३० । 'सक्त्वज्योग्वाग्यवागूनस्किचः' । इयं सक्त्त्वज्योक्वाक्यवागूः ना स्किन ॥ 30. The words agarland,' sam skin,' he long' (an Indeclinable I. 1. 37), ara speech,' aig barley gruel, ar boat' and final hips' are feminines. Thus इयं सक, त्वक, ज्योक, वाक्, यवागू, ना and स्फित ॥ ३१ । 'वृटिसीमासंबध्याः । इर्थ टिः सीमा संबध्या ॥ 31. The words टि, सीमा boundary and सम्बध्या? are feminines Thus इय टि, सीसा Or संबध्या ॥ ३२ । 'चुल्लिणिखार्यश्च । स्पष्टम् ॥ 32. The words great a fire-place,' afu "a braid of hair' (Un. IV. 48) measure of grain,' are feminines. ३३ । 'ताराधाराज्योत्स्नादयश्च । शलाका स्त्रियां नित्यम् । नित्यग्रहणमन्येषां कचिङ्ख्य भिचारं ज्ञापयति । इति स्त्रयधिकारः ।। 33. The words aTTT <a star, OTTT ' a current;' surat light' &c. are feminines, The word शलाका a small stick,' is ALWAYS feminine. Note :--The force of the word always is that the other words given above, may be of masculine or neuter gender also. In fact, the gender depends upon usage. ७ , ७ CHAPTER II. THE MASCULINE GENDER. १ 'पुमान् । अधिकारोऽयम् । 1. The Masculine Gender. This is an adhikára Sûtra. २. । 'घजबन्तः' । पाकः । त्यागः । करः । गरः । भावार्थ एवेदम् । नपुसकत्वविशिष्ट भावे कल्युड भ्यां स्त्रीत्वविशिष्ट तुक्तिनादिभिर्वाधनपरिशेषात् । कर्मादा तु घजाटान्तमपि विशेष्याल- जम् । तथा च भाष्यम्- ‘मबन्धमनुतिष्यते इति ॥ Nouns formed with the affixes ga and yu are masculine. Thus with ;=UTF: “cooking', para: renunciation,' with 40, we have akt: hand,' गर: 'poison', ·To are Neuters." * 3. 114 and 115. VOL. III. GENDERS CH. II. $7.3 MASCULINE, The affis os must have the force of 2772 or condition for the purposes of ibis rule. In other words, the nouus so formed should be abstract nouns nouns of action. This meaning of owe infer from the analogy of the two rules, cne relating to the Feminines and the other to the Neutere Thus with regards to Neuters we have the rules arê 57: I BEST # «Nouns formed by the afis lyut with the force of bháva: ; and the Nisthâ afises with the same force have the rules : &c. (Chapter I. 9) &c, where te, are thúva afixes, Analogically the gs here must also be a bhà va denoting afür. For the force of 951 is generally that of BIG or Noun of action, See III. 3, 16-18. To form Neuter nouns of action we have kta and lyut by form feminine nouns of action we have klime, kyap, &c. by III. 3. 95, 98. Therefore by elimination, to form the masculine nouns of action, to us is left the affix Hence we say the ghañ here has the force of bhava.' But when ghañ has the force of karma or of karana &c., as it has by III 3. 116 and 117 &c., then the words so formed need not be masculine. They will have the gender of the word with which they are in construction. They will have their own specific gender, As we have in the Bhishya, सम्बन्धमनुवर्तिप्यते । Here the word 'sambandha' though formed by ghañ is used in the Neuter gender: because the force of ghañ is here that of karma. 2065775 Ia' i fast: i rac: I 99: 1 90: Enife u 3. The nouns formed with the affixes a and pa ara masculines, This faet: 'extension, at: (pasturage,' qu: frampart ; colleotion'. Gyictory' &c. ४। भयलिङ्गभगपदानि न सके । एतानि नपुंसके स्युः। भयम् । लिङ्गम् । भगम् । a only. The nouns #7 $fear, faz 'gender', HIT *the perinaeum of females', uz foot' are neuters.. Thus C#, FEFA, HTH, CA: u 1959: 1515 unut: g fæ RITA | 17:da: 11 The nouns formed with the affix as are masculin Thus uz: “sacrifice,' ga: effort?. ४ । 'याज्ञा स्त्रियाम् । पूर्वस्यापवादः । 6. The noun aiast begging' is feminine, This is an exception to the last aphorism. ७। 'क्यन्तो घुः'। किप्रत्ययान्तो घुः पुसि स्यात् । प्राधिः । निधिः। उदधिः । 'क्यन्स' किम् । दानम् । 'धु: किम । जजिर्बीजम ॥ 7. The nouns formed with the affix fon from roots belonging to the g class are masculines., The roots belonging to g class are zi and wr. Thus ufu: ‘agony', fare: "abode,' 3zfu: 'water.' Why do we say "formed with the affix fani" ? Observe Zia (which is Neuter).

·। 3 - BA 228 THE SIDDHA NPPA KAUMUDI. [VoL. III. GENDERS CH. II. RS. Why do we say "roots belonging to the y class” ” Observe afaatar. ८ । 'इपुधिः स्त्री च । इषुधिशब्दः स्त्रियां पुसि च । पूर्वस्यापवादः 8. The noun zgfu: a quiver' is both masculine and feminine. Thus अयं or इय इषुधिः । । 'देवासुरात्मस्वर्गगिरिसमुद्रनखकेशदत्तनभुजकण्टखड्नशरपङ्काभिधानानि । सतानि पुति स्य ।। देवाः सुराः । असुरा दैत्याः। श्रात्मा क्षेत्रज्ञः । स्वर्गो नाक: । गिरिः पर्वतः । समुद्रोऽब्धिः ! গল্পঃ ঈ ঈমঃ তিঙ্কি दन्ती दशनः। स्तनः कुचः । भुजो देशः । कण्ठो गलः । खड्गः करवालः । शरो मार्गणाः। पङ्कः कर्दम इत्यादि । 9. The words which are synonyms of देव 'god,' असुर 'demon,' श्रात्म 'self,' स्वर्ग the heaven,' गिरि the mountain,' समुद्र the sea,' नख the nail', केश the hair,' दन्त the tooth,' स्तन the breast,' भुज (the arm,' कराठ 'the throat,' खन Thus देवाः सुराः; असुराः दैत्याः; श्रात्मा क्षेत्रज्ञः; स्वर्गों नाकागिरिः पर्वतः; समुद्रो. sब्धि ; नखाः कररुहाः, केशाः शिरोरुहाः; दन्तो दशनः; स्तनः कुचः भुजो दोः; कठो गल:- खड्सः करवालः ; शरोमार्गणः ; पङ्कः कर्दमः &c. २० । त्रिविष्टपत्रिभुवने नपुसके । स्पष्टम् । तृतीयं विष्टय निविष्टपम् । स्वर्गाभिधानतया पुस्तके प्राप्त ऽयमारम्भः ।। 10. The noun त्रिविष्टप meaning the heaven' is neuter'. This word being synonymous with east would have been considered masculine by the last aphorism, but this aphorism prevents that. १९ । 'टो स्त्रियाम्' । योदिवोस्तन्त्रेणोपादानमिदम् ॥ 11. The nouns at and faa the heaven are feminines. By sûtra 9, these two words being synonyms of gin would have been cons sidered masculines, but this aphori sm prevents that, १२ । 'इषुवाहू स्त्रियां च । चात्युंसि ।। 12. The nouns & the arrow' and बाहु are also feminines. By the force of the letter a in the sútra, these words are to be considered masculines also. १३ । 'बाणकायडी नपुंसके च' । चात्युठि । त्रिविष्टपेत्यादिचतुःसूत्री देवासुरेत्य स्यापवादः ।। 13. The nouns TU an arrow' and काण्ड a section' are also neuters. By the force of the letter e in the sûtra, these words are to be considered masculine also. The last four sûtras are exceptions to the sůtra 9. १४ । नन्तः । अयं पुस । राजा । तक्षा। न च चर्म वर्मादितिव्याप्तिः । 'मन्दव्यच्च को- इकर्तरि' इति नपुसकप्रकरणे वक्ष यमाणत्वात् ।। The nouns ending in 7 are masculines. Thus राजन्, तक्षन् । But not चर्मन् ' skin,' वर्मन - armour which are neuters, The rule however should not be extended to चर्मन, वर्मन् &c. These are Neuters because of the subsequent rule III. 33. १५ । 'ऋतुपुरुषकपोलगुलफमेधाभिधानानि । ऋतुरध्वरः । पुरुषो नरः । कपोलो गगडः । गुलफः प्रपतः । मेघो नीरदः ।। F CIN the arm ·VOL. III.GENDERS CH. II. $23.] MASCULINE, 229 9 2 1 13 The nouns which are synonyms of the sacrifice,' yea: 'the man, Rūt the cheek' yan' the ankle,' a cloud' are masculines Thue ऋतुरध्वरः; पुरुषोनरः; कपोलो गण्डः ; गुलफः प्रपदः ; मेधो नीरदः ॥ १६ । मन नपुसकम् । पूर्व स्थापवादः ॥ 16. The nouns 7 oloud is neuter. This is an exception to the last. १७ । 'उकारान्तः । अयं पुसि स्यात् । प्रभुः । इत्तुः । 'हनुई दुविलासिन्यां नृत्यारम्भ गढे स्त्रियाम् । द्वयोः कालावया' इति मेदिनिः । करेणुरिभ्यां स्त्री नेभे' इत्यमरः । एवंजातोयक- विशेषवचनानाक्रान्तस्तु प्रकृतसूत्रस्य विषयः । उक्त च-लिङ्गशेषधिधियायो विशेधैर्यटा बाधित: द्धति । एवमन्यत्रापि।। 17. The nouns ending in 3 are masculine. Thus ty: ; : According to Medini, the noun when meaning wanton woman,' the commencement of a dance,' or, disease' is feminine. But it is both masculine and feminine when it means the obin.' According to Amara, the noun mity when meaning “a she-elephant' is feminine ; otberwise masculine when it means an elephant. The words which are subject to this rule are like these which are not governed by any other specific text to the contrary, As it has been said. 6 A rule of gender is of universal application if it is a sesha rule i. ,, a rule that remains after the application of all other rules. Provided that it is not debarred by any specific rule.” ९८ । 'धेनुरज्जुकुहुसरयुतनुरेणुप्रियङ्गवः स्त्रिया। 18. The nouns sa cow,' 'rope,' og 'new moon-day,' gry “the river Sarayu,' al' body,' sy'atom,' fuug name of a creeper are feminine. ९६ । 'समासे रज्जुः पुसि च । कर्कटरजज्या कर्कटरज्जुना ॥ 19. The noun strope' in a com pound is also used in the masculine, Thus कर्कटरज्वा or कर्कटरज्जुना. २० । श्मश्रुजानुवसुस्वादश्रुजतुत्रपुतानि नपुसके । 20. The nouns cal bared,' 773 the knee,' enig 'sweetness ; relish; * tear, sit' wax,' s lead तालु the palate' are neuters. २१ । 'वसु चार्थवाचि'। 'अर्थवाचि इति किम् । 'वसुर्मयूखाग्निधनाधिपेषु॥ 21. The noun ag when meaning wealth' is neuter. Why do we say when meaning wealth ? For otherwise it is masculine when meaning ngara ray of light? sufia 'fire' and atau lord of wealth'. २२ । 'भद्गुमधुसीधुशीधुसानुकमण्डलनि नपुसके च' । चात्युति । अयं मद्गुः । इदं मद्गु । 22. The nouns मदगु "a kind of pulse'; sy honey,' sity 2 kind of vine, Fra summit,' seg water-put' are also neuters, By the force of the letter q in the sûtra, these words are also masculines. Thus अयं मद्गुः or इदं मदगु. 23 LfFan:' | #T: 1 âg: !! 23. The uouus formed with the affixes F (Uņ. IV. 101) and g (Uə I, 69) are masculines, Thus Åk: ‘Meru,' agt: a bridge." 2 2 taste, 13 and ·IT.84 ७ . Thus 8: or सक्तः - [Vol. III.GENDERS the chin'; on the root of the water-lily, 230 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. २४ । 'दारुकसेरुजतुवस्तुमस्तूनि नपुसके । रुत्वन्त इति पुस्तवस्यापवादः । इद दास ॥ 24. The nouns दास tree,' कलेस + kind of fruit,' जनू 'collar bone, ' वस्तु object,' sour cream, whey, are Neuters. This is an exception to the last sûtra. This.इदंदाह। These words are all formed by sand g affixes and therefore ought to have been masculines. २५ । 'सक्त नपुसके च। चात्युसि सक्त :-सक्तु । 25. The noun or porridge' is also neuter. By the force of the letter च in the sutra, it is also masculine. २६ । 'प्रायश्मेरकारान्तः' । रश्मिदिवसाभिधानानि' इति वक्ष्यति माक् एतस्मादकारान्त साक्रियते ।। 26. From this up to sútra 66, the gender of nouns ending in will be mentioned. This is an adhikâra sutra. It extends up to rasmi-divasi (IL.66) andar plies to nouns ending in श्रा। २७ । 'कोपधः' । कोपधोऽकारान्तःपुसि स्यात् । स्तवः। कल्याः ।। 27. The nouns ending in with the penultimate z are masculines. Thus far: «a.cluster'; *: filth.' (Un. III. 40). २८ । 'चिबुकशालकप्रातिपदिकांशुकोला कानि नसके। पूवसूत्राप वादः ॥ 28. The nouns faga प्रातिपदिका (the crude-noun' *3#' a garment,' grafi storch; are neuters. This is an exception to the last sútra, २६। कपटकानीकसरकमोदकचपकमस्तकपुस्तकतडोकनिष्कशुष्कवर्चस्वपिनाकमाण्डकपिण्ड ककटकशगडकपिटकतालकफलकपुलाकानि नसके च । चात्य नसके च। चात्यु सि । अय कराटकः । कपटकमित्यादि। 29, The nouns कण्टक 'a thorn,' अनीक ' army' (Un. IV. 16. 17) सरक road ; liquor'; मोदक' a sweetmeat,' चषक goblet'; मस्तक - the head, पुस्तक "book, तडाक 'tank,' निष्क 'a kind of coin,' शुष्क dryness,' वर्चस्क lustre'; पिनाक 'the bow of Shiva; भाण्डक 'a vessel,' पिण्डक'a ball an army, belt', दण्डक staff,' पिटक' basket ' तालक'yellow orpiment,' 'an ear ornament'; फलक blade,'पुलक a thrill of joy', are also neuters. By the force of the letter a in the slitra these words are also masculine. Thus श्रय कण्टक: or इटं कण्टकम् &c. ३०। टोपधः । टोपधोकारान्तः पुसि स्यात् । घटः पटः ॥ 30. Nouns ending in my with the penultimate z are m`sculines. Thus घट: 'a jar,' पटः a piece of cloth.' ३९ । किरीटमुकुटललाटवटवीटरङ्गाटकराटलोष्टानि नपुसके । किरीटमित्यादि । 31. The nouns किरीट a crown,' मुकुट ' a crowu,' ललाट • forehead,' घट • kind of tree,' ate (?) 'a mountain with three peaks, a place where . .

·VOL. IIT. GENDERS CH. II. $39.] 'MASCULINES. 231 6 four roads meet. TATT au elephant's cheek,' (Un. IV. 81) and arez a clod of eartb' are also neuter, 9 By the force of the letter in the sû tra, these words are also masculines. Thus fancta: or factae &c. ३२ । कुटजूटकपटकपाटकर्यटननिकटकीटकटानि नसके च। चात्युसि । अटः । कुट- FANT The nouns a 'a water pot ; a fort,'sc fraud ; illnsion ; a house" KUZ. hypocrite ; cheating,' *TC door, fie patched garment' a dancer', face near ; vicinity,' it a worm, raat? : are also Deuters. By the force of the letter they are also masculine. Thus कुटः कुटम् > &o. $ 35. 23 I BŪTTU: I UITETSH1714: g fa fata i Ju: 1 970: 1 OTUTU: 11 33. Nouns ending in with the penultimate U are masculines. Thus tu: quality,' tu: a host,' utumu: a stone." 28 | UfauJÄTTUTUCUTfa auga पूर्वसूत्रापवादः ॥ 34. The nouns zu debt,' gau salt,' at leaf,' arcu a portal, Tu battle? J heat are neuters. This is an exception to the last sútra. ३५ । कापिणस्वर्णसुवर्णव्रणचरणवषणविषाणचूर्णतणानि नपुंसके चाचात्यसि ॥ The nouns WATUIT a kind of coin,' F gold,' gant gold, at boil,' atu foot,' quu the scrotum ; faunu a horn,' go powder,' au 'grass, are also neuters. By the force of the letter in the s tra, these words are also masculine. 3€, 109: 1 TO: NI 36. Noung ending in with the penultimate y are masculines, Thus tu: * chariot?. ३७ । काष्ठयष्ठरिवर्थासक्योकानि नपुसके। इदकाष्ठमित्यादि। 37 The nouns any wood,' Tos back,' fiu inheritance, fara bee's wax,' saya sentence are neuters. Thus za FSF &c. 95. I EFTEST faruf feaTE I EFT: 161: 11 38. The noun From when denoting '& quarter or region of the world is feminine. Thus EHT: TEST: I ३९ । तीर्थप्रोथयूथगाथानि नपुसके च । चात्युंसि । अय तीर्थः । इद तीर्थम् ॥ 39. The noaus ata spilgrimage,' wty 'the noge of a horse; the hip, u a herd,' and 7114 ‘a singer ; a song are also neuters. & 2 12 ·- 232 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI.. [VOL. IIT. GENDERS. CA. II. $40 41. 6 6 6 $ By the force of the letter 7 in the sûtra, these words are masculines also. Thus sy to: or gap atua. ४० । नापधः । अदन्तः पुसि । इनः । फेनः ॥ 40. Nouns ending in with the penultimate are masculines. Thus ga: ' a lord,' a: 'foam'. faarfsagfzaamgaanafaafafanana718HÈTUTAFAYA Aviatafaafe- हानि नपुंसके। पूर्वस्यापवादः ॥ the skin of a black The nouns 57777 'the hip, (Un. V. 32) sa antelope '(Uņ. II. 48) fenice,' 7979 forest, forest,' afara hair 'sin,' fafua' a wood; a thicket,' (Uņ. II. 52) ana 'pay,' staa rule, E101a "Jadder,' faya copulation, 2017 cemetry,' ta gem, faa' a low place, faz' sign' are neuters, This is an exception to the last aphorism. XR1 ARUT#419-faxgfaara TA1TERETETAATEPATANAWAGATHTER विभावनविमानानि नपुसके च । चात्युसि । अयमानः । इदं मानम् । 42. The nouns pride,' 0197 carriage,' sqfur vocabulary, afeta lotus ; & crane,' fa'a sandbank' (Un. II. 53) 3219 garden,' * 'sleeping,' a seat,' 217 "a place,' z 'sandalwood," with the tying-post, GFTET 'honor, Haa house,' 787 dress,' EACH 'possibility, মিমান (2) fantza baloon are also neuters, By the force of the letter in the sûtra, these words are also masculines, Thus अय मानः or इदं मानम् &c. ४३ । पोयधः । श्रदन्तः पुसि। यूपः । दीपः । सर्पः॥ 43. Nouns ending in my with the penultimate u are masculine. Thus qu: 'a sacrificial' post' (Ur. III. 27). dio: ' a lamp' au': ' a snake.' ४४ । पापरूपोडुपतल्यशिल्पयुषपशष्यसभीयान्तरीपाणि नपुसके। इदं पामित्यादि । 44. The nouns utasin,' ET 'form,' agua raft,' a bed, ' furu' art,' quu'flower,' tau 'young grass,' untu' vicinity,' u 'an island ; a promon. tary (VI. 3. 93) are neuters. Thus UTOR &c. ४५ । सूर्य कुतपकुणपद्वीपविटयानि न सके । इदं शूर्य मित्यादि । The nouns qu a winnowing basket,' zna a Brâhmana; & kind of grass,' ou 'a corpse, 'a spear,' atu an island,' fazo a branch,' are also neuters (as well as masculines). Thus ma' qu: : or इदं शूर्पम् &c. ४४ । भाषधः । स्तम्भः । कुम्भः ।। 46. Nouns ending in with the penultimate w are masculines. a pillar, 'a: ‘a water jar.' ४७ । तलभं नपुंसकम् । पूर्व स्यापवादः ॥ 3 Thus :

·१ A Nouns ending in with the penultimate are masculine Vor. II. GONDERS CH, II.F56.] MASCULINE. The noun तलभ is neuter. This is an exception to the last, ४८ । जम्भ नसके च । जुम्भम्-जम्मः ॥ 48. The nouun Syawning' is also neuter. Thus जम्भम् or जम्भः ४६ । मोपधः । सोमः । भीमः Thus ein: 'the Soma, 'a:Bhima.' ५० । रुक्मसिध्मयुग्मेधूमगुल्माध्यात्मकुङ्कमानि नपुसके । इदं शामित्यादि । 50. The nouns रूकन, gold,' सिम -scab,' युग्म 'couple,' इध्म 'fuel,' गुल्म blossom,' अध्यात्म 'spiritual,' कुकुम 'saffron' are Neuter. Thus इदं रूकमम. &c. ५१ । सग्रामदाडिमकुसुमाश्रममक्षीमहामोदामानि नपुसके च । चात्युसि। अयं संग्रामः । इदं मग्रामम् ॥ 51. The nouns सग्राम fight,' दाडिम 'pornegranate,' कुसुम 'fio wer,' आश्रम * dwelling house,' क्षेम happiness' (Un. I. 138) नीम silken cloth,' हाम ! horma' उदाम violently' are also Neuter. By the force of the letter a in the sútra, these words are also masculine. Thus अयं स गाम: or इदं संग्रामम ॥ ५२ । 'योपधः। समयः। हयः ॥ 52. Nouns ending in s with the penultimate o are masculine. Thus समय: timeहयः the horse.' ५३ । 'किसलयहृदन्टियोत्तरीयाणि नपुंसके' । स्यष्टम् ॥ 53. The nouns fremu 'a sprout' au 'the heart,' pago "the sense,' anita an upper garment' are neuter. ५४ । 'गोनयकवायमलयान्वयाव्ययानि नपुंसके च' । गोमय :-गोमयम् ॥ 5. The nouns गोमय 'cow-dung,' कषाय the real color,' मलय Malaya अन्वय 'Association, अध्यय- Indeclinable are also neuters. Thus गोमयः or गोमयम ॥ ५५ । रोपधः। तुरः । अङ्करः ॥ 55. Nouns ending in w with the penultimate T are masculines. Thus at: 'the hoof,' agt: 'the blossom.' ५६ । 'द्वाराग्रस्फारतक्रवक्रवक्षप्रक्षुद्रनारतीरदूरकच्छरन्ध्रावधभीरगभीरविचित्रके यूर के. टारोदराजसशरीरकन्दरमन्दारपञ्जरजठराजिरवैरचामरपुष्करगहरकुहरकुटीरकुलीरचत्वरकाश्मीरनीरा- মিনিন্মমনুলমিল সিনেমালিন্যমনসময়ানুনুনয়নামা- णि न सके । इदं द्वामित्यादि । 56. The words द्वार 'door,' अग्र in front,' म फार 'swelling abundance' (UN. II. 13) समा 'eurdled milk,' व 'crooked,' 'rampart,' निग्र 'a measura of tine, 30 - ·234 TAE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. VOL. III. GEN DERS CH. II. $56. 6 w Thus & TRĄ. 2 small,' fere hole,' are a multitude;' ate 'shore,' ac distance,' difficulty,' “misery,' au 'a hole,' a tear; blood,' sau 'a bole; a den,' watt a cowherd,' mat deep,' she cruel, fafar beautiful,' angr an armlet,' are meadow,' at 'the stomach, Te 'constant, yolc the body,' T, the root, HTT the coral tree,' and 'T skeleton,' T 'immortal,' 567 'the stomach,' sufit 'a court-yard,' av enmity, at sobámara,' got the lake,' store the cave,'tr'a cavity,' ett a hut,' sett sa crab,' arat a court-yard' (Uņ. II. 121), TTT kás. mira,' at 'water, at sky; cloth, furat dew,' at 'a loom,' 7*7 'instrument, 97. dominion,' a 'a field,' FAT a friend,' ar 'a wife,' far'a picture,' *7 *um. brella,' , 'urive,' thread, ath 'face,' 'the eye,' 1117 'gotra,' sgfa 3 x fuger-protector,' 17 (?) sea 'an instrument,' en 'a weapon,' atau 'Śâstra SE"cloth,' an leaf,' vir la vessel,' and 77 star' are neuters. Thus इदं द्वारम् &c. ५७ । 'शुक्रमदेवतायाम् । इदं शुक्र रेतः ।। The noun 7 is neuter when it is not the name of the god (Sukra). Here means 'semen,' 461***tamICATtiaitun attāTATZETTHETTAR tiratzfafafafurfu ay सके च'। चात्यसि। चक्र:-चामत्यादि । 58. The nouns um disc,' 'a thunderbolt,' r 'darkness,' ATT 'essence,' sant (1) OTT the further or opposite side,' at 'milk,' à 1AT, 'an iron olub,' ZETT, the sentiment of love,' HET 'the coral tree,' STIT ‘a kind of grass,, fafat 'darkness, fufst dew' are also neuters. By the force of the word a in the sûtra, these are also masculines. Thus 54: or A & 4€ Igrou: , qu:: 5: 59. Nouns ending in with the penultimate, a are masculines. Thus wu: 'a bull;' a: a tree.' 601fufuatatrafiaútaugttaran Teasertatfus ag pa ni 60. The fuciu 'the name of a tree' au expression of joy, to the head' spalla 'a fryingpan,' atga 'nectar,' (Uņ. IV. 76), gita 'faeces,' femafaa 'sin, and hu 'stain' are neuters, ६१ । 'यूषकरीमविषवर्षाणि नपुसके च' । चात्यसि । अयं यूपः । इदं यूमित्यादि । The words gu 'soup,' itu 'dry cow-dung', fa pretext,' 'emulation,' fan poison,' au a year' are also neuters. By the force of the word a in the Sûtra, these words are also masculine. Thus श्रयं यूप: or इदं यूधम, ER 18109: 1 apgai aug: 1 AT1AH: 1) 62. Nouns ending in sy with the penultimate y are masculines, Thus are: ta calf' (Un. III. 62); que: a crow,' ATAH: a kitchen, १३ । 'चनसबिसखुससाहसानि नपुसके । 63. The words qae' jack-fruit,' fag 'the fibre of a lotus,' gg 'chaft,' and wine courage,' are neuters, € 61. € 6 m ·VOL. III. CEN D ERS Cg. II. 872.] MASCULINE. . - । 'चमसांसरनिर्यासोपवासकार्यासवाटमासकासकांसमांसानि नपुंसके. च' । 'इदं चमसम् । आयं चमस इत्यादि। 64. The words चमस vessel,' अंस, रस juice,' नियास gum juice,' उपवास * fast, Tacotton,' zio perfume; habitation ; ' #18 month, 118, TE cough,' ata bell-metal,' and ia flesh are also neuters. Thus चमसं चमत: &ca ६५। कंस चाप्राणिनि । कसोऽस्त्री पानभाजनम् । प्राणिनि तु । कसो नामः कश्चिः है 65: The noun कस wlien not meaning: a. living being. is neuter; It is never feminine and means a drinking vesel, cup or cen.' When it means a. living being, then. it. is the name of a king of Mathura son of Ugrasena and enemy of Krishna. ६६ । 'रश्मिदिवसाभिधानानि ।' एतानि पुसि स्यः । रशिममयूखः। दिवसो घम: ॥ 66. Nouns. which are synonyms of रधिम: 'a ray of light, and दिवस day' are masculine. Thus रशिमर्मयूखः; दिवसो घसः॥ 'दीधितिः स्त्रियाम'। पूर्वस्थापवादः । 67. The noun afufa: 'a ray of light' is feminine, This is an exception to the last aphorism, १८ । 'दिनाहनी नयु सके.' । प्रायमध्यपवादः ॥. 68. The nouns fan: 'a day' and 9 a day' are neuters. This is also an exception to the aphorism 66. ६६ । 'मानाभिधानानि । एतानि पुसि स्य:। कुडवः । प्रस्थः ॥ Nouns which are. synonyms a measure, a standard.' are zaasaulines, Thus कुडवः, प्रस्थः ।। ७० । 'दोणाढको नपुंसके चा' । इदं द्रोणाम् । श्रयं द्रोणः ।। The words द्रोण sa measure. of capacity' and पाढक measure of grain' are neuters also. Thus इदं द्रोणम् or श्रयं द्रोण: ७१ । 'खासमानिके स्त्रियाम् । इयं खारी। इयं मानिका ॥ The words खारी 'a measure of grain equal to.16 droness' and मानिका। 6.a. kind of weight ' are feminines. Thus इयं वारी, इयं मानिका।। ७२ । दाराक्षतलाजासूनां बहुत्वं च । इमें दाराः ।। 72. The nouns दारा ' wife, अक्षत 'whole grain or unhuskeil rice, लाज * garched or fried grain,' असु: ' the five vital breaths' are always plural, Thus इसके 69. of By the force of the word g in the sutra, tbey are féminines, ·236 THE SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. III, GENDERS CH. II. 873. words HS 6 & 6 es 6 ७३ । 'नाअपजनोपपदानि व्रणाङ्गपदानि । यथासंख्यं नाझायुपपदानि व्रणादीनि पुसि R: 1 mai aištau: 4013: 1 9942: 1 bucatar safarei sfa marafiązze 978 7.3. The nouns au 'a boil, at a member and us a foot' compounded with atel, F and a respectively are masculines. The words au &c. are of both genders (i, e. Masculine and Neuter), but this Sûtra debars their use as neuters, (when compounded with the above fiords). Thus wo istaa: 17019 5902: # 981' REGIEatalpas:? 1 90' 74. The • wind' (Up. I, 94) TIER 6 the wing of a bird'ara swimming' and fast a sacrificial priest,' are masculines. Thus अयं मरुत् ॥ ou 1 #factfogfaufra fxfszfaataarifaâifarrafãfamfagaa:' i så göfge: 1 omta: 11 75. The words fo'a seer,' tfy's heap,' afara leathern bag for holding water,' di 'knot,' fuh fH 'a worm,' af sound,' afer offering,' f (d) and Aifa' the head,' rf' the sun;' fa" the poet,' mfű (a monkey,' and gfa ésage,' are masculines. Thus we zig: 1 OFIA FISH :', ca g fer u 76. The Fords tz 3 flag,' 118 elephant,' si så sort of grass,' gist a heap' are masculines: ७७ । 'हस्तकुन्तान्तवातवातदूतधूतं भूतचूतमुहूर्ताः' । पते पुसि। अमरस्तु 'मुहूर्तोऽस्त्रियाम् SPUTX 11 The words the hand,' a 'a lance,' a 'the end,' ara a mul titude,' un 'the wind,' an a messenger, a rogue, सूत a son, the mango tree, मुहूर्त a moment,' are masculines, According to Amarakosba, (1. 4, 11) gran is never feminine, (é. e. it is both masouline and neuter). 35 1 OTZAUSFUEHtigatEgegntsAISUUTETTJET:', u uz: # 78. The nouns utg a bull,' RUE' the scum of boiled rice,' aus a small box or basket of bamboo 'Tus master,' arus 'a multitude,' qogmouth,' mox the cheek,' gta a mau with bald head,' utus'a heretic, and futás & crest are inasculine. Thus gu gus: 11 ७ । 'बंशांश पुरोडायाः' । अयं वंशः। पुरो दाश्यते पूरोडाशः । कर्मणि घञ् । भवष्या CITATŪT: TATU URTIGTTGTretmana' (988€) xfa faritu rūsite girera (१५२८) इति च निपातनात् प्रकृतसू त्र एन निपातनाद्वा दस्य डत्वम् । 'पुरोडाशभुजामिष्टम gta 19: 79. The nouns au a family,'#*a shars,' TISTI an oblation' are masculines, 6 6 9 6 6 # & 6 en ·VOL. III. GENDERS CH. III. $4.] NEUTER. 237 6 Thus आय वशः। The word purodása a cake-offering is derived by adding the affis an, with the force of karma to the root 21), preceded by the upapada पुरो। The z is changed to 3 by no particular rule of Grammar, but we find the word so spelt in sûtras IV. 3. 70, S. 1449 ; and IV. 3. 148 S. 1528. Or the x is changed to g by nipatana even in the present stra; and sútra IIT. 2. 71. S. 3414. Thus in Magha also we fiud : gitgit PITA, TEA. the sacri. fice of purođása eaters. ८० । 'हेदकन्दकुन्दबुदबुदशब्दाः । श्रयं हृदः ॥ 80. The words Ea a lake, कन्द 'root,' कुन्द a kind of jasmine.' बुद् बुद bubble' are masculines. Thus yoga: 11 541 Sofeamuarela ayat:' 1 SUHTÉ: u 81. The words offering,' afya & road,' fua a churning stick, anfaa'a name of Iudra,' FIR 'a clump ofgrass ' fanp, the buttocks,' and on a heap are masculines. Thus pu se u can geelauan ATTIETAZ KAĞAfuatggianaUKAZJEFaraggar'i श्रयं पल्लव इत्यादि। 82. The words omaa “a sprout,' thaa'a small pool,' cough, ishi (gound,' TETE ‘frying pan,' fazia a peg,' 77 * the hut of an ascetic,' #fu 'jewel,' ain' wave,' horse' nie smell,' #'m' a musical instrument,' n attachment,' ocean,' and yea'a falcon,' are masculines. Thus sura: &c. ८३ । सारथ्यतिथिक्षिस्ति पारयज्जलयः । एते पुसि। श्रय सारथः । 83. The words grafu 'charioteer,' ufafu 'a guest,' fa 'the womb,' afe the abdomen,' TÍU - the hand,' for the hollow of the hands' are masculines. Thus ud fy: &c. efa gfagtfuma th 6 & 6 b THE NEUTER GENDER. agai suaritsam 1. The Neuter Gender. This is an Adhikâra sú trà. २। भावे ल्युडन्तः । हसनम । 'भावे किम् gaatsfor: । दुधमत्रश्चनः कुठारः ॥ 2. This Abstract nous of action formed with the affix pena, are neuters. is a repetition of III. 3. 115, S 3290. Thus & (laughter). Why do we say abstract nouns of action ? Observe tai: * fire'; qazaa: an axe', these words are masculines and not neuters. 3, fast a' i pia at fassi azi shila 719 i afuna 1 an. " 3. Abstract noun of action formed with the fatost affix are neuters. This is also repetition of III. 3. 114. S. 3090. Thus fa#laughter, vitae, a song. ४ । त्वध्यञी तचिता । [मत्वम्-शोकल्यम् । व्यञः पित्त्व सामर्थ्यात्यने स्त्रीत्वम.। चातु- यम - चातुरी । सामग्र यम -सामग्री । श्री चित्यम -श्री चिती ॥ Among taildhitus, words formed with the affixes 3 and 1s1 are Neuteis ; (See V. 1. 123, S. 1787).

·238 THE SIDDEANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL. III. GendERS CE. III. $4, Thus शुक्रत्वम The घज खुज । पिता Thus सख्यम whiteness and शाकल्याम #whiteness. formed nouns are optionally feminines because of the indicatory letter o by IV. 1. 41, S. 498 in order to give scope to, the indicatory w. Thus argås or arget cleverness. ' 14T JA or annut effects, goods." चित्यम, or श्रचिती 'aptness.' ५ । 'कर्मणि च ब्राह्मणादिगुणवचनेभ्यः । ब्राह्मणस्य कर्म ब्राह्मण्यम । 5. Brahmanâdi words when denoting work and quality are neuters. This is repetition of V. 1. 124, S. 1788. Thus EUA, Brâhmanical, ६। यट्यढग्यगण्वुञ्छाश्च भावकर्मणि । एतदन्तानि कोवानि । 'स्नाय चलोपशव (१७६०) । स्तयम । 'सख्युर्यः (१७६१)। साम । 'कपिज्ञात्योर्डक्. (१७६२) | कायम । 'पत्य न्त पुरोहितादिभ्यो यक' (१७६३) आधिपत्यम । 'प्राणभजातिवयोवचनोद्गात्रादिभ्योऽज (१७९४) श्रीष्ट्रम, । हायनान्तयुवादिभ्योऽण (१७६4) | ढहायनम् । द्वन्द्वमनोज्ञादिभ्यो पुत्रकम । हात्राभ्यश्छः (१८००)। अच्छावाकीयम, ॥ 6. Nouns formed with the affixes यत, घ, ढक थक, प्रज, अण, वुज.. and the senses of nature or action thereof are neuters. (a) The affix un is added by virtue of V. 1. 125, S. 1790. Thus FAH stheft. (3) The affix g is added by virtue V. 1. 126, S. 1791. • friendship.' (c) The affix ढक is added by virtue of V. 1. 127, S. 17.92. Thus कायम fape-like.' (d) The affix यक् is added by virtue of v. 1. 128, S. 1793. Thus आधिपत्यम sauthority.' (e) The affixus, is added by virtue of V. 1. 129, S. 1794. Thus sich "camel-like. (h The afix प्रण is added by virtue of v. 1. 130, S. 1795. Thus Qहायनम, the action of two days.' (७) The affix वुज, is added by virtue of V. 1. 132 and 133, S. 1797 and 1798. Thus पितापुत्रकम 'paternal and filial.' (b) The affix o is added by virtue of V. 1. 135, S. 1800. Thus अच्छावा कोयम ॥ NOTE: -This Sutra summarises all the affixes taught in v. 1. 124-135. ७ । 'अध्ययीमाव:-' (६५६)। अधिस्त्रि । 7. Nouns which are अव्ययीभाव compounds are neuters. (See II. 4. 18, S. 659) Thus अधिस्त्रिा ८। 'द्वनकत्वम् । पाणिपादम ॥ 8. Nouns which are are compounds are neuter. (See II. 4. 2, S. 906), Thus पाणिपदम । । प्रभाषायां हेमन्तशिशिरावहोरात्रे च । स्यष्टम ॥ ।

·VOL. III. GENDERS CH. III. $18.] NEUTER. 239 9. The compound af fart is masculine, and er is neuter in the nou-classical literature. (See II. 4. 28. S. 3399). 901 99517AETTURA I Fa:'wêrsa u 10. A Tatpurusha, compound, with the exception of that which is formed by the particle waſ, and of the Karmadhâraya compound, becomes neuter gender, in the cases explained in the following sûtras. (See II. 4. 19, S. 822). This is an adhikâra sútra. qe i samme HTAT | TTTUH N 11. A Tatpurusha compound ending with the word chhaya 'shadow' is neuter in gender, when the sense is that of profuseness of the thing indicated by the first term. (See II. 4. 22, S. 825). Thus शरच्छायम ॥ १२ । 'राजामनुष्यपूर्वा सभा' । इनसभमित्यादि । 12. A Tatpurusha compound ending in ## 'court' when preceded by words which are syuonynis of 1757 and AZOR inou-human being' is neuter. (See II. 4. 23, S. 826). Thus ga HHA, 'the sing's court' &o. 921 gaat TuaTfa91 frutal 13. Tatpurusha compounds ending in (wine,' gat 'army,' 101 'shadow,' at 'a house,' fat night' are also feminines (in addition to their being also neuter). See II. 4. 15, S. 828. 981 foran' i Aaru: uraia wią 11 14. The gender of a Dvanda or a Tatpurusha compound is like that of the last word in it. (See II. 4. 26. S. 812). 941 7717781: afa" (508) 15. The Dvanda or a Tatpurusha compound ending with 19 night,'s fa day' and y'a day' is masculine. (See II. 4. 29, S. 814.) १६ । अयथपुण्याहे नपुंसके । 16. The words way bad road' and young 'sacred day' are neuters. (See II. 4. 30, S. 815 and II. 4. 17, S. 821 Vartika). per fpargaf ufa:' : farisa, i gaf gfæ fra i pa na: 11 A Dvigu compound ending with the word of when preceded by a numeral is neuter. (See II. 1. 52, S. 730). Thus friFa" Why do we say then preceded by a numeral"? Oliserve pariş: which is masculine. १८ । द्विगुः स्त्रियां च । व्यवस्थया । पञ्च फली। त्रिभुवनम् ॥ 18. Noung which are Dvigu compounds are feminines also, (See II. 4. 17, S, 821 Vârtikas). Thus पञ्चमूलो 'fire-roots,' त्रिभुवनम् three-Torlds.'

·240 The SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. (VOL III, GENDERS CH. III. $25. . . MP १६ । इसुसन्तः । हविः । धनुः । 19. Nouns ending in a (Un. II. 108) and 38, (Uņ. II. 115) are neuter. Thus हविः - oblation to fire ' (see Un. II. 108) धनुः a. bow' (Un. II. 115 read with II. 117). २० । अर्चिः स्त्रियां च । इसन्तत्व ऽप्यर्चिः स्त्रियां नपुसके च स्यात् । इमिद वार्चिः ।। 20. The nouns fa ray’is feminine also in addition to its being neuter, although it ends in इस ) ॥ Thus qयं or इदं चिः २९ । छदिः स्त्रियामेव । इयं छदिः । छादयतेनेनेति छदेश्चुरादिगणन्तात् "अर्चिशुचि- इत्यादिना इस । इस्मन् इत्यादिना हस्वः । पटल दिः इत्यमरः । तत्र घटलसाहचर्याच्छी दिषः स्लीबतां वदन्तोऽमरव्याख्यातार उपेक्ष्याः ॥ 21. The word of the roof' is always feminine. Thus इयं छदिः । It is also formed by adding the affix इस (see Un. II, 108) to the root wife belonging to the churâdi class. The root wife becomes a by VI. 4. 97, S. 2985. In the Amarakosha, we find the word uza gfa: (II. 2 14). There the commentators say that the poun fe is neuter because it is mentioned along with uza' which neuter. This explanatiou of the commentators should be rejected. २२ । मुखनयनलाहवनमांसरुधिरकार्मुकविवरजलहलधनानाभिधानानि । एतेषामभिधाय कानि कीबे स्युः । मुखमाननम् । नयन लोचनम् । लोह कालम् । वन गहनम् । मसिमाभिधम अधिरं रक्तम् । कार्मुकं शरासनम् । विवरं बिलम् । जलं वारि । हलं लालम् । धनं द्रविणम् । अचमशनम् । अस्यापवादानाह त्रिस त्या ॥ 22. The words which are synonyms of मुख face,' नयन an eye, लोह 'copper,' वन "forest,' मास a month,' धिर blood, कार्मक a bow,' विवर 'a hole, जल *water,' a 'the plough,' a 'wealth,' and sy food' are neuters. Thus मुखं प्राननम् ; नयनं लोचनम् ; लोह कालम ; वन गहनम ; मांस मा. मिधम्; रुधिरं रक्तम , कार्मुकं शरासनम् ; विवरं बिलम ; जलं वारि; हल लांगलम् ; धनं द्रविणम् ; अन्न अशनमः ॥ In the next three sû tras exceptions to this are mentioned. २३ । बोरार्थीदनाः पुंसि ॥ 23. The words सोर a plough,' अर्थ 'wealth' and ओदन 'food' are masculine. २४ । वक्त नेत्रारण्यगारडीवानि पुति च । वक्तो वक्तम् । नेत्रो नेत्रम् । अरण्योऽरगयम् । नायडीवो गाण्डीधम । 24. The words वक्त the face,' नेत्र 'the cye,' अरण्य the forest,' and गाण्डीव + Arjuva's bow' are also tuasculines (as well as neuters.) Thus वक्तः or वक्तुम ; नेत्रः or नेत्रम् ; अरण्यः or अरण्यम, ; गाण्डीव or गाण्डीवम । २५ । अटवी स्त्रियाम ॥ The word अटवी the forest' is feminine, । 25, ·Vor.. III. GENDERS CH. III. F33. NEUTERS. 241 । ७ २६ । लोपधः । कुलम । कूलम् । स्थलम॥ Nouns ending in any with the penultimate pare neuters. Thus कुलम् 'a race,' कूलम a shore,' स्थलम, place.' २७ । तूलायललालकुमूलतरलकम्बलदेवलवषलाः युसि । अब तूलः ।। 27. The following are masculines -तूल ' cotton,' उपलgstarme, are the Palmyra tree,' कुसल 'a granary,' तरल 'a necklace,' कम्बल 'blis.siket,' देवल 'a virtuous man,' and 'a sûdra.' Thus प्रय :&c. २८ । शीलमूलमङ्गलसालकमलमलमुसलकुण्डलपललमणालवानिगलपनालविडाल खिल, शूलाः पुंसि च । चातकाबे। इदं शामित्यादि। 28, The following are masculines also (in addition to their being neuters): -शोल: conduct,' मन 'root, the planet Mars,'हाल 's tree,' कमल lorus, सल 'bottom,' मुसल 'nestle,' कुण्डल ear-ornament, पलल : demon, "ilesh ; माल a lotus fibre,' वाल 'a child, निगल swallowing,' पलाल strand; thusk, विडाल, 'S cat,' feta 'a desert,' w 'a spear, Thus शीत: or शीलम । २६ । शतादिः संख्या । शतम । सहस्र । 'शतादिः' इति किम । सको तो अहवः । संख्या इति किम । शतको नाम पर्वतः ॥ The numerals शत a hundred &c. are neuters. Thus शतम 'a hundred, सहसम a thousand.' Why do we say, शत &c. ? Obserye pm: 'one,' a 'tro,' #: 'many." Why do we say wben meaning the numerals' ? Ouserve शतः (the name of a mountain). Here IF is masculine. ३० । शतायुतप्रयुताः पुंसि च । अयं शतः । इदशमित्यादि। 30. The words शत a hundred,' अयुत 'a myriad,' प्रयुत 'a million' are also masculines. Thus अय शत: or इदं शतम &c. ३१ । लक्षा कोटिः स्त्रियाम । इयलक्षा। इयं कोटिः । 'धा लक्षा नियुतं च सत्' पत्य, मरातकोऽपि लक्षम ॥ 31. The words war a lakh' and कोटि ten million' are feminine. Thus य लता, इयं काटि:।। According to Amarakosha (III. 5. 24) the word लक्ष is also neuter. Thus 29. । ३२ । शक पुसि । सहसः क्वचित् । अयं सक्षमः । एवं सहस्रम् ॥ 32. The word शंकु ten billious, and sometimes सहन 'a. thousand' is musculine, Thus अयं सहसः or दवं सहसम. ३३ । मन्त्र चकाकर्तरि । मन्प्रत्ययान्ता व्यच का लोबास्याच तु कर्तरि । धर्म । चम दव्यचकः किम । अणिमा । महिमा । अकर्तरि किम । ठदाति इति दामा । 33. Nouns of two syllables forned with the affix ha and when not denoting an agent are neuters, 31 ।

·242 THE SIDDIANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. GENDERS CH. III. $33. 36. Thus चम्मन skin, वर्मन् 'ar mor,' कर्मन 'work' Why do we say of two syllables ?' Observe fu#7 'minuteness,' AfEAR 'glory.' Why do we say when not denoting an ageut' Observe Tata giver ३४ । ब्रह्मानटि च । नय बा । इदं ब्रह्मा । 34. The word en is also masculine, Thus ब्रह्मा or इंदं ब्रहा। 94 1 ATHTHOT FI #q@ 39:- TARTU wsa: ! 35. The words aga name' and, it "hair, are neuters. This is meroly an amplification of sätra 33. 3E1*: UT: 1 #9: 1 au: 1 na 1 121: 1 Nouns of two syllables formed with the affix ure neuters, Thus que, glory,' wae, 'mind,' , austerity.' Why do we say of two syllables'? Observe as the moon,' which, is masculine, 991 **T: FECUTATI TAT HTH: wrlgrá agatai: 37. The word swth is feminine. Thus TAT FUT8: Generally, this word is used in the Plural muniber only. 351 917: 1 491 77 38. Nouns formed with the affix 7 are neuters. (Un, IV. 159), * a leaf : 7H. an umbrella." 28 1 91718191 HETER at 1: FeaTa' 39. The following are always feminine :-017 journey,' ATT sure,' HET a leathern bag,' a tusk,' ZET'& strap. ४० । 'भूनामित्रछात्रपुत्रमंत्रवत्रमेट्रोष्ट्राः पुसि' । अयं भूत्रः । न मित्रममित्रः। तस्य मित्रा- रायमित्रास्ते' इति माघः। 'स्याला मन्त्री मित्र च' इति च । यत्तु 'द्विषोऽमित्रे' (३१११) इति सूत्रे हरदत्तेनोक्तम्-'अमेपिदित्योणादिक इत्रच् । अमेमिनं मित्रस्य ध्यथर्योदत्यादी मध्योदात्तस्तु चिन्त्यः। नसमासेऽप्य वम् । परल्लिङ्गतापि स्यादिति तु तत्र दोषान्तरम्' इति ततप्रकृतसूत्रा- पर्यालोचनमूलकम् । स्वरदोषोद्भावनर्माण 'नो जरममित्रमताः' (१८५०) इति पाष्ठसूत्रास्मरण- Fanfafa fan 40. The following are masculines :-** a servant,' far 'an enemy.' 17' a pupil,' gx'a gön,' AT 'a maritra,' a= 'name of a demon killed by Indra,' AG'a ram,' 30'a cameli' Thus अयं भूत्रः । मित्रः is equal to न मित्रम् a non-friend 2.e. all enemy, Thus we find in Magha तस्य मित्रारमित्रास्त। So also स्याताममित्री मित्रे च ॥ In commenting on the sûtra featsfæ(III. 2. 113 S. 3111), Haradatta in his Padamanjari says : The word umitra is derived from the roof am with the Unadi uffis 977 under sûtra IV. 174, in the sense of an evemy. The pord amitra is not a negative compound of 29+far as it would appear at first sight. Because had it been a Tatpurusba compound of a + mitra, then by sútra II. 4. . 6, D Thus OTA © $ 2 mea- & $ ·.. VOL. IIT. GENDERS CA. III. $4:6.] NEUTERS. 5 $ S: 812, it would bave been Neuter, because the word mitra is Neuter, If it bo Biid that 'the gender of a word depends upon usage, and though mitra be Neuter, amitra will be masculine, then there arises the he difficulty as to accent, tben. by VI. 2.2, S. 3736 the # will retain its accent in the Tatpurusha. it is intented thirt the accent should be on f; .en the fan accent, For the Rig Vedins read it with the acute on the middle of amitra, as in the following : SHER. 2001 FIAF: (Rig Veda VL. 25: 2), FÄra HT (Rig VIII. 75, 10).' But these two objectious of Haradatta proceed on the assumption that the Word amitra is a Tatpurusha compound, Bit as a roatter of fact it is a Bahu. vrihi compound and consequently the rule of gen ler taught in II. 4, 26 does.not apply to it. Haradatta overlooked the coutext in applying this rule. He further forgot sûtra VI. 2. 116, S. 3850 which specifically applies to the accent of amitra, when he raizes the objection as to accent. Note : -Did Haradatta, really ni sapply sûtra II. 4, 29 and forget VI. 2. 116; or is not Bhattoji foundering? Why should the word wat be taken as 2. Bihu vrihi and 100 a. Tatpurusha ? The Bubuyrihi amitra would mean friendless,' and not an enemy.' 891 DFUrTartan: g'fa a' 41. The following are masculines (in addition to their being neuters): leaf ;.' NIF '2. vessel ; ' ufa= ' holy ; ' 'a thread ; ' 7. a line. Thus 03:. or CRI: ४२ । 'बालकुसुम्मशुल्बयुद्ध पत्तनरणाभिधानानि' । बलं वीर्यम् ॥ 42. The synonyms of a courage or strength,' & 'a flower,' '& 1ope, string'ara a town and to fight' are neuters. Thus बलं वीर्यम ॥ ४३ । 'घल्मक्रमलोत्यनानि पुसि च । पमादयः शब्दाः कुसुमाभिधायित्वेऽपि द्विलिङ्गा स्थ:। अमरोऽप्याह-वा पुसि. पटा नलिनम्' इति। एवं च 'अधादिसूत्रे तु जलजे. पम नपुंसकमेव' इति वृत्तिग्रन्यो मतान्तरण नेयः ।। 43. The words gem; DAR, 39 the lotus flower,' although names of a kind of flower, are masculines also (in addition to their being neuters). In the Amarakosha, (I. 2. 39) and afea are optionally masculines. L. II. 4. 31, Kåſikå says padma meaning lotus is neuter only. This is however, one view. of the case. 841' E8 Uhr g'fa' 11. The words siga and #UTA: «fight are masculines. By III: 42. This makes these words being synonyms of rana would have been Neuters, them masculines, 841' wifs: fata - 45; The word af fight is always feminine. This also by sutra 42 am) would have been Neuter, Eltfa', astfaarat ni ay'e F12 # A# Names of fruits are nenters. C 6 46.

·The SIDDHANTA KAUMUDI. [VOL. III. GENDARS CA. III. $47. Tbus START one of the myrobolans,' ** mango.' But the word TYT is feminine '90. It bowever does 200 ideau the fruit, but the tree which produces that fruit. 9'asfa:', fara rudazu i TIF # 47. Names of trees are feminines only. This ia got a universal rule. Thus हरीतकी.. one of the myrobolana. 51. faussi Ukongatuan' i a ml: B: a 48. The following are neuters :- rawn the sky,' 7the universe,' en once,' * ordure,' drop of water,' van ordure,' (Un. IV. 58), can'the liver,' safsaa ' whey." HET antaraarai nafayfarfenfuratranufwaifa # The following are neuters : comme wala butter,' 7 a well,' a lie, 64 'uectar,' farat cause, fan & wealth,' far miud,' for bile,' an fust,' caa silver,' au au event,' ta 6 * gray hair. 40 SierravaanisatsigafUREVE TEUTETTA146aaarfar gaita R:11 9 $ 6 corn,' S 50. The following are neuters :- VIE' a funeral rite', fathe thunderbolt of Iudra,' a 'fate,' 16' seat,' 93'e bowl,' (Up 1. 112). si 'the body.' efo'qurdled milk,' afy the thigh' (Un. III. 154), via an eye,' fa' a bone,' 8C's place,' sh" the sky;' uersin,' and at the seed.' ५१ । देवसि च । वैधम-दैवः ।। 51. The word 29 luck is also masouline. Thus aan or dan • E117212037aurtuntár24HZLETSZERTUrage fauzan af 8 virafaROTEIN The following are neuters w194 clarifed butter,' porop), '62'silver,' JUU 'vendible, ana saffrou, yra 'conquerable,' sai clarified butter,' Si Sanoblation of foud to deceased ancestors,' 6182 a poolu ; ' un' truth ;' urloftspring * the price ;' fuma loop or swing made of rope ;'s a wall,'ha *wine ;' a jouse ;' gå & kiud of wusical justrument ;' gai • an army.' Tbus za 1172de 42 1' angaro:cafcufuzfapagmaTUT&Richfa'u 53. The following are neuters :-- art couple' ay 'A peacook's tail,' gia 'sorrow ;' afsu “a Ish book,' facer . the tail of a peacock,' fame shadow,' SGR relation,' wae amuiet,' ar • baon,' té "an errow,' qzim ' a deity. 48 l'parafra' isi fa? TOISTĀT A7 D *The word na when it means one of the speoial seoses is nenter. Why do we say oue of the special seuses ? It will not bị Nuuter when it Made the dicle of & chariot, do ति अपुंसकाधिकारः ॥ EXO 6 ·Vol. III. GENDERS CH. IV. $4.) MASCULINES AND FEMININE. 6 MASCULINE AND FEMININE GENDERS. Qiqat:' 1 FETTISTÆ ! 1. Masculine aud Femanine Genders, This is an adhikâra sutra, २ । 'गोर्माणार्याष्टमुष्टिपाटनिवस्तिशाल्मलित्रुटिसिमरीचय' । दयमयं वा गाः । The following belong to both masuuline and feminny genders : if the cow,' #fur ía gein,' ufc 'a stick,' or 'the fist; Titter the trumpet duwer,' ait residing,' simfa ‘uume of a tree,' giz'cutting' wfs ink,' pitfe pegu per-' Thus go or yu #:. ३ । 'मन्युमृत्युसोधुक्रर्कन्धुकिकुक्रगडुरेणावः' । इयमयं वा मन्युः । 3. The following are buch masculine and feminines : --- front fanger" (Uņ. III 20), Ay 'death ;' árg 'rum,' en the jujube tree' (Un. I 93) sug 'scratching,' to u atuni of dust.' Thus go or a : 1 ४ । 'गुणवचनमुकारान्तं नपुसकं च' । त्रिलिमित्यर्थः । पटु-पटुः- पदवी ॥ 4. Nouns ending in 3 denoting quality or qualification are also neuters. That is they belong to all the three genders. Tbus ac, ug:, ocat. u gautuarga aroma:-ronata 5. Those arun nouus which deuote an offspring are both masculiue and feminine. Thus sma: or Tout i pfa eng'erfuatt: 1 MASCULINE AND NEUTER GENDERS. qilgajar:', NUMITSUÆ # 1. Masculine and Neuter Genders, This is an adhkâra sutra. २ । 'एतभूतमुस्तलितरावतपुस्तकाबुस्ललोहिताः' । अयं धृ.सः । इद घृतम् । The following are both masculines and neuters:--TA ‘butter,' yn 'any being,' मुस्त a kind of grass,' स्वेलित 'play, सेरावत Indra's elephaut,' पुस्तक ' book,' gen the burnt orust of roast meat,' ariza 'redness.' Thus po ua: orë 29. * I 'ZefagramTREET:' , mazy: 1 * 3. The following are both masculines and neuters :-95 & born,' “Half,' faarg heat,' 377 effort,' 172. a spear,' a 'firm.' Thus अयं शङ्कor इदं यंगम् । * 1 *ANSFNVESTATufaidazugar:' 1 st aa: 1 67° 4. The followilig are both masculines and neuters :--an fa moltitule, 50 'a tree,' u 'a carpet,' and 'a buudie,' weed a level plain,' au pride' a'a cemetry' (Uņ. I. 137), ud a half a verse,' a** a kind of grass,' and game tail.' Thus we asi: or sa 56A, ·THE SIDDHANAT KAUNUDI, (Vol III. GENDER CH. V. $5. कुशी 6. VE 1 ५ । 'कबन्धीषधायुधान्ताः' । स्पष्टम् ॥ 5. The following are loth masculine and neuter azt a headless trunk,' y 'medicine,' sargu ta weapon.' ZIGAZTATEvan&utra"*10*9*11##:" på पुनपुः PERUT: स्युः । 'कुशो रामसुते द: यो द्वीये कुश जले इति विश्वः । शलाकावाची तु स्त्रियाम् । तथा 'जानपद-'(५००) श्रादिसुत्रणायोविकारे ङोधि । ! arsim तुटाया 'कुशा वानस्पत्याः स्थ ता मा यात' इति श्रुतिः । अतः काम-' (१६०) इति सूत्रे 'कुशाक यु' इति प्रयोगश्च । graf 9-Etat qurat sararroz eta i 7 Shanx i va' a fra 102TUTTÀ #acara fra la manier saaf ałT HTHÁİTƏa: dfsa ZATIGT ति विभावनाय बहुश्रुतेः ॥ The following are both masculines and neuters : cs' punishment, #13 the scum of boiled rice,' 718 & break,' qa the corpse,' gawa ka kind of rock-salt,' ata the side,' 17 cough,' wa hook, a goad,' 912 'the sky, 1 kuſa grass,' faz 'thunder-bolt.' These words are both masculines and neuters. Thus we find in the Visvakosha “ Kuba is the name of the son of Râma, it means also darbha grasa, as well as the rope of kısa grass for connecting the yoke of a plough with the plongh, and an island. Kusam (neuter) meang Water' But when it means ploughsbare or a rod (salaka) it is feminine. That being so, wheu tbe salaka is made of iron the feminine will be formed by tą as it This is by sûtra IV.. 1. 42, S 500. But when it means a salâkâ made of wood, the feminine is formed by ZIT | As of a piece of wood.' As we find in the sruti : -कुशावानस्य त्या:. FIAT AT GIÁ you kušas are the children of the tree, do you protect me.' So also in VIII. 3. 46, S. 160, we find the word 27 used. So also in the Vpåsa Sûtra we find the word for used. See Vedâuta. Sátra III. 3. 26 where the getting rid of good and evil is mentioned; "the ob. taining of this good and evil by others has to be added, because the statement about the obtaining is supplementary to the statement about the getting rid of as in the case of the kusas, the metres, the praise and the singiug This (2.e. the l'eason for this) has been stated in the Půrva Mimânsa.” (According to the commentators, small wooden rods used by the Udgâtris in counting the stotras. are called kusâs. Thibaul's Vedânta Sätras Part II. p. 227) So also in the commentary on the above gâtra by Sankarichấryn, we find varafando anafa ärfarawati u Thus we find that the Sruti (kuśa vânaspatyåh), the sůtra (VIII. 3. 46, S. 160), che sârîrika Bhâslya (kuća nâma &o) all unanimousely agree in stating that there is such a word as kus& ; and it is this word which is used in the Vedanta Sätra III. 3. 26 (Kuśâ Chhandas &o). The words 47130: in that sútra are equal to not plus parti ; and not fit plus min.: 1 Bhâinati the comm:n tary on the Sâririka Bhashya is therefore evidently wrong when it analyses the Words ME: of the sutra into ou + 1 + 2:So it is a mere bold assertion of the author of Bhramati, and is not borue out by any authority. Let the learned. ponder over it.

·VOL. III. GENDIOS CI. VI. $71 COMMOS GENDER. - . . ७ । 'गृहमेहदेह पट्पटहाष्टापदाम्बुदद कुमाश्च ॥ The following are both musculines and feminines : - गहh house, मेह • a ram,' देह - the liuly,' घट्ट a slais, tai let, OZE a kettle-urum,' ZTaz (?) mac* clouri,' ficha 'the peak or sumınit of a mountain,' ति पुनयुसकाधिकारः ॥ COMMON GENDER. १। 'अशिष्टलिङ्गम् ॥ 1. The rest. This is an adhikára sütra. २ 'अव्यय कतियुष्मदस्मदः' । 2. The avyayas (Indeclinables), *in, yra an:can be useil with words in all tive three genders. ३ । 'ष्णान्ता मच्या' । शिष्टा पावत् । एकः पुरुषः । एका स्त्री । एक कुनम ॥ 3. Numerals ending in u and I can be useil with words in all the thice genders. Thus एकः पुरुषः । एका स्त्री । एक कुलम ॥ ४ ! 'गुणवचन छ' । शुक्रः पटः । शुका घटी। शुक्र वस्त्रम् ॥ 4. So also altributive words. Thus शुकः :पट: । गुम्का प्रटि । शुक्र वस्त्रम ॥ ५ । 'कत्याश्च ॥ 5. The kritya derivatives also. The words formerl by kritya affixes follow the gender of the words which they qualify. (III. 3.171. S. 3312). ६ । 'करणाधिकरणयाटुंद' ॥ 6. The words formed by the affix lyut added with the force of instrument or location. (III. 3. 117 S. 3293). ७ । 'सर्वादीनि सर्व नामानि । स्यष्टार्थेय त्रिसूत्री ॥ The Pronominals sarva 'et cetera,' (I. 1. 27 S, 213). इति लिङ्कानुशासनप्रकरणाम । इति श्रीभोजिदीक्षितविरचिता वैयाकरणासिद्धान्तकौमुदी समाला ॥ ॥ शुभमस्तु॥ Apneruram 17-5-05. ARCH New Delhi OCENTRALE